PDF Meridian Features & Services 1 Of 3

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 616

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

XII features and services
SUPPLEMENT

Publication number:
Product release: Xl 1 release 19
Document release: 8.0
Document status: Standard
Date: October 31, 1993

1989 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

telemanuals.com
ii

Revision history
December

First issue of document.
June

Standard document is issued for updates and changes for X 11 release 15.
December

Standard document is issued for updates and changes for Xl 1 release 16.
December

Standard document is issued to include updates for Xl 1 release
extent of changes, revision bars are omitted.

Due to the

December

Reissued to include updates for
release 18. Changes in existing modules
are noted with revision bars in the margins. Information from Product
Bulletin 92024 (July 1992) is included in this document. The new modules
release 18 are listed below.
for
Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime
Off Hook Alarm Security
Overlay Cache
December

This document is reissued to include updates for option 8 I systems. Revision
bars remain for 1 release changes (refer to note above), but are not
included for option 8 1 information.
August

This document is reissued to include updates for Xl
noted with revision bars in the margins.

release 19. Changes are

October

This document is reissued to include technical updates. Changes are noted
with revision bars in the margins.
Xl 1 features and services

telemanuals.com

telemanuals.com

iii

Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-l

Index of feature modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Systems and releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-l 1

Features and software options . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-13

Software options and package dependencies ,

1-21

Feature modules and issue dates . . . . . . . . . . .

1-45

Access restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

Application Module Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

Attendant Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

Attendant Alternative Answering . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

Attendant Barge-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1

Attendant Busy Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attendant call selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1

Attendant Calls Waiting Indication . . . . . . . . . .

1 O-1

features and services

telemanuals.com

iv

Contents

Attendant consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attendant Incoming Call Indicators . . . . . . . . .

12-l

Attendant Interpositional Transfer . . . . . . . . . .

13-I

Attendant Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14-I

Attendant Overflow Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15-I

Attendant Position Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16-I

Attendant Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17-I

Attendant Secrecy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18-I

Attendant Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19-I

Attendant Supervisory Console . . . . . . . . . . . .

20-I

Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication

.....

Audible Reminder of Held Calls . . . . . . . . . . . .
................................

21-I
22-l
23-l

Automatic Answerback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24-l

Automatic Call Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25-l

Automatic Line Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26-l

Automatic Number Identification . . . . . . . . . . .

27-l

Automatic Number Identification on DTI . . . . .

28-l

Automatic Preselection of Prime Directory
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29-l

features and services

telemanuals.com

Contents v

Automatic Set Relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30-I

Automatic Timed Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31-I

Automatic Trunk Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32-l

Automatic Wake

33-l

.......................

Auxiliary Processor Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34-l

Auxiliary Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35-l

Background Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36-l

Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37-l

Busy Lamp Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38-l

Call Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

39-l

Call Forward All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40-I

Call Forward Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41-I

Call Forward by Call Type

.................

42-l

Call Forward External Deny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

43-l

Call Forward, Internal Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44-l

Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward
No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

45-l

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level . . . . . .

46-l

Call Hold, Deluxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

47-l

Call Hold, Permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

48-l

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

vi

Contents

Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Party Name Display

...............

49-l
..

50-I

Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51-I

Call Pickup, Directed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

52-l

Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

53-l

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . .

54-l

Called Party Disconnect Control . . . . . . . . . . . .

55-I

Camp-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56-l

Capacity Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

57-1

Centralized Attendant Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58-l

Switchhook Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59-l

Charge Account and Calling Party Number . , .

60-I

Charge Account, Forced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conference

.............................

62-l

Console Presentation Group Level Services . .

63-l

Controlled Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

64-l

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced . . . . . .

65-l

Departmental Listed Directory Number . . . . . .

66-l

Dial Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

67-l

Dial Pulse/Dual Tone Multifrequency Conversion

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Contents vii

Dialed Number Identification Service . . . . . . . .

69-1

Digit Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

70-I

Digital Trunk Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

71-1

Direct Inward System Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

72-1

Directory Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73-l

Directory Number Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

74-l

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing . . . . . . . . .

75-1

Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

76-1

Electronic Switched Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

77-1

End-to-End Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

78-1

Equal Access Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

79-1

Fast Tone Digit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

80-l

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision .

81-1

Flexible Feature Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

82-1

Group Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

83-1

History File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

84-1

................................

85-1

Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86-1

In-Band

87-1

.............................

Incoming DID Digit Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Xl 1 features and services

88-1

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

viii Contents

Incremental Software Management . . . . . . . . .

89-l

.........

90-I

Integrated Services Digital Network . . . . . . . . .

91-I

Integrated Voice and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

92-l

Intercept Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

93-l

Basic Rate Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

94-l

Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

95-l

Limited Access to Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

96-l

Line Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

97-l

Line Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

98-l

Line and Trunk Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

99-l

Maid Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

100-l

..........................

101-l

Malicious Call Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

102-I

Manual Line Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

103-I

Manual Signaling (Buzz)

..................

104-I

....................

105-I

Integrated Messaging System Link

Manual Trunk Service

Meridian Hospitality Voice Services . . . . . . . . .

106-I

Meridian Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

107-I

Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration . .

108-I

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Contents

ix

Meridian Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

109-I

Meridian MAX/ACD-MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

110-I

Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ill-l

Message Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

112-1

Message Waiting Indication (MWI) Interworking 113-I
Message Waiting Lamp Maintenance . . . . . . . .

114-1

MSDL Serial Data Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115-1

Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime . . . 116-1
Multiple Console operation

................

117-1

Multiple Customer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

118-I

Multi-Tenant Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

119-I

Multi-User

120-l

Music

.........................

..................................

121-1

Music, Enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

122-1

Network Message Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

123-1

New Flexible Code Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

124-I

Night Key for DID Digit Manipulation

125-1

........

Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

126-I

No Hold Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

127-1

North American Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . .

128-I

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

X

Contents

Off Hook Alarm Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129-I

Off-Premise Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

130-I

Office Data Administration System

.........

131-I

On Hook Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

132-I

Optional Outpulsing Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

133-I

Overlay Cache Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

134-I

Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

135-I

Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

136-I

Pretranslation

...........................

137-I

Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

138-I

Privacy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

139-I

Privacy Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

140-I

Private Line Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

141-I

Property Management System Interface . . . . .

142-I

Public Switched Data Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

143-I

Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

144-I

Recorded

Recorded Overflow Announcement . . . . . . . . .

145-l

Recorded Telephone Dictation . . . . . . . . . . . . .

146-I

Remote Call Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

147-I

Remote Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . .

148-I

Ring Again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149-I

Xl features and services

telemanuals.com

Contents

xi

Room Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

150-I

Secretarial Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

151-I

Short Buzz for digital telephones . . . . . . . . . . .

152-I

Speed Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

153-I

Speed

154-I

with Authorization Codes

Speed Call, System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

155-I

Station Category Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

156-I

Station Specific Authorization Code . . . . . . . . .

157-I

Station-to-Station Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

158-I

Stored Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

159-I

Telephones

.............................

160-I

Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

161-I

.....................

162-I

Tones, Flexible Incoming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

163-I

Trunk Verification from a Station . . . . . . . . . . . .

164-I

Uninterrupted Line Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .

165-I

User Selectable Call Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . .

166-I

Voice Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

167-I

2500 Telephone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

168-I

500 Telephone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

169-I

Type Line Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . .
features and services

170-I

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

xii Contents

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

xi

List of figures
Figure
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field Supervisory mode . . . . . .

20-

Figure
1
Standard Busy Lamp Field on the

. . . .

38-

Figure 38-2
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field monitoring (example) . .

38-

Figure
I
Typical Centralized Attendant Service configuration. .

58-

Figure
1
Circular Hunting example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86-

Figure 86-2
Linear Hunting example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86-

Figure 86-3
Secretarial Hunting example . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86-

Figure 86-4
Short Hunting example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86-

Figure
Example of Audit Trail printout (LD22). . . . . . . . . . .

96-

Figure
LLC, system control levels (hierarchy and overlap of
operative levels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

97-

Figure
Private Corporate Network with Meridian 1 hosting the
Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 features and services

553-3001-30

xiv List of figures

Figure 113-2
Private Corporate Network with DMS hosting the
Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

113-3

Figure 113-3
Configuration Requirements for MWI Interworking . . . . . . . . . . . . .

113-8

Figure 116-l
CFW and MARP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

116-6

Figure 116-2
MARP control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

116-7

Figure 129-l
Zone Dependent example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129-3

Figure 129-2
Event Dependent example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129-4

Figure 143-1
Public Switched Data Service (PSDS) between Meridian 1 and
Central Office (CO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

143-l

Figure 151-l
Secretarial Filtering example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

151-l

Figure 160-l
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160-13
Figure 160-2
.....................................

160-14

Figure 160-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160-16
Figure 170-l
Incoming Trunk Call of Internal Call Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

170-2

Figure 170-2
Outgoing Call from the Meridian 1 to a Central Office . . . . . . . . . . .

170-3

features and services

553-3001-305

List of tables
Table
System and supported X 11 release . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-12

Table 1
Class of Service chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

2-3

Table 2-2
Trunk signaling arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

2-8

Table 1 l-l
Incoming Call Indicator key assignments . . . . . . . . .

.

.

1 l-3

Table 1 l-2
Attendant console optional feature key assignments . . . . . . . . . .

11-5

Table
1
Recommended number of rings per Automatic Wake Up call

.

33-3

....

39-6

Table
1
Tone and Cadence Card Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

.

40-3

Table
Response formats for CPND NAME prompt . . . . . . . . . .

....

50-3

Table
1
Features expanded in Xl 1 release 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

57-1

Table 57-2
Features expanded in Xl 1 release 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

....

57-2

Table
1
Call Detail Record Generation with answer supervision .

.
.

Table
1
Do Not Disturb intercept treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 features and services

.

76-2

553-3001-305

xvi

List of tables

Table 77-l
Digit translation before and after X11 release 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

77-7

Table 78-l
LD15 Enable End-to-End Signaling tone feedback. . . . . . . . . . .

78-4

Table 78-2
LD12 Add End-to-End Signaling key to attendant console. . . . .

78-4

Table 78-3
LD56 Specify the cadence for the EES feedback tone . . . . . . . .

78-5

Table 81-1
Returning Answer Supervision for DID calls terminating at the
Meridian1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

81-3

.

Table 93-l
Intercept Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 93-2
Intercept Treatment for

calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.

Table 108-l
Data stored by both the Meridian 1 and Meridian Mail . . . . . . . . .

93-2
93-3

.

108-4

Table 108-2
Effect of running Audit with Data Correction enabled . . . . . . . . .

.

108-8

Table 108-3
Effect of running Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

108-9

Table 108-4
LD17 Configuring the VMBA application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 108-11

Table 108-5
a VMB on a

telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 108-12

Table 108-6
-Add a VMB on a digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-13
Table 108-7
VMBA Application States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-19
Table 108-8
Print the DN block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-22

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

List of tables xvii

Table 108-9
LD20 Print the TN block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-22
Table 108-10
LD20 Print VMB data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-23
Table 108-l 1
VMB States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

108-24

Table 108-12
LD83 Print ODAS data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 108-24

Table 113-l
Network switch connections

.......................

. . 113-4

Table 113-2
Package requirements for the originating node
(the node with Message Center users) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 113-6

Table 113-3
Package requirements for the host node
(the node hosting the Message Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 113-7

Table 113-4
Package requirements for the tandem node
(the node that does not have Message Center users) . . . . .

. . 113-7

Table 113-5
LD 17 -Configuring MWI remote D channel capability

.

. . 113-9

Table 113-6
LD 23 -Configuring a Message Center DN . . . . . .

.

113-9

Table 122-l
Features vs. No Music, Music, and Enhanced Music

.

122-1

Table 128-1
Access Codes and

dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

128-3

Table 137-l
Description of model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

137-3

Table 137-2
Numbering plan for model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

137-4

Table 137-3
Access and restrictions for model

.

137-5

...............

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

xx

List of tables

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Introduction
This document describes the software features available with the system. The
alphabetically by feature
features are described in feature modules
An alphabetized index of feature modules, enhancements and alternate
feature names is provided for easy reference. The enhancements, and
alternate feature names are italicized, with a reference to the appropriate
module which describes the functionality/capability. Each feature module
contains the following information.
Status box
Feature description
Operating parameters
Feature interactions
Feature packaging
Feature implementation
Feature operation
Status box In the upper right hand corner of the module’s first page, the
status box identifies the minimum X 11 release this feature is available, as
well as the latest issue date of the feature module.
Feature description Immediately following the title, a description
explains this feature and any enhancement made to the original design. When
an enhancement is included, be sure to note the required X11 release
identified in the description text, as it may differ from the X11 release of
the original feature.
Operating parameters These details explain the hardware and software
items required or prohibited for operating this feature.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Introduction

Feature interactions An interaction description explains how this feature
is affected by, or affects, other features. When two features are mutually
exclusive, they cannot be active in the system at the same time.
Feature packaging A brief list provides the package information (name,
number, and mnemonic) for this feature and its dependencies.
Feature implementation This shows the individual overlays
necessary to activate this feature. The overlays listed show only prompts
requiring responses for this feature. For a complete discussion of prompts and
responses, refer to Xl1 input/output guide (553-3001-400).
Feature operation Use these procedures to learn how to operate this
feature.
Information concerning software packaging and dependencies is discussed in
the chapters listed below.
Index An alphabetized index of feature modules, enhancements and
alternate feature names is for easy reference. The enhancements, and alternate
feature names are italicized, with a reference to the appropriate module which
describes the functionality/capability.
Systems and releases A table documents the highest X11 release
supported for each machine type.
Features and software options An alphabetical list of features shows
the software package number, feature mnemonic, and the earliest Xl 1 release
the feature is available.
Software options and package dependencies A numerical list of
software packages shows the feature name and package dependencies.
Feature modules and issue dates An alphabetical list of feature
modules includes the latest issue date of the module.
Special features like Electronic Switched Network and Automatic Call
Distribution are documented in separate Northern Telecom Publications. The
modules in this manual that discuss these special features provide high-level
overviews, with the appropriate Northern Telecom Publication references.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Index of feature modules
A
Access Restrictions
Q Record Option. See
Call Detail Recording
ACD-MAX. See
Meridian MAX
Application Module
Attendant Administration
Attendant Alternative Answering
Attendant Barge-In
Attendant Busy Verify
Attendant
Name Display. See
Call Party Name Display
Attendant call selection
Attendant Calls Waiting Indication
Attendant consoles
Attendant End-to-End Signaling. See
End-to-End Signaling
Attendant Incoming Call Indicators
Attendant Interpositional Transfer
Attendant Lockout
Attendant Overflow Position
Attendant Overflow Position Busy. See
Attendant Overflow Position
Attendant Position Busy. See also
Night Service
Attendant Recall
Attendant Secrecy
Attendant Splitting
Attendant Supervisory Console

Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication
Audible Message Waiting. See
Message
Audible Reminder of Held Calls
Autodial. See also
Last Number Redial
Stored Number Redial
with Authorization Code. See
Automatic Answerback
Automatic Call Distribution
Automatic Line Selection
Automatic Number Identification
Automatic Number Identification on DTI
Automatic Preselection of Prime Directory
Number
Automatic Set Relocation
Automatic Timed Reminders
Automatic Timed Recall. See
Automatic Timed Reminders
Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Automatic Wake Up
Auxiliary Processor Link
Auxiliary Signaling

B
Background Terminal
Barge-In. See
Attendant Barge-In

1 features and services

1-4

Index of feature modules

Basic Alternate Route Selection. See
Electronic Switched Network
Basic Authorization Codes. See
Electronic Switched Network
Bridging
Busy Lamp Field
Busy Verify. See
Attendant Busy Verify
Buzz. See
Manual Signaling (Buzz)

C
Call Back Queuing. See
Electronic Switched Network
Call Back Queuing/Conventional Main. See
Electronic Switched Network
Call Detail Recording
Call Forward, See
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward Busy
Call Forward External Deny
Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type
Call Forward, Internal Calls
Call Forward No Answer/ Flexible Call
Forward No Answer
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
Call Forward Reminder Tone
Hunting
Call Forward No Answer Second Level
Message Waiting Allowed Stations. See
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
Call Hold, Deluxe
Call Hold, Permanent
Call Park
Call Party Name Display
Call Pickup
Call Pickup, Directed
Call selection. See
Attendant call selection

1 features and services

Call Splitting. See
Attendant Splitting
Call Transfer
Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting
Called Party Disconnect Control
Calling Party Number. See
Charge Account and Calling Party Number
Calls Waiting Indication. See
Attendant Calls Waiting Indication
Trunks. See
Automatic Number Identification
Camp-On
Capacity Expansion
CDR. See
Call Detail Recording
CDR Expansion. See
Call Detail Recording
CDR Outpulsed Digits Option. See
Call Detail Recording
Centralized Attendant Service
Switchhook Flash
Code Restriction. See
Access Restrictions
Charge Account and Calling Party Number
Charge Account, Forced
Class o f Service restrictions. See
Access Restrictions
CO Trunk Priority Option. See
Call Pickup
Conference
Conference Control. See
Conference
Console Digit Display. See
Digit Display
Console Presentation Group Level Services
Control o f Trunk Group Access. See
Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication
Controlled Class of Service
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

Index of feature modules

Coordinated Dialing Plan. See
Electronic Switched Network
Coordinated Call Back Queuing. See
Electronic Switched Network
Coordinated Call Back Queuing Against
Main. See Electronic Switched Network

Data Port Hunting. See
Hunting
Deluxe Hold. See
Call Hold, Deluxe
Departmental Listed Directory Number
Dial Intercom
Dial Pulse/Dual Tone Multifrequency
Conversion
Dial Tones. See
Tones and Cadences
Digit Display
Digital Trunk Interface
Direct Inward System Access
Directed Call Pickup. See
Call Pickup, Directed
Directory Number
Directory Number Expansion. See also
Capacity Expansion
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing
Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom. See
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
Do Not Disturb
DSN Station Loop Preemption. See
Station Loop Preemption

E
Electronic Switched Network
End-to-End Signaling
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service. See
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

Enhanced Hot Line. See
Hot Line
Enhanced Music. See
Music, Enhanced
Enhanced 911 Interface. See
Call Detail Recording
Equal Access Compliance
ESN, See Electronic Switched Network
Exclusive Hold. See
Call Hold, Deluxe

F
Fast Tone Digit Switch
FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervisio
Flexible Attendant DN. See
Directory Number
Flexible Call Forward No Answer. See
Call Forward No Answer/Flexible
Call Forward No Answer
Flexible ESN
Routing. See
Electronic Switched Network
Flexible Hot Line. See
Hot Line
Flexible Feature Codes
Flexible Line Lockout. See
Line Lockout
Flexible Tones and Cadences. See
Tones and Cadences
Forced Charge Account. See
Charge Account, Forced

G
Group Call
Guest Entry of Automatic Wake Up. See
Automatic Wake Up

H
History File

1 features and services

Index of feature modules
Hold. See

Interpositional Transfer. See

Call Hold, Deluxe
Call Hold, Permanent
Hospitality Screen Enhancement
Hot Line

Attendant Interpositional Transfer
ISDN Basic Rate Interface

features. See

Wake-Up
Background Terminal
Controlled Class of Service
Maid ID
Property Management System Interface
Room Service
Hunting

L
Last Number Redial. See also
Stored Number Redial
Limited Access to Overlays
Line Load Control
Line Lockout
Listed Directory Numbers. See

Directory Number
Lockout. See

Attendant Lockout
Line Lockout

I
Improved End-to-End Signaling. See

M

End-to-End Signaling
See

Integrated Messaging System Link
In-Band AN1
Incoming DID Digit Conversion
Incoming Call Indicators. See

Attendant Incoming Call Indicators
Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion. See

Electronic Switched Network
Incremental Software Management
Individual Hold. See

Call Hold, Deluxe
Integrated Messaging System Link
Integrated Services Digital Network
Integrated Services Digital Network/
Application Protocol
Integrated Voice and Data
Intercept Treatment
Internal Call Detail Recording. See

Maid Identification
Make Set Busy
Malicious Call Trace
Manual Line Service
Manual Signaling (Buzz)
Manual Trunk Service
Meridian Hospitality Voice Services
Meridian Mail
Meridian Manager
Meridian MAX
Message Center
Message Registration
Message Waiting Lamp Maintenance
Modem Trunk Hunting. See

Hunting
Multiple Appearance DN. See

Directory Number
Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime

Call Detail Recording

Multi-Language Wake Up. See

Internal Call Forward. See

Automatic Wake-Up
Multiple-Console Operation
Multiple-Customer Operation

Call Forward, Internal Calls
Internal Call Waiting. See

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting

1 features and services

553-3001-305

I

telemanuals.com

Index of feature modules

Multiple DID Office Code Screening. See
Electronic Switched Network
Multi-Tenant Service. See also
Console Presentation Group Level Services
Multi-User
Music. See also
Recorded Announcement
Music, Enhanced

N
Network Automatic Call Distribution. See
Automatic Call Distribution
Network Alternate Route Selection. See
Electronic Switched Network
Network Authorization Codes. See
Electronic Switched Network
Network Call Transfer. See
Electronic Switched Network
Network features. See
Electronic Switched Network
Network Message Center. See
Network Message Services
Network Message Services
Network Name Display. See
Integrated Services Digital Network
Network Signaling. See
Electronic Switched Network
Network Speed Call. See
Electronic Switched Network
Network Traffic. See
Electronic Switched Network
New Distinctive Ringing. See
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing
New Flexible Code Restriction. See also
Access Restrictions
Night Key for DID Digit Manipulation
Night Service
Night Service by Time of Day. See
Night Service
No Hold Conference

0
Off Hook Alarm Security
Off Hook Queuing. See
Electronic Switched Network
Off-Net Number Recognition. See
Electronic Switched Network
Off-Premise Extension
Office Data Administration System
On Hook Dialing
Optional Outpulsing Delay
Optional Privacy
Outgoing Trunk Hunting. See
Hunting
Overflow tone. See
Tones and Cadences
Overlay Cache Memory
Override

P
Paging
Permanent Hold. See
2500 Set Features
Standardization. See
Property Management System Interface
Position Busy. See
Attendant Position Busy
Pretranslation
Prime DN. See
Directory Number
Privacy
Privacy Override
Privacy Release
Private Line Service
Property Management System Interface
Public Switched Data Service

Xl 1 features and services

telemanuals.com

1-8

Index of feature modules

RAN. See
Recorded Announcement
Recall. See
Attendant Recall
Recorded Announcement
Recorded Overflow Announcement
Recorded Telephone Dictation
Remote Call Forward
Remote Peripheral Equipment
Ring Again
Ringing Number Pickup. See
Call Pickup
Room Status
Round Robin Trunk Hunting. See
Hunting

S
Secrecy. See
Attendant Secrecy
Secretarial Filtering, See
Call Forwrd All Calls
Short Buzz for digital telephones
Single Appearance DN. See
Directory Number
Six Party Conference for 2500 Sets. See
Conference
Software Capacity Expansion. See
Capacity Expansion
Special Dial Tone. See
Tones and Cadences
Speed Call
with Authorization Codes
Speed
Speed Call, System
Splitting. See
Attendant Splitting
Station Category Indication
Station Hunting. See
Hunting

Station Specific Authorization Codes
Station-to-Station Calling
Station to Station Call Waiting. See
Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting
Stored Number Redial
Supervisory Attendant Console. See also
Attendant Supervisory Console
System Capacity Expansion, See
Capacity Expansion
System Speed Call. See
Speed Call, System

T
TAFAS. See
Night Service
Telephones
Time and Date
Time Forced Disconnect. See
Paging
Tones and Cadences
Tones, Flexible Incoming
Transfer. See
Call Transfer
Trunk Answer From Any Station. See
Night Service
Trunk Group Access Restrictions (TGAR).
See Access Restrictions
Trunk Group Busy
See
Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication
Trunk Hunting. See
Hunting
Trunk Signaling Arrangements. See
Access Restrictions
Trunk Verification from a Station

U
Uninterrupted Line Connections
User Selectable Call Redirection

telemanuals.com

Index of feature modules

1-9

V
See
Voice Mailbox Administration
Voice Call
Voice Mailbox Administration

VP Wake Up. See
Automatic Wake Up

o-9
11 -Digit Translation. See
Electronic Switched Network
2500 Set Features
500 Set Features

500 Wake Up Calls. See
Automatic Wake Up

512 Second RAN. See
Recorded Announcement
Type Line Disconnect

63 Attendant Consoles. See
Multiple-Console Operation

features and services

553-3001-305

l-10

Index of feature modules

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

1-11

Systems and releases
Table
lists the systems, and the lowest and highest supported Xl 1 release
for each system.
Meridian 1 XT and system option 71 require a hard disk with Xl 1 release 16
and X 11 release 17.
Xl 1 release 18 and later require hardware upgrades. For further information,
conversion procedures
or Upgrade
refer to
systems

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

1-12

Systems and releases
Table
System and supported Xl 1 release
System

System
number

Lowest supported
Xl 1 release

Highest
supported Xl 1
release

ST

1011

9

17

STE

1511

18

1

8

19

NT
XT

1211

8

19

RT

1311

12

19

21

1011

15

17

1511

18

19

51

1111

15

19

61

1111

15

19

71

1211

15

19

81

1611

18

19

featuresandservices 553-3001-305

9

1-13

Features and software options
Feature name

Number

Mnemonic

Release

ACD Activity Code Entry

155

ACNT

R13

ACD

83

CDRQ

R3

ACD Load Management (C2)

43

LMAN

ACD Package A

45

ACDA

ACD Package B

41

ACDB

ACD Package Cl

42

ACDC

ACD Package D

50

ACDD

R2

ACD Package D, Auxiliary Link Processor

51

LNK

R2

ACD Priority Agent

116

PAGT

ACD Timed Overflow

111

TOF

RIO

ACD-D Auxiliary Security

114

AUXS

R13

Advanced Network Services

148

NTWK

Alarm Filtering

243

ALARM-FILTER

Queue Record

I

Route Selection

13

RI

Application Module Link

153

R13

Attendant Administration

54

AA

Attendant Alternative Answering

174

AAA

Attendant

56

AOP

Overflow

Position

1 features and services

I

553-3001-305

1-14

Features and software options

Feature name

Number

Mnemonic

Automatic Answerback

47

AAB

Automatic Line Selection

72

LSEL

R4

Automatic Number Identification

12

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

84

ATM

R7

Automatic Wake Up

102

AWU

Auxiliary Processor Link

109

APL

Background Terminal

99

BGD

Basic Alternate Route Selection

57

BARS

Basic Authorization Code

25

BAUT

Basic Automatic Call Distribution

40

BACD

0

BASIC

Basic Queuing

28

BQUE

Basic Rate Interface

216

BRI

Basic Routing

14

BRTE

Call Detail Recording

4

CDR

Call Detail Recording Expansion

151

CDRE

Call ID

247

CALL ID

Call Party Name Display

95

CPND

Call Park

33

CPRK

R2

Call-by-Call Service Selection

117

CBC

R16

Call

225

CWNT

118

CCDR

CDR on Data Link

6

CLNK

CDR on Teletype Machine (TTY)

5

CTY

Centralized Attendant Services (Main)

26

CASM

Basic Call Processing

Waiting

Notification

Calling line ID in CDR

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Release

R18

R13

telemanuals.com

Features and software options
Feature name

Number

Mnemonic

27

CASR

157

THF

Charge Account for CDR

23

CHG

Charge Account/Authorization Code

24

CAB

Command Status Link

77

Console Presentation Group Level Services

172

Controlled Class Of Service

81

Coordinated Dialing Plan

59

CDP

CSL with Alpha Signaling

85

CSLA

R8

Customer Controlled Routing

215

CCR

R18

Deluxe Hold

71

DHLD

R4

Departmental Listed Directory Number

76

DLDN

R5

Dial

21

DI

Centralized Attendant Services (Remote)
Switchhook Flash

Intercom

CPGS

98

Digit Display

19

DDSP

Digit Key Signaling

180

DKS

Digital

88

DSET

Direct Inward System Access

22

Directed Call Pickup

115

DCP

Directory Number Expansion

150

DNXP

74

DRNG

Do Not Disturb, Group

16

DNDG

Do Not Disturb, Individual

9

Distinctive

Ringing/New

Distinctive

Ringing

End-to-End Signaling
Enhanced ACD Routing

R15
R7

Dialed Number Identification Service

Telephones

Release

R7

R13

EES
214

EAR

1 features and services

R17

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

1-18

Features and software options

Feature name

Number

Mnemonic

242

MULTI-USER

Multi-Tenant Service

a6

TENS

Music

44

MUS

207

NACD

58

NARS

Network Authorization Code

63

NAUT

Network Call Transfer

67

NXFR

Network Class of Service

32

NCOS

Network Message Services

175

NMS

Network Queuing

38

MCBQ

Multi-User

Network ACD
Network

Alternate

Route

Selection

Main

Release

R7

R15

R3

R2

Network Signaling

37

Network Speed Call

39

NSC

R2

Network

Measurements

29

NTRF

Rl

New Flexible Code Restriction

49

NFCR

R2

Off Hook Queuing

62

OHQ

Office Data Administration System

20

ODAS

Optional Outpulsing Delay

79

OOD

PBX Inter-face for DTI

75

Pretranslation

92

PXLT

Priority Queuing

60

PQUE

Traffic

Property Management System Interface
Recorded Announcement

R2

R5

103

RIO

7

RAN

Recorded Overflow Announcement

36

ROA

Remote Peripheral Equipment

15

RPE

192

RVQ

Remote Virtual Queuing

1 features and services

553-3001-305

R5

R2

telemanuals.com

Features and software options
Feature name

Number

Mnemonic

Room Status

100

RMS

Set Relocation

53

SR

228

STA

Single

Terminal

Access

1-19

Release

Station Category indication

80

R7

Station Loop Preemption

106

R13

Station

Specific

Authorization

Code

Stored Number

229

SSAU

64

SNR

Superloop Administration (LD97)

205

Supervisory Attendant Console

93

System Errors and Events Lookup

I

R3

R8

245

System Speed Call

34

ssc

Time and Date

8

TAD

Tone Detector

65

TDET

Trunk Verification from a Station

110

TVS

I

Voice Mailbox Administration

246

VMBA

I

VIP Auto Wake Up

212

VAWU

2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface

154

2500 Telephone Features

18

SS25

500 Telephone Features

73

ss5

R2

R7

R14

features and services

R4

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Features and software options

1 features and services

553-3001-305

1-21

Software options and package
dependencies
Number
0

Feature Name
Basic Call Processing

Mnemonic

Release

BASIC

Includes the following features:
Call Transfer
Conference
Call Forward No Answer
Hunt
Call Pickup
Extended PBX Features

OPTF

includes the following features:
Call Forward All Calls
Override
Ring Again
Secretarial Filtering
Speed Call
Voice Call
2

Multiple-Customer Operation

CUST

features and services

553-3001-305

l-22

Software options and package dependencies

Number
4

Feature Name
Call Detail Recording

Mnemonic
CDR

This is the base package for CDR. See also
CDR with Charge Account (CHG-24)
CDR Magnetic Tape (CLNK-6) (package 6 is not
supported on Release 19 and later)
CDR TTY (CTY-5)
CDR Queue Record (CDR-83)
Internal CDR (ICDR-108)
Without CTY (5) or CLNK
statistics or reports.

CDR cannot output

CDR on Teletype Machine (TTY)

CTY

Package dependencies:
CDR (4)
CDR on Data Link

CLNK

Package dependencies:
CDR (4)
Recorded

Announcement

RAN

Package dependencies:
(11)
Time and Date
9

Do Not Disturb, Individual
End-to-End Signaling

11

Intercept

12

Automatic Number Identification

13

TAD

Treatment

Route Selection
Package dependencies:
(12)

Xl 1 features and services

EES

Release

telemanuals.com

Software options and package dependencies
Number
14

Feature Name
Basic Routing

1-23

Mnemonic

Release

BRTE

Rl

Rl

Package dependencies:
NCOS (32)
15

Remote Peripheral Equipment

RPE

16

Do Not Disturb, Group

DNDG

Package dependencies:
(9)
17

Make Set Busy

MSB

18

2500 Type Features

SS25

19

Digit Display

DDSP

20

Office

21

Dial

22

Direct Inward System Access

23

Charge Account for CDR

Data

Administration

System

Intercom

Rl

ODAS

Rl

DI

Rl
RI

CHG

Package dependencies:
CDR (4)
CAB (24)
24

Charge Account/Authorization Code

CAB

25

Basic Authorization Code

BAUT

Package dependencies:
CAB (24)
26

Centralized Attendant Services (Main)

CASM

CASM cannot be used with AOP (56)
27

Centralized Attendant Services (Remote)

CASR

CASR cannot be used with AOP (56)
28

Basic Queuing

BQUE

Xl 1 features and services

Rl

553-3001-305

l-24

Software options and package dependencies

Number
29

Feature Name
Network

Traffic

Measurements

Mnemonic

Release

NTRF

One of the following packages must be equipped:
BARS (57)
(58)
CDP (59)
PQUE (60)
FCBQ (61)
OHQ (62)
32

Network Class of Service

NCOS

33

Call Park

CPRK

R2

34

System Speed Call

ssc

R2

35

Integrated Message System

IMS

R2

ROA

R2

Package dependencies:
BACD (40)
ACDA (45)
MWC (46)
Meridian Mail IMS applications require the following
additional packages:
(77)
CDRQ (83)
(85)
36

Recorded Overflow Announcement
Package dependencies:
RAN (7)

37

Network Signaling
Package dependencies:
NCOS (32)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

R2

Software options and package dependencies

Number
38

Feature Name
Network Queuing

Main

l-25

Mnemonic

Release

MCBQ

R2

NSC

R2

Package dependencies:
NCOS (32)
(37)
FCBQ (61)
39

Network Speed Call
Package dependencies:
ssc (34)
BARS (57) or NARS (58)

40

Basic Automatic Call Distribution

BACD

This is the minimum package for ACD. See also
ACD Basic; package A (ACDA-45)
ACD Advanced; package B (ACDB-41)
ACD Management Reports; package

(ACDC-42)

ACD Load Management; package C2 (LMAN-43)
ACD Package D (ACDD-50)
ACD Auxiliary Link Processor (LNK-51)
record (CDRQ-83)
ACD Timed Overflow
Dialed
41

Number

Identification

ACD Package B

Service

(DNIS-98)
ACDB

Package dependencies:
BACD (40)
ACDA (45)
42

ACD Package Cl

ACDC

Package dependencies:
BACD (40)
ACDB (41)
ACDA (45)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

l-26

Software options and package dependencies

Number
43

Feature Name
ACD Load Management (C2)

Mnemonic

Release

LMAN

Package dependencies:
BACD (40)
ACDB (41)
ACDC (42)
ACDA (45)
44

Music

MUS

Package dependencies:
RAN (7)
45

ACD Package A

ACDA

Package dependencies:
BACD (40)
46

Message Center

MWC

47

Automatic Answerback

AAB

48

Group Call

GRP

49

New Flexible Code Restriction

NFCR

R2

ACDD

R2

LNK

R2

Package dependencies:
NCOS(32)
50

ACD Package D
Package dependencies:
BACD (40)
ACDB (41)
ACDC (42)
ACDA (45)
LNK (51)

51

ACD Package D, Auxiliary Link Processor
Package dependencies:
ACDD (50)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

Number
52

Feature

Name

Mnemonic

Forced Charge Account

1-27

Release

FCA

Package dependencies:
CHG (23)
CAB (24)
53

Set Relocation

SR

54

Attendant Administration

AA

55

History File

56

Attendant

Overflow

Position

RI

AOP

AOP cannot be used with CASM (26) or CASR (27).
57

Basic Alternate Route Selection

BARS

Package dependencies:
(14)
NCOS (32)
58

Network

Alternate

Route

Selection

NARS

R2

CDP

Rl

Package dependencies:
BRTE (14)
NCOS (32)
59

Coordinated Dialing Plan
Package dependencies:
BRTE (14)
FCBQ (61)
NCOS (32)

60

Priority Queuing

PQUE

Package dependencies:
NCOS (32)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

l-28

Software options and package dependencies

Number
61

Feature Name
Flexible Call Back Queuing

Mnemonic

Release

FCBQ

Package dependencies:
BQUE (28)
BARS (57) or NARS (58) or CDP (59)
62

Off Hook Queuing

OHQ

Package dependencies:
BQUE (28)
BARS (57) or NARS (58)
63

Network Authorization Code

NAUT

Package dependencies:
CAB (24)
BAUT (25)
BARS (57) or NARS (58) or CDP (59)
64

Stored Number Redial

SNR

R3

65

Tone Detector

TDET

R7

67

Network Call Transfer

NXFR

R3

Hot Line Services

HOT

R4

Enhanced Hot Line

HOT

Package dependencies:
NCOS (32)
(37)
70

Package dependencies:
NCOS (32)
ssc (34)
71

Deluxe Hold

DHLD

R4

72

Automatic Line Selection

LSEL

R4

1 features and services

553-3001-305

1-29

Software options and package dependencies

Number
73

Feature Name
500 Telephone Features

Mnemonic

Release

ss5

R4

Package dependencies:
SS25 (18)
DRNG

74

Distinctive and New Distinctive Ringing

75

PBX Inter-face for DTI

76

Departmental Listed Directory Number

77

Command Status Link

79

Optional Outpulsing Delay

80

Station Category Indication

R7

81

Controlled Class of Service

R7

83

ACD CDR Queue Record

R5
DLDN

R5
R8

OOD

R5

CDRQ

Package dependencies:
CDR (4)
BACD (40)
84

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

ATM

R7

Package dependencies:
TDET (65)
85

CSLA with Alpha Signaling

R8

Package dependency:
DDSP (19)
(77)
(75) for Meridian Mail MP systems
86

Multi-Tenant Service

TENS

R7

87

Fast Tone and Digit Switch

FTDS

R7

88

Digital

DSET

R7

Telephones

1 features and services

553-3001-305

I

l-30

Software options and package dependencies

Number
89

Feature Name
M3000 Touchphone

Mnemonic

Release

TSET

R7

Package dependencies:
DSET (88)
9
91

0

Last Number Redial

LNR

M2317 Digital Display Telephone

DLT2

Package dependencies:
DSET (88)
92

Pretranslation/Enhanced Pretranslation

93

Supervisory Attendant Console

95

Call Party Name Display

PXLT
R8
CPND

Package dependencies:
DDSP (19)
DSET (88)
TSET (89)
ODAS
BGD
*The ODAS package is required for DES.
*The BGD package is required for Hotel/Motel
applications.
96

Meridian

98

Dialed

ST/System Option 21
Number

Identification

Service

Package dependencies:
DDSP (19)
ACDA (45)
APL
IDC
*The APL package is required for DP link.
*The IDC package is required for routing by DNIS.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

SLST

Software options and package dependencies

Number
Background

Feature Name

Mnemonic

Facility

BGD

Terminal

1-31

Release

Package dependencies:
CCOS (81)
RMS
100

MR

AWU

or

(103)

Room Status

RMS

Package dependencies:
CCOS (81)
BGD (99)
(9)
MWC (46)
Packages
status.
101

(9) and MWC (46) are required for lamp

Message Registration

MR

RIO

Package dependencies:
CCOS (81)
BGD (99)
102

Automatic Wake Up

AWU

Package dependencies:
RAN (7)
CCOS (81)
BGD (99)
103

Property Management System Interface
Package dependencies:
CCOS (81)
BGD (99)
RMS (100)

105

Line Load Control

106

Station Loop Preemption

LLC

Xl features and services

R13

I

RIO

I

553-3001-305

l-32

Software options and package dependencies

Number

Feature Name

107

Malicious Call Trace

108

Internal Call Detail Recording (ICDR)

Mnemonic

Release

MCT

Package dependencies:
CDR (4)
109

Auxiliary Processor Link

APL

110

Trunk Verification from a Station

TVS

111

ACD Timed Overflow

TOF

R9.32

Package dependencies:
ACDB (41)
113

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

IDC

R13

AUXS

R12

Package dependencies:
NFCR (49)
114

ACD-D Auxiliary Security
Package dependencies:
ACDD (50)
LNK (51)

115

Directed Call Pickup

DCP

116

ACD Priority Agent

PAGT

Package dependencies:
ACDA (45)
117

Call-by-Call Service Selection
Package dependencies:
(145)
PRA (146)
IEC
*The IEC package is required for Inter-Exchange Carrier.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

CBC

R12

Software options and package dependencies

Number
118

Feature Name
Calling line ID in CDR

1-33

Mnemonic

Release

CCDR

R13

EMUS

R12

R16

Package dependencies:
CDR (4)
(145)
119

Enhanced Music
Package dependencies:
MUS (44)

125

Flexible Tone and Cadences

FTC

139

Flexible Feature Codes

FFC

Package dependencies:
CCOS
s s 5
*The SS5 package is required if you are using
500 telephones.

on

*The CCOS package is required for the Electronic Lock
feature.
140

M2250 TCM Console

DCON

Package dependencies:
DSET (88)
145

Signaling

146

Primary Rate Access

PRA

Package dependencies:
(75)
(145)
The DDSP (19) package is required for CLID.
147

Signaling Link

ISL

R14

Package dependencies:
(145)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

Number
148

Feature Name
Advanced Network Services

Mnemonic

Release

NTWK

R14

IEC

R13

DNXP

R13

CDRE

R13

Package dependencies:
BRTE (14)
NCOS (32)
(145)
NARS (58) or CDP (59)
PRA (146) or ISL (147)
(37) for tandem node
149

Inter-Exchange Carrier
Package dependencies:
(145)
PRA (146)

150

Directory Number Expansion
The CDRE (151) package is required if CDR is equipped.

151

Call Detail Recording Expansion
Package dependencies:
CDR (4)
DNXP (150)

153

Application Module Link

R13

Package dependencies:
(77)
IMS (35)
MSDL requires MSDL package 222
154

2.0 Megabit Primary Rate Interface
Packagedependency:
(145)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

R14

Software options and package dependencies

Number
155

Feature Name
ACD Activity Code Entry

l-35

Mnemonic

Release

ACNT

R13

THF

R14

Package dependencies:
ACDD (50)
LNK (51)
AUXS (114)
157
158

Switchhook Flash
Feature Group D

FGD

Package dependencies:
BARS (57)
NARS (58) (recommended)
164

Limited Access to Overlays

170

Meridian Modular Telephone
Package dependencies:
DSET (88) or TSET (89)

172

Console Presentation Group Level Services

CPGS

Package dependencies:
TENS (86)
173

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service

ECCS

Package dependencies:
CCOS (81)
174

Attendant Alternative Answering

AAA

features and services

553-3001-305

l-36

Software options and package dependencies

Number
175

Feature Name
Network Message Services

Mnemonic

Release

NMS

R16

EOVF

R15

Package dependencies:
Network Message Center:
Originating or Terminating PBX: EES (IO), MWC
PRA (146) or ISL
NTWK
Tandem PBX:
NTWK (148)

PRA (146) or ISL

Meridian Mail
Originating PBX: EES
MWC
NTWK
(147)

BACD

Tandem PBX: NTWK
or ISL (147)

ACDA
PRA

or

PRA

Terminating PBX: EES
IMS
ACDA
MWC
CSL
(146) or ISL
NTWK (148)

BACD
PRA

ACD Message Center:
Originating PBX: EES
MWC
PRA (146) or ISL
NTWK (148)
Tandem PBX:
NTWK (148)

PRA (146) or ISL

Terminating PBX: EES
BACD
ACDA
MWC
PRA (146) or ISL
NTWK (148)
178

Enhanced Overflow
Package dependencies:
TOF(lll)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

Number
179

Feature Name
Hospitality

Voice

Services

1-37

Mnemonic

Release

HVS

R16

DKS

R16

Package dependencies:
Pretranslation and DND enhancements:
RAN (7)
EES (10)
(17)
IMS

(35)

BACD (40)
ACDA (45)
MWC (46)
(77)
CSLA (85)
APL (109)
enhancements:
CCOS
Meridian

BGD

RMS

(103)

Mail:

APL (109)
180

Digit Key Signaling
Package dependencies:
RAN (7)
EES (10)
MSB (17)
IMS (35)
BACD (40)
ACDA (45)
MWC (46)
(77)
CSLA (85)
APL (109)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

I

l-38

Software options and package dependencies

Number
192

Feature Name
Remote Virtual Queuing

Mnemonic

Release

RVQ

R18

Package dependencies:
NTWK (148)
PRA (146) or ISL (147)
(145)
FCBQ (61)
(38)
202

International PRA
Package dependencies:
(145)
(154)

203

Extended Peripheral Equipment (Superloop)

XPE

Package dependencies:
(295)
204

Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS card

XCTO

Package dependencies:
(205)
205

Superloop Administration (LD97)

206

Multi-Language Wake Up

MLWU

R16

NACD

R15

Package dependencies:
AWU (102)
(103)
207

Network ACD
Package dependencies:
BQUE (28)
NTWK (148)
EOVF (178)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

Number
208

Feature Name
Hospitality Screen Enhancement

1-39

Mnemonic

Release

HSE

R17

Package dependencies:
(170)
209

Meridian Link Module

MLS

I

Package dependencies:
(153) (before

1 release 17 only)

MSDL requires package 222 (Xi 1 release 18 and later)
210

Maid

Identification

MAID

R17

VAWU

R17

EAR

R17

Package dependencies:
CCOS (81)
BGD (99)
RMS (100)
(103)
The
(103) package is required to capture Maid ID
for statistic reports. The HSE (208) package is required
to bring up Maid ID screen for Meridian Modular
Telephones with Hospitality Screen Enhancement
feature.
212

VIP Auto Wake Up
Package dependencies:
AWU (102)

214

Enhanced ACD Routing
Package dependencies:
MUS (44)
ACDB (41)
ACDA (45)

1 features and services

553-3001-305

l-40

Software options and package dependencies

Number
215

Feature Name
Customer Controlled Routing

Mnemonic.

Release

CCR

Package dependencies:
(77)
EAR (214)
CALL ID (247) for Release 19 and later
216

R18

Basic Rate interface
Package dependencies:
(145) (required for Packet Handler options)
XPE (203)
MSDL (222)

218

Hold in Queue for IVR
Package dependencies:
CCR (215)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

IVR

R18

l-41

Software options and package dependencies

Number
219

Feature Name
Message Waiting Indication Interworking with DMS

Mnemonic

Release

MWI

R 19

Package dependencies:
Originating Node:
MWI (219) if connected to DMS (BCS 36) for
Interworking
(175)
BACD (40) and ACDA (45) if ACD DN is used as the
Message Center DN
Signaling (145)
Primary Rate Access (146) or
Link (147)

Signaling

NTWK (148)
MWC (46)
EES (10)
Host Node:
MWI (219) if connected to DMS (BCS 36) for
Interworking
(175)
IMS (35)
(77)
BACD (40)
ACDA (45)
Signaling (145)
Primary Rate Access (146) or
Link (147)

Signaling

NTWK (148)

I

MWC (46)
EES (10)
Tandem Node:
MWI (219) if connected to DMS (BCS 36) for
interworking
Signaling (145)
Primary Rate Access (146) or
Link (147)

Signaling

Network Services (148)
features and services

553-3001-305

l-42

Software options and package dependencies

Number

Feature Name

Mnemonic

Release

222

Multi-Purpose Serial Data Link

MSDL

R18

223

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

FCC

R17

224

Meridian 911
Package dependencies:
DDSP (19)
(153)
EAR (214)
CALL ID (247)
CWNT (225) for full

operation

MLM (209) for Meridian Link
Recommended:
CDR (4)
CTY (5)
LMAN (43)
ACDC (42) or ACDD (50) and LNK (51)
CPND (95)
MCT (107)
CCDR (118)
225

Call Waiting Notification

CWNT

227

MSDL Serial Data Interface

MSDL SDI

Package dependency:
MSDL (222)
228

Single

Terminal

Access

Package dependencies:
MSDL (222)
MSDL SDI (227)

features and services

553-3001-305

STA

Software options and package dependencies

Number
229

Feature Name
Station

Specific

Authorization

Code

Mnemonic

1-43

Release

SSAU

Package dependency:
BAUT (25)
242

Multi User

243

Alarm Filtering

MULTIUSER

Packagedependency:

FILTER

(55)
245

System Message Look-up Facility

246

Voice Mailbox Administration

VMBA

Package dependency:
CPND (95)
247

Call ID

CALL ID

248

Meridian Packet Handler

MPH

Package dependency:
(216)
(145) for 1.5 Mbps PRI link
(154) for 2 Mbps PRI link

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

l-44

Software options and package dependencies

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

1-45

Feature modules and issue dates
Feature
Access

module

issue date
92 1231

restrictions

Application Module

9 2 12 31

Application Module Link

9 2 12 31

Attendant Administration

9 2 12 31

Attendant Alternative Answering

9 2 12 31

Attendant Barge-in

93 1031

Attendant Busy Verify

92 1231

Attendant

call

selection

92 1231

Attendant

Calls

Waiting

92 1231

Indication

9 2 12 31

Attendant consoles
Attendant
Attendant

Incoming

Call

Interpositional

Indicators

9 2 12 31

Transfer

92 1231
92 1231

Attendant Lockout
Attendant

Overflow

9 2 12 31

Position

Attendant Position Busy

92 1231

Attendant Recall

9 2 12 31

Attendant Secrecy

9 2 12 31

1 features and services

553-3001-305

1-46

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature

module

Issue date

Attendant Splitting

92 1 2 31

Attendant Supervisory Console

92 1 2 31

Attendant Trunk Group Busy

92 1 2 31

Indication

Audible Reminder of Held Calls

92 12 31
92 12 31

Automatic Answerback

92 12 31

Automatic

Distribution

93 10 31

Automatic Line Selection

92 12 31

Automatic Number identification

92 12 31

Automatic Number Identification on DTI

92 12 31

Automatic Preselection of Prime Directory Number

92 12 31

Automatic Set Relocation

93 10 31

Automatic Timed Reminders

921231

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

921231

Automatic Wake Up

921231

Auxiliary Processor Link

921231

Auxiliary Signaling

921231

Background Terminal

921231

Bridging

92 12 31

Busy Lamp Field

92 12 31

Call Detail Recording

921231

Call Forward All Calls

93 10 31

Call Forward Busy

93 08 01

Call Forward by Call Type

92 12 31

Call

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature

Issue date

module

Call Forward External Deny

92 12 31

Call Forward, Internal Calls

93 10 31

Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

92 1231

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

92 1231

Cail Hold, Deluxe

93 10 31

Call Hold, Permanent

92 12 31

Call Park

93 10 31

Call Party Name Display

93 1031

Call Pickup

93 1031

Call Pickup, Directed

92 12 31

Call Transfer

92 12 31

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting

92 1231

Called Party Disconnect Control

92 12 31

Camp-On

92 1231

Capacity Expansion

92 12 31

Centralized Attendant Service

92 12 31

Switchhook Flash

921231

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

92 12 31

Charge Account, Forced

92 1231

Conference

92 1231

Console Presentation Group Level Services

92 12 31

Controlled Class of Service

92 12 31

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

93 1031

Departmental Listed Directory Number

92 1231

Xl 1 features and services

l-47

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature

module

Dial

Intercom

Dial

Pulse/Dual

Dialed

Number

Issue date
93 08 01

Tone

Multifrequency

Identification

Conversion

Service

92 12 31
92 12 31

Digit Display

92 12 31

Digital Trunk Interface

92 12 31

Direct Inward System Access

92 12 31

Directory Number

92 12 31

Directory Number Expansion

92 12 31

Distinctive/New

92 12 31

Distinctive

Ringing

Do Not Disturb

92 12 31

Electronic Switched Network

92 12 31

End-to-End Signaling

93 08 01

Equal Access Compliance

93 10 31

Fast Tone Digit Switch

921231

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

921231

Flexible Feature Codes

93 08 01

Group Call

921231

History File

93 08 01

Hot Line

93 08 01

Hunting

931031

In-Band

92 12 31

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

92 12 31

Incremental Software Management

92 12 31

Integrated Messaging System Link

92 12 31

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature

module

Integrated

Issue date

Services

Digital

Network

921231
92 1231

Integrated Voice and Data

92 1231

Treatment
Basic Rate Interface

92 12 31

Last Number Redial

92 12 31

Limited Access to Overlays

92 1231

Line Load Control

92 1231

Line Lockout

921231

Line and Trunk Cards

93 1031

Maid

93 1031

Identification

Make Set Busy

92 12 31

Malicious Call Trace

92 1231

Manual Line Service

921231

Manual Signaling (Buzz)

92 12 31

Manual Trunk Service

92 1231

Meridian

Hospitality

Voice

92 1231

Services

Meridian Mail

921231

Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration

93 10 31

Meridian Manager

92 1231

Meridian MAX/ACD-MAX

92 1231

Message Center

92 12 31

Message Registration

93 08 01

Message

Waiting

Indication

(MWI)

interworking

931031

Message Waiting Lamp Maintenance

92 1231

Xl 1 features and services

1-49

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature

Issue date

module

MSDL Serial Data Interface

93 08 01

Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime

92 12 31

Multiple Console operation

92 12 31

Multiple Customer Operation

92 12 31

Multi-Tenant Service

92 12 31

Multi-User

93 08 01

Music

93 08 01

Music, Enhanced

92 12 31

Network Message Services

92 12 31

New Flexible Code Restriction

92 12 31

Night Key for DID Digit Manipulation

92 12 31

Night Service

92 12 31

No Hold Conference

92 12 31

North American Numbering Plan

93

Off Hook Alarm Security

93 08 01

Off-Premise Extension

92 12 31

Office Data Administration System

921231

On Hook Dialing

92 12 31

Optional Outpulsing Delay

921231

Overlay Cache Memory

93 08 01

Override

921231

Paging

921231

Pretranslation

93 08 01

Privacy

92 12 31

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

31

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature

module

Issue date

Privacy Override

93 08 01

Privacy Release

92 1231
921231

Line Service
Property Management System Interface

93 08 01

Public Switched Data Service

93 10 31

Recorded

92 1231

Announcement

Recorded Overflow Announcement

92 12 31

Recorded Telephone Dictation

92 1231

Remote Call Forward

93 08 01

Remote Peripheral Equipment

921231

Ring Again

921231

Room Status

93 08 01

Secretarial Filtering

921231

Short Buzz for digital telephones

92 12 31

Speed Call

92 12 31
with Authorization Codes

Speed

921231

Speed Call, System

93 08 01

Station Category Indication

92 1231

Station

Specific

1-51

Authorization

Code

93 08 01

Station-to-Station Calling

921231

Stored Number Redial

921231

Telephones

93 08 01

Time and Date

921231

Tones and Cadences

921231

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

1-52

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature
Tones,

Issue date

module
Flexible

92 12 31

Incoming

Trunk Verification from a Station

92 12 31

Line Connections

92 12 31

User Selectable Call Redirection

92 12 31

Voice Call

93 08 01

2500 Telephone Features

93 10 31

500 Telephone Features

921231

50012500 Type Line Disconnect

93 08 01

features and services

553-3001-305

Access restrictions
Access restrictions limit individual user access to the exchange network,
private network, and certain services and features. These restrictions can be
arranged to control all calls originated by or terminating on stations. Access
restrictions can be temporarily overridden by the use of other Meridian
features, if equipped, such as Forced Charge Account, Authorization Code,
and System Speed Call.
When a call is originated, access checks are made by the Meridian 1 on
the class of service (CLS) of the individual station
the Trunk Group Access Restriction (TGAR) code of the station
the area and exchange codes dialed by stations with a Toll Denied (TLD)
class of service
the Network Class of Service (NCOS) of the station, if Basic Alternate
or
Route Selection/Network Alternate Route Selection
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) is equipped
If any restrictions are detected when a call is placed, the call is denied and the
intercept treatment defined in the Customer Data Block is applied.

features and services

553-3001-305

2-2

Access

restrictions

Class of Service restrictions
The Class of Service (CLS) restrictions assigned to telephones and Tie trunks
control the degree of access to and from the exchange network. CLS
restrictions also control access to certain features within the system. There are
eight possible CLS access restrictions assigned to telephones, Tie trunks,
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) trunks, and Authorization Codes that
access the public exchange network. They are listed in order, from the most
restricted to least restricted. Each of these restriction levels builds upon the
capabilities of those listed before it. For example, a telephone with
CLS
can call anywhere a telephone with FR2 can, and can also access Tie trunks.
See Table 2-l.
Fully Restricted Service There are three levels:
FR2
.

allowed to originate and receive internal calls

.

denied access to tie and Common Controlled Switching
Arrangement networks

.

denied access to and from the exchange network, either by dialing,
through an attendant, or using call modification from an unrestricted
telephone
Call modification takes place when certain features are activated
while a call is in progress, for example, Call Park, Call Pickup, Call
Transfer, Conference, or Night Answer.

.

allowed to originate and receive internal calls

.

allowed access to tie and CCSA networks

.

denied access to and from the exchange network, either by dialing
through an attendant, or using call modification from an unrestricted
telephone

Note: If a telephone with CLS =
is in a Multiple Appearance DN
(MADN) arrangement, the call may be presented if at least one of the
telephones has CLS = UNR. Once the call is presented it will ring all
telephones in the MADN group. However, only UNR telephones can
answer the call.

Xl 1 features and services

Access

restrictions

2-3

Table
Class of Service chart
UNR
Incoming
calls

Yes

TLD
Yes

Yes

SRE
Yes

FRE
Yes
using call
modification

FR2
No

No

No

No

No
Outgoing
non-toll trunk
calls

Yes

Yes

Outgoing toll
trunk calls
(0 or 1+ on
COT or FX)

Yes

Yes using No
BARS/
direct
NARS
access

To/From Tie
trunk

Yes

Yes

To/From
internal

Yes

calls
TGAR = No

calls
TGAR

Yes

Yes

Yes using
attendant
or UNR
telephone

Yes
using UNR
telephone

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Uses
NCOS
only

Uses
NCOS
only

Uses
NCOS
and
CLS

Uses
NCOS
and CLS

Uses NCOS
and CLS

Uses
Uses
NCOS NCOS
and
and

Uses
NCOS
and
TGAR

Uses
Uses
NCOS
NCOS,
and TGAR CLS
and
TGAR

Uses
NCOS,
CLS, and
TGAR

Uses NCOS,
CLS, and
TGAR

Uses
Uses
NCOS, CLS
only
and
TGAR

No direct
access

Xl 1 features and services

2-4

Access

restrictions

FRE
allowed to originate and receive internal calls
.

allowed access to tie and CCSA networks

.

allowed access to and from the exchange network using call
modification from an unrestricted telephone

.

denied access (either by dialing or through an attendant) to and from
the exchange network

Note: The FRPT prompt in LD17 allows or denies access to incoming

calls for FRE CLS telephones. It allows FRE calls to Call Pickup, Night
Answer, and to receive modified calls.
The assignment of Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) keys allows the attendant to
recognize which calls are fully restricted:
DFO = calls from FRE,

and FR2 CLS

DLO = calls from CUN, CTD, TLD, SRE, and UNR CLS
Semi-Restricted Service (SRE) Allowed to receive calls from the exchange
network. Restricted from all dial access to the exchange network. Allowed to
access the exchange network through an attendant or an unrestricted
telephone only.
Toll Denied Service
Allowed to receive calls from the exchange
network and to dial the local exchange network or selected local exchanges, if
code restriction is in effect. Allowed to originate calls through the toll exchange
network through an attendant or an unrestricted telephone only. TLD is
commonly used with Forced Charge Account and Code Restriction Blocks.
Conditionally Toll Denied Service (CTD) Allowed access for calls placed
and
through Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP). Then the telephone NCOS restriction is
checked. When using dial access of routes, CTD are seen as TLD telephones.
Conditionally Unrestricted Service (CUN) Allowed access for calls placed
Denied access for all other
through Automatic Number Identification
types of outgoing calls.
Unrestricted Service (UNR) Allowed to originate and receive calls from the
exchange network.

features and services

553-3001-305

Access

restrictions

2-5

Code Restriction
Code Restriction allows limited access to the toll exchange network to
stations and Tie trunks with a Toll Denied Class of Service (TLD). A Code
Restriction Block that specifies the allowed area and exchange codes (200
through 999) is built for each trunk route. This block restricts access to
specific area and exchange codes by monitoring the digits dialed.
There can be only one Code Restriction Block per route. The only routes that
use Code Restriction Blocks are Central Office Trunk (COT) and FX, since
they are toll routes. Code Restriction Blocks are ignored for all other types of
routes.
When a telephone or Tie trunk with a CTD, CUN, or TLD class of service
directly access a COT or FX route, the system examines the Code Restriction
Block to determine the call eligibility.
Note: No area codes, local exchange, on special numbers such as 911
and 411 can be successfully dialed unless allowed in a Code Restriction
Block for
Code Restriction Blocks only perform three-digit screening. For
dialing
areas, the system can ignore the 1 when examining the TLD telephone dialed
number. The 1 is later outpulsed with the dialed number to complete the call
successfully.
For more information, see “New Flexible Code Restriction” or Basic
Network Alternate Route Selection description

Trunk Group Access Restrictions
Trunk Group Access Restrictions
control access to the exchange
network, tie and CCSA access lines, and paging and dictation services.
Telephones, Tie trunks, Direct Inward System Access (DISA) trunks, and
Authorization Codes are assigned a Trunk Group Access Restriction (TGAR)
code which defines the trunks that may be accessed. Up to 16 TGAR codes
can be assigned for each customer. X11 release 13 and later software allows
the assignment of 32 TGAR codes per customer. Any TGAR that is not
allowed access to a route is assigned in the Trunk Route Data Block in
response to the prompt TARG (Trunk Access Restriction Group).

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

2-6

Access

restrictions

When a telephone or Tie trunk accesses a trunk route, the Meridian 1 checks
the class of service of the originating party. If access is allowed, the system
then compares the TGAR of the station against the TARG codes defined for
the route being accessed. If a match is found, the call is denied and Intercept
Treatment (INTR) defined in the Customer Data Block-is applied.
When dial access to a trunk group is denied, the station may access the trunk
route through the attendant or a nonrestricted station. If a route is busied-out
by the attendant, stations with a TGAR code 0 to 7 are intercepted to the
attendant. Stations with a TGAR code 8 to 31 continue to seize and use the
trunks on the busied route to which they have access.
The following example further explains Trunk Group Access Restrictions.
Assume a customer has seven trunk routes:
TGAR

Access denied to routes

Route 0

COT
WATS

Xl 1 features and services

2

FX

3

FX2

4

TIE

5

TIE 2

6

Paging

553-3001-305

Access

restrictions

Assume the following seven TGAR codes are required:
TGAR

Access denied to routes

0

No restrictions (default)

2
3
4
5
6

The

matrix summary is as follows:

Trunk Type

Route number

TARG Code
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

COT

0

WATS

I

FX 1

I

1
I
I

12

4

FX 2

3

1 2 3

5

TIE 1

4

1 2 3

5

TIE 2

5

1 2 3

5 6

Paging

I

6

I

1

4 5 6

Xl 1 features and services

7-31

2-7

2-8

Access

restrictions

It follows from the matrix summary that a telephone or Tie trunk was
assigned one of the following TGAR codes:
0 -has no restrictions
1 -cannot access trunk routes 0 through 6
2-cannot access trunk routes 2 through 5
3 -cannot access trunk routes 3 through 5
4 -cannot access trunk routes 2 and 6
5 -cannot access trunk routes 3 through 6
6 -cannot access trunk routes 5 and 6

Trunk signaling arrangements
Trunk to trunk connections are further controlled by the signaling and
supervision arrangements assigned to each trunk. Table 2-2 summarizes the
trunk signaling arrangements.
Table 2-2
Trunk signaling

arrangements
To
Trunk
with/without
disconnect
supervision

Paging
dictation
trunk

Telephone
(non-trunk)

Trunk with disconnect
supervision

Yes

No

Yes

Trunk without
disconnect supervision

No

No

Yes

RAN/Paging
trunk

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

From

dictation

Telephone

Note: Yes: connection allowed
No: connection disallowed

features and services

553-3001-305

Access

restrictions

2-9

Operating parameters
If a conflict exists between the class of service (CLS) and TGAR restrictions,
the access denied restriction takes precedence.
Access restrictions are applied through service change overlay programs.
Access to telephone and trunk features is denied in the respective data block
by allowing the system to default to a denial, by not entering the appropriate
feature code or by not assigning the feature to a key/lamp pair. You must
enable the features and access restrictions you want, on a customer and
telephone level.
Services such as paging and dictation can be restricted through TGAR codes
because the auxiliary equipment is linked to the Meridian 1 system by way of
trunks.

Feature interaction
New Flexible Code Restriction
The Code Restriction feature and New Flexible Code Restriction cannot
be implemented simultaneously for the same customer.

Feature packaging
These capabilities are included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Xl features and services

2-10

Access

Feature

restrictions

implementation
Use the overlays on the following pages to configure access
restrictions.

Assign a Class of Service and TGAR code for
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type
Terminal Number

TN
TGAR

telephones.

x, (O)-31

Station or trunk TGAR
X = remove TGAR value
Note: With
allowed.

Unrestricted

1 release 12 and earlier, O-l 5 TGAR codes are

(default)

CUN

Conditionally Unrestricted

TLD

Toll Denied

CTD

Conditionally

SRE

Semi Restricted

FRE

Fully

Toll

Restricted

Fully Restricted 1
FR2

Xl 1 features and services

Fully Restricted 2

Denied

Access

restrictions

2-11

-Assign a Class of Service and TGAR code for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa

TN
TGAR

Terminal Number
x, (O)-31

Station or trunk TGAR
X = remove TGAR value
Note: With Xl 1 release 12 and earlier, O-l 5 TGAR codes are allowed.

Unrestricted

(default)

CUN

Conditionally Unrestricted

TLD

Toll Denied

CTD

Conditionally

SRE

Semi Restricted

FRE

Fully

Toll

Denied

Restricted

Fully Restricted 1
FR2

Fully Restricted 2

1 features and services

553-3001-305

2-12

LD14

Access

restrictions

Assign a Class of Service and TGAR code for Tie trunks.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

TIE, ISA, CSA

Trunk type

TN
TGAR

Terminal Number
x, (O)-31

Station or trunk TGAR
X = remove TGAR value
Note: With Xl 1 release 12 and earlier, O-l 5 TGAR codes are
allowed.

Unrestricted

(default)

CUN

Conditionally Unrestricted

TLD

Toll Denied

CTD

Conditionally

SRE

Semi Restricted

FRE

Fully

Toll

Restricted

Fully Restricted 1
FR2

Xl 1 features and services

Fully Restricted 2

553-3001-305

Denied

Access

restrictions

-Assign a Class of Service to the Authorization Code classcode.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

AUB

Authcode Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

SPWD

xxxx

Secure data password (see

CLAS

o-115

Classcode number

cos

5 for description)

Unrestricted
CUN

Conditionally Unrestricted

TLD

Toll Denied

CTD

Conditionally

SRE

Semi Restricted

FRE

Fully

Toll

Denied

Restricted

Fully Restricted 1
FR2

Fully Restricted 2

TGAR

x, (O)-31

Class code TGAR Network Class of Service

NCOS

(O)-99

Toll

Restricted

Xl 1 features and services

2-13

2-14

LD24
REQ

Access

restrictions

Assign a Class of Service to Direct Inward System Access (DISA) numbers.
CHG

Change

TYPE

data

CUST

o-99

Customer number

SPWD

xxxx

Secure data password (see
DN

DN
TGAR

5 for description)

x, (O)-31

Station or trunk TGAR
X remove TGAR value
Note: With Xl 1 release 12 and earlier, O-15 TGAR codes are
allowed.

NCOS

(O)-99

Network Class of Service
Unrestricted

cos
CUN

Conditionally Unrestricted

TLD

Toll Denied

CTD

Conditionally

SRE

Semi Restricted

FRE

Fully

Toll

Denied

Restricted

Fully Restricted 1
FR2

Fully Restricted 2

incoming calls to telephones with an FRE Class of Service for all customers.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CFN

Configuration record

FRPT

OLFR

Allow incoming trunk calls to telephones with FRE CLS,
using call modification

(NEFR)

Deny incoming trunk calls to FRE telephones using call
modification

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Access restrictions 2-1

LD16

Add/change the TARG code for a trunk route.

REQ

CHG

C h a n g e

TYPE

RDB

Route data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-511

Route number

TARG

2 3 31

Route TARG codes (list each TGAR to be blocked from
using this route-put a space between each entry). To
remove an entry, precede with X.
Note: With Xl 1 release 12 and earlier, the range for TARG codes
is I-15.

LD19

Implement Code Restriction on trunk routes.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CRB

Code

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

xxx

Trunk route number of COT or FX (there can be only one
Code Restriction Block for each COT or FX route)

Block

Allow all NPA/NXX codes except those entered in response
to the prompt DENY

CLR

DENY

Restriction

DENY

Deny all
to the prompt



Used when REQ = CHG

xxx xxx

If

enter the NPA/NXX codes (200-999) allowed

xxx xxx

If

enter the NPA/NXX codes (200-999) denied

codes except those entered in response

1 features and services

553-3001-30

2-16

Access

restrictions

Define toll access digits that are to be ignored for Code Restriction.
CHG

Change

TYPE

RDB

Route Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-51

Route number

OABS

xxx

Outgoing digits (O-9) to be ignored

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Application Module
The Application Module (AM), formerly known as the Meridian Link
Module, is an application processor providing an interface between a host
computer and the Meridian providing operations, administration, and
maintenance capabilities. It is housed in the Application Equipment Module
Up to two Application Modules can be put into one
chassis in
a redundant configuration.

Related documents
For complete information regarding the Application Module (AM), see the
following documents:
Meridinn Link description
Application

1- 1 10)

Module installation guide

Meridian Link installation (553-3201-210)
Meridian Link

guide (553-320 l-200)

Meridian Link diagnostic and maintenance (553-3201-5

1 features and services

553-3001-305

3-2

Application Module

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
13
4-1

Application Module Link
The Application Module Link (AML) provides supervisory and control
functions for the link that allows host computers and other external
processors access to TSDN network services on the Meridian 1. Tasks
performed by the Application Module Link (AML) include link activation,
fault detection, maintenance, and traffic reporting. The Application Module
Link (AML) provides the association of telephones with one or more
with the host computer. This allows a computer to access basic telephone
features of the Meridian 1. Telemarketing, electronic mail, and other features
can take full advantage of ISDN services using the AML.

Operating parameters
Refer to the Application Module Link description

100).

Feature interaction
Refer to the Application Module Link description

100).

Feature packaging
Application Module Link

package

requires:

Command Status Link (CSL), package 77
Digit Display (DDSP), package 19
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Basic features (ACD-A), package 45
ACD Advanced features (ACD-B), package 41

Feature

implementation
Refer to the Application Module Link description (553-3201-100).

1 features and services

553-3001-305

4-2

Application Module Link

Feature operation
Refer

1 features and services

to

the

Application Module Link description

553-3001-305

(553-3201-100).

Issued:
Status:
Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All
5-l

Attendant Administration
allows the attendant to tnodify a specific set of
features that can he assigned to telephones. The console must have an
alphanumeric display, and it must be assigned to the satne customer group as
the telephones on which the features are to be changed.
Attendant Administration is itnpletnentcd by assigning a Program key on the
strip on the attendant console. The Program key and a
tnode in a
four-digit password allow the attendant to enter the
into the Meridian systetn from a systetn
manner equivalent to
terminal.
When in the Program mode, the Attendant Console key/lamp strip functions
are
frotn normal call
to the Attendant Administration
programming
A plastic overlay is placed over the console
programming functions.
key/lamp strips to indicate
inputs the information by pressing the appropriate key or by
numbers or letters on the dial pad. The alphanumeric display shows
information and
feedback from the system. The
feedback includes
current status of the telephone, the protnpts requesting
the tnessages indicating an input error.
input.
The
that may be changed by Attendant Administration are listed
that are not included in the list cannot be tnodified or
below. Any
the
Administration
SL- I and
Call Forward

digital

key assignments

telephones only)

Call Forward Busy (all telephones)
Call Forward

Answer (all

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

5-2

Attendant Administration

Call Pickup (all telephones)
Call Pickup Group (all telephones)
Call Waiting
Dial Intercom Group
Directory Number
Permanent Hold

telephones only)
telephones only)
telephones only)
telephones only)

Hunt Directory Number (all telephones)
Hunting (all telephones)
Last Hunt Key (SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones only)
Message Waiting (all telephones)
Ring Again
Speed Calling
Stored Number Redial
Call Transfer

telephones only)
telephones only)
telephones only)
telephones only).

For details on feature operation, refer to the XI I
user guide.

Operating parameters
Calls cannot be initiated or received by the console while it is in the program
mode.
The attendant may only change data for the customer to which the console
belongs.
The system generates Customer Service Change (CSC) messages that
indicate changes made to individual telephones. These messages may be
output on a system terminal or stored in the history file.
Attempting to change a telephone that is busy is not allowed. A busy
telephone is defined as a telephone with any active or held calls or with any
active features such as Autodial. There are exceptions, however. A telephone
that has Call Forward All Calls or Make Set Busy activated can be modified.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Administration

5-3

During the time a telephone is undergoing feature changes by the attendant,
it is made Maintenance Busy and is therefore inoperative.
If a console remains idle in the program mode for 20 minutes, the program
mode i s terminated and the console returns to Position Busy.
If an Attendant Console, maintenance telephone, or system terminal tries to
log into the system while another device is logged in, the system displays a
message identifying the logged-in device. If a password is then entered, the
is accepted, forcing out the device previously logged in. A console
forced out is returned to Position Busy and provided with an output message
in the display to indicate what has occurred.
making service changes at a system terminal, when a Directory
telephone that appears elsewhere (as
Number (DN) is entered for a
Hunt, or Private Line DN), the associated error code (MIX, HUNT,
a
is not displayed. If the DN is not valid, an error code is displayed.
or
The data base is automatically dumped during the midnight routine if a
transaction has been successfully completed during the previous day. If this
data dump fails, the minor alarm lamp on the console will light.

Feature interaction
the system initializes or reloads while the console is in the program
Attendant Administration is aborted and the console returns to the
Position Busy mode. Any service change since the last Prime DN prompt
(for initialize) or since the last successful data dump (for system reload)
is lost and must be input again.
Initialize
The Attendant Administration password is preserved over an
initialization and set to the value on the tape when the system is reloaded.
Attendant console
It is not necessary to have the handset/headset plugged in while in the
program mode. Plugging in the handset/headset while in the program
mode has no effect.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

5-4

Attendant Administration

Feature packaging
Attendant Administration (AA), package 54, has no feature package
dependencies.

Feature
LD15

implementation

Assign an Attendant Administration access code.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ATAC

xxxx

New or changed Attendant Administration access code
(maximum four digits)
X preceding the access code removes it.

PWD2

xxxx

This password is programmed in LDI 7 at the PWD2
prompt.

Attendant Administration key.
REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

ATT, 1250, 2250

Console type

CUST

o-99

Customer number. Prompted only when REQ = NEW

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx PRG

Add an Attendant Administration key

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Alternative Answering
Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA) allows customers to define a timing
threshold for attendant calls. After the predefined time, the unanswered call
presented to an idle loop key on an attendant console is forwarded to a
predefined DN for alternate answering.
An unanswered call is forwarded to an idle or busy alternate DN. The call is
subject to further call modification depending on the database configuration
for the alternate DN.
When a call is presented to an idle loop key on the attendant console, the
following occurs:
1

The system checks the attendant for AAA eligibility by checking for the
AAA timer. The AAA time activates the AAA feature.

2

When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded to the
Attendant Alternative Answering DN (AAA DN) defined for an
individual attendant. Calls forwarded to the AAA DN are subject to the
individual telephone’s features, independent of the attendant. It is
possible that the DN rung may not be the AAA DN.

3

After the alternate telephone has been reached, the attendant console
releases the call.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

6-2

Attendant Alternative Answering

4

If call termination is unsuccessful at the AAA DN, an error message is
generated that explains the problem:
.

If the error is because of an invalid AAA DN or tenant-to-tenant
access denied condition, the call remains on the idle loop key for the
attendant, and the AAA timer is not started again.

.

For all other errors, the call remains on the attendant loop key and
AAA timer is restarted. The sequence is repeated until the call is
answered at the console, disconnected by the caller, or terminated at
the AAA-DN.

When an Automatic Wake Up (AWU) recall is presented to the AWU key on
the attendant console, the following occurs:
1

The AWU key buzzes, and the associated indicator fast flashes.

2

The attendant presses the AWU key to accept the recall.

3

The attendant presses the RLS key to release the call. An AWU recall
must be acknowledged before any other calls can be presented to the
attendant.

4

With AAA, the AWU call is presented to the attendant for the duration
of the AAA timer. If an AWU recall is not acknowledged before the
timer threshold, the recall is returned to the attendant queue, to be
presented later. The AWU recall will not be forwarded to the AAA DN.

If the AAA DN does not answer, call treatment is defined by the features
allowed for the originally dialed DN. If the originally dialed DN is the
attendant, call treatment is defined by the features allowed for the AAA DN.

Xl 1 features and services

Attendant Alternative Answering

6-3

The order listed below reflects the precedence when one or more call
forwarding features is equipped:
1

Call Forward All Calls

2 Message Center
3

4

Call Forward No Answer
.

Flexible Call Forward No Answer

.

Second Level Call Forward No Answer

.

Call Forward by Call Type

Automatic Timed Recalls (slow answer)

For an unanswered call presented to a busy AAA DN, treatment is defined by
the features enabled for that customer and the AAA DN telephone.
The order listed below reflects the precedence when one or more call
forwarding features is equipped on the AAA DN:
1

Call Forward All Calls

2 Hunting
3 Call Waiting
4

Message Waiting (Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls only), if Message
Waiting Forward Busy (MWFB) is enabled in

5

Call Forward Busy (DID calls only)

If no call forwarding feature is defined for the busy AAA DN, the call remains
on the attendant console, and the AAA timer is restarted. When the AAA
timer expires, the call is again forwarded to the AAA DN.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

6-4

Attendant Alternative Answering

Operating parameters
Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA) is defined and applicable on a
customer basis only, not at the Console Presentation Group (CPG) level. It
only handles calls presented to the console, not calls in the attendant queue.
It is recommended that the AAA DN assigned to an attendant be within the
same CPG as the attendant.
Only 63 Attendant Consoles can be assigned per customer. Only one AAA
DN can be assigned per Attendant; thus, this feature is limited to 63
per customer, one for each attendant console.
With Night Service (NSVC) enabled and active, calls are rerouted to the
Night Service DN. Calls presented to the NSVC DN are not subject to
The AA4 DN must be a valid DN or ACD DN. If invalid, the call stays on
the console.
The AAA DN defined is not subject to pretranslation. The
the actual DN.

DN must be

This feature allows more than one backup of the attendant to be available,
provided the designated alternative DN is defined as a member of a Call
Pickup group or as a Multiple Appearance DN.

Feature interaction
Attendant Overflow Position (AOP)
The AOP DN handles calls from the attendant queue if all attendant
consoles are busy or in the Position Busy mode. Calls presented to the
AOP DN are
subject to AAA.
Attendant Recall (ARC)
Under ARC conditions, the initiator of the recall rings the destination
side of the console, and the third party becomes the source. The AAA
timer is applied to the source party. If the AAA timer expires, the
destination is dropped, and the source is forwarded to the AAA DN. If
the source party disconnects before the destination party, then the AAA
timer is restarted on the destination party, still buzzing the attendant
through the ARC key. The AAA timer is dropped if both parties
disconnect.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Alternative Answering

6-5

Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over all other call forwarding
features for a particular telephone. Calls forwarded by AAA are subject
to the Call Forwarding conditions on the AAA DN.
Call Forward Busy
If Call Forward Busy is allowed for the AAA DN (and that DN is busy),
a DID call is returned to the attendant and can again be eligible for AAA
timing and operation.
Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT)
If Call Forward by Call Type is enabled on the AAA DN, then calls are
forwarded based on the Call Type of the originator.
Call Forward No Answer (CFNA)
When the AAA DN does not answer, the call can be forwarded by CFNA
to the DN defined as the CFNA DN for the originally dialed DN. If the
originally dialed DN is the attendant, then the call is forwarded to the
CFNA-DN defined for the AAA DN.
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
The AAA timer is not applied to CAS calls routed from the remote CAS
location through the Release Link Trunk to the main CAS attendant. All
other internal or trunk calls presented to the CAS attendant at the main
location are timed by AAA as usual.
If the remote CAS attendant presses the CAS key while a call is being
presented, the presented call is subject to AAA timing and is forwarded
to the AAA DN at the remote location after the timer expires.
Do Not Disturb (DND)
A DN in the DND mode is free to originate calls but appears busy to
incoming calls. Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over DND
indication on AAA
Hunting
Calls directed to a busy AAA DN with Hunt defined are routed down the
Hunt chain as defined for the AAA DN.
Message Center
If the AAA DN is a Message Center (MWC), then a Message Center call
to the attendant and forwarded by AAA is still treated like a Message
Center call.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

6-6

Attendant Alternative Answering

Multi-Tenant
Tenant-to-tenant access must be allowed between an internal caller and
the AAA DN. If caller-to-AAA access is denied, the call remains on the
console until the call is answered or dropped.
Call Pickup
The AAA DN can be assigned to a call pickup group to allow members
of the same group to answer the call.

Feature packaging
Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA), package 174, has no feature
package dependencies.

Feature
LD15

implementation

Implement the Attendant Alternate Answering feature in the customer data block.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number
26

AAA timer in 2-second increments. Odd numbers are
rounded down.
= 0 disables the feature

LD12

Define the AAA DN for each attendant console affected.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

ATT,

Console type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

AADN

Attendant Alternative Answering DN

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

7-1

Attendant Barge-In
Attendant Barge-In allows the attendant to establish a connection with any
trunk in the system to verify that the trunk is in working order. When Barge-In
burst of tone is sent to the connected parties every six
is active, a
seconds to indicate the presence of the attendant.

Operating parameters
Barge-In can only be used for trunks with Warning Tone Allowed (WTA)
Class of Service. All parties connected to the trunk when the attendant
attempts to barge in must have WTA Class of Service.
If equipped, the Barge-in key must be assigned to key I of the console flexible
feature strip.
The system must be equipped with a conference loop.

Feature interaction
None.

Feature packaging
Attendant Barge-In is included in basic XI system software.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Barge-In

7-2

Feature

implementation

Add/change a Barge-In key on attendant consoles.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

ATT,

Console type

TN

Terminal Number
1 BIN

KEY

Add a Barge-In key

Allow/deny a warning tone Class of Service for
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

telephones.

Terminal Number
(WTA), WTD

(Allow), deny warning tone

-Allow/deny a warning tone Class of Service for SL-1 and digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =
2317, 2616, or 3000

TN

Terminal Number

lscu

(Allow), deny warning tone

WTD

LD14

Allow/deny warning tone Class of Service for trunks

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

COT, DID, FEX,
RAN, TIE, WAT

Trunk type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

(WTA), WTD

(Allow), deny warning tone

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Barge-in 7-3

Feature operation
To establish a connection on a trunk, follow these steps:
1

Select an idle loop key.

2 Press Barge-In.
3

Dial the route access code and the trunk member number, followed by
the octothorpe

Possible results are
dial tone (trunk is idle and working)
conversation (trunk is busy and working)
modem carrier tone (long distance trunk is working)
fast busy (trunk is either disabled or has Warning Tone Denied CLS)
If you hear fast busy, check the trunk again before reporting a problem.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

7-4

Attendant Barge-In

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
Release:

92 1231
Standard
All
8-l

Attendant Busy Verify
Attendant Busy Verify allows the attendant to establish a connection with any
apparently busy DN to verify that the DN is actually busy and in working
order. This feature can also be used to connect with a busy station if an
emergency situation requires call interruption by the attendant.
burst of interrupted tone is sent every
When Busy Verify is active, a
six seconds to indicate the presence of the attendant. The attendant can Busy
Verify only those stations with warning tone allowed Class of Service.

Operating parameters
The system must be equipped with a conference loop.
If equipped, the Busy Verify key must be assigned to key 0 of the console
flexible feature strip.

Feature interaction
Call Forward All Calls
If the DN is call forwarded to the attendant console, the attendant will
receive a click followed by silence.
Hunting and Call Forward Busy
Hunting and Call Forward Busy do not affect Busy Verify.

Feature packaging
Attendant Busy Verify is included in basic X 11 system software.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Busy Verify

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant call selection
All calls to the attendant, with the exception of slow-answer recalls, are
automatically queued in order of arrival. The attendant can answer a call in
two ways:
Calls can be answered in the order received, regardless of call type, using
the Loop key (LPK).
A particular call type can be answered before other calls in the queue by
manually selecting the appropriate Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key.
The first call presented to an idle console is indicated by the appropriate ICI
lamp. All subsequent calls are indicated by the Calls Waiting lamp only until
the first call is released. All appropriate ICI lamps will then light and an
attendant may select a specific incoming call type by depressing the
appropriate ICI key.
If a customer has multiple consoles, the first call in queue is presented to the
first idle console.

Operating parameters
The maximum number of ICI lamps per attendant console is 20. All consoles
associated with a customer have the same ICI assignment.

Feature interaction
None.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant

1 o-2

Calls

Waiting

Indication

Feature interaction
None.

Feature packaging
Attendant Calls Waiting Indication is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature

implementation

Define Call Waiting thresholds and indications for a customer.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

Yes, (No)

Automatically notify attendant console (M2250) when the
number of calls waiting in queue changes

CWCL

(0)-255 (0)-255

Lower and upper bound of the threshold for the number of
calls waiting (default is 0)

CWTM

(O)-511 (O)-511

Lower and upper bound of the threshold for the time calls
are waiting (default is 0)

CWBZ

Yes, (No) Yes, (No)

The two options are
1. Enable (Disable) a buzz to the attendant when either
the CWCL or CWTM thresholds are exceeded.
2. Enable (Disable) a buzz to the attendant when the first
call enters the queue.

LD12

Add/change a Display Calls Waiting key on an attendant console.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

ATT,

Console type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx DCW

Add a Display Calls Waiting key
xx = O-9 for QCW or Ml 250 attendant console
xx = 00-l 9 for M2250 attendant console

Feature operation
Not applicable.
features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:.
Status:
Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All
11-l

Attendant consoles
Attendant consoles assist in placing
Meridian 1 system. The operator of
attendant. The consoles provide the
increase the speed and ease of call

and extending calls into and out of the
an attendant console is known as the
attendant with many unique features that
processing.

This feature module provides an overview of the attendant consoles and a
description of the basic software capabilities and associated service changes.
Additional information regarding attendant-related software features may be
found in other feature modules in this document.
The following attendant consoles are available with the Meridian 1 system:
QCW 2 Basic console with an eight-digit display
QCW 3 Basic console with a
display
QCW 4 Basic console with a
alphanumeric display
M 1250 Console with a four-line, 40-character wide, alphanumeric liquid
crystal display
M2250 Digital console with a four-line, 40-character wide,
alphanumeric liquid crystal display

1 features and services

553-3001-305

11-2

Attendant consoles

QCW attendant consoles
The attendant consoles have a digit display at the top of the console and a dial
pad below the display. Five vertical keystrips on the console provide access
to the functions described in this section.
Vertical
1
This
at the far left on the console is utilized for Trunk Group Busy
(TGB) keys. The attendant may deny stations access to a trunk route by
pressing the associated Trunk Group Busy key. Additionally, the lamps
associated with Trunk Group Busy keys provide the following visual
indication of the status of the trunks within the route.
Dark
Some of the trunks in the route are idle.
Flashing
All of the trunks in the route are busy.
Steadily lit The attendant has taken control of the route.
The basic attendant console has 10 Trunk Group Busy keys. If an add-on
module is installed, there are 16 Trunk Group Busy keys.
Vertical
2
This
is utilized for Incoming Call Indicator keys. The Incoming Call
Indicators
identify the type of calls in the queue and the status of each
particular call type. Three lamp states are associated with each Incoming Call
Indicator key:
No calls of this type are waiting.
Dark
Steadily lit One call of this type is waiting in queue.
Flashing
Two or more calls of this type are queued, or one call has
been waiting longer than 20 seconds.
To select a specific type of incoming call, the Incoming Call Indicator key
associated with a steadily lit or flashing LED is pressed. The call is removed
from the queue and presented to an idle loop key on the attendant console.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant consoles

11-3

The basic attendant console has 10 Incoming Call Indicator keys. If an add-on
module is equipped, the console may have 20 Incoming Call Indicator keys.
An Incoming Call Indicator key may be assigned to one or more of the call
types listed in Table 11-1.
Table 1 l-l
Incoming Call Indicator key assignments
Mnemonic

Meaning
Station Category Number (x = l-7)

00-l 9

CFB

Call Forward Busy

9

CFN

Call Forward No Answer

00-l 9

DFO

Dial 0 fully restricted

00-l 9

DLO

Dial 0
Inter-attendant

00-l 9
9

INT

Intercept

00-l 9

LCT

Lockout

9

LDO

Listed DN 0

call

Listed DN 1

9
9

LD2

Listed DN 2

9

LD3

Listed DN 3

9

MWC

Attendant Message Center

00-l 9

RLL

Recall

00-l 9

Rxxx

Route number

Vertical

This

3

includes the following operating keys:

Release Allows the attendant to release a call from the console. When the
release lamp is lit, it indicates that no incoming calls are being presented to
the console.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

11-4

Attendant consoles

Loop key/lamps Allows the attendant to answer and originate calls from the
console. The first call in the attendant queue is automatically presented to an
to a loop key when
idle loop key. Subsequent calls are queued and
the console becomes idle.
Position Busy Puts the console into the Position Busy mode. All incoming
calls are then redirected to another console in a multiple-console installation
or to a night number in a single console installation.
Night Service Permits incoming calls to be routed to preselected stations
when all attendant consoles are in the Night mode.
Signal Remote Provisioned if Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) is in use.
Three lamp indicators, positioned on the upper right hand side of the keystrip,
provide the following information:
Two Alarm indicators When steadily lit, the minor alarm lamp
indicates the system has detected a malfunction that does not affect
normal call processing. When the major alarm lamp is steadily lit, the
system has detected a malfunction that does not permit normal call
processing.
Waiting indicator The Call Waiting lamp indicates the number of
calls in the attendant queue and the length of time they have been waiting
to be answered. The lamp changes from steadily lit to flashing when
waiting calls exceed a certain number, or when a call has been waiting
longer than a specified time. The number of waiting calls are displayed
by pressing the Display Calls Waiting key, if assigned.
Vertical
This

4
provides the following fixed feature keys:

Hold Allows the attendant to hold a call at the console.
Conference Permits the attendant to set up a conference of up to five
conferees plus the attendant.
Release Destination Allows the attendant to release the called party from a
call held at the console, while holding the calling party.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

:

Attendant consoles

11-5

Release Source Allows the attendant to release the calling party from a call
held at the console, while holding the called party.
Signal Source and Destination Allows the attendant to recall either party to
a call held on the console.
Exclude Destination Excludes the called party from an established call held
at the console, allowing the attendant to speak privately with the calling party.
Exclude Source Excludes the calling party from an established call held at
the console, allowing the attendant to speak privately with the called party.
Volume Control Allows the attendant to change the volume of alerting
signals. Each depression of the key changes the volume of the signal by one
step in an eight step range.
Vertical

5

The optional features listed in Table 11-2 can be defined on this key strip.
Table 11-2
Attendant console optional feature key assignments (Part 1 of 2)
Mnemonic

Meaning

00

BVR

Busy Verify

01

BIN

Barge-In

00-09

ADL

02-09

AWU

Automatic Wake Up

00-09

CHG

Charge Account

00-09

CPN

Calling Party Number

00-09

DCW

Display Calls Waiting

00-09

DDL

Do-Not-Disturb, Individual

00-09

DDT

Display

00-09

DPD

Display

00-09

DPS

Display Source

Date
Destination

features and services

553-3001-305

11-6

Attendant consoles
Table 11-2
Attendant console optional feature key assignments (Part 2 of 2)
Mnemonic

Meaning

00-09

DTM

Display

Time

02-09

EES

End-to-End Signaling

00-09

GND O-99

Group Do-Not-Disturb

00-09

MCK

Message cancellation

00-09

MDT

Display/Change Date

00-09

MIK

Message indication

00-09

MTM

Display/Change Time

00-09

PAG

Paging

00-09

PRG

Attendant Administration

00-09

PRK

Call Park

00-09

RDL

Stored Number Redial

00-09

RTC

Routing Control

= route access code)

00-09

xxxx

00-09

ssc xxxx

System Speed Call Controller
(xxxx = list number)

00-09

TRC

Malicious Call Trace

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Speed Call Controller
(xxxx = list number)

Attendant consoles

11-7

Ml250 and M2250 attendant consoles
The Ml250 attendant console is available on X11 release 12 and later
software. The M2250 attendant console is available on X11 release and
later software. Both consoles have a four line LCD alphanumeric display,
each line 40 characters wide, which displays the following information:
Line
Line
Line
Line

1
2
3
4

Displays the time and date
Displays call source information
Displays call destination information
Displays console status information

Directly below the display screen is a horizontal row of keys that provide the
Position Busy, Night Service, Signal Source, and Signal Destination
functions.
The Ml250 and M2250 consoles have five vertical keystrips that provide the
functions described for the QCW consoles. In addition, the consoles have a
Shift key on the fixed feature key strip that provides access to an Options
menu. This menu allows the setting of the display screen contrast, buzz tone,
language, time and date format, and calls waiting options. Additional
information on the Options menu can be found in the Ml250 Attendant
Console User Guide and the M2250 Console User Guide.
The Shift key also allows Ml250 consoles to have 20 Incoming Call Indicator
keys in the regular mode and 16 Trunk Group Busy keys in the shift mode.
The M2250 console can have 20 Incoming Call Indicator keys in the regular
mode, and 20 Trunk Group Busy keys and an additional ten flexible feature
keys in the shift mode. Add-on modules are not required on the Ml250 and
M2250 consoles to provide the additional key functions.
Attendant Call Party Name Display (CPND) and the Enhanced Busy Lamp
Field/Console Graphics Module capabilities may be equipped with the
Ml250 and M2250 consoles. Please refer to the feature modules in this
document for a complete description of these capabilities.

Xl 1 features and services

11-8

Attendant consoles

For additional information on attendant consoles and associated hardware,
refer to the following Northern Telecom Publications:
Attendant consoles and add-on
and

modules

(553-2001-115)

Attendant Consoles descriptim (553-2201-117)

Telephone and attendant console installation (553-3001-215)
Fault clearing (553-3001-510)

Operating parameters
Refer to the preceding Northern Telecom Publications.

Feature interaction
Refer to the

Northern Telecom Publications.

Feature packaging
QCW and Ml250 attendant console capabilities are included in basic X11
system software.
Call Party Name Display (CPND), package 95, includes Attendant CPND
and requires Digit Display (DDSP), package 19.
M2250 attendant console
(DSET), package 88.

features and services

553-3001-305

package 140, requires Digital Telephones

Attendant consoles

Feature

11-9

implementation
console related prompts and responses (Part 1 of 3).

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

xx xx . . . . ALL

Attendant Consoles associated with LDNO (see Note)

xxx...x

Listed Directory Number 1

xx xx . . . . ALL

Attendant Consoles associated with

LDN2

xxx...x

Listed Directory Number 2

LDA2

xx xx . . . . ALL

Attendant Consoles associated with

LDN3

xxx...x

Listed Directory Number 3

xx xx . . . . ALL

Attendant Consoles associated with LDN3 (see Note)

xxx...x

First Night Service DN

hh mm

Hour and minute of first Night Service DN

NIT2

xxx...x

Second Night Service DN

TIM2

hh mm

Hour and minute for second Night Service DN

xxx...x

Third Night Service DN

TIM3

hh mm

Hour and minute for third Night Service DN

NIT4

xxx...x

Fourth Night Service DN

TIM4

hh mm

Hour and minute for fourth Night Service DN

ATDN

(0) xxx...x

Attendant DN

NCOS

(O)-99

Attendant Network Class of Service for all consoles

CAS

Yes, (No)

Change Centralized Attendant Service options

Listed Directory Number 0

LDNO
LDAO

(see Note)

(see Note)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant consoles

Attendant console related prompts and responses (Part 2 of 3).
10 or 20 incoming Call Indicators

OPT

Trunk Group Busy keys equipped/not equipped

ITG, (XTG)

Allow (Deny) Lockout

(LOD)
IDP, (XDP)

Digit Display equipped/not equipped

ILF, (XLF)

Lamp Field Array equipped/not equipped

SYA, (SYD)

Allow (Deny) Secrecy

xxx x

Attendant Billing number

ANLD

xxx...x

LFTN

lscu

TN of first Lamp Field Array

LFTN

lscu

TN of second Lamp Field Array

listed DN

First DN of Lamp Field Array

LFFD
AATT

attendant identifier

xxxx
xxxx yyyy

2222

Recall

timers

xxxx = slow answer (O-378)
yyyy = Camp-on (o-510)
= Call Waiting (O-51 0)
26
ICI

YYY

Attendant Alternative Answering timer
Incoming Call Indicator key assignment
xx = key number
yyy = mnemonic (see Table
Note: Multiple responses can be entered for the same key.
To remove an entry, enter xx NUL, then reenter the desired
responses.
To add an entry, enter the desired response. It will be added to any
already existing response.

AQTT

l-(30)-255

Attendant queue timing threshold in seconds

AODN

xxxx...x

Attendant overflow DN

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant consoles

II-11

Attendant console related prompts and responses (Part 3 of 3).
ATAC

xxxx

Attendant Administration access code

Yes, (No)

Call Waiting queue update

(Q-255, (0)-255

Call Waiting lower and upper thresholds for number of calls
in queue

CWTM
CWBZ

(O)-511

Call Waiting lower and upper thresholds for time in queue

Yes, (No)

Buzz when Call Waiting thresholds are exceeded

Yes, (No)

Buzz when first call enters queue

Yes, (No)

Attendant consoles used as Message Center

O-63

Attendant number for supervisor

AWU

Yes, (No), X

Enable Automatic Wake Up (X erases AWU information)

ATRC

Yes, (No)

Attendant Recall after failed AWU attempts

MATT

Note: Enter one or more attendant numbers (l-63). Enter ALL to enable this listed DN on all attendants.
Precede the attendant number with X to remove.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

11-12

Attendant consoles

LD12 -Add an attendant console.
REQ

ADD

Add a console

TYPE

ATT

Attendant console

1250

250 console

2 2 5 0

M2250 console

PWR

Power TN

TN

TN of attendant console

CDEN

Card density

SETN

Second TN (must be on same loop as primary TN of
attendant console)

ANUM

1-63

Attendant number (l-63)

DLEN
ssu

Digit display length (default 8)
Not prompted if TYPE = 1250 or 2250
O-4095

System Speed Call user list number

ICDA, (ICDD)

Allow (Deny) internal call detail

CNDA, (CNDD)

Allow (Deny) Call Party Name Display
Prompted if TYPE is 1250 or 2250

DNDA, (DNDD)

Allow (Deny) dialed name display

EBLF

BLFA, (BLFD)

Allow (Deny) enhanced busy lamp field
Prompted if TYPE is 1250 or 2250

AADN

xxx...x

Attendant Alternative Answering DN

KEY

xx aaa

Key number and mnemonic for feature assignments

CPND

(see Table 11-2)

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Incoming Call Indicators
Attendant consoles can be equipped with up to 20 Incoming Call Indication
(ICI) key/lamp pairs to identify the type of calls being presented and the call
status for each particular call type. The customer can specify which incoming
call types are to be assigned a separate ICI key. Possible call types include,
but are not limited to, the following:
Trunk calls (such as FX, WATS, and tie)
Listed Directory Number (LDN) calls
Dial zero calls
Fully restricted dial zero calls
Automatic Timed Reminder recalls
Attendant Interpositional calls
Attendant Intercept calls
Call Forward Busy calls
Call Forward No Answer calls
Three lamp states are associated with each Incoming Call Indicator key:
Dark
There are no calls of this type waiting.
Steadily lit One call of this type is waiting in queue.
Flashing
Two or more calls of this type are queued, or one call has
been waiting longer than 20 seconds.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

12-2

Attendant

Incoming

Call

Indicators

Operating parameters
The ICI feature applies to attendant consoles only.
The number of ICI keys to be assigned (10 or 20) is defined in the Customer
Data block. The default is ten.
No more than 20 ICI key/lamp pairs can be assigned to an attendant console.
The assignment of call types to ICI key/lamp pairs is flexible. All attendant
consoles in the customer group will have the same ICI key assignments.

Feature interaction
Attendant
The ICI feature is used with the Attendant Call Selection and Calls
Waiting features to recognize, answer and process incoming calls.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic

features and services

system software.

Attendant

Feature

Incoming

Call

Indicators

12-3

implementation

Assign ICI keys for attendant consoles.
CHG

Change
Customer Data Block

TYPE
CUST

o-99

Customer number
or 20 incoming Call Indicators

OPT
ICI

O-1 9

Station category number
x = category number through 7

O-l 9 CFB

Call Forward Busy

O-l 9 CFN

Call Forward No Answer

O-1 9 DFO

Dial 0 fully restricted

O-l 9 DLO

Dial 0 (attendant)

O-l 9

Inter-attendant

O-l 9 INT

Call

O-l 9 LCT

Line Lockout Intercept

O-l 9 LDO-3

Listed Directory Number (0 through 3)

O-l 9 MWC

Attendant message center

O-1 9 RLL

Recall

o-1 9 xxx

Route number

call

intercept

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

12-4

Attendant

Incoming

Xl 1 features and services

Call

Indicators

553-3001-305

Attendant Interpositional Transfer
Attendant Interpositional Transfer enables an attendant to call or transfer a
call to another attendant in a multiple-console group, even when the
destination attendant console is busy.
When transferring a call to another attendant whose console is idle, the
interpositional call is presented immediately. If the called attendant is busy,
the calling attendant hears a busy tone. The attendant then presses the Release
key and the transferred call will be the next call presented to the called
attendant console.

Operating parameters
In systems using software prior to X 11 release 8, a call cannot be transferred
if the called attendant console is in Position Busy, has activated Night
Service, or if network blocking occurs. In these cases, the calling attendant
receives a busy tone. With software release 8 and later, the call can be
transferred to an attendant console in the Position Busy state; however, the
called console does not receive any audible signal. A Call Waiting indication
appears on the console display.

Feature interaction
None.

Feature packaging
Attendant Interpositional Transfer is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

features and services

553-3001-305

13-2

Attendant Interpositional Transfer

Feature

implementation
an Interpositional Call Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key on attendant

consoles.
CHG

Change
Customer Data Block

TYPE
CUST

o-99

Customer number

ICI

O-l 9

Add an Interattendant Call ICI to all consoles

Feature operation
To transfer a call to a busy attendant (attendant console), follow these steps:
1

The attendant console you have dialed is busy. Press RLS. Your call will
be the next call presented to the busy attendant.

To transfer a call to an attendant console in Position Busy mode, follow these
steps:
1

Dial the Interpositional access code (0) and the desired attendant position
number. You receive a busy tone. Press RLS.

To answer a call transferred to an attendant console in Position Busy mode,
follow these steps:
1

The Call Waiting indicator lights; there are no audible tones. Press the
Position Busy key to take the console out of Position Busy mode.

2

The call is presented to the loop key and you receive an audible tone.
Press the Loop key.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Lockout
Attendant Lockout restricts the attendant from entering an established
connection completed through and held on the console. Attendant Lockout
does not come into effect until the call has been answered.
The attendant can reenter the call if the source party is a station telephone.
Attendant Lockout occurs only if the source party is an external number
(trunk) AND the destination party is a telephone.

Operating parameters
Busy Verify and Barge-In allow the attendant to override the Attendant
Lockout feature.

Feature interaction
Attendant Recall
If one of the stations activates Attendant Recall, the attendant is allowed
to reenter the connection.

Feature packaging
Attendant Lockout is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

1 features and services

Attendant Lockout

14-2

Feature implementation
Allow/deny Lockout for attendant consoles.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

(LOD)

Allow (Deny) attendant lockout

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:.
Status:
1 Release:

921231
Standard
All

Attendant Overflow Position
Attendant Overflow Position (AOP) allows certain types of calls to be
automatically rerouted to a specified idle Directory Number (AOP DN) when
calls waiting to be answered have exceeded a defined threshold, or an
attendant is in the Position Busy state, but the system is not in Night Service.
When a call that can be rerouted has been waiting longer than the
customer-defined Attendant Queue Timing Threshold (O-255 seconds), it is
rerouted to the AOP DN. Calls that can be rerouted to the AOP DN are trunk
calls, internal calls and Call Forward Busy, or Call Forward No Answer calls
directed to the attendant.
Attendant calls that cannot be rerouted are transfer calls, intercept calls,
parked call recalls, automatic or manual recalls, and attendant interposition
calls. These calls will not be answered until an attendant becomes available.
When the last attendant console is put into Position Busy or disabled, the
system does not go into Night Service if an AOP DN is available. In this case,
calls that can be rerouted will be forwarded to the AOP DN. Ineligible calls
remain unanswered until the system is put in Night Service or one of the
consoles deactivates Position Busy.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

15-2

Attendant

Position

Operating parameters
An AOP DN can be a single-appearance, multiple-appearance single-call, or
multiple-appearance multiple-call DN. If it is a Multiple Appearance DN, an
SL-1 or digital telephone can busy out the AOP DN for all appearances.
telephone can have an AOP DN. It does not have the ability to
A
busy out the AOP DN and continue to receive calls. If it is a requirement that
the
telephone have an AOP DN, the AOP DN must also appear on
an SL-1 or digital telephone to create a mix of telephones, which negates
privacy.
In order to properly identify and greet attendant overflow calls, it is best to
have the AOP DN appear on an SL-1 or digital telephone’s secondary DN.
SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones specified as Attendant Overflow
Positions can prevent calls from being rerouted by the Attendant Overflow
feature. To prevent attendant overflow calls, press the Attendant Overflow
Position Busy (AOP Busy) key/lamp pair on the telephone. Activating this
key will busy out all appearances of the AOP for either Single Call Ringing
or Multiple Call Ringing arrangements. Overflow calls will remain in the
attendant queue. Normal incoming calls to the AOP telephone will not be
affected.
The following requirements apply to the activation/deactivation of the AOP
Busy key:
A telephone with an AOP Busy key must have an appearance of the AOP
DN in order for the key to work.
Any AOP DN that has an AOP Busy key can activate or deactivate the
AOP feature. If the AOP Busy key is activated at one appearance of the
AOP DN, attendant calls are not rerouted to any appearance of the AOP
DN.
Activation or deactivation of the AOP Busy key does not affect any call
already rerouted to the AOP DN.
If all consoles are in Position Busy and the system is not in Night Service
when an AOP Busy key is activated, the system goes into Night Service.
If the system is in Night Service when the AOP Busy key is deactivated,
the system remains in Night Service.

features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Overflow Position

15-3

Activation or deactivation of the AOP Busy key does not affect the
Position Busy status of the attendant console. If all attendant consoles are
in Position Busy and the AOP Busy key is activated; the system goes into
Night Service.
The status of the AOP Busy key remains unchanged through a system
initialization but is deactivated if a system reload occurs.
The AOP feature package is not allowed on systems equipped with
Centralized Attendant Service-Main (CASM) or Centralized Attendant
Service-Remote (CASR) packages.
Each customer may have only one AOP DN. The AOP DN cannot be a
private line DN, a trunk DN, or a SPRE code.
There are no special ringing cadences or lamp operations to indicate that an
incoming call to the AOP DN is an Attendant Overflow Position call. It is
recommended that the AOP DN be used only for Attendant Overflow
Position calls enabling calls to be answered appropriately.
If the AOP DN is busy, calls remain in the attendant queue and are not
rerouted through the Attendant Overflow Position feature until the DN is free
to receive the next call.
Calls will not be rerouted to the Attendant Overflow Position DN when
Calls are on an ISDN or ESN network.
All appearances of the AOP DN are busy.
The AOP DN is in the Call Forward All Calls mode.
The call is an interposition call from an attendant.
The call has been redirected to the attendant by the Call Transfer or
Attendant Recall features.
The call is an intercept call to the attendants.
The system is in the Power Fail Transfer modes.
All appearances of the AOP DN have the Make Set Busy feature
activated.
Any appearance of the AOP DN has activated Attendant Overflow
Position Busy (AOP Busy).

1 features and services

553-3001-305

15-4

Attendant Overflow Position

A
telephone appearance of the AOP DN goes idle and a Call
Waiting call is queued for the telephone. The Call Waiting call rings the
telephone and AOP calls are not rerouted to the telephone.
The AOP DN goes idle with a Camp-On call queued for the telephone.
The Camp-On call rings the telephone and AOP calls are not rerouted to
the telephone.
The rerouting of the call violates the access restrictions or Class of
Service restrictions on the AOP DN telephone. For example, if the AOP
DN is FR2, an external Public Exchange network call will not be
rerouted to the AOP DN because it is prohibited by the telephone access
restrictions.
The system is in Night Service.

Feature interaction
Attendant
The calls waiting indicator on the attendant console is updated when a
call is rerouted to the AOP DN.
Attendant Overflow Position Busy
If the telephone with AOP DN has an Attendant Overflow Position Busy
(AOP Busy) key activated, calls will not overflow to any appearance of
the AOP DN.
Attendant Recall
An Attendant Overflow Position call answered at an AOP DN may be
recalled to the attendant using the Attendant Recall capability (ARC
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
With X11 release 16 and later externally marked trunks will overflow to
support ACD
an ACD DN. X11 release 15 and earlier does
defined as attendant overflow.
Call Forward All Calls
If the telephone assigned an Attendant Overflow DN has activated the
Call Forward All Calls feature, overflow calls are not rerouted to the
telephone is forwarded, AOP is cancelled.
telephone. If a

features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Overflow Position

15-5

Call Forward No Answer
A call rerouted through Attendant Overflow Position will Call Forward
to the forwarding DN only if it is the Prime DN or a single appearance
DN on that telephone.
Call Pickup
An Attendant Overflow Position Call presented to the AOP DN can be
picked up by any station belonging to the same Call Pickup Group.
Conference
An Attendant Overflow Position call answered on an AOP DN may be
with another DN.
Line Lockout
If a telephone with an AOP DN is in Line Lockout, it still receives AOP
calls.
Make Set Busy
If a telephone that is the only idle AOP DN has MSB activated, calls will
not overflow.
If the AOP DN is a multiple appearance DN, the MSB key should be
added to all telephones with an AOP DN.
If MSB is activated in a Multiple Call Ringing arrangement, the
telephone appears busy. All other appearances of the AOP DN will still
receive calls. This allows the user to leave the telephone and prevent
callers from
and receiving
with no answer.
If the AOP DN is a Multiple Appearance, Single Call arrangement and
MSB is activated, the AOP DN of that telephone will flash but the
telephone will not ring (the call can still be answered from that
appearance).
Multiple Appearance DN
A multiple appearance, multiple call AOP DN allows as many overflow
calls to be in progress as there are appearances of the DN. A multiple
appearance, single call AOP DN allows only one overflow call at a time.
Night Service
A call rerouted through the Attendant Overflow Position feature is not
redirected to the Night DN if the system is subsequently put into Night
Service. When all attendant consoles are in Position Busy the system will
not go into Night Service until the AOP Busy key is activated.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Overflow Position
Note: Deactivating the AOP Busy key after the system has been placed
in Night Service does not affect the Night Service feature.

Traffic Measurement
Traffic measurements are provided for the Attendant Overflow feature in
Traffic Report
A count of the number of attendant calls
rerouted through the feature is printed.
Automatic Timed Recall
After an attendant call has been rerouted using the AOP feature, there is
no automatic timed recall to the attendant or any other DN.
Ring Again
If Ring Again is activated against the AOP DN, notification is given to
the originator when the telephone becomes idle. An AOP call, however,
takes precedence over Ring Again notification on the AOP DN when the
AOP DN becomes free.

Feature packaging
Attendant Overflow Position (AOP), package 56, has no feature package
dependencies. Attendant Overflow Position and Centralized Attendant
Service are, however, mutually exclusive.

Feature

implementation
an Attendant Overflow Position DN and queue threshold timing.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

O-(30)-255

Attendant queue timing threshold (AQTT)

xxx...x

DN where calls are to be overflowed when they have been
in queue the time specified for AQTT

AODN

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant

Over-flow

Position

15-7

-Add/change an AOP DN and AOP Busy key.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2317,
TN

lscu

KEY

Terminal Number
Attendant Overflow Position DN
xx = key number
= DN

KEY

xx OVB

Attendant Overflow Position Busy key

Add/change an Attendant Overflow Position DN on a
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

DN

telephone.

Attendant Overflow Position DN

features and services

553-3001-305

15-8

Attendant Overflow Position

Feature operation
Attendant Overflow Position calls will be rerouted to all appearances of the
AOP DN as long as the following conditions are met:
The system is not in Night Service.
The Attendant Overflow Position Busy key (any AOP DN appearance)
is not activated.
At least one appearance of the AOP DN is on a telephone that does not
have Make Set Busy activated.
To prevent attendant overflow calls from being rerouted to the AOP DN, do
any of the following:
Activate the Attendant Overflow Position Busy key.
Activate the Make Set Busy key on all telephones with an appearance of
the AOP DN.
Place the system in Night Service.
To prevent attendant overflow calls from being rerouted to a single telephone
with an appearance of the AOP DN (but not others):
Activate Make Set Busy, OR
Activate Call Forward All Calls

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telephone)

16-1

Attendant Position Busy
If multiple consoles are defined for a customer, an attendant can remove a
console from service by pressing the Position Busy key. Incoming calls are
then directed to other consoles in the customer group.

Operating parameters
Position Busy applies to attendant consoles only.

Feature interaction
Night Service
When the last console operator activates the Position Busy key or the
Night key, Night Service is put into effect. Incoming calls receive the
customer-specified night treatment.
Attendant Administration
If a console in the Attendant Administration mode is idle for more than
20 minutes, it automatically reverts to Position Busy. If the Meridian
SL-1 system is initialized or reloaded while the console is in Attendant
Administration mode, Attendant Administration is aborted and the
console is placed in Position Busy.
Supervisory Console
Activation of the Position Busy key on a Supervisory console puts the
console in the supervisory mode.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Feature

implementation
Not applicable.

features and services

16-2

Attendant Position Busy

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

17-l

Attendant Recall
Attendant Recall allows a user to call the attendant directly during an
established call by pressing a single key. A three-way connection is
established among the user, the attendant, and the third party.
To activate this feature, a separate Attendant Recall key/lamp pair must be
equipped on SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephones. A
must be
programmed on the M3000 Touchphone for this feature.
On single-line telephones, a user can recall the attendant during an
established call by flashing the switchhook. Attendant Recall is automatic if
a Transfer Denied class of service (XFD) is specified for the telephone. If a
Transfer Allowed class of service (XFA) is specified, the user hears a special
dial tone following the switchhook flash, and then dials zero (0) to recall the
attendant. After a switchhook flash has been used to recall the attendant, it is
not possible to return to a two-party connection before the attendant answers.

Operating parameters
In order for the Overflow Position Busy (OVB) key to work, the telephone
must have an AOP DN configured.

Feature interaction
Attendant
After the attendant and the two parties have been connected, the
attendant can use the Attendant Splitting feature to communicate
separately with either party.

Feature packaging
Attendant Recall is included in basic

1 system software.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

17-2

Attendant Recall

Feature
LD15

implementation

Add/change a Recall Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key on attendant consoles.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ICI

xx RLL

Add a Recall ICI to all consoles

Implement Attendant Recall for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CLS

XFA, (XFD)

Allow (Deny) call transfer which allows automatic Attendant
Recall

an Attendant Recall key for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx ARC

Add an Attendant Recall key (M3000 must use key 33)
xx = key number

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Recall

17-3

Feature operation
To c o n t a c t an attendant during a call (SL-1 or digital telephone), follow these
steps:
1

Press Att Recall.

2

Stay on the line until the attendant answers.

3

When you hang up, the other party remains connected to the attendant.

To contact an attendant during a call
Allowed class of service), follow these steps:

telephone with Transfer

1

Flash the switchhook (you hear a special dial tone).

2

Dial zero (0).

3

When you hang up, the other party remains connected to the attendant.

To contact an attendant during a call
Denied class of service), follow these steps:

telephone with Transfer

1

Flash the switchhook (the attendant is automatically dialed).

2

When you hang up, the other party remains connected to the attendant.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

17-4

Attendant Recall

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

92 1231
Standard
All
18-1

Attendant Secrecy
Attendant Secrecy automatically prevents a voice connection between the
source and destination parties of a call being extended by an attendant, until
the attendant connects the two parties. This allows the attendant to converse
privately with the destination party before completing the connection.
Attendant Secrecy is allowed or denied on a customer basis.

Operating parameters
Attendant Secrecy is available on attendant consoles only.
Attendant Secrecy operates on trunk calls only.

Feature interaction
Attendant Recall
Attendant Secrecy does not apply on an attendant recall or when the
attendant re-enters a call held on a Loop key. The Exclude Source and
Destination keys are used in these cases.

Feature packaging
Attendant Secrecy is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

18-2

Attendant Secrecy

Feature

implementation

Allow/deny Attendant Secrecy for a customer.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

SYA, (SYD)

Allow (Deny) Attendant Secrecy

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Splitting
Attendant Splitting allows the attendant to talk privately to the source or
destination side of an existing connection on the console. The Exclude Source
(EXCL SRC) key allows the attendant to speak privately with the destination
(called) party. The Exclude Destination (EXCL DEST) key allows the
attendant to speak privately with the source (calling) party.

Operating parameters
This feature is active only while the attendant is involved in the call.
Attendant Splitting applies to attendant consoles only.

Feature interaction
None.

Feature packaging
Attendant Splitting is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Feature

implementation
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

19-2

Attendant Splitting

Feature operation
To speak privately to the source party:
1

Press EXCL DEST.

2

To connect yourself, the caller, and the called party, press the lpk key.

3

To end your connection in the call, press RLS.

To speak privately to the destination party:
1

Press EXCL SCR

2

To connect yourself, the caller, and the called party, press the

3

To end your connection in the call, press RLS.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

I p k key.

Attendant Supervisory Console
The Supervisory Console feature allows one attendant console in a customer
group to function in a supervisory capacity when put into the Position Busy
state. The elements of the Supervisory Console feature allow any of the
following functions.

Attendant Status Display
The supervisor, by monitoring the attendant status display, can determine
how many attendant positions are in service and able to receive calls.
QCW-type consoles If 1 to 16 attendants are assigned within a customer
or
group, the supervisory console can be equipped with either a
or
add-on module mounted on the
20-key add-on module. The
right side of the supervisory console provides a visual indication to the
supervisor of which attendant consoles are in service. One key/lamp pair on
the supervisory console add-on module is assigned for each attendant in the
customer group including the supervisory attendant. When the supervisory
console is operating as a normal attendant the add-on module key functions
are changed to Trunk Group Busy, if ICI 2 is defined in customer data.
Ml250 console If 1 to 16 attendants are assigned within a customer group,
the supervisory console can monitor their status using Trunk Group Busy
keys. No add-on module is necessary.
console If 1 to 20 attendants are assigned within a customer group,
the supervisory console can monitor their status using Trunk Group Busy
keys. No add-on module is necessary.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

20-2

Attendant Supervisory Console

When an indicator on the module associated with a particular attendant is on,
the attendant is available to service calls. If the indicator is off, the attendant
position is in a Position Busy state. Attendant status indicators are only
operable when the supervisory console is in a supervisory mode (Position
Busy key operated). When the supervisory attendant is in Position Busy, the
LED associated with the supervisor fast flashes at 120 ipm.

Status using Lamp Field Array
QCW console A supervisory console can have up to 49 status indicators. The
QMT3 Lamp Field Array (LFA) is used for this function because the Trunk
Group Busy keys are limited to 16. The supervisory attendant may use the 16
TGB keys or the LFA, depending on the number of attendants or the
preference of the customer.
The LFA associated with the supervisory console displays the attendant status
on lamps 101 to 149. The lamp is dark when the attendant is in Position Busy
and lit when the attendant is available. A steadily lit lamp in fields 51 to 81
identifies the active supervisory console. The letter S is displayed using lamps
0 to 42 to indicate that this LFA is in the supervisory mode. The LFA displays
attendant status whether the console is in Supervisory mode or Attendant
mode.
Ml250 and M2250 consoles A supervisory console can have up to 49 status
indicators when used in the Standard Busy Lamp Field mode. When using
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field mode, a supervisory console can display the
status of all attendant consoles in the customer group. Figure 20-l shows an
example of Supervisory monitoring in Enhanced Busy Lamp Field mode on
the Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Supervisory Console

20-3

Figure
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field Supervisory mode

SUPERVISORY MODE
STATUS

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

7m

n

n

n

gm

n

n

6m

n

n

n

n

n
n

mm

n
n

n

n

n
n

n

n

n

n

n
n

n
n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n
n

n

n
n

n

= busy or unavailable console

n
n

n

n

n

553-5107

active or available console

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

20-4

Attendant Supervisory Console

Visual indication of calls in queue
An attendant call queue holds incoming calls to the SL-1 system that cannot
be immediately answered by attendants. The supervisory console can monitor
the call queue for specific types of incoming calls.
A maximum of 20 (ICI) key/lamp pairs may be assigned on an attendant
console. Each ICI is assigned to handle a specific type of call (such as station,
tie, or dial 0) to the attendant. When a console is in the supervisory mode, the
state of the lamp associated with each ICI provides a visual indication of the
number of calls in the attendant queue for each ICI type. Each supervisory
console ICI lamp state (dark, flash at 60 ipm, fast flash at 120 ipm, steadily
ON) provides the supervisor with a visual indication of the number of calls in
the queue for each call type. The ranges (calls in queue) are identified by one
of three customer-specified thresholds that are set in service change
programs.

Attendant Service Observation
This feature allows the supervisory attendant to monitor (listen only) calls in
progress on other attendant loops without being heard. Service Observation
requires the assignment of one key/lamp pair on the supervisory console
flexible key strip. The key is assigned as Busy Verify through service-change
programs. When the console is in Supervisory mode, the key function is
service observation; when the console is operating as a normal attendant the
key function is Busy Verify.
The observed attendant and the connected party or parties are not aware that
their conversation is being monitored. The supervisor can release the
connection by pressing the Release key. When the attendant is in a Service
Observe mode, only the Release key is allowed as a valid input.

Xl 1 features and services

Attendant Supervisory Console

20-5

Supervisory assistance
An attendant can consult with, or transfer calls to, the supervisor or another
attendant using the Interposition call feature. Interposition calls to the
supervisor are allowed regardless of the mode of operation (Supervisory or
Attendant). The supervisor can use the Interposition call feature to contact
any attendant, except those in Position Busy. When the supervisor is
conferring with an attendant, subsequent calls to the supervisor receive a busy
indication.
If an attendant calls the supervisor who at the time is not in supervisory mode
and is handling a call, the supervisory attendant interposition ICI lamp flashes
at 60 ipm. As soon as the supervisor is idle, the calling attendant is connected
to an idle loop on the supervisory console.
Interposition calls can be made from any attendant in the customer group to
any other attendant within the customer group. Only one interposition call can
be terminated on a console at a given time.

Supervisor serving as attendant
When the supervisor decides to act as an attendant, the supervisory console is
removed from Position Busy. The system presents calls to the supervisory
console as if it were a normal attendant console. The supervisory console
must be idle to change states from attendant to supervisor or supervisor to
attendant.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

20-6

Attendant Supervisory Console

Operating parameters
The supervisory console and all attendant consoles (except M2250 attendant
consoles) in the customer group must be assigned to QPC297 Attendant
Console Monitor circuit packs. Their prime TN must be assigned to unit 0 and
the secondary TN must be assigned to unit 1. Units 2 and 3 can be used for
power, otherwise they must be left unassigned.
Note: M2250 digital attendant consoles must be minimum vintage of
AD and have the Attendant Supervisory Module (ASM) installed to
allow supervision.
The supervisory console must be equipped with one of the following if it is a
QCW-type console:
type 10 key/lamp expansion module (can display status of
attendants l-15)
QMT2 type 20 key/lamp expansion module (can display status of
attendants l-15)
QMT3 type Lamp Field Array module (can display status of attendants
149)
The supervisory console must have a Digit Display (DDS).
If the supervisory console is a QCW-type equipped with a QMT3 Lamp Field
Array, the status of attendants 50 to 63 cannot be displayed because of the
physical limitations of the Standard Busy Lamp Field. An Ml250 or M2250
console equipped with a Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module
can display the status of all attendant consoles (up to the
maximum 63) by using the Enhanced Busy Lamp Field mode. The
must be minimum vintage AD to provide this capability.
One supervisory console can be assigned per customer. Only one attendant
console (1 to 63) can be assigned as a supervisory console.
The customer group must be equipped with more than one attendant.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Supervisory Console

20-7

When using the Attendant Supervisory Module (ASM), the console TN must
be configured on unit
16, and so on. The secondary TN (SETN) unit
17, and so on). The ASM TN is then
must succeed the Primary TN
configured with TYPE = PWR. The PWR TN must succeed the SETN
10, 18, and so on).

Feature interaction
Add-on modules
Add-on modules (key/lamp strips and lamp field arrays used to display
attendant status) can be used for other purposes defined by the customer
when the console is in Normal mode; however if the Busy Lamp Field is
assigned to display attendant status, then it cannot be used for other
functions during any mode of the attendant console.
Multi-Tenant Service
The supervisory capabilities extend to all attendant consoles defined
within the customer group, regardless of tenant partitioning. The
attendant console serving as supervisor should be a member of every Call
Presentation Group so that it can serve all Tenant groups when operating
in the Normal mode.
Departmental Listed Directory Number (DLDN)
The supervisory capabilities extend to all attendant consoles defined
within the customer group. The attendant console serving as supervisor
should be a member of every DLDN groups so that it can serve all groups
when operating in the Normal mode.
Attendant Administration
Attendant Administration mode can be entered directly from the
supervisory console from Supervisory or Normal mode by pressing the
program (PRG) key. The Supervisory mode does not need to be
terminated first.

Feature packaging
Supervisory Console (SUPV), package 93, has no feature package
dependencies.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

20-8

Attendant Supervisory Console

Feature
LD15
for an
mode.

implementation

Enable/disable feature for a QCW console with Lamp Field Array or Add-on Module, or
console with a Console Graphics Module in the Standard Busy Lamp Field

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

o-99

Customer number

ITG, (XTG)

include/exclude Trunk
Requires OPT

OPT

(XLF)

Group Busy Indication
for QCW consoles

include/exclude Lamp Field Array Module

lscu

Secondary TN of supervisory console (required when Lamp
Field Array is equipped)

l-63

Attendant number for supervisory console

0

No supervisory console

Yes, (No)

Supervisory lamp field array is or is not to be used to
monitor other attendant consoles

l-255

Visual indication threshold 1 (number of calls in queue
but < ITH2)

ITH2

2-255

Visual indication threshold 2 (number of calls in queue
but

ITH3

3-255

Visual indication threshold 3 (number of calls in queue
ITH3)

LFTN

SBLF

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Supervisory Console

Enable/disable feature for an
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field mode.
REQ

CHG

console with a Console Graphics Module in the

Change
Customer Data Block

TYPE
o-99

Customer number

IBL, (XBL)

Include/exclude Busy Lamp Field or Console Graphics
Module

l-63

Attendant number for supervisory console

0

No supervisory console

l-255

Visual indication threshold 1 (number of calls in queue
but < ITH2)

ITH2

2-255

Visual indication threshold 2 (number of calls in queue
ITH2 but ITH3)

ITH3

3-255

Visual indication threshold 3 (number of calls in queue a
ITH3)

OPT

20-9

LD12 -Enable/disable supervisory console Silent Observe.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

ATT,

Console type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

0 BVR

Add Busy Verify key (key 0) for silent observation

1 features and services

553-3001-305

20-10

Attendant Supervisory Console

LD12
Enable/disable supervisory console for
Field and Silent Observe.
CHG

REQ
TYPE

consoles with Enhanced Busy Lamp

Change
Console type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

EBLF

BLFA (BLFD)

Allow (Deny) Enhanced Busy Lamp Field

KEY

0 BVR

Add Busy Verify key (key 0) for silent observation

LD15

Enable/disable an

console using Trunk Group Busy keys as status keys.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

O-99

Customer number

OPT

ITG, (XTG)

Include/exclude Trunk Group Busy Indication.

1-63

Attendant number for supervisory console

0

No supervisory console

No

Supervisory lamp field array is not to be used to monitor
other attendant consoles

l-255

Visual indication threshold 1 (number of calls in queue
but

ITH2

2-255

Visual indication threshold 2 (number of calls in queue
ITH2 but ITH3)

ITH3

3-255

Visual indication threshold 3 (number of calls in queue
ITH3)

SBLF

features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Supervisory Console

1

Feature operation
Enable/disable Supervisory mode
To put your console in Supervisory mode, follow these steps:

q

1

Press
when your console is idle (all lpk indicators are off). Your
console is now in position busy mode, preventing calls from ringing at
your console.

2

To cancel supervisory mode, press

q

again.

Monitor other attendants
In supervisory mode, you can monitor selected attendant calls without being
detected by either the attendant or the caller. To monitor an attendant, follow
these steps:
1

Once in Position Busy mode, select an idle loop key.

2

Press

3

Dial the access code, then the attendant number:

4

ver.

.

If the called attendant is talking to a caller, you hear the conversation
but you cannot be heard.

.

If the called console is idle, the S and D indicators go on.

.

If the called console is in Position Busy mode, you hear a fast busy
tone, the S and D indicators flash quickly, and the
VER
indicator goes off.

Press RLS to end the procedure.

Call an attendant
To call an attendant in your group, follow these steps:
1

Once in Position Busy mode, select an idle Ipk key.

2

Dial the attendant access code.

3

Dial the attendant code.
You hear ringing. The S indicator flashes slowly.

4

Press RLS to end the call.
The S indicator goes on steadily, and the RLS indicator goes on.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

20-12

Attendant Supervisory Console

Transfer a call to an attendant
You can transfer a call to an attendant in your group, even if the attendant’s
console is in Position Busy mode. To transfer a call, follow these steps:
1

Dial the attendant access code; then the attendant code.
The EXCL SRC indicator goes on; the caller is automatically placed on
hold. The D indicator flashes slowly, the lpk and S indicators are on.
.

If you dial an incorrect attendant code or if the called console is in
night service mode, the transfer cannot be completed. You hear a
fast busy tone and the D indicator remains off. Press RLS.

.

If the called console is busy, you hear a busy tone and the D indicator
continues to flash slowly. Press RLS and your call is placed in the
attendant queue.

2

Press the
key when the attendant answers.
The EXCL SRC indicator goes off and the D indicator lights steadily.
You, the caller, and the attendant are connected.

3

Press

to end your connection in the call.

Assist an attendant
Even when your console is in Supervisory mode, an attendant can call you for
assistance or transfer a call to you by following these steps:
1

You receive a call from an attendant while you are in Supervisory mode.
You hear a tone. The S indicator flashes and the INTER POS. C.
indicator goes on.

2

Press the lpk key next to the flashing S indicator.
The tone stops; the lpk and S indicators light steadily.
You are connected to the call.
Note: If it is a transferred call, the Call Waiting indicator lights. You
must exit Position Busy mode to answer the call.

features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication
The attendant can control user access to a trunk route by pressing the
appropriate Trunk Group Busy key. Station users with a Trunk Group Access
Restriction (TGAR) from 0 to 7 accessing the route that has been busied out
will be automatically intercepted to the attendant. Station users with a TGAR
of 8 to 3 1 will not be affected and can dial out in the normal manner.
The QCW attendant console has up to 10 Trunk Group Busy key/lamp pairs
assigned. If an add-on module is equipped on the console, up to 16 Trunk
Group Busy key/lamp pairs can be assigned.
The Shift key allows the M 1250 attendant console to have 16 Trunk Group
Busy keys. The M2250 attendant console can have up to 20 Trunk Group
Busy keys.
Trunk Group Busy Indication is allowed or denied on a customer basis. If
allowed, the lamps associated with the Trunk Group Busy keys will provide
the following visual indication of the status of the trunks within the route:
Off Some of trunks in the route are idle.
of the trunks in the route are busy.
Steadily

attendant has taken control of the route.

Trunk Routes 0 to 9 are automatically assigned to keys 0 to 9 on the console.
If an add-on module is equipped on a QCW type console and the IC2 option
specified, Trunk Group Busy key/lamp pairs will be automatically assigned
to the add-on module. Trunk Routes 0 to 15 are assigned to keys 0 to 7 and
10 to 17.

features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication

21-2

On the M1250, Trunk Routes 0 to 15 are assigned 0 to 7 and 10 to 17 when
the Shift key is activated. On the M2250, Trunk Routes are assigned to keys
0 to 9 and 10 to 19 when the Shift key is activated.

Operating parameters
There are no feature requirements.

Feature interaction
None.

Feature packaging
Attendant Trunk Route Busy Indication is included in basic Xl 1 system
software.

Feature

implementation

Allow Trunk Group Busy keys.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number
Allow Trunk Group Busy keys

OPT

=
IC2

16 for Ml 250, or 20 for

Include/exclude Trunk Group Busy Indicator keys (default is
XTG)

OPT

Feature operation
To restrict access to a trunk route (make it busy to users), follow these steps:
Press the Trunk Group Busy key associated with the trunk.
The indicator goes on steady.
To allow access to the trunk route, follow these steps:
Press the Trunk Group Busy key associated with the trunk.
The indicator goes off.

features and services

Issued:
Status:
Release:

92 1231
Standard
14
22-1

Audible Reminder of Held Calls
Occasionally, a user may forget that a call has been placed on hold. Audible
Reminder of Held Calls (ARHC) allows an audible tone to operate as a
telephones and a
reminder of a held call. It provides for a ring on
tone on SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephones. The cadence and the duration
between cadences are programmed per customer. This ability allows the user
to differentiate between the cadence for Audible Reminder of Held Call
(ARHC) and the cadences of other existing features.
The station user will hear a ring or tone, which is repeated every 2 to 120
seconds depending on how this feature is programmed, as a reminder that a
call is being held. A single-line telephone user must hang up after putting a
call on Permanent Hold in order to start the timer.

Operating parameters
For
telephones, Audible Reminder of Held Calls (ARHC) applies
only to permanent hold. When using ARHC on an SL- 1 or Meridian digital
telephone, the station user must not be originating, receiving, or active on
another call.
Audible Reminder of Held Calls is supported on Multiple Appearance
however, only the appearance initiating Hold will receive the reminder ring.
This feature does not operate on attendant consoles.

Feature interaction
Permanent Hold
Permanent Hold must be enabled in LD 10 for the single-line telephone;
however, the ARHC timer takes precedence over the Permanent Hold
timer.

features and services

22-2

Audible Reminder of Held Calls

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature

implementation
duration between reminder cadences for Audible Reminder of Held Calls.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

DBRC

Duration between reminder cadences for Audible Reminder of
Held Call

20

An odd numbered entry is rounded up to the next even number.

Allow/deny Audible Reminder of Held Call for
REC!

telephones.

Change

CHG

Telephone type

TYPE
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CLS

XFA, (XFD)

Allow (Deny) call transfer.

ARHA, (ARHD)

Allow (Deny) Audible Reminder of Held Call

PHD

Permanent Hold allowed

FTR

Audible Reminder of Held Call for SL-1 or digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

ARHA, (ARHD)

Allow (Deny) Audible Reminder of Held Call

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:.
Status:
Xl 1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All

23-1

allows users to dial a number by pressing a single key. SL- 1
telephones, Meridian digital telephones, and attendant consoles can be
assigned an
key/lamp pair.
key can be programmed or changed
The number stored against the
at any time. The maximum number of digits the user is allowed to program
can be 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, or 23 digits. Depending on the length allowed, the
number can be another DN or an access code plus further digits. The
can be used when a pause is required. When the
key is
asterisk
pressed, the stored number is processed as if it had been dialed manually.
Speed
with Authorization Code, X11 release 13 and later
This enhancement allows an authorization code to be included in a Speed Call
entry or an
key. Entries can contain any one of the following
combinations:
SPRE code + digit 6 + authorization code
SPRE code + digit 6 + authorization code + #
SPRE code + digit 6 + authorization code + # + ESN access code and
dialed number

1 features and services

553-3001-305

23-2

Operating parameters
must be assigned to a key/lamp pair so it is not available on
50012500 type telephones.
An attendant can enter an Authorization Code for other callers provided that
the system is equipped with the Network Authorization Code (NAUT)
package.
On attendant consoles, pressing the
key is not allowed.

key, then pressing a Speed Call

Authorization Code Conditionally Last is not supported by the
feature.
An octothorpe (#) is required as a delimiter after the Authorization Code if an
ESN access code and dialed number is stored as part of the
key. If
the octothorpe is not entered, the user receives fast busy tone. The octothorpe
is not stored in the CDR record.
feature allows a maximum of 23 digits including the SPRE
The
the ESN access
code, the digit 6, the Authorization Code, the delimiter
code, and the dialed number.
If the system initializes before the Authorization Code is recorded by CDR,
the record will be lost.
An SL-1 digit display telephone can display up to 16 digits. Additional digits
cause the digits to scroll off the display.
Because it has a Directory, the M3000 Touchphone does not support the
feature.
On digit display telephones, Authorization Codes cannot be blocked from
being displayed.
The Authorization Code is not validated during the storing process. An
invalid authorization code is detected when the
key is activated.
NARS and BARS does not support the asterisk
number.
an

1 features and services

553-3001-305

as a pause when dialing

23-3

Feature interaction
Last Number Redial
will become the Last Number Redial
A number dialed using
number on all telephones except the M2317 and M3000.

Fsature packaging
Extended PBX Features (OPTF), package 1, includes
feature package dependencies.
To implement
required:

and has no

with Authorization Code, the following packages are

Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24, OR
Basic Authorization Code (BAUT), package 25, OR
package 63
Network Authorization Code
Extended PBX Features (OPTF), package 1, OR
System Speed Call (SSC), package 34, OR
Network Speed Call (NSC), package 39

Feature

implementation

-Assign

key for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx ADL yy

xx = assigned key number
yy = the length of the
23 digits; default is 16)

number (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, or

= the digits to be dialed automatically (optional)

1 features and services

553-3001-305

23-4

LD12
REQ

Assign

key for Ml250 and M2250 attendant consoles
Change

CHG

TYPE

Console type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx

xx = assigned key number
= the digits to be dialed automatically (optional)

Feature operation
To program autodial, follow these steps:
1

While the handset is on hook, press the
The associated lamp flashes.

2

Dial the desired number and press the
The lamp goes dark.

key.
key again.

To use autodial, follow these steps:
1

Lift the handset off hook, or press the Handsfree key if allowed.

2

Press the
key.
The call is dialed.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All
24-1

Automatic Answerback
Automatic Answerback (AAB), when assigned to an SL- 1 or Meridian digital
telephone, allows any incoming call to a single appearance Prime Directory
Number (PDN) to be answered automatically. An incoming call will ring one
time, then the Meridian 1 system will turn on Handsfree and establish a
speech path. When either party hangs up, the call is automatically
disconnected.
Automatic Answerback can be permanently assigned either as a Class of
Service, or with an Automatic Answerback key/lamp pair assigned to allow
activation/deactivation of the feature. If privacy is desired during a call,
handset operation is allowed.

Operating parameters
This feature is available on SL-1, Ml 109,
M3000 telephones.

M2317, M2616, and

SL- 1 telephones must be equipped with QUS Logic Handsfree unit
connected by the QKK3 Handsfree interface kit. Ml 109 telephones only
Handsfree interface kit.
require a
Incoming ground start trunks must provide answer supervision. If not, the call
is connected to the attendant who provides the necessary supervision.
The Prime DN (PDN) must be a single appearance DN.
other than the PDN, or calls presented to the PDN
Calls presented to
when active on another DN, will not receive Automatic Answerback
treatment.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

24-2

Automatic Answerback

Feature interaction
Message Center
If a telephone is in the Automatic Answerback mode, incoming calls are
not routed to the Message Center.
Automatic Answerback can be provided as a Class of Service or on a
key/lamp pair. You cannot assign both in service change.

Feature packaging
Automatic Answerback (AAB), package 47, has no feature package
dependencies.

Feature

implementation

-Assign Automatic Answerback as a Class of Service to SL-1, M2112, M2317, M2616, or
M3000 telephone.

TYPE

CHG

Change

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa
TN

lscu

Terminal Number
Allow (Deny) Automatic Answerback for all calls. AAA
cannot be entered if the AAK key is already programmed.

CLS

Allow (Deny) Handsfree (see Note)

HFA (HFD)
Note: HFA is allowed for M2216 only.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic Answerback 24-Z

-Assign Automatic Answerback key to SL-1, M2112, M2317, M2616, or M3000
telephone.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

HFA, (HFD)

Allow (Deny) Handsfree (Note 1)
Allow (Deny) Automatic Answerback
Must disable to add the AAK key

KEY

Add Automatic Answerback key (Note 2)

xx AAK

xx = key number
Note

HFA is allowed for M2216 only.

Note 2: M2216 with AAA cannot use key 5 as a feature key. Key 5 is reserved for handsfree. M3000 must
use key 35.

Feature operation
To activate Automatic Answerback, follow this step:
Press Auto Answer.
Incoming calls to your PDN will ring once, then be answered with
Handsfree turned on.
To deactivate Automatic Answerback, follow this step:
Press Auto Answer.
Incoming calls to your PDN will not be answered automatically.
Note: If Automatic Answerback is assigned as a Class of Service instead
of a key on your telephone, you cannot deactivate it.

Xl features and services

24-4

Automatic Answerback

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic Call Distribution
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) is an optional feature. The ACD feature
is used when a large volume of incoming calls are answered by a group of
ACD assigned telephones. Incoming calls are served on a first-in, first-out
basis and are distributed among the available telephones so that the agent
position that has been idle the longest is given the first call. This guarantees
that incoming calls are distributed equally to all agents.
ACD is available in several packages:
ACD Basic Features (ACD-A)
ACD Advanced Features (ACD-B)
ACD Management Reports (ACD-C 1)
ACD Load Management (ACD-C2)
ACD-MAX
Meridian MAX
Consult the following documents for complete information regarding the
various ACD packages.

features and services

553-3001-305

25-2

Automatic

Call

Distribution

Automatic Call Distribution Features
In-Calls key
Directory Number key
Not Ready key
Release key
Make Set Busy key
Night Mode
Call Source Identification
Calls Waiting Indication
Display Agents key
Display Waiting Calls key
Incoming Trunk restrictions
Recorded Announcement
Night Treatment
Night Call Forward (NCFW)
Priority trunks
Music on Hold
ACD-CDR Connection Record
In-Band
Alternate Call Answer
Automatic Overflow
Call Interflow
Time Overflow (TOF) queuing
Enhanced Overflow
Supervisor control of queue size
Call Forcing
Secondary DN Call Blocking (SDNB)
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
Routing by DNIS number
Name Display for DNIS
DNIS across call modifications
DNIS on CDR
Enhanced ACD Routing
Customer Controlled Routing (CCR)
Hold in queue for Interactive Voice Response
Music On Delay
Priority Agents
Display Waiting Calls (DWC)
Agent Observe
Supervisor and agent communication

features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic

Call

Distribution

Supervisor Control of Night Service (NSVC)
Agent and Supervisor communication
Calls waiting indication
Emergency key
Automatic Call Distribution ACD management commands and reports
(553-2671-112)
CCR reporting information
Agent ID option
ACD set log in
Data Agent log in
ACD telephone log out
Data Agent log out
Agents using DN keys
Report Control
Management report terminals
ACD supervisor terminal
ACD senior supervisor terminal
Periodic management reports
Warning messages
Report data
Calls per ACD DN
Calls delayed per ACD DN
Total trunk usage per ACD DN
Report length
Short Reports
Enhanced daily totals
Ongoing Status Display
Agent ID reporting
System totals
Daily totals
Accessing the command mode
Set Controlled mode (CNTL)
Set Default ACD DN (DFDN)
Query current options (POPT)
Query current parameters (PPAR)
Select Route and Trunk Assignment (SRTA)
Select Trunk Priority Assignment (SPRI)
Select Agent Position Assignment

1 features and services

25-3

25-4

Automatic

Call

Distribution

Select Agent to Supervisor Assignment (SATS)
First RAN Route Assignment (FRRT)
Second RAN Route Assignment (SRRT)
Night RAN Route Assignment (NRRT)
Automatic Overflow Target DN
Automatic Overflow thresholds (TLDA, TLDB, TLDC)
Time Overflow threshold (TLDD)
Setting the Interflow DN (IFDN)
Telephone Service Factor time (TSF)
Daily system totals
Set Agent Priority (SAGP)
List Agent Position Assignment
List Agent Priority (LAGP)
Enable Call Force
Print CDN Parameters and Options (PCPO)
Set the Call Ceiling (CEIL)
Customers with PC-based ACD Package D systems (ACD-MAX or Meridian
MAX) should also consult the documents listed below:
Meridian MAX 3.3-AM Installation (553-4001-101)
Meridian MAX Operation
Meridian

Messages (553-4001-800)

Network ACD, introduced in X11 release 15, uses ISDN to allow ACD
services over the customer’s network for automatic least cost call routing in
an ACD environment. In addition to the above listed documents, refer to the
following:
description and operation (553-3671-120)

Operating parameters
Refer to the documents listed for your system.

Feature interaction
Refer to the documents listed for your system.

Feature packaging
Refer to the documents listed for your system.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic

Call

Distribution

Feature implementation
Refer to the documents listed for your system.

Feature operation
Refer to the documents listed for your system.

Xl 1 features and services

25-5

25-6

Automatic

Call

1 features and services

Distribution

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
Release:

92 1231
Standard
4
26-1

Automatic Line Selection
Automatic Line Selection allows manual or automatic selection of incoming
and outgoing lines for a given SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephone on a class
of service basis. When a user lifts the handset, the telephone automatically
selects a preferred line according to its priority. The line preferences are as
follows, listed in order of selection priority:
Manual Line Selection
The user manually selects the DN to be used before going off hook. Dial
tone is returned if the line is idle. If the line is ringing, the call is answered
and connected to the speaker of the telephone or Handsfree unit.
Incoming Ringing Line Selection
With Incoming Ringing Line Selection enabled, when the user goes off
hook, the telephone automatically scans the DN keys (without the user
first manually selecting a DN key). If a line on the telephone is ringing,
it is selected and the call answered.
Incoming Non-Ringing Line Selection
With Incoming Non-Ringing Line Selection enabled, when the user goes
off hook, the telephone scans the DN lines and answers any unanswered
incoming calls that appear but do not ring at that telephone.
Outgoing Line Selection
With Outgoing Line Selection enabled, when the user goes off hook, the
telephone scans the DN keys for an idle line. If a line is idle, it is selected
and a dial tone is returned.
Prime Line Selection
When the handset is lifted, the system processes any manual, incoming,
or outgoing line selections. If no line is selected by one of these modes,
a designated Prime Line (the DN on key 0) is selected.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

26-2

Automatic Line Selection

Operating parameters
This feature is available on SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones only.
The user determines which line is in use by observing lamp state changes.

interaction
Voice Call
This feature is not selected by automatic Outgoing Line Selection. It is
selected for Incoming Ringing and Non-Ringing Line Selection.
Group Call
This feature is not selected for automatic Outgoing Line Selection or
Non-Ringing Line Selection. It is selected for Incoming Ringing Line
Selection.
Audible Message Waiting
The Audible Message Waiting signal is given if there is a message
waiting on whatever line is selected by Outgoing Line Selection.
Automatic Answerback
Automatic Answerback operates only on the Prime DN (key zero) and
has no interrelation with Incoming Ringing/Non-Ringing Line Selection.
Dial Intercom
A Dial Intercom DN is selected by Incoming Ringing Line Selection and
Outgoing Line Selection.
Private Line Service
A Private line DN is selected by Incoming Ringing/Non-Ringing Line
Selection and Outgoing Line Selection.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
An ACD DN is not selected by automatic Incoming Non-Ringing and
Outgoing Line Selection. It is selected by Incoming Ringing Line
Selection.
Call Waiting
A call on the Call Waiting key is not selected.

Feature packaging
Automatic Line Selection (LSEL), package 72, has no feature package
dependencies.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Line Selection

Feature

26-3

implementation

-Assign Automatic Line Selection for each SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa

2006, 2008, 2009,

2317,
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CLS

IRA, (IRD)

Allow (Deny) incoming ringing line preference

NIA, (NID)

Allow (Deny) incoming non-ringing line preference

OLA, (OLD)

Allow (Deny) outgoing line preference

xx

Specify the last key to be scanned for line preference (such
as O-7, O-l

LPK

Prompted only if

NIA, or OLA

Note: A value of 0 (zero) for LPK disables this feature.

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

26-4

Automatic Line Selection

1 features and services

553-3001-305

27-1

Automatic Number Identification
Automatic Number Identification
automatically identifies a station
originating an outgoing toll call and its destination party, and transmits the
information to a recording office. A multifrequency (MF) sender is used to
transmit AN1 information. The signaling method used to send this
information to the Central Office can be E&M, DX, or loop signaling.
AN1 supports three basic signaling methods: NT400, NT500, and Bell (Super
Trunk Group).
Each customer is assigned an AN1 Listed Directory Number (LDN). This
number identifies the customer to the toll office.
Route Selection works in conjunction with the AN1 feature. The AN1 Route
Selection (ANIR) facility is optional and may be used to route toll calls
automatically over specified trunks. ANIR allows distinctive routing of the
following:
0- calls: calls to the AN1 operator for assistance
0+ calls: credit card or operator-assisted calls
calls: DDD calls
local calls: calls not preceded by a 1 or 0
enhancement, X11 release 12 Permits the transmission of the
necessary signaling method for access to AT&T operator assistance when
“00” is dialed. This enhancement operates on a route basis and applies only
to Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
routes using the
Bell MF signaling method.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

27-2

Automatic Number Identification

In-Band AN1
X11 release 15 The In-Band AN1
feature
provides display capability of a lo-digit calling party number during setup
(signaling) over a non-ISDN
trunk. The AN1 digits are displayed when
they auto-terminate to an ACD DN agent telephone with digit display.

parameters
The AN1

enhancement operates on a route basis and only applies to
routes using the MF signaling methods. All route members that use
the AN1
enhancement must have an MFR Class of Service.
The AN1
enhancement is not supported over dial pulse trunks.
Therefore, a mix of trunk members may not be used when assigning this
feature.
The

enhancement is not supported on CCSA routes.

Feature interaction
AN1 Route Selection (ANIR)
ANIR has not been modified to allow “00” or
using “00
or
are treated as a
Data Block).
route is selected

dialing. Calls made
call, and the zero plus

DN Expansion
If the DN Expansion package is equipped, the AN1 billing number
can have up to seven digits. The total number of digits for
and AN1 listed DN (ANLD) cannot exceed seven.

Feature packaging
Automatic Number Identification
dependencies.

package 12, has no feature package

AN1 Route Selection (ANIR), package 13, requires Automatic Number
Identification (ANJ), package 12.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic Number Identification

Feature
LD15

implementation

Implement

customer data

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ANLD

xxx...x

billing number for attendants making

xxx...x

listed DN for billing purposes (O-5 digits)

Note: The total number of digits in

LD16

27-3

and ANLD cannot exceed seven digits.

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

RDB

Route Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

xxx

TKTP

CAM
CAA

route data (Part 1 of 2).

route number
NT4, or NT5
= Bel

BEL

Bell method signaling

NT4

ITT-North NT400 signaling
(only if TKTP=CAMA)

NT5

ITT-North NT500 signaling
(only if TKTP=CAMA)

FORM

calls

For BEL, NT4, or NT5 (NT4 and NT5 not applicable if
TKTP=CAA)
For BEL, NT4, or NT5 (NT4 and NT5 not applicable if
TKTP=CAA)
For NT5 (only if TKTP=CAMA)
OGT

Outgoing

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

27-4

LD16

Automatic Number Identification

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting

ID

route data (Part 2 of 2).

Identification digit for
o-9

CAT

routes

For BEL
Category digits for

routes (only if TKTP=CAMA)

For NT4 and NT5
00-99
STRK

Yes, (No)

Enable or disable super trunk group feature (Bell method
signaling only)

SPTO

Yes, (No)

3-digit, or

ANKP

Yes, (No)

Suppress/not suppress KP signal on

CNTL

Yes, (No)

Allow/not allow changes to timers

AT0
ANDT

LD14

Yes, (No)

Provide/not provide

calls

dial tone

trunk data.

New or change
trunk

CAM
CAA

trunk

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CLS

MFR

Arrange

Xl 1 features and services

calls

timeout timer in ms (default is 4,992)

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
NEW, CHG

TYPE

to lo-digit outpulsing for

553-3001-305

trunk

for

in LD16)

multifrequency

outpulsing

telemanuals.com

Automatic Number Identification
LD28

Route selection data for AN1 calls.

TYPE

RSA

RASC

xxxx

0-RT

xxxx

Route access code for 0- calls

xxxx

Route access code for 0+ calls

xxxx

Route access code for

xxxx

Route access code for local calls

CORT
LD16

27-5

Route selection for
access code digits

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting

or

calls

route data.

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

RDB

Route Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

xxx

TKTP

TIE, CCSA

Trunk type

ANTK

xxxx

Billing number for Tie or CCSA trunks that are allowed a
tandem connection to

route number

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

27-6

Automatic Number Identification

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

921231
Standard
14
28-1

Automatic Number Identification on DTI
Introduced in Xl 1 release 14.43, Automatic Number Identification
on
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) extends the AN1 feature to digital CO (DCO)
and Digital Toll Office (DTO) trunks. In addition, the AN1 capability is
extended to Primary Rate Access (PRA) trunk routes through the Primary
Rate Interface.
For further information, refer to Automatic Number

description

(553-26

Operating parameters
The
is the minimum vintage multifrequency (MF) sender circuit
board required to implement this feature.
DTI interfaces externally with a digital trunk carrier facility at the DS- 1 rate.
MF signals pass across this interface in a digitally encoded format.
Supervisory signaling through DTI is accomplished by A&B bit signaling.
A&B bit signaling can emulate E&M or loop signaling.
Address (called number) signaling through DTI can be DP or MF. Immediate
start or wink start may be used.
Calling number information signaling is done using the MF signaling
method.
This enhancement supports the three basic signaling methods for
are Bell, NT400, and

These

Feature interactions
None.

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

28-2

Automatic Number Identification on DTI

Feature packaging
This enhancement is included in the

software package.

Automatic Number Identification
14.43 and later.

package 12, requires Xl 1 release

implementation
LD16

Define CO or Toll Office port types.

DTRK

Yes, (No)

Digital trunk route

DGTP

DTI

Digital trunk type

PTYP

DCO/DTO

CO or Toll Office port type (default DCO)

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Automatic Preselection of Prime
Directory Number
Automatic Preselection allows a user to select the Directory Number (DN)
assigned to key zero by lifting the handset. It is not necessary to operate the
DN key to get dial tone or to answer an incoming call. The DN assigned to
key zero is referred to as the Prime Directory Number (PDN) for that
telephone.

Operating parameters
The Automatic Preselection feature does not apply to single-line telephones.

Feature interaction
None.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic Xl 1 system software,

Feature

implementation
The desired Directory Number is assigned to key zero in

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

29-2

Automatic Preselection of Prime Directory Number

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

Automatic Set Relocation
Automatic Set Relocation (ASR) and Modular Telephone Relocation (MTR)
move a telephone to another location without the intervention of a
craftsperson.
release added MTR to reduce the number of steps
required to relocate the Meridian Modular Terminals.
With ASR, Directory Numbers
and features assigned to the telephone
are maintained. Up to 32 telephones can be relocated at any one time. The
following access codes are associated with this feature.
Special Prefix code (SPRE) relocation code 8 1
SPRE codes are system codes enabling
type telephones to
utilize additional telephone features. Refer to the “Telephones” or
module in this document.
Flexible Feature Code (FFC) relocation number
are user programmable codes that enable
type telephones
to access certain telephone features. Refer to the FFC module in this
document.
Security code
You must enter the security code before a telephone can be moved
Identification code
The identification code is user-selectable, and can be any four-digit
number (excluding the symbols and (MTR does not require this
code.)
This feature is also used to install and enable line cards to make unused
telephone locations available for telephone relocation. Adding the first
telephone on a line card by overlay service change enables that card (if not
already enabled). Removing the last telephone from a line card leaves that
card enabled; it does not disable the card.

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

30-2

Automatic Set Relocation

Note Automatic Set Relocation (ASR) requires the circuit units on
SL-1 and digital line cards used for supplementary power to be specified
as power units in LD12. This allows the Meridian 1 system to disable
signaling to these units, while leaving unequipped units enabled for
telephone relocation. If power units are not specified, they generate
erroneous messages and may disable the entire card.
Note 2: After putting a telephone back into service, the craftsperson
should wait at least 20 seconds before using the telephone.

Modular Telephone Relocation

1 release 18 and later)

Modular Telephone Relocation enhances ASR to make relocating Meridian
Modular Telephones simpler and faster (by omitting the requirement for an
identification code). The following telephones support Modular Terminal
Relocation:
M2006
M2008

M2216
M2616
When a telephone is relocated out, a relocation block is automatically built to
store the relocation information in the protected data area. The relocation
block includes the old TN, the terminal ID information, the serial number of
the telephone, and feature information. If a data dump occurs, the relocation
block is not copied to the disk.
Modular Terminal Relocation uses the unique serial number and terminal ID
of the Meridian Modular Telephones (instead of the identification code) to
identify the one being relocated. This reduces the number of steps needed for
relocation.
A telephone’s successful relocation is indicated by a 180-millisecond buzz
through the telephone’s loudspeaker, not a tone through the handset. The buzz
occurs after the telephone is plugged into the new location, and the parameter
download to the Meridian Modular Terminal is complete.

features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic Set Relocation

30-3

Modifying the relocation table
The relocation table contains information regarding the telephone’s serial
number, Terminal Number (TN) and terminal identification information.
When a telephone is relocated OUT, the table maintains the necessary
telephone information. When the telephone is relocated IN, the Meridian
searches the table for that telephone’s information. When the information is
found, the data is moved to the new location. The telephone data is then
removed from the relocation table.
the serial number or any terminal ID information may be
Through
modified while the telephone is relocated out (before is has been relocated
back in). For example, use LD.50 when replacing a telephone with another
one of the same type with a different serial number or terminal ID, but the
same key configuration.
LD21 prints information about telephones that have been relocated out.
The ‘IDU’ (ID for Unit) command in LD32 determines the telephone’s serial
number and ID information.

Operating parameters
A single-line telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on a
Line Card.
An SL-1 telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on an SL-1 Line
Card. A digital telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on a Digital
Line Card (DLC) or Integrated Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC) in the
switch.
An Add-on Data Module (ADM) must be relocated to a vacant data port on a
QPC311 Data Line Card. A co-located
telephone and ADM must be
relocated to a vacant voice and data port combination on a
Data Line
Card.
Moving a telephone from an off-premise to on-premise location or vice versa
is not recommended as incorrect pad values on connections may result.
A Manual Line telephone cannot be relocated using the Automatic Set
Relocation feature.

Xl 1 features and services

telemanuals.com

30-4

Automatic Set Relocation

The relocation table allows a maximum of 32 telephones to be relocated out
at one time.
A relocated out telephone
be relocated in to an already defined TN. A
telephone relocating-in must be plugged into a TN location that currently has
no assigned telephone information.
ACD agent telephones with an associated supervisor and the ACD supervisor
telephones cannot be relocated.
If a data dump occurs while a telephone is relocated out, a sysload returns the
telephone to its original TN location. If a telephone was in the relocated out
s t a t e when the last data dump occurred, and has since relocated in, another
data dump is necessary. The second data dump prevents a sysload from
returning the telephone to its previous TN location.
When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and the overflow tone is returned
during relocation out, the relocation attempt is abandoned. Try the relocation
again.
When Modular Terminal Relocation is used there is a slight delay between
the time the telephone is plugged in and the buzz. The buzz occurs after the
telephone is relocated in, enabled, and downloaded. This delay is
traffic-dependent. If no buzz is received, the relocation is unsuccessful.
When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and a telephone is relocated out,
a Customer Service Change (CSC) message containing the old TN number,
serial number, and terminal ID is displayed on the TTY. When a telephone is
relocated in, a CSC message containing the old TN and new TN is displayed.
These messages are placed in the history file.
When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and a sysload occurs before a
data dump completes, the data for all telephones relocated in or out is lost.
Return the telephones to their original location and repeat the relocation
process.

features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic Set Relocation

30-3

Modifying the relocation table
The relocation table contains information regarding the telephone’s serial
number, Terminal Number (TN) and terminal identification information.
When a telephone is relocated OUT, the table maintains the necessary
telephone information. When the telephone is relocated IN, the Meridian
searches the table for that telephone’s information. When the information is
found, the data is moved to the new location. The telephone data is then
removed from the relocation table.
Through LD50, the serial number or any terminal ID information may be
modified while the telephone is relocated out (before is has been relocated
back in). For example, use LD50 when replacing a telephone with another
one of the same type with a different serial number or terminal ID, but the
same key configuration.
LD21 prints information about telephones that have been relocated out.
The ‘IDU’ (ID for Unit) command in LD32 determines the telephone’s serial
number and ID information.

Operating parameters
A single-line telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on a
Line Card.
An SL-1 telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on an SL-1 Line
Card. A digital telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on a Digital
Line Card (DLC) or Integrated Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC) in the
switch.
An Add-on Data Module (ADM) must be relocated to a vacant data port on a
Data Line Card. A co-located SL-1 telephone and ADM must be
relocated to a vacant voice and data port combination on a
Data Line
Card.
Moving a telephone from an off-premise to on-premise location or vice versa
is not recommended as incorrect pad values on connections may result.
A Manual Line telephone cannot be relocated using the Automatic Set
Relocation feature.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

30-4

Automatic Set Relocation

The relocation table allows a maximum of 32 telephones to be relocated out
at one time.
A relocated out telephone
be relocated in to an already defined TN. A
telephone relocating-in must be plugged into a TN location that currently has
no assigned telephone information.
ACD agent telephones with an associated supervisor and the ACD supervisor
telephones cannot be relocated.
If a data dump occurs while a telephone is relocated out, a sysload returns the
telephone to its original TN location. If a telephone was in the relocated out
state when the last data dump occurred, and has since relocated in, another
data dump is necessary. The second data dump prevents a sysload from
returning the telephone to its previous TN location.
When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and the overflow tone is returned
during relocation out, the relocation attempt is abandoned. Try the relocation
again.
When Modular Terminal Relocation is used there is a slight delay between
the time the telephone is plugged in and the buzz. The buzz occurs after the
telephone is relocated in, enabled, and downloaded. This delay is
traffic-dependent. If no buzz is received, the relocation is unsuccessful.
When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and a telephone is relocated out,
a Customer Service Change (CSC) message containing the old TN number,
serial number, and terminal ID is displayed on the TTY. When a telephone is
relocated in, a CSC message containing the old TN and new TN is displayed.
These messages are placed in the history file.
When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and a sysload occurs before a
data dump completes, the data for all telephones relocated in or out is lost.
Return the telephones to their original location and repeat the relocation
process.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Automatic Set Relocation

30-5

Feature interaction
Call Forward No Answer/Hunting- Calls will not hunt or forward no answer
to a telephone that is being relocated.
Call Forward/Ring Again-If Call Forward, or Ring Again is active when a
telephone is relocated, the feature is deactivated.
Make Set Busy -If Make Set Busy is active when the telephone is relocated,
Make Set Busy remains active.
Power Fail Transfer-Since Power Fail Transfer is hardwired to certain
Terminal Numbers (TN), this feature is not maintained by a telephone when
it is relocated.
Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime (MARP)
TN is restored when the telephone relocates.

The original MARP

When Automatic Set Relocation or Meridian Modular Terminal is used to
move a telephone, the telephone’s MARP designations are maintained. If the
TN is a MARP for one or more
the system maintains the MARP TN. A
system message indicates the telephone relocation.
When a set leaves the system due to set relocation, the following CSC
message appears.
xy
x = old TN (1 c u) for the telephone
y = ID code entered
While the telephone is being relocated, a temporary MARP TN is assigned.
The following SCH message appears for each DN associated to the removed
MARP TN.
SCH5524 DN nnnn NEW MARP 1 c
nnnn = the DN associated with the MARP TN
c = the new default MARP for DN nnnn
The same message given through Attendant Administration displays on the
attendant console when a MARP is assigned for a DN. The History File can
be configured to store these messages until a printout is requested.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

30-6

Automatic Set Relocation

When a telephone reenters the system, the following message appears.
xy
x = old TN (1 c u) for the telephone
y = new TN (1 c u) for the telephone
The following message appears again for each changed TN.
SCH.5524 DN nnnn NEW MARP 1 c
nnnn = the DN associated with the MARP TN
1 c = the new MARP TN assigned to DN nnnn

Feature packaging
Automatic Set Relocation (ASR), package 53, has no feature package
dependencies.
Modular Telephone Relocation requires the following:
Automatic Set Relocation (ASR), package 53
Meridian Modular Terminals (ARIE), package 170
Digital telephones (DSET), package 88

Feature

implementation

Assign Automatic Set Relocation security code
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

Customer data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

SRCD

xxxx, , x

Automatic Set Relocation security code; default is 0000; X
removes security code

Enable/disable line circuits for Automatic Set Relocation
REQ

CHG

TYPE

CARD

TN

lscu

Xl 1 features and services

Change
line circuit for Automatic Set Relocation
Terminal Number

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Automatic Set Relocation

30-7

-Enable/disable line circuits for Automatic Set Relocation
CHG

Change

TYPE

CARD

SL-I or digital line circuit for Automatic Set Relocation

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

LD12

Gather data for each SL-1 line circuit to be used as a supplementary power source

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

PWR

SL-1 line circuit for supplementary power

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

LD17

Allow ASR messages to be printed at a system terminal or stored in the history file

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CFN

Configuration record

Yes, (No)

Change input/output terminals or devices

(0)-65534

History file buffer length

NEW, CHG aaa x

System terminal device number for Automatic Set
Relocation messages.
aaa and x HST
PRT O-l 5
TTY O-l 5

USER

csc

Customer service change (Automatic Set Relocation)
messages

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

30-l 0

Automatic Set Relocation

Feature operation
Automatic Set Relocation
To use Automatic Set Relocation:
1

Lift the handset.

2

Enter the relocation code (either SPRE 81 or the Flexible Feature Code).

3

Enter the security code. With X11 release 19 and later, a security code is
required. The default is 0000.

4

Enter the four-digit code to identify your telephone.
A tone confirms the telephone is ready to be moved.

5

Unplug the telephone and install it at the new location.

6

Lift the handset and dial the four-digit identifier.
A tone confirms the telephone has been moved successfully.

Modular Telephone Relocation
To relocate a telephone using Modular Telephone Relocation:
1

Lift the handset or activate handsfree.

2

Enter the relocation code (either SPRE 81 or the Flexible Feature Code).

3

Enter the security code. With X11 release 19 and later, a security code is
required. The default is 0000.

4

A two-second tone burst confirms that the telephone is relocated out.
Unplug the telephone and install it at the new location.

6

The confirmation buzz through the telephone’s loudspeaker indicates the
telephone is in service.
Note: All calls associated with the telephone receive force disconnect
while it is relocated out. The telephone information automatically moves
to the relocation table.

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Automatic Timed Reminders
Automatic Timed Reminders alert the attendant when a call extended to a
station by the attendant console has not been answered within a predefined
period of time. Recall timers for different conditions are specified by the
customer:
Slow Answer (set in increments of six seconds)
Camp-On (set in increments of two seconds)
Call Waiting (set in increments of two seconds)
If no entry is made, the default is 30 seconds in each case. One optional Recall
Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key is provided on the attendant console for
operator-extended recalls.

Operating parameters
There are no feature requirements.

Feature interactions
Call Park
A Call Park recall to an attendant appears on the Recall Incoming Call
Indicator.
Call Forward No Answer/Call Forward No Answer Second Level
When Call Forward No Answer is activated on a telephone, the slow
answer timer begins only after the call reaches its final destination.

Feature packaging
Automatic Timed Reminders are included in basic Xl 1 system software.

features and services

553-3001-305

31-2

Automatic Timed Reminders

Feature

implementation

Define Recall timers and add/change a Recall Incoming Call Indicator key on attendant
consoles.
REQ

CHG

Change
Customer Data Block

TYPE
CUST

o-99

Customer number

xxxxyyyyzzzz

Recall

timers

xxxx = slow answer,
(default 30 seconds)

in 6-second increments

yyyy = Camp-on, O-l ,022, in 2-second increments (default
30 seconds)
zzzz = Call Waiting, O-l ,022, in
(default 30 seconds)
ICI

Add RECALL ICI to all consoles

O-l 9 RLL

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

increments

telemanuals.com

Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) enables Meridian 1 to be programmed
to automatically perform scheduled transmission and supervision tests on
specified trunk groups terminating at the Meridian 1. ATM also reports the
results to the maintenance system terminal.
Trunks that fail any of the tests are flagged so that more rigorous tests can be
performed manually using transmission test equipment. The system can be
programmed to disable any of these flagged trunks, up to a configurable limit
per trunk group, if they reach the programmable “out-of-service” threshold.
In addition to the automatic scheduling and running of the ATM program, it
may also be run manually, at any time.

Related documents
For complete information on Automatic Trunk Maintenance, refer to
Automatic trunk maintenance description (553-275 1- 104).
Configuration is described in
(553-3001-400).

and LD92 in the XI I input/output guide

features and services

553-3001-305

32-2

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

telemanuals.com

I features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

92 1231
Standard
All
33-1

Automatic Wake Up
Automatic Wake Up (AWU) provides an efficient wake up service for
hospitality and health care environments. It relieves the console attendant
from having to make wake up calls by providing this service automatically.
At the requested time, the system automatically rings the room or extension
and connects the called party upon answer to a music followed by a recorded
wake up announcement.
If the wake up call is answered within a customer-specified number of rings
(2-5 with Xl 1 release 15 and later, 5 rings with Xl 1 release 14 and earlier),
the system recognizes a completed call and presents the predefined wake up
treatment. The system disconnects the AWU call when the called party
releases, or when the recording cycle is completed.
The system allows for an alternate recording that can be used for evening
wake up calls or when the primary recording is being updated. The secondary
recording can also replace the primary recording at a customer-specified time
period.
Answering the wake up call The Wake Up indicator goes dark after the
guest answers the wake up call. In Xl 1 release 16 and later, customers can set
the attendant recall option if the call is unanswered after a specified number
of tries (from one to three).
Answering the wake up call for multiple appearance DN telephones is similar
to single appearance DN telephones: after the call is answered, the Wake Up
indicator goes dark.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

33-2

Automatic Wake Up

The system balances the wake up load over five-minute intervals, generating
a maximum of 100 wake up calls per five-minute period. The system
processes one wake up call every two seconds during peak periods, and one
wake up call every four seconds during lighter periods. A light load is defined
as anything less than 60 wake up call requests per five minute interval.
A wake up request is rejected by the system under the following conditions:
The wake up request (in units of five-minute intervals) is less than one
interval ahead of the current time interval (see Note).
The wake up request (in units of five-minute intervals) is less than five
intervals before the current time interval. In other words, the wake up
request is more than 23 hours and eight intervals in advance.
The interval requested contains 100 calls already (or 500 calls with X11
release 1.5 and later for XT, NT, and RT machines, and system options
71, and 81).
Note: The time interval = (hour x 12) + (minute 5). Always round
down to the nearest five-minute interval.
If the interval requested for a wake-up call already contains the maximum
number of calls, the system searches for the next available time interval in the
following sequence:
the five-minute interval before the requested time
the five-minute interval after the requested time
the next available five-minute interval within three hours before the
requested time
You can also use a Background Terminal (BGD) to enter Automatic Wake
Up information. The Background Terminal lets you monitor system
operation. One or more terminals may be assigned to access AWU data. You
can have data displayed or printed at a preselected time of day.
500 Wake Up Calls, X11 release 15 The number of Automatic Wake Up
calls available per five-minute period increases to 500 calls for NT, RT, and
and 81. The number (100)
XT machines and system options
remains the same for all other systems.

features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic Wake Up

33-3

The feature enhancement also lets you define the number of rings for the call
from two to five. If there is no answer after the specified number of rings, the
AWU call overflows to the next five-minute interval. The system tries three
times to terminate the call before it is recalled to the attendant. X11 release
16 and higher software lets you define the number of wake up attempts, from
one to three.
telephones should be ringing at any one
No more than twenty-five
time. To ensure this, set the Number of Rings for Wake Up (NRWU) prompt
in LD15 according to the recommendations listed in Table 33-l. The NRWU
is two to five, with a default of five.
Table 33-1
Recommended number of rings per Automatic Wake Up call
Time on
(seconds)

Time off
(seconds)

Maximum
number of rings

3

3

2

2

5
2

5

* North American standards

Only 500 AWU calls can be defined for the system, but up to 750 calls can
actually be placed. Up to half of the programmed AWU calls unanswered can
be carried over to the next five-minute interval. The carry-over from one
block to the next is important in limiting the number of calls in the original
programmed interval.
For a complete description on programming AWU with the Background
Terminal, please refer to Background Terminal Facility description
(553-2311-316).
Guest Entry of Auto Wake Up (GEWU) Calls, Xl1 release 16 GEWU
provides entry of a wake up call from a room telephone. By using the Wake
on the telephone, guests can program, query (with display),
Up key
or cancel their own wake up calls based on a 24-hour time format.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

33-4

Automatic Wake Up

Requests must be made on a daily basis since the wake up time is
automatically canceled after each use.
GEWU does not alter the operation of AWU, but adds a new option to AWU
programming. Unless otherwise specified, operating GEWU is the same
regardless of whether the telephone has a display. The distinction is that with
indicates
a display, guests can check their wake up call requests. A dash
that no time has been programmed. In addition, when programming a wake
up call, the system will search for and display the next available time if the
time interval chosen for the wake up call is full. Without a display, the guest
can still program and cancel a wake up call.
Note: For Multiple Appearance DN telephones, the wake up time for
secondary
cannot be queried.
Multi Language Wake Up (MLWU) Calls, X11 release 16 MLWU
provides Automatic Wake Up calls in any of up to six languages. You can use
any language as long as you have a recording of it available on a RAN trunk.
At check-in, each guest can choose the language for wake up calls. If no
language is assigned, the default language, Language 0, is used.
You can assign a language to a room’s telephone at any time by using the
Background Terminal (BGD) or Property Management System (PMS). A
room DN is valid if it has at least one appearance as a Prime DN (key 0) on a
telephone and Controlled Class of Service Allowed (CCSA). Multiple
appearance telephones with the same Prime DN may be assigned different
languages through Service Change.
You can also assign the language on a TN basis, allowing the language option
to be employed outside the hospitality industry without requiring a BGD
and
in
terminal or the PMS. Refer to
(553-3001-400) for the prompt “LANG.”
The language remains unchanged until the next language assignment. An
AWU language cannot be changed on a call-by-call basis. The customer may,
however, optionally clear the language either at check-in or check-out times,
using the Background Terminal.

1 features and services

Automatic Wake Up

33-5

If Automatic Wake Up is enabled, up to six pairs of language-specific RAN
routes (both a.m. and p.m. for each language), called Automatic Wake Up
routes (AWR), can be configured. The languages, O-5, correspond to the
AWR routes
(for Language 0),
(for Language
up to
(for Language 5) in the Customer Data Block (LD15). The
and RAN2 for
only requirement is that the default language routes
Language 0 must be defined. If a specific language AWR is not accessible at
wake up time, the corresponding primary or secondary default language
routes (RAN1 and RAN2) are used.
On a Background Terminal, a customer can define a two-character language
identifier to reference the languages. For example, the customer may define
Language 0 as EN (English), Language 1 as SP (Spanish), and Language 2 as
GR (German). For details on implementing BGD terminal commands, refer
to Background Terminal Facility description (553-2311-316).
Unanswered Automatic Wake Up calls recall to the attendant if the attendant
recall option is on. Upon a recall, the room’s language is displayed on the
attendant console. On alphanumeric displays (Ml250 or M2250 attendant
consoles), the language identifier is displayed after the Call Party Name
Display (CPND) fields. On digit displays (QCW type attendant console), the
language number (O-5) is displayed after the recalling DN field.

Operating parameters
To operate AWU, a system must have a Background Terminal or Attendant
Console with AWU key, room telephones with Controlled Class of Service
Allowed (CCSA), and Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunks.
This feature requires a Background Terminal (BGD). For a complete
description of this feature, refer to Northern Telecom Publication
Background Terminal Facility description (553-2311-316).
The following hardware is required for the AWU feature:
QPC74 RAN trunk interface card or

universal trunk card

a continuous announcement (RAN) machine, such as the Audichron
HQ-1 112

features and services

553-3001-305

33-6

Automatic Wake Up

Systems with software earlier than X11 release 1.5, require at least one
dedicated conference circuit (loop and conference card) for the
feature.
For X11 release 1.5 and later software, a dedicated conference loop is no
longer required for the network-enhanced machines.
For the call to utilize both music and a wake up announcement, a music route
First RAN Trunk (RANF) and a primary RAN route must be configured.
Automatic Wake Up is only allowed on a telephone’s Prime Directory
Number (PDN). For telephones in a multiple-appearance arrangement, all
telephones are rung; however, only one wake up time may be assigned against
the PDN. The system tries the wake up call a customer-defined number of
release 16 and later, 3 with 1 release 15
times (from one to three with
and earlier), and then treats it as any other unanswered wake up call. In a
single-call arrangement, if any appearance of the DN is busy when the wake
up call is made, the wake up call is not presented. In a multiple-call
arrangement, the wake up call is presented to all idle appearances.
A wake up key cannot be configured on a data station (a telephone with DTA
class of service).
There can only be one wake up key per telephone.
Only attendant consoles can have an AWU key.
release 16 and later
releases allow the AWU time to be programmed on digital telephones (using
GEWU and a Wake Up key).
Automatic Wake Up and Centralized Attendant Services (CAS) are mutually
exclusive.
If the wake up call goes unanswered, or the guest hangs up before the AWU
2 second hold time, the system tries the wake up call again in the next five
minute interval. If Attendant recall is enabled, the call transfers to the
attendant following the last unsuccessful wake up call attempt.
Maintenance technicians can access any AWU RAN trunk or music trunk
with the RAN trunk access code.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic Wake Up

33-7

Feature interaction
The Attendant Administration feature does not support data entry or changes
for the AWU feature.
Attendant Overflow Position
AWU recalls are not redirected to a customer-defined Attendant
Ovefflow Position DN. Failed wake up calls stay in the attendant queue
or ring indefinitely on the console.
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP)
AWU supports CDP as long as an internal DN is used.
Do Not Disturb (DND)
When a telephone is configured for DND, a wake up call can still be
presented.
Manual Line or Private Line Services
AWU does not support these features; an AWU call cannot be
programmed against a manual line or private line DN.
Night Service
Unanswered AWU calls going through Attendant Recall are discarded if
the attendant console is in the Night Service mode. AWU may still be
programmed when the attendant console is in Night Service.
Pretranslation
the actual DN,
When the Pretranslation feature is equipped with
not the pretranslation DN, should be used when programming the AWU
call request.
Room Status
When a guest checks in or out, the room status changes. If an AWU
request is still active, it is canceled if it is included as part of the Check
In/Out option.
Multiple Appearance DN
are rung, including both primary and
All Multiple Appearance
Programming the wake up request using the Wake Up
secondary
key applies only to telephones with the primary DN on key 0, and the
Wake Up indicator operates as described only on the telephone that is
currently programming the wake up request.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

33-8

Automatic Wake Up

In addition, if two or more Multiple Appearance Primary DN telephones
program a wake up request at the same time, the last telephone to finish
overrides. In other words, all telephones with the same primary DN get the
same request time of the last telephone to program a request. If the last
telephone cancels the request, all requests are canceled.
When the wake up programming sequence is finished, all Wake Up indicators
on Multiple Appearance Prime
are updated unless a telephone is in the
middle of Wake Up programming.
If the AWU Recall option is chosen, the recall is presented to any idle
attendant console in the same Console Presentation Group (CPG) equipped
with the AWU key.

Feature packaging
Automatic Wake Up (AWU), package 102, requires:
Background Terminal Facility (BGD), package 99
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS), package 81
Recorded Announcement (RAN), package 7
Guest Entry of Auto Wake Up is included as part of Automatic Wake Up.
Multi Language Wake Up (MLWU), package 206, requires Automatic Wake
Up (AWU), package 102. Refer to the package dependencies of AWU.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic Wake Up

Feature

33-9

implementation
Step l-Assign at least three AWR routes (RANF,
RAN2)

and

the RANF route.
REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change
Route Data Block

TYPE
CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-51

Route number

TKTP

AWR

AWU RAN route

RTYP

AUD

Audichron recorder

xxxx

Trunk route access code
Must be different from RANF

Note: Route 31 cannot

LD16

be used for AWU on

Define the

1 release 13 and earlier.

route.

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

RDB

Route Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-51

Route number
Must be different from RANF route number

TKTP

AWR

AWU RAN route

RTYP

AUD

Audichron recorder

xxxx

Trunk route access code
Must be different from RANF and RAN1

Note: Route 31 cannot be used for AWU on Xl 1 release 13 and earlier.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

33-10

LD16

Automatic Wake Up

Define the RAN2 route.

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

RDB

Route Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-51 1

Route number
Must be different from RANF and RAN1 route numbers

TKTP

AWR

AWU RAN route

RTYP

AUD

Audichron recorder

xxxx

Trunk route access code

Note: Route

31

cannot be used for AWU on

Xl 1

release

13

and earlier.

Step 2-Build a trunk for each route
LD14

Define the trunk for RANF.

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

AWR

AWU RAN trunk

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CUST

o-99

Customer number

RTMB

YY

1 features and services

Route number and member number

553-3001-305

1

Automatic Wake Up

LD14

Define the trunk for

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

AWR

AWU RAN trunk

TN

lscu

Terminal Number
Must be a different TN from RANF

CUST
RTMB

o-99
YY

Customer number
Route number and member number
Must be a different RTMB from RANF

LD14

Define the trunk for RAN2.

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

AWR

AWU RAN trunk

TN

lscu

Terminal Number
Must be a different TN from RANF and RAN1

CUST
RTMB

o-99
YY

Customer number
Route number and member number
Must be a different RTMB from RANF and

Xl 1 features and services

33-11

33-12

Automatic Wake Up

Step 3-Enable AWU for the customer
LD15 -Enable Automatic Wake Up in Customer Data Block (Part 1 of 2).
REQ

CHG

Change
Customer Data Block

TYPE
CUST

o-99

Customer number

AWU

Yes

Activate AWU for a customer

ATRC

Yes, (No)

Allow or deny attendant recall

CONF

o-1 59

Conference loop number (see note below)

RANF

o-51 1

Music RAN route number

O-51 1

Primary AWR route number

RAN2

O-511 

Secondary AWR route number

LA1 1

O-51 1

Language

RAN route 1

X = remove language RAN route definition
LA12

O-51 1

Language

LA21

o-51 1

Language 2, AWR route 1

LA22

o-51 1

Language 2, AWR route 2

LA31

O-51 1

Language 3, AWR route 1

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

AWR route 2

Automatic Wake Up

33-13

-Enable Automatic Wake Up in Customer Data Block (Part 2 of 2).
LA32

o-51 1

Language 3, AWR route 2

LA41

o-51 1

Language 4, AWR route 1

LA42

o-51

Language 4, AWR route 2

LA51

o-51 1

Language 5, AWR route 1

LA52

o-51 1

Language 5, AWR route 2

hhmm

RAN2 start time

hhmm

RAN2 end time

2-(5)

Number of rings for a wake up call (Xl 1 release 15 and
later)

NRWU
TAWU
Note

Number of wake up tries for an unanswered AWU call (Xi 1
release 16 and later)
Conference loops are required only for

Note 2: AWR route number ranges from O-51 1 apply to
all other options. Enter
to remove a route.

release 14 and earlier releases.
NT, 51, 61, 71, and 81 only. Range is O-1 27 for

Step 4-Allow AWU on telephones and attendant consoles
Set language and CCOS for
REQ

CHG

type telephones (on a per TN basis).
Change
Telephone type

TYPE
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

LANG

(0)-5

Language number
To remove entry, precede with X

CCSA

Controlled Class of Service allowed

features and services

553-3001-305

33-14

Automatic Wake Up
-Set language and CCOS for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones (on a per TN basis).

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CCSA

Allow Controlled Class of Service
Language number
To remove entry, precede with X

LANG
KEY

Assign a wake up key on a telephone
Must be a key/lamp pair (Xl 1 release 16 and later)

xx WUK

Note: To assign a language on a per DN basis, use a Background Terminal.

LD12 -Allow access to AWU from attendant consoles.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaa

Console type

aaa = ATT,
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx AWU

Add an AWU key

Feature operation
From a telephone with a wake up key
To program a wake up call from an idle telephone, follow these steps:
1

Press Wake Up.
The indicator flashes.

2

Dial the wake up request time, in 24-hour format
a.m. as
p.m. as 1930).
Telephones with display show a dash followed by the time. If no time is
set, a single dash is shown.The indicator keeps flashing.

3

Press Wake Up.
The indicator goes on steady.

features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic Wake Up

33-15

Press the Release (RLS) or PDN key while programming a wake up request
to abort the wake up request. Any previously defined wake up time will
remain.
Display telephones If the time interval chosen for the wake up call is full,
the system searches for and displays the next available time. If the system
and the
cannot find another time, the display shows four dashes (Wake Up indicator remains flashing. If the system finds another time, the
guest has three options:
To accept the new wake up time, press Wake Up.
To reject the new wake up time and enter another one, dial the new wake
up time and press Wake Up to validate the new time.
To abort the wake up time, press RLS or the Prime DN key (PDN).
To cancel a wake up request, follow these steps:
1

Press Wake Up.
The indicator flashes.

2

Dial the octothorpe

3

Press Wake Up.
The indicator goes off.

To check a wake up request on a telephone with display, follow these steps:
1

Press Wake Up.
The indicator flashes and the current wake up time appears on the
display. If no wake up time is programmed, the display shows a dash

2

Press Wake Up.
The indicator lights if a wake up time is set.
Note: In each scenario, the Wake Up indicator lights and the display
clears, except when the wake up time is aborted and no wake up time was
programmed before the abort. In this case, the Wake Up indicator stays
off. If a time was programmed before aborting, the previous wake up
time is restored, and the indicator is on.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

33-16

Automatic Wake Up

From an attendant console
To program a wake-up call from an attendant console, follow these steps:
1

Press A. Wake Up.
The A. Wake Up, ICI, lpk, and S indicators light.
Note: If the displayed number is not the number requiring the wake up
call, dial the proper number.

2

Press the octothorpe
If the A. Wake Up indicator remains on steadily, the dialed number is
valid. If it flashes, the number is invalid.

3

Dial the requested wake up time using a 24-hour format. Press
A. Wake Up again.
If the A. Wake Up indicator remains on without flashing, the requested
wake up time is acceptable; if it flashes, the time is not acceptable. Enter
the new time; if it is acceptable, the indicator goes on without flashing.

4

Press RLS to end the procedure.

To cancel a wake up call from an attendant console, follow these steps:
1

Press A. Wake Up.
The A. Wake Up indicator lights.
Note: If the displayed number is not the number requiring cancellation
of the wake-up call, dial the proper number.

2

Press the octothorpe
then press A. Wake Up again.
The A. Wake Up indicator goes off and the wake up request is canceled.
Note: If the indicator flashes quickly, no wake up call was found for the
dialed number. Press A. Wake Up again.
Press RLS to end the procedure.

If a guest has not responded after three wake-up call attempts, you’ll hear a
continuous buzz. The indicator will flash quickly. The extension number of
the room that has failed to respond will be displayed. Follow these steps:
1

Press A. Wake Up to cancel the notification.

2

Press RLS to end the procedure.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Auxiliary Processor Link
The Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) is a full-duplex asynchronous data link
capable of accommodating up to a 4800 baud rate. It is connected to the
Meridian SL- system through a Serial Data Interface (SDI) port.
This feature is currently used in conjunction with the Integrated Messaging
System package and the ACD Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
package.

Operating parameters
There are no feature requirements.

Feature interaction
None.

Feature packaging
Auxiliary Processor Link (APL), package 109, has no feature package
dependencies.

Feature

implementation
Not applicable.

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

34-2

Auxiliary Processor Link

1 features and services

Auxiliary Signaling
In some situations, customers require special auxiliary devices such as bells,
buzzers, or lights to be connected through the Meridian SL- system. These
devices are activated through a regular
Line Card and its associated
data block.

Operating parameters
A
ringer, or any other special signaling device that can be activated by
a 20 Hz ringing signal, can be equipped through the
Line Card.
ringers or equivalent devices can be configured on
A maximum of five
one TN. This limit depends on the device’s impedance to the 20 Hz ringing.

Feature interaction
Mixed
If the DN associated with the signaling device appears on
SL- or Meridian digital telephones, the telephone can answer or
into an active call.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic Xl system software.

Feature

implementation
The

data block is programmed in LD

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

35-2

Auxiliary Signaling

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Background Terminal
Hospitality and health care personnel use Background Terminal (BGD) to
enter. retrieve, and modify data associated with the following features:
Automatic Wake Up (AWU)
Room Status (RMS)
Message Registration (MR)
Call Party Name Display (CPND)
BGD helps monitor system operations by providing a visual display of
information changes. hard-copy backup, and traffic statistics.
For complete information, refer to the
(553-23 1
16).

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

36-2

Background Terminal

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
Xl 1 Release:

92 1231
Standard
All
37-1

Bridging
With Bridging, the same DN can appear on up to eight single-line telephones.
A maximum of five of these telephones can be equipped with ringers.
Incoming calls ring all telephones with a ringer connected and can be
answered at any of the single-line telephones.

Operating parameters
A maximum of five

ringers are allowed on one parallel loop.

Feature interaction
Privacy is lost when telephones are bridged. Any appearance of the DN can
enter the call by going off hook.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic

Feature

1 system software.

implementation
Not applicable.

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

37-2

Bridging

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Busy Lamp Field
There are two types of Busy Lamp Field (BLF) modules.
QMT3 Lamp Field Array
The QMT3 Lamp Field Array is an add-on module for SL- 1 telephones and
QCW attendant consoles. It displays the status of a specified 150 consecutive
Directory Numbers
defined in LD 15 (Standard Busy Lamp Field
(SBLF)). A maximum of two Lamp Field Arrays can be supported per
customer. Both Lamp Field Arrays in the customer group display status for
the same 150
Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module
The Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module (BLFKGM) is an add-on
module for the M 1250 or M2250 attendant consoles. It can be configured to
display the status of a specified 150 consecutive
(Standard Busy Lamp
100 at a time (Enhanced Busy Lamp Field (EBLF)).
Field (SBLF), or all
By monitoring the status, an attendant can tell a caller if the DN is busy prior
to extending the call.
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field (EBLF) Array, introduced in X 11 release 15,
for a customer. The
displays the
displays the status of all
status of 100
at a time on up to 63 M
attendant consoles.
Each of the Console Graphics Modules can display a different hundreds
group, while up to 20
can display the same hundreds group
simultaneously.
When the attendant extends a call, a hundreds group is displayed after enough
digits have been entered to determine the group. After a group has been
established, the
shows the status for each DN in that group.
Figure
1 shows an example of the Enhanced Busy Lamp Field (EBLF) on
the

features and services

553-3001-305

38-2

Busy Lamp Field

The EBLF continues to display the status of the hundreds group until another
group is determined or until the module is cleared. The display is updated
whenever the status of a DN in that group changes. The BLF is cleared when
the attendant dials a new series of digits or releases the call.
Figure 38-l shows the Standard Busy Lamp Field (SBLF) display on the
CGM. The first and last
in the displayed group are listed as START EXT
and END EXT. The START and END EXT
show the hundreds group
displayed. The top row on the CGM designates the tens group. The left side
to be
shows the ones group. Figure 38-1 shows the busy
and 3549.
Figure 38-1
Standard Busy Lamp Field on the

3400

START EXT:
END EXT:

3549

0 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

n

.

. . n Am

.

0
1

2
4
5
6
7

n

.

.

.

.

.
.

.
.

. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .

.

.

.

.

0 1 2 3 4

. . m ,

.

. . . . .

n

. m . .

.

A . . n n
.

n

.

n

.

.

.

m m . .

.

.

. . . . .
q Am . .
.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.
.

.
9

n

.

.

.

.

.

.

. n

. n n

= idle extension

n

= busy extension
idle extension with supplementary information
= busy extension with supplementary information
553-5109

Xi 1 features and services

Busy Lamp Field

38-3

Figure 38-2 shows a system monitored by the EBLF. Each telephone
represents a busy DN, listed beneath the telephone icon. The display screen
at the top of the module defines the hundreds group as 35. The CGM displays
within that group. The larger squares represent busy telephones
the busy
within the group, and the smaller squares represent idle
The attendant
can quickly see which telephones are busy and which are idle.
Figure 38-2
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field monitoring (example)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

38-4

Busy Lamp Field

Operating parameters
Enough hundreds groups must be defined to support the maximum number of
telephones to be monitored. The maximum number of hundreds is 99.
attendant console equipped with a
The EBLF requires an
It does not work with the earlier attendant consoles using a
QMT3 Lamp Field Array.
The SBLF and the EBLF are incompatible.
or 7 digits), but each
The EBLF supports mixed dialing plans
25XX and
hundreds group defined must be unique. For example,
cannot be configured in the same system. Any
group must
begin with something other than 25 because, in this case, the CGM would be
updated for
2500 through 2599.
Only 20 attendant consoles can be updated for the same hundreds group
simultaneously. If more than 20 consoles are monitoring the status of a single
hundreds group, only the first 20 are updated. The remaining consoles display
the earlier status, and an error message is output at this occurrence. (An
unlimited number of consoles can be updated when they display different
hundreds groups.)

Feature interactions
Not applicable.

Feature packaging
Busy Lamp Field Array (BLFA) is included in basic X11 system software.
EBLF requires X11 release 15 or later software and the

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Busy Lamp Field

Feature

38-5

implementation
Response to the following prompts in the listed overlays is required for this
feature to operate properly. In addition, at least one DN in each hundreds
group must be activated.

Estimate the memory required for Enhanced Busy Lamp Field trees.
REQ

CHG

Customer Data Block

TYPE
TYNM

Change

EBLF xx yy z

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field
xx = number of Customers to get EBLF
yy = Average number of Hundreds Groups (HGRP) per
customer
z = Average DN length (4, 5, 6, or 7)

1

Note: This overlay is required for ST and 21 systems.

LD15

Define the Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module options in the customer data

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

or

Include (exclude) Standard Busy Lamp Field
or

IBL, (XBL)

Include (exclude) Enhanced Busy Lamp Field

(XLF)

OPT

Lamp Field TN for first display console.

LFTN

Prompted only if OPT = ILF
LFTN

lscu

Lamp Field TN for second display console
Secondary TN if this is the attendant console

LFFD

xxx . . x

First DN for the Lamp Field Array
Prompted only if OPT = ILF

Xl features and services

Busy Lamp Field

38-6

Identify which attendant consoles have Enhanced Busy Lamp Field on the
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

ATT, 1250, 2250

Console type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

EBLF

BLFA, (BLFD)

Allow (Deny) Enhanced Busy Lamp Field
Prompted only if TYPE = 1250 or 2250

When the BLF is configured before the telephones are programmed, the
procedures in
and
are not required. As an alternative to
reentering data when the BLF is configured after the telephones, a sysload
associates the DN with the Hundreds Group (HGRP).
Activate DN hundreds groups for EBLF for each DN within each hundreds group.
CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

DN

xxx

x

Reenter Directory Number (no change necessary)

-Activate DN hundreds groups for EBLF for each DN within each hundreds group.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000

2009,

2216,

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx aaa

Reassign Directory Number (no change necessary)
xx = key number

aaa

DN type
= Directory Number

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Lamp Field

38-7

Feature operation
To display the status of extensions on the
steps:

(attendant), follow these

1

Press the SHIFT key, then the
mode.
The console is in the

2

Press the Mode key q
.
The
screen displays the main menu.

3

Dial 0 (zero).
The BLF/CGM displays the SBLF or the EBLF, depending on which
option is configured in the system software.

For complete feature operation, see

key.

Field/Console

user

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

38-8

Busy Lamp Field

features and services

553-3001-305

Call Detail Recording
Call Detail Recording (CDR) records information about selected calls for
accounting purposes. For each call, CDR identifies the calling and called
parties and notes the time and duration of the call. A record describing the
complete call is output by the Meridian 1 system when the call is terminated.
The following three recording options are available and can be specified by
the customer in any combination for each trunk route:
all outgoing calls
all outgoing toll calls
all incoming calls
For outgoing calls. all calls seizing a trunk in that route are recorded from the
time of trunk seizure, no matter how long or short the call is. If answer
supervision is allowed on the Meridian 1 system, calls placed over tandem tie
trunks are billed from the time the call is answered. The caller is not charged
the time it takes for dialing, digit outpulsing. or ringing.
For incoming calls, all calls answered by a telephone or attendant console are
recorded.
Three output options are available:
System terminal: CDR system terminal (CTY)
Information is output in ASCII serial format suitable for a system
terminal or equivalent device.
Magnetic tape: CDR Data Link (CLNK)
Information is output in binary format to a QCA 1 1 CDR machine for
downstream processing.
Both system terminal and magnetic tape.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

39-2

Call Detail Recording

The Meridian 1 system provides access to as many as 16 input/output ports,
which can include any combination of designated CDR system terminal
(CTY) or CDR Data Link (CLNK) ports. Because each customer on a
Meridian can access multiple CDR ports, system terminal and magnetic
tape CDR recording machines can be used at the same time for the same
customer.
Q record option X11 release 3 and later software provide an
integrated Automatic Call Distribution/Call Detail Recording (ACD/CDR)
call processing interface for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) applications
such as emergency 911 services and airline reservation systems.
For example, a call to an emergency 911 ACD queue is initially screened by
the Meridian 1 system. The caller’s name, location, and problem are entered
into the call profile on the customer’s computer. After this information is
to the appropriate public
collected, the call is transferred or
service division. When the division answers the call, the Meridian 1 system
informs the customer’s computer of the transfer or conference. The
customer’s computer then displays the call profile on a CRT at the remote
public service location.
The ACD/CDR call processing interface can be configured from a CDR TTY
(CTY) port. Connection records (records created by this option) include
Q records, for a connections between a trunk and an agent
R records, for calls transferred by an agent
F records, for conferences set up by an agent
Two-party calls generate only one record. Calls involving additional parties
generate multiple records. These records always show the trunk associated
with the original call, unless it is an internal call. A set of records identifies
all parties involved in the call. If the call is transferred to other parties,
however, only those involved at call termination are identified. The call
register has been increased from 23 to 32 digits to ensure that CDR records
do not wrap on the printer.

1 features and services

Call Detail Recording

39-3

The following information is recorded for each call:
customer number
calling party identification
terminating party identification
terminal number (if applicable)
date and time at start and end of call
call duration
digits dialed
tenant number
If a Meridian 1 user has placed a call using Basic Alternate Route
or
Selection/Network Alternate Route Selection
Consolidated Dialing Plan (CDP), the digit field shows the letter A followed
by the appropriate code and the dialed digits.
Note: If the user has accepted a route designated as expensive, the letter
E is shown instead of A.

Optional CDR software packages
CDR TTY (CTY) Outputs call records on one or more
compatible
devices. Provides a hard copy of the call records and can be used with the
other CDR optional packages.
CDR Data Link (CLNK) Formats call records for storage on magnetic tape.
Used with the single- or multi-port CDR storage system.
CDR with Charge Account (CHG) Bills calls directly to specific charge
account numbers.
Internal Call Detail Recording (ICDR) X11 release 10 and later software
Produces a CDR record (type L) for internal calls, including telephone and
attendant console calls.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

39-4

Call Detail Recording

One of two classes of service internal CDR allowed (ICDA) or internal
CDR denied (ICDD)
is assigned to each telephone or attendant console
requiring a CDR record. ICDA class of service generates internal call records
for the telephone. ICDD class of service disallows this new record type on a
per telephone basis. The class of service default is ICDD.
For an internal CDR record to be produced, the following criteria must be
met:
CDR must be activated.
All connecting parties must be telephones, attendant consoles, or internal
conferees.
One party or both parties must have ICDA class of service.
When a telephone disconnects from a call, the speech path between the two
parties is released. If an internal record is warranted, only one is produced,
even if both the originating and terminating telephones have ICDA class of
service. Also, when a conference loop is involved in the call, it is always
considered the originator.
Attendant consoles can also be assigned an ICDR class of service and are
treated like telephones.
When an attendant with ICDA class of service disconnects from a loop (for
an internal call), a maximum of two internal call records is produced, one for
the source and one for the destination.
An internal CDR record is produced when an internal call is released or
modified, or when a multiple-party call is released. The recorded duration of
the internal CDR excludes ringing time.
For details on internal CDR record and magnetic tape formats, refer to Call
(553-2631-100).
Detail Recording description
Outpulsed Digit Option, X11 release 12 and later stores outpulsed instead
of dialed digits to generate the CDR record. This option applies to calls using
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) or Network Alternate Route
Selection (NARS) software only.

features and services

553-3001-305

Call Detail Recording

39-5

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) and Route Selection-Automatic Number
Identification
are not affected by this option. With both BARS and
NARS packages, the CDR record follows the BARS format. For additional
information on CDR, refer to
(553-2631-100).
CDR Expansion, Xl 1 release 13 and later allow Directory Numbers
fields of CDR records to be expanded to accommodate up to seven digits.
Other fields (such as customer, route, and record type) are also expanded.
This option works in conjunction with DN Expansion (DNXP).

CDR Answer Supervision for Ground Start Trunks
(Xl 1 release 18 and later)
CDR Answer Supervision for Ground Start (and Loop Start) trunks detects
answer supervision on Ground and Loop Start trunks when sent as reverse
battery from the Central Office, and generates Call Detail Records based on
actual answer received rather than trunk seizure. A Ground Start trunk or a
North American Loop Start trunk with answer supervision begins Call Detail
Recording when reverse battery from the CO is detected.
Note I: Ground Start Answer Supervision is available with X11 release

18 and later. Loop Start Answer Supervision is available with Xl 1
release 14 and later.
Note 2: Trunks without answer supervision capability continue to

generate Call Detail Records when the trunk is seized.
(Terminating ID) field indicates that an answer was
The A in ther
received on an answer supervision trunk. Otherwise, a T appears in that field.
For Ground and Loop Start trunks, the A appears when answer supervision is
detected from the CO. Select this option with the AIA prompt in LD16.

Class of Service
To enable answer supervision, the Polarity Sensitive Pack (PSP)
of
Service must be set. PSP indicates that answer supervision is detected by
battery reversal on the CO trunk. If Polarity Insensitive Pack (PIP) is set,
battery reversal is not detected, and Call Detail Records begin at trunk
seizure.

features and services

553-3001-305

I

39-6

Call Detail Recording

Refer to for the various classes of service and their effects on answer
supervision and Call Detail Records. The table applies to both Ground and
Loop Start trunk types.
Table 39-1
Call Detail Record Generation with answer supervision
OAL
NO

OTL
NO

YES

CDR
affected

OAN

CDR begins

YES/NO

No CDR

N/A

NO

All calls

Trunk seizure

*

NO

YES

N/A

NO

Toll calls

Trunk seizure

YES

N/A

NO

YES

All calls

Reverse battery for answered calls;
Trunk seizure for unanswered calls

NO

YES

NO

YES

Toll calls

Reverse battery for answered calls;
Trunk seizure for unanswered calls

YES

YES

Answered
calls

Reverse battery

YES

YES

Toll calls

Reverse battery

YES
NO

YES

Note: If OAL and OTL are NO, then OAN is always NO.
Legend:
PSP = Answer Supervision CLS for Ground Start and Loop Start trunks
CDR for outgoing calls
OAL
OTL
CDR for outgoing toll calls
OAN
CDR for answered calls only
Not applicable. The option can be YES or NO, and does not affect CDR.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

39-7

Call Detail Recording

Operating parameters
The capacity of the CDR system is limited by two factors:
the maximum rate at which information can be output to the
or input to the CDR magnetic tape unit

devices

the storage capacity of the magnetic tape unit
Customer-provided auxiliary processors do not have to be modified to
process an internal CDR record.
Internal CDR data input is not supported through Attendant Administration.
When configuring a Ground Start trunk with the PSP class of service, it
should be confirmed that the Central Office provides reverse battery for
ground start trunks. Otherwise, CDR records will NOT be generated.

Feature interactions
Automatic Call Distribution
If ICDR criteria are satisfied, internal records are produced for ACD
telephones on completion of an internal or inter-position call. In all cases,
the ACD position ID is shown on the originator or terminator identifier
field of the internal record.
When the supervisor releases Observe Agent, internal records show that
the ACD agent and the internal party are connected with the conference
loop.
When the supervisor activates or releases Answer Emergency, the
interactions are similar to those with Observe Agent and internal records
are produced.

1 features and services

39-8

Call Detail Recording

Call Modification
If ICDR criteria are satisfied, internal CDR records are produced in the
following situations:
.

when a party joins or leaves a conference

.

when conference parties leave a conference (the last two parties
remaining in the connection are treated as a normal call)

.

when a call is transferred

.

when a call is parked

.

when a party is disconnected from a group call

.

when an attendant activates Busy Verify from a console

Directory Number Expansion
If the DNXP package is equipped without the CDRE package, CDR
records are generated in the unexpanded format and the DN fields
contain only the trailing four digits of a DN.
Integrated Messaging System
When an internal call is routed to Integrated Messaging System (IMS)
and ICDR criteria are satisfied, the IMS position ID is displayed on the
terminator identifier field of the internal record.
Multiple Appearance Directory Number
If the Auxiliary ID is turned on (through LD1.5) and originating or
terminating parties or both have Multiple Appearance Directory
the Terminal Number (TN) is printed in the
Numbers
Auxiliary Identifier field of the internal record.
Override
When party A overrides party B while B is in conversation with party C,
the speech path between B and C is disconnected, and a three-party
connection is established. Therefore, when party A releases, multiple
internal records are produced (if the ICDR criteria are satisfied). These
records show the conference loop with each individual party. Also, when
an attendant releases from overriding on a Do Not Disturb (DND)
telephone, internal records are produced (if the ICDR criteria are
satisfied).

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Detail Recording

39-9

Feature packaging
Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4, requires at least one of the
following:
Call Detail Recording on TTY (CTY), package 5
Call Detail Recording on Data Link (CLNK), package 6
Call Detail Recording on Teletype (CTY), package 5, requires:
Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4
Call Detail Recording on Data Link (CLNK), package 6, requires:
Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4
Charge Account for CDR (CHG), package 23, requires:
Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4
Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24
ACD CDR Queue record (CDRQ), package 83, requires:
Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4
Basic ACD (BACD), package 40
Internal CDR (ICDR), package 108, requires:
Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4
CDR Expansion (CDRE), package 151, requires:
Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4
DN Expansion (DNXP), package 1.50

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Detail Recording

39-10

Feature
LD17
REQ

implementation

Define Call Detail Recording link and priority.
CHG

Change

TYPE

CFN

PARM

Yes

To allow changes to system parameters

PCDR

Yes, (No)

Priority is or is not given to the CDR recording; Yes = an idle
call register is selected before call processing

Yes

Allow changes to

NEW TTY O-5

Add a CDR port

CDNO

o-15

SDI card number

DENS

SDEN, DDEN,
4DEN

SDI card ports

USER

CDL

CDR port connects to a data link

CTY

CDR port connects to a system terminal

Yes, (No)

Calling line ID in the CDR; prompted only if
CDR = Yes and
package is equipped

features and services

Configuration record

553-3001-305

devices

Call Detail Recording

39-11

Call Detail Recording link and priority for X11 release 18 and later.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CFN

Configuration record

PARM

Yes

To allow changes to system parameters

PCDR

Yes, (No)

Priority is or is not given to the CDR recording; Yes = an idle
call register is selected before call processing

Yes

Allow changes to

NEW TTY O-l 5

Add a CDR port

CTYP

aaaa

Card type
aaaa = DCHI, MSDL, MSPS, SDI,

DNUM

o-1 5

Device number printed automatically (same as
number)

USER

CDL

CDR port connects to a data link

CTY

CDR port connects to a system terminal

Yes, (No)

Calling line ID in the CDR; prompted only if
CDR = Yes and
package is equipped

devices

1 features and services

553-3001-305

39-12

Call Detail Recording

Define Call Detail Recording for a customer.
REQ

CHG

TYPE

Change
Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CDR

Yes, (No)

Enable or disable CDR

Yes, (No)

Auxiliary identification (TN) for multiple appearance
or is not included in CDR records; enter Yes if there are
multiple appearance
that exist as prime

TRCR

Yes, (No)

Enable or disable carriage return after each ACD CDR
connection record; when TRCR = Yes, all CDR system
terminal ports in the system are affected.

CDPR

Yes, (No)

CDP in CDR; prompted only if CDP package is equipped
Yes = trunk access code is inserted before the dialed digits
No = distant steering code or trunk steering code is
replaced by trunk access code

MCR

Yes, (No)

Mini-CDR equipped

PORT

o-1 5

CDR port number



Stop the PORT prompt

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

is

Call Detail Recording

LD16

39-13

Gather data for each trunk route for which Call Detail Recording is to be applied.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

RDB

Route data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-51 1

Route number

CDR

Yes, (No)

Enable or disable CDR for the route

INC

Yes, (No)

Enable or disable CDR for incoming calls

QREC

Yes, (No)

Enable or disable the CDR connection record for ACD
records

OAL

Yes, (No)

Enable or disable CDR for outgoing calls (tie)

AIA

Yes, (No)

Identify answered calls

OTL

Yes, (No)

Enable or disable CDR for outgoing toll calls; prompted if
OAL = No and ROUT =
CO, DID, FX, or WATS

OAN

(Yes), No

CDR allowed or not allowed on all answered calls;
prompted if OAL or OTL = Yes

OPD

Yes, (No)

CDR with outpulsed digits; prompted if OAL or OTL = Yes
No = put dialed digits into CDR
Yes = put outpulsed digits into CDR

Enable/disable the recording of authorization codes in Call Detail Recording.
REQ

Change

TYPE

AUB

Authcode data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

SPWD

xxxx

Secure data password

ACDR

Yes, (No)

Enable or disable the recording of authorization codes in
CDR

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Detail Recording

39-14

Internal Call Detail Recording for
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

ICDA, (ICDD)

Allow (Deny)

-Add/change Internal Call Detail Recording for
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

telephones.

class of service

and Meridian digital telephones.

aaaa =

, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018,
2317, 2616, 3000
TN

LD12

lscu

Terminal Number

ICDA, (ICDD)

Allow (Deny)

class of service

Add/change Internal Call Detail Recording for attendant consoles.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

ATT,

Console type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number
Allow (Deny)

(ICDD)

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

class of service

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

93 10 31
Standard
All
40-l

Forward All Calls
Call Forward All Calls (CFW) automatically forwards incoming calls to
another destination, within or outside the Meridian 1 system. Only calls to the
Prime DN or any single-appearance DN on the telephone are forwarded.
Outgoing calls can still be placed from the telephone when Call Forward is
active.
1 release 19 and later provides the following additional capabilities. First,
it supports selectively activating Call Forward depending on the source of the
originating party. With the Internal Call Forward (ICF) feature, the user can
cause only internal calls to be forwarded. Second, the Call Forward Reminder
Tone (CFRT) presents special dialtones on
telephones with CFW
active. One tone indicates that CFW is active; a second indicates that there is
a message waiting for the telephone with CFW active.
Call Forward All Calls, as well as Internal Call Forward, is assigned on a
per-telephone basis. SL-1 and digital telephones must be equipped with
separate key/lamp pairs to allow the activation and deactivation of each
feature. Customers can specify the length of the destination number in LD 11.
Options are 4, 8, 12,
or 23 digits. If you enter another number for the
length, the system rounds to the nearest acceptable choice. The default is 16
digits.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

40-2

Call Forward All Calls

When using Multiple Appearance
call redirection is
determined based on the TN order in your DN block. To determine the TN
or LD22 (TYPE = DNB). When a call
order, print the DN block from
comes in to a MADN, the system begins a search to determine how the call
will be handled. Using the TN list you printed, the system performs the
following search, beginning at the bottom of the TN list, and working up.
1

Search for the first Prime DN appearance of the MADN with Call
Forward All Calls activated.

2

If there are no Prime DN appearances, the first secondary DN appearance
with Call Forward All Calls Activated.
Note: The search does not necessarily determine the lowest numerical
TN. The search starts at the bottom of the TN l i s t .

Operating parameters
The forwarding of a call depends on the access restrictions assigned to the
telephones and the trunks involved in the call. If call forwarding results in a
connection that is not permitted by the assigned access restrictions, the
incoming call is not forwarded.
The customer can specify which telephone determines the successful
completion of the call: the originating telephone or the forwarding telephone.
Internal Call Forward requires a programmable feature key. Therefore,
Internal Call Forward is not supported on BRI telephones.
Call Forward Reminder Tone does not apply to telephones such as the SL-1
that have a visual indication of active CFW status.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward All Calls

40-3

Call Forward Reminder Tone requires the presence of either a
(XCT) card or a Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) card.
Table 40-l shows the available card types and their markets.
Table 40-l
Tone and Cadence Card Types
Card Type

Identifier

International,
including
North America

XCT
TDS

TDS

Market

QPC251

North America

Japan

Feature interaction
X11 release 12 and later provides an option in LD15 to allow or disallow
telephones to program Call Forward All Calls to a Trunk Access Code. See
Call Forward External Deny.
Paging Calls that originate on a tie trunk to a telephone that is redirected to a
paging route are blocked.
Multiple-Appearance Redirection Prime X11 release 18 and later support
Multiple-Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP). This affects how call
redirection operation is defined. Refer to the MARP module in this document
for details.

Feature packaging
Internal Call Forward requires the 500 Set Features
(package 73) for
telephones, and the Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) (package 139).
Call Forward Reminder Tone is packaged with the Call Forward All Calls
feature.

features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward All Calls

40-4

Feature implementation
On a
type telephone, the user accesses the Call
All Calls
and Internal Call Forward features by dialing either the SPRE plus the feature
code, or the appropriate Flexible Feature Codes
On a digital
telephone, the user accesses each feature via its feature key.
Activating the features requires service changes to Overlays 15,
57.
Define Class of Service for Call Forward All Calls
REQ

Change

CHG

TYPE

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

(CFO), CFF

CFO
Calling party Class of Service is active during
Call Forward All Calls
CFF
Forwarding party Class of Service is active
during Call Forward All Calls

CFTA

(No), Yes

No = deny telephones to Call Forward All Calls to a
Trunk Access Code (default is no)
Yes = allow telephones to Call Forward All Calls to a
Trunk Access Code

OPT

(CFRD), CFRA

Call Forward Reminder Tone denied (CFRD) for
telephones
Call Forward Reminder Tone allowed (CFRA) for
50012500 telephones

1 features and services

553-3001-305

and

Call Forward All Calls

Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for
CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CFW xx yyyy...y

Allow Call Forward All Calls

40-5

telephones

xx
maximum number of digits (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 23) in
the Call Forward destination number (default is 16
digits)
yyyy = number where calls are forwarded
Note: YYYY cannot be entered from the maintenance
terminal. When the telephone information is printed in
shows the call forward number.

FTR

ICF xx

Allow Internal Call Forward
xx = maximum number of digits (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 23) in
the Call Forward destination number (default is 16
digits)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

40-6

Call Forward All Calls

-Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for digital telephones
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2216,
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx CFW yy

Define Call Forward All Calls
xx = key number; M2317 must use key 22
yy = maximum number of digits (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 23) in
the Call Forward All Calls destination number (default is
16 digits)
zzzz = number where calls are forwarded

KEY

xx ICF yy zzzz

Define Internal Call Forward
xx = key number
yy = maximum number of digits (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 23) in
the Call Forward All Calls destination number (default is
16 digits)
zzzz = number where calls are forwarded

Add/change Flexible Feature Codes for Internal Call Forward
REQ

NEW, CHG, OUT

Add, change, or remove an FFC table

TYPE

FFC

Flexible Feature Code
Access code for Internal CFW Activate

CODE

Access code for Internal CFW Deactivate
Access code for Internal CFW Verify

and

xxxx

Internal CFW Activate Code (Note 1)

xxxx

Internal CFW Deactivate Code (Note 1)

xxxx

Internal CFW Verify Code

may share the same code.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward All Calls

40-7

Add/change Flexible Feature Codes for Internal Call Forward
REQ

NEW, CHG, OUT

Add, change, or remove an FFC table

TYPE

FFC

Flexible Feature Code
Access code for Internal CFW Activate

CODE

Access code for internal CFW Deactivate
Access code for Internal CFW Verify

and

xxxx

Internal CFW Activate Code (Note 1)

xxxx

Internal CFW Deactivate Code (Note 1)

xxxx

Internal CFW Verify Code

may share the same code.

Feature operation
To forward all calls from an SL-1 or digital telephone:
1 Press Forward.
2

Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

3 Press Forward.
To forward internal calls only from an SL-1 or digital telephone:
1

Press Internal Call Forward.

2

Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

3

Press Internal Call Forward.

To cancel Call Forward All Calls:
1 Press Forward.
To cancel Internal Call Forward:
1

Press Internal Call Forward.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

40-8

Call Forward All Calls

To forward calls from a

telephone:

1

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74 (500 telephone)
or lift the handset and dial (2500 telephone).
or lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Allowed FFC.

2

Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

3 Hang up.
To forward internal calls from a

telephone:

1

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (500 telephone)
(2500 telephone)
or lift the handset and dial
or lift the handset and dial the Internal Call Forward FFC.

2

Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

3 Hang up.
To cancel Call Forward All Calls:
1

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74 (500 telephone)
or lift the handset and dial (2500 telephone)
or lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Deny FFC.

To cancel Internal Call Forward:
Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (500 telephone)
(2500 telephone)
or lift the handset and dial
or lift the handset and dial the Internal Call Forward Deny FFC.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:Status:
Release:

93 08 01
Standard
All
41-1

Call Forward Busy
Call Forward Busy (CFB) automatically routes incoming DID calls to the
attendant console when a telephone is busy. This capability is allowed or
denied in the Class of Service
of the telephone.

Operating parameters
On incoming DID calls, Hunting takes precedence, followed by Call Waiting,
then Call Forward Busy. In busy situations, the call hunts if the telephone has
Hunting specified.

Feature interaction
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Call Forward Busy.
Call Waiting for
telephones
and Call Waiting Allowed CLS and a Call
If a telephone has
Waiting key, calls are forwarded to the attendant when the telephone is
busy and has another call waiting.
Call Waiting for multi-line telephones
If Class of Service allows CFB and Call Waiting Allowed, and the
telephone has a call waiting key, calls do not forward to the attendant
when the telephone is busy and another call is waiting.
When a telephone is busy, an incoming call hunts only if Hunting is
allowed for that telephone. If all the steps in the hunt group are busy, and
Call Waiting is not allowed, the call forwards to the attendant console.
Multiple-Appearance Directory Numbers
With Xl 1 release 18 and later, Hunting is controlled by the MADN
Redirection Prime (MARP) TN. See the description for MARP in this
document.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward Busy

With X11 release 17 and earlier, call redirection parameters are derived
from the TN data block (LD20 TNB) of the first TN in the DN block for
that DN (LD22 DNB) with hunting control enabled. Hunting control is
enabled by Hunting allowed (HTA) class of service for
telephones. For SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones, the DN key must
also be less than or equal to the Last Hunt Key (LHK).
When a telephone is service changed, the TN is moved to the beginning
of the DN list regardless of the TN’s numerical value. This telephone
remains at the
of the list until another telephone is service
changed.
Note: If all the telephones in the MADN group are SL-1 and/or
Meridian digital telephones, ringing telephones are placed at the
beginning of the DN list, while non-ringing telephones are placed at the
end.
If a MADN appears in a group with several telephone types, the set type
affects where the TN appears in the list.
telephones are listed
at the beginning, and SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones are listed in
numerical TN order at the end of the list. A service change to a
telephone moves its TN to the beginning of the list. A service change t o
an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone moves it to the end of the list. Call
redirection follows the TN order from beginning to end.
Night Service
When the system is in night service, DID calls forwarded by Call
Forward Busy are routed to the specified night number. If the night
telephone is busy, subsequent calls receive busy tone.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward Busy

Feature
LD15

41-3

implementation

Add/change a Call Forward Busy Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) on attendant consoles.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

xx

Customer Number

ICI

xx CFB

Add a Call Forward Busy ICI key; xx = O-1 9

Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

FBA, (FBD)

Allow (Deny) Call Forward Busy

-Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

FBA, (FBD)

Allow (Deny) Call Forward Busy

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

41-4

Call Forward Busy

features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
Release:

92 1231
Standard
10
42-1

Call Forward by Call Type
Call Forward Call Type (CFCT) routes calls receiving no answer or busy
signal to separately defined
based on the type of incoming call. The two
types of incoming calls are internal and external.
An internal call is defined as a station-to-station call, a Direct Inward System
Access
or an incoming call over a trunk route class marked as
internal. An external call is an incoming call over a trunk route class marked
as external. The trunk route data block (LD
allows routes to be defined as
internal or external for this feature.
Four options are available at the customer level for Call Forward No Answer:
FDN, ATT, NO, and HNT. Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled
only when the FDN and HNT options are chosen. If Call Forward by Call
Type (CFCT) is not activated, the four options function as they did prior to
Xl release 10.
In LD Call Forward No Answer is defined by FNAT for external non-DID
calls and by FNAL for internal calls. FNAD continues to define Call Forward
No Answer for DID trunk calls.
CFCT is allowed or denied for each telephone in LD IO or LD 1 with Class
If CFCT is allowed (CFTA), the forwarding
of Service
destination is also defined in LD 10 or LD 1
Once enabled, CFCT requires no intervention. How the system initiates Call
Forward by Call Type is described below.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

42-2

Call Forward by Call Type

When a call is presented to a telephone, the telephone is checked for the
appropriate Class of Service (HTA, FNA, CFTA). The incoming call is then
checked to determine if it is a telephone, DISA, or trunk call. If it is a trunk
call, the trunk route is checked to determine whether the call should be treated
as an internal or external call. After these checks, internal calls are forwarded
to the FDN or Hunt DN of the telephone. External calls are forwarded to the
EFD or EHT DN of the telephone.
The order in which the system handles no answer and busy calls is an
important consideration when implementing this feature. The order of
precedence is listed below.
Calls to telephones that do not answer:
Call Forward All Calls
Message Waiting
Call Forward No Answer
Attendant Recall
Calls to busy telephones:
Call Forward All Calls
Hunting
Call Waiting or Camp-on
Message Waiting Forward Busy
Call Forward Busy

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward by Call Type

42-3

Operating parameters
Attendant Administration does not support the entry of the new EFD and
EHT Class of Service required for Call Forward by Call Type.
The following trunk routes can be defined as internal or external call types for
CFCT: CO, DID, FX, ATVN, CCA, tie, WATS, and CSA.
Incoming DISA calls are always treated as internal calls irrespective of the
trunk route class mark defined for the incoming trunk.
If an incoming call has been modified by Call Forward All Calls or Hunting,
the Class of Service and forwarding DN are obtained from the dialed DN.
This applies when Call Forward No Answer specified at the customer level is
HNT or FDN.

Feature interaction
Attendant
An attendant-extended call is classified internal or external by the
originating telephone or class mark of the trunk type. This is the case
whether or not the attendant has released before forwarding occurs.
Automatic Timed Recall
Calls eligible for Flexible Call Forward No Answer treatment, and
handled by Call Forward by Call Type, use the Call Forward No Answer
timer in the customer data block as the recall timer for attendant extended
calls. Irrespective of the relative timeout for Automatic Timed Recall,
the ringing continues as long as allowed by the Call Forward No Answer
Timer.
Call Forward All Calls
If a call is unanswered at the forwarded DN, the telephone that has Call
Forward All Calls activated is checked for the Class of Service and the
call forward DN. If a chain of call forwarding occurs, the Class of
Service and the forward DN for Call Forward No Answer are obtained
from the first telephone in the chain. This applies when FDN and HNT
have been specified for Call Forward No Answer at the customer level.
Prior to
release 10, when HNT was specified for Call
Forward No Answer, the Class of Service and Hunt DN for Call Forward
No Answer were obtained from the last telephone in the chain.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

42-4

Call Forward by Call Type

Call Forward No Answer
The sequence for forwarding unanswered calls is Call Forward All Calls,
Message Waiting, Call Forward No Answer, then Attendant Recall (if
the call is attendant-extended). The same sequence is used when Call
Forward by Call Type is active for the customer.
Call Transfer/Network Call Transfer
Calls modified by Call Transfer and Network Call Transfer receive
CFCT treatment. If party A (telephone or trunk) calls party B, and B
transfers to party C, the forwarding DN and Class of Service are obtained
from party C.
Conference
Calls modified by Conference receive CFCT treatment for the
telephone. If party A calls party B, and B tries to conference
in party C, the forwarding DN and Class of Service are that of C. For
example, Joan and Bob are in conversation, and they try to conference in
is not at his desk, so the attempted conference call is sent to
the destination associated with Mack’s telephone.
DID
Eligibility of a DID call for Call Forward by Call Type is determined by
allowing or denying the type of call in the customer data block (FNAD
prompt). The decision to treat a DID call as internal or external is made
on a trunk route basis.
Message Center
Message Center uses the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN)
of the called telephone to route no answer calls. If CFCT is enabled,
unanswered internal calls use the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN
(FDN) to route a call. Unanswered external calls use the External
Flexible DN (EFD) to route a call.
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers
Call redirection parameters like Call Forward No Answer are derived
from the TN data block of the prime appearance of the called MADN. If
there is more than one prime appearance, the parameters are selected
from the last TN in the DN block.
If more than one prime appearance of a MADN exists, the following
information must be considered prior to configuring call redirection
parameters for

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward by Call Type

42-5

The DNB organizes MADN information in numerical TN order. The TN
with the highest numerical value (000-O-06-03) is placed at the
beginning of the list. The list then continues in descending order with the
lowest numerical TN (000-O-03-01) at the end of the list. Service change
activity affects the organization of the DN list as described in the
following paragraphs.
.

If a telephone is service changed, its TN is moved to the beginning
of the DN list, irrespective of the numerical value. This telephone
remains at the beginning of the list until another service change or a
sysload.

.

If a DN appears on
SL-1, and Meridian digital telephones,
the
telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the top
and Meridian digital telephones are listed in
of the list.
numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A service change to a
telephone moves its TN to the beginning of the list. A
service change to an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone moves its
TN to the end of the list.

.

A sysload restructures the list back to numerical TN order, with
telephones at the top and SL-1 and Meridian digital
telephones at the bottom. Call redirection parameters continue to be
derived as described in the preceding paragraphs.

Second Level Call Forward No Answer
After a DN is rung and Call Forward by Call Type is activated, a
forwarded call is allowed Second Level Call Forward No Answer. This
is based on the originating party’s call type if the currently ringing
telephone has Second Level Call Forward No Answer activated.

Feature packaging
Call Forward by Call Type is included in basic X11 system software.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

42-6

Call Forward by Call Type

Feature

implementation

Enable Call Forward by Call Type for a customer.
CHG

Change

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

FNAD

(HNT), ATT, NO, FDN

Treatment for incoming DID calls

FNAT

(HNT), ATT, NO, FDN

Treatment for incoming external calls

FNAL

(HNT), ATT, NO, FDN

Treatment for incoming internal calls

REQ

Number of ringing cycles for CFNA

CFNA

Define a trunk route as internal or external for Call Forward by Call Type.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

xxx

Route number

RCLS

INT, (EXT)

Route class marked as internal or external

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward by Call Type

-Enable Call Forward by Call Type for

42-7

telephones.

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

HUNT

xxxx

Hunt DN for internal calls

CFTA, (CFTD)

Allow (Deny) Call Forward by Call Type Telephone must
have Hunting (HTA), and Call Forward No Answer
(FNA) allowed.

EFD xxxx

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for external calls

EHT xxxx

Hunt DN for external calls

FDN xxxx

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for internal calls

FTR

-Enable Call Forward by Call Type for SL-1, M3000, and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =
2616, 3000

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

FDN

xxxx

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for internal calls

CFTA, (CFTD)

Allow (Deny) Call Forward by Call
have Hunting (HTA), and Call Forward No Answer
(FNA) allowed

EFD

xxxx

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for external calls

HUNT

xxxx

Hunt DN for internal calls

000

Short Hunt for internal calls

xxxx

Hunt DN for external calls

000

Short Hunt for external calls

xx

Last hunt key number for internal and external calls

EHT

LHK

Xl 1 features and services

must

553-3001-305

42-8

Call Forward by Call Type

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward External Deny
This enhancement provides the option to restrict, on a per-telephone basis, the
DN that can be programmed for Call Forward All Calls to internal
only.
are defined as:
Internal
that terminate on a

telephone

that terminate on an SL- or Meridian digital telephone
that terminate on a data terminal defined in LD 10 or LD 1
Attendant

or Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) local attendant

Listed
Message Center

as defined in LD23

External
include (but are not limited to) trunk access codes, Coordinated
Dialing Plan (CDP) steering codes, Basic and Network Alternate Route
access codes, ESN Location Codes, non-message
Selection
center ACD numbers, Call Park numbers, and Direct Inward Services Access
numbers.
When Call Forward External Deny is enabled for a telephone:
telephone to an external
a user trying to forward calls from a
DN receives overflow tone. The telephone is not call forwarded.
a user trying to forward calls from an SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephone
to an external DN receives overflow tone and the lamp associated with
the Call Forward key of the telephone flashes. The telephone is not call
forwarded.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

43-2

Call Forward External Deny
a user trying to forward calls from a Meridian digital to a display

telephone to an external DN receives overflow tone. The telephone is not
call forwarded and one of the following messages is displayed:
Release and try again (M2317 telephones)
Release, check, and try again
telephones)

a user trying to forward calls from a data module to an external DN does
not receive overflow tone. Calls are not forwarded and one of the
following messages is displayed:
Invalid data forward number (M2317 telephones)
Data calls not forwarded (M3000 telephones)

Operating parameters
External
cannot be used with Call Forward All Calls if Call Forward
External Deny is enabled for the telephone.
Both ESN access codes and CDP steering codes are considered external
and cannot be used as a Call Forward All Calls DN if Call Forward External
is denied for the telephone.
The number of digits specified in
or
for the Call Forward DN
must be equal to or greater than the number of digits of any other internal DN.
Attendant Administration cannot change Call Forward External Deny Class
of Service.

Feature interaction
Call Forward All Calls
This feature overrides other Call Forward All Calls parameters. For
example, if Call Forward to Trunk Access Code (CFTA) is allowed for
the customer, but Call Forward External Deny (CFXD) is enabled for the
telephone, CFXD takes precedence and call forwarding to a trunk access
code is denied.
Network Call Forward
Call Forward External Deny restricts a telephone from being forwarded
unconditionally to a number that is not on the home switch. Therefore, it
and the Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Access (ISDN
PRA) feature Network Call Forward are mutually exclusive.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward External Deny

43-3

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic

Feature

1 system software.

implementation

Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

telephones.

aaaa =
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

(CFXA), CFXD

Allow (Deny) Call Forward to an external DN

-Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa = SLI
2216, 2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

(CFXA), CFXD

Allow (Deny) Call Forward to an external DN

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

43-4

Call Forward External Deny

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward, Internal Calls
The Internal Call Forward (Internal CFW) feature operates with Xl release
calls to the Internal
19 and allows you to selectively forward only
CFW DN.
Internal CFW is activated/deactivated on a per telephone basis and is user
programmable when Internal CFW is activated. On an SL-1 or digital
telephone, the Internal CFW feature (ICF) key is the only access method. On
a
type telephone, Internal CFW can be accessed by either dialing
or by the appropriate
SPRE and the Internal CFW feature code
Flexible Feature Codes
All internal calls terminating on the primary (or any single appearance) DN
of an Internal CFW active telephone are automatically forwarded to the
programmed Internal CFW DN (refer to the operating parameters section for
information on primary and secondary, and single and multiple appearance

An internal call is defined by the Internal CFW feature as one of the following:
An extension-to-extension call
A Direct Inward System Access (DISA) call
An attendant originated call
A conference call
A Group Call feature initiated call
An incoming trunk call over a trunk route classified as internal (LD 16
where RCLS = INT)
An incoming ISDN trunk call using private numbering
Non-internal calls are not affected by the Internal CFW feature.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

44-2

Call Forward, Internal Calls

Parameters
CFW All Calls takes precedence over Internal CFW, but is not a prerequisite
for the Internal CFW feature. For example, if a telephone is already CFW All
Calls active, it will not be allowed to activate Internal CFW at the same time.
Internal CFW can only be activated if CFW All Calls is explicitly
deactivated.
Also, if Internal CFW is active when trying to activate CFW All Calls,
Internal CFW will automatically be deactivated.
Internal CFW operation is consistent with the CFW All Calls feature.
Therefore, when an SL-l/digital telephone activates Internal CFW, the
will become Internal CFW activated:
following
The primary DN (key 0), regardless of whether the DN is multiple
appearance or not.
All secondary

that are single appearance.

Consequently, if all the appearances of a multiple appearance DN are on
will never
non-primary SL-l/digital telephone keys, calls to these
receive Internal CFW treatment.
type telephone activates Internal CFW, regardless of
When a
whether the DN is multiple appearance or not, Internal CFW becomes
activated.
Internal CFW supports only the voice line on digital telephones that have both
voice and data options.
On 2317 and M3000 telephones, the CFW programming screen (invoked by
pressing the CFW soft key), is not displayed when the ICF key is pressed.
Instead, the screen displays the previously programmed ICF number.
If an Internal CFW call is rejected, a display message is given if the telephone
is digital and has a digit display module. (This display message is the same as
that given to a failed CFW All Calls activation request.) Otherwise, overflow
tone is given.
Internal CFW is not maintained through a sysload.
Internal CFW is not supported on BRI telephones.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward, Internal Calls

Feature interactions
Attendant Administration This feature does not support Internal CFW.
Attendant Busy Verify When the attendant is using this feature to call a
telephone that is Internal CFW active, the call will not receive Internal
treatment.
Attendant Extended Calls When the attendant extends a call on its SRC key
to a telephone that is Internal CFW active, the call on the SRC key will only
receive Internal CFW treatment if it is an internal call.
Attendant Night Service When a call to the attendant is redirected to the
Attendant Night DN that is defined on an Internal CFW active telephone, the
call will only receive Internal CFW treatment if it is an internal call.
Attendant Overflow If Attendant Ovefflow redirects an internal call to a
telephone that is Internal CFW active, the call will remain in the attendant
queue, and will not receive Internal CFW treatment.
Call Forward Reminder Tone
The Call Forward Reminder Tones apply to Internal CFW.
If Call Forward Reminder Tone Allowed (CFRA), then whenever a PBX
telephone that is Internal CFW is activated goes off-hook to originate a call,
the telephone will hear the CFW Reminder Tone.
If the customer option is set to Call Forward Reminder Tone Denied
(CFRD), then whenever a PBX telephone that is internal CFW activated
goes off-hook to originate a call, it will hear the normal dial tone (DIAL).
If the customer option is set to Call Forward Reminder Tone Allowed
then whenever a PBX telephone that is Internal
(CFRA, package
CFW is activated goes off-hook to originate a call, the telephone will
hear either the Call Forward Dial Tone (CFDT) or the Call
Forward/Message Waiting Dial Tone (CFMW).
If the customer option is set to Call Forward Reminder Tone Denied
activated
(CFRD), then whenever a PBX telephone that is internal
goes off-hook to originate a call, it will hear either the normal dial tone
(DIAL) or the Message Waiting Dial Tone (MWDT).

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

44-4

Call Forward, internal Calls

Internal CFW takes precedence over the following:
Call Waiting
Camp-on
Do Not Disturb
Hunting
Remote Call Forward Remote CFW Activate (RCFA), Remote CFW
Verify (RCFV)
can only be
Deactivate (RCFD), and Remote
used to access CFW All Calls; they cannot be used to access Internal
CFW.

Feature packaging
Internal CFW requires the following packages:
Package 1 (CFW package required but does not have to be enabled)
Package 73 for access to
Package 139 to implement FFC

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

type telephones

Call Forward, Internal Calls

Feature

implementation

LDlO-Add/change Internal CFW for

type telephones.

NEW

Add a new telephone.

CHG

Modify an existing telephone.

TYPE

500

500 or 2500 type telephone.

FTR

ICF

Allow Internal CFW for the specified telephone and the
maximum forward DN length.

REQ

44-5

Remove Internal CFW from the telephone.

-Add/change

TYPE

Internal Calls for SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones.

NEW

Add a new telephone.

CHG

Modify an existing telephone.

xxxx

Telephone

type.

2317, 2616.
KEY

xx ICF

Define an Internal CFW feature key for the telephone.
The command consists of:
xx = key number
ICF = feature mnemonic
4-23 = the maximum forward DN length
nnnn = forward DN

xx null

Remove function/feature from a key.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

44-6

LD57
REQ

TYPE

Call Forward, Internal Calls

Add/change Internal CFW for

type telephones using FFC.

NEW

Add a new FFC table.

CHG

Modify an existing FFC table.

OUT

Remove an existing FFC code.

FFC

Flexible Feature Code.
Access Code for Internal CFW Activate.

CODE

Access Code for Internal CFW Deactivate.
Access Code for Internal CFW Verify.
xxxx

Internal CFW Activate code.

xxxx

Internal CFW Deactivate code.

xxxx

Internal CFW Verify code.

Feature operation
SL-l/digital telephone
To forward internal calls from an SL-l/digital telephone:
1

Press the ICF key.

2

Dial the number

3

Press the ICF key.

calls are to be forwarded.

To cancel Internal CFW from an SL-l/digital telephone:
1

Xl 1 features and services

Press the ICF key.

553-3001-305

Call Forward, Internal Calls

50012500 type telephone
To forward internal calls from a
1

44-7

type telephone:

I

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (Internal CFW feature code)
Lift the handset and dial the Internal CFW Activate (ICFA) FFC.

2

Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

To cancel Internal CFW from a
1

Related

type telephone:

I

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (Internal CFW feature code)
-orLift the handset and dial the Internal CFW Deactivate (ICFD) FFC.

modules
When using Internal CFW, you may want to refer to the following related
1 release 19 features:
Call Forward Reminder Tone (CFRT)
Refer to the CFW All Calls module for a description of the Call Forward
Reminder Tone (CFRT) feature.
User Selectable Call Redirection
Refer to the User Selectable Call Redirection (USCR) module for a
description of this feature.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

44-8

Call Forward, Internal Calls

features and services

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call
Forward No Answer
Call Forward No Answer automatically forwards unanswered calls to another
DN. The customer can specify the number of rings (1 to 15) before the system
invokes Call Forward No Answer. The default is four rings.
Four options are available at the customer level for Call Forward No Answer:
deny for all telephones
route all unanswered calls to the attendant
route all unanswered calls to the Hunt number defined for the telephone
route all unanswered calls to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN
defined for the telephone (Xl 1 release 2 and later)
Flexible Call Forward No Answer, X11 release 2 and later allow the
customer to specify, on a per-telephone basis, where an unanswered call
should be routed. This is independent of the Hunt number assigned to the
telephone. This capability is implemented on a per-customer basis and can be
specified for DID and non-DID call types. When activated, a call to a
telephone that does not answer within the specified number of ring cycles is
forwarded to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) associated
with that telephone.

1 features and services

45-2

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

A call is forwarded under the following conditions:
The Class of Service of the dialed telephone is Forward No Answer
allowed.
Flexible Call Forward No Answer is enabled at the customer level.
The call has rung the specified number of times.
The Call Forward No Answer DN

is valid and has been assigned.

System or telephone features such as Hunting and Call Forward All Calls may
result in the presentation of a call to a telephone that is different from the
dialed DN. In these cases, if the call is eligible for Flexible Call Forward No
Answer, it is forwarded to the DN specified for the dialed DN, not the ringing
DN.
call redirection is
When using Multiple Appearance
determine based on the TN order in your DN block. To determine the TN
order, print the DN block from LD20 or LD22 (TYPE = DNB). When a call
comes in to a MADN, the system begins a search to determine how the call
will be handled. Using the TN list you printed, the system performs the
following search, beginning at the top of the TN list, and working up.
1

Search for the first Prime DN appearance of the MADN with Call
Forward All Calls activated.

2

If there are no Prime DN appearances, the TN at the bottom of the list
controls call redirection
Note: The search does not necessarily determine the highest or lowest
numerical TN.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

45-3

Operating parameters
Calls are forwarded one step only. For Call Forward No Answer
enhancements, refer to the Call Forward, Second Level module.
Incoming calls on private lines with the Restricted Call Modification option
enabled are not forwarded.
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) can be assigned to telephones
with Message Waiting Allowed Class of Service. This is irrespective of the
telephone’s Class of Service and how forward no answer is specified in the
customer data block. Message Center always uses the FDN associated with
the telephone to route unanswered calls.

Feature interaction
Attendant Administration
Attendant Administration can assign and change a Flexible Call Forward
No Answer DN with the function key on the attendant console.
Automatic Timed Recall
Flexible Call Forward No Answer timing takes precedence over
Automatic Timed Recall timing. Irrespective of the relative time-out
intervals for each feature, ringing continues as long as allowed by Call
Forward No Answer.
Call Forward All Calls
Suppose that party A calls party B, and party B has programmed Call
Forward All Calls to party C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer will
forward a No Answer call at party C to the FDN associated with party B,
the dialed DN.
Call Waiting
If a call to a telephone gets CFNA treatment to another telephone that is
busy, then Call Waiting and Camp-On do not apply. The call will attempt
to terminate on the original DN again.
Meridian Mail Operator Revert
Prior to X11 release 13.32, Operator Revert was used to transfer a call
from an ACD Message Center (Meridian Mail). The originally dialed
number was not passed on to the person that received the transferred call.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

45-4

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

With
release 13.32 and later the Called Party ID can be passed along
from the ACD Message Center when Operator Revert is activated. The
attendant can now activate the Message Waiting key for the Called Party
while active on the redirected call by pressing the Message Indicator key.
For example, Party A calls Party B, which Call Forward No Answers to
Meridian Mail. Party A dials 0 and is transferred to a message center with
“live” agents. The agent receiving the call sees information for Party B
along with the information for Party A, the calling party.
Multiple-Appearance DN Redirection Prime
Xl 1 release 18 and later supoort Multiple-Appearance DN Redirection
Prime (MARP). This feature affects call redirection operation. refer to
the MARP module in this document for details.
.

If a telephone is service changed, its TN is moved to the beginning
of the DN list, irrespective of the numerical. This telephone remains
at the beginning of the list until another service change or a sysload.

.

If a DN is assigned as a Prime DN on a telephone and as a secondary
DN on one or more telephones, the DN list is still organized as
described in the preceding paragraphs. If only one prime appearance
of a DN exists, however, call redirection parameters are derived
from the TN of the prime appearance telephone, even though it may
not be at the end of the list. A prime appearance is always the first
TN used when the system looks for call redirection instructions.

.

If a DN appears on
SL-1, and Meridian digital telephones,
the
telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the top
of the list. SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones are listed in
numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A service change to a
telephone moves its TN to the beginning of the list. A
service change to an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone moves its
TN to the end of the list.
A sysload restructures the list back to numerical TN order with
telephones at the top and SL-1 and Meridian digital
telephones at the bottom. Call redirection parameters continue to be
derived as described in the preceding paragraphs.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

45-5

Feature packaging
Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer is included in
basic Xl 1 system software.

Feature

implementation

Define Call Forward No Answer for a customer.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ICI

xx CFN

Attendant Incoming Call Indicator for Call Forward No Answer
xx = key number (00-19)
Forward No Answer DID calls to the Hunt number

FNAD
ATT

Forward No Answer DID calls to the attendant

FDN

Forward No Answer DID calls to the Flexible Call Forward No
Answer DN

features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

45-6

-Define Call Forward No Answer for a customer.
NO
FNAT

Forward No Answer local calls to the Hunt number
ATT

Forward No Answer local calls to the attendant

FDN

Forward No Answer local calls to the Flexible CFNA DN

NO

No Answer local calls are not forwarded
Forward No Answer external calls to the Hunt number

FNAL

CFNA

No Answer DID calls are not forwarded

ATT

Forward No Answer external calls to the attendant

FDN

Forward No Answer external calls to the Flexible Call Forward No
DN

NO

No-answer external calls are not forwarded

l-15

Number of ringing cycles before No Answer calls are forwarded
(default is 4)
In Xl 1 release 9 and earlier, the FNAN prompt takes the
place of the FNAT and FNAL prompts.

Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for

telephones.

CHG

Change

500

Telephone type

lscu

Terminal Number

FNA, (FND)

Allow (Deny) Call Forward No Answer

FDN xxxx .

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (if the DN
Expansion package is equipped, the DN can have up to
13 digits)

Xl 1 features and services

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

-Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for SL-1 and digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
lscu

TN
FDN

2006, 2008,

2018, 2112,

Terminal Number
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (if the DN
expansion package is equipped, the DN can have up to
seven digits)

FNA, (FND)

Allow (Deny) Call Forward No Answer

-Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

HUNT

xxxx

Hunt DN where a No Answer call is to be routed (if the
DN Expansion package is equipped, the DN can have
up to 10 digits)

FNA, (FND)

Allow (Deny) CFNA

Xl 1 features and services

45-7

45-8

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

-Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on SL-1 and Meridian digital
telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =
2216,

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CLS

FNA, (FND)

Allow (Deny) CFNA

HUNT

xxxx

Hunt DN where a No Answer call is to be routed (if the
DN Expansion package is equipped, the DN can have
up to
digits)

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

.

,

.

:

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
10

46-1

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
Second Level Call Forward No Answer enhances Flexible Call Forward No
Answer by forwarding unanswered calls twice. The following example best
illustrates this enhancement.
Party A places a call to extension 5000, which does not answer. Extension
5000 has Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) allowed and extension 6000
defined as its CFNA number. The call forwards to extension 6000. This is the
first level CFNA.
Extension 6000 also does not answer the call. This telephone has a Call
Forward No Answer and Second Level Call Forward No Answer allowed
Class of Service (FNA and SFA). As it has a CFNA number of 7000, it
forwards there. This is the second level of Call Forward No Answer. Note that
the forwarding DN is always obtained from the currently ringing telephone.
If extension 7000 does not answer the call, one of two things may occur:
If the original call is a DID or internal call, the forwarded call continues
to ring until answered or the calling party disconnects.
If the original call is extended by the attendant console, Attendant Recall
occurs.
Second Level Call Forward No Answer uses the same customer-level timer
as Flexible Call Forward No Answer to determine the number of rings before
forwarding a call.
Telephones with an MWA Class of Service should have the Message Center
DN defined as their FDN. Calls to these telephones forward to the Message
Center and are not eligible for Second Level Call Forward No Answer.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

46-2

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

Requirements at the dialed DN for first-level CFNA are as follows:
Flexible Call Forward No Answer or Hunting is allowed at the customer
level for the incoming call type (DID, non-DID, or internal)
the telephone has an FNA Class of Service
the terminating call has rung for the number of rings specified for CFNA
or DFNA in the customer data block (LD1.5)
the forwarding DN (FDN, EFD, Hunt, or EHT) must be distinct from the
ringing DN and be a valid number within the system
Requirements at the originally called telephone DN for Second Level Call
Forward No Answer are as follows:
Flexible Call Forward No Answer or Hunting is allowed at the customer
level for the incoming call type (DID, non-DID, or internal)
the telephone has SFA and FNA Class of Service
Call Forward No Answer has occurred only once prior to ringing this
telephone
the forwarding DN (FDN, EFD, Hunt or EHT) must be distinct from the
ringing DN and must be a valid number within the system
The order of precedence for activation of first level Call Forward No Answer
is as follows:
Call Forward All Calls
Message Waiting
Call Forward No Answer
Attendant Recall
The order of precedence for activation of Second Level Call Forward No
Answer is as follows:
Call Forward All Calls
Second Call Forward No Answer (CFNA calls only)
Attendant Recall

features and services

553-3001-305

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

46-3

Call Forward No Answer Second Level for Message Waiting Allowed
Telephones, X11 release 15 and later allow an SFA Class of Service to be
defined on telephones with a Message Waiting Allowed (MWA) Class of
Service. Thus, a message waiting indication can be activated at the originally
dialed DN for Second Level CFNA calls terminating at a message center.

Operating parameters
A maximum of two levels of Call Forward No Answer is allowed for an
unanswered call.
Calls directed to an attendant or ACD Message Center cannot have Second
Level Call Forward No Answer.
Attendant Administration cannot change the
Class of Service.
Error messages are generated if changes made to the Forward No Answer or
Class of Service.
Hunt Class of Service conflict with the

Feature interaction
Call Forward All Calls
Both first and Second Level Call Forward No Answer use the final
(ringing) telephone in the chain to obtain Class of Service and
forwarding DN information.
Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT)
To implement CFCT for Second Level Call Forward No Answer eligible
calls, the originating party’s call type is checked. If it is internal, the call
is forwarded to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN). If it is
external, the call is forwarded to the External Flexible DN (EFD).
Call Forward No Answer
Second Level Call Forward No Answer applies to the Hunt and Flexible
Call Forward No Answer options. This is implemented by defining the
FNAD, FNAT, or FNAL prompts in LD15 as FDN or HNT. If the
attendant option is defined, an unanswered call goes to the attendant
queue and is not eligible for Second Level Call Forward No Answer.
Note: The FNAN prompt is replaced by two new prompts, FNAT and
FNAL, in X11 release 10 and later.
Flexible Call Forward No Answer
If Second Level Call Forward No Answer is disabled, Flexible Call
Forward No Answer operates as described.
Xl features and services

553-3001-305

46-4

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing
The ringing cadence for all telephones in a chain of call redirections
remains the same as for the original DN called.
Hunting
A forwarded call may be modified by Hunting if the Call Forward No
Answer DN is busy. This call is eligible for Second Level Call Forward
No Answer if the SFA Class of Service is allowed and a Call Forward No
Answer DN has been defined for the last rung DN.
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers
Call redirection parameters like Hunt and Call Forward No Answer are
derived from the TN data block (LD20 TNB) of the prime appearance of
the called MADN. If there is more than one prime appearance, the
parameters are selected from the last TN in the DN block for the DN
(LD22 DNB).
If more than one prime appearance of a MADN exists, the following
information must be considered prior to configuring call redirection
parameters for
The DNB organizes MADN information in numerical TN order. The TN
with the highest numerical value (000-O-06-03) is placed at the
beginning of the list. The list then continues in descending order with the
lowest numerical TN (000-0-03-01) at the end of the list. Service change
activity affects the organization of the DN list as described in the
following paragraphs.

Xl 1 features and services

.

If a telephone is service changed, its TN is moved to the beginning
of the DN list, irrespective of the numerical value. This telephone
remains at the beginning of the list until another service change or a
sysload.

.

If a DN is assigned as a Prime DN on a telephone and as a secondary
DN on one or more telephones, the DN list is still organized as
described in the preceding paragraphs. If only one prime appearance
of a DN exists, however, call redirection parameters are derived
from the TN of the prime appearance telephone, even though it may
not be at the end of the list. A prime appearance is always the first
TN used when the system looks for call redirection instructions.

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

46-5

If a DN appears on
and Meridian digital telephones,
the
telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the top
of the list. SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones are listed in
numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A service change to a
telephone moves its TN to the beginning of the list. A
service change to an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone moves its
TN to the end of the list.
.

A sysload restructures the list with
telephones at the top
and SL-1 and Meridian digital
at the bottom. Call
redirection parameters continue to be derived as described in the
preceding paragraphs.

Message Centers
There are three types of Message Centers:
.

ACD
Calls forwarded to an ACD Message Center are queued, so that no
CFNA timeout occurs.

.

Attendant
Calls forwarded to an Attendant Message Center are queued, so that
no CFNA timeout occurs.

.

DN
An indirect call forwarded to a DN Message Center and not
answered by an operator, is forwarded to a second level if SFA for
DN-MC.

Note: It is recommended that DN Message Center stations be denied
CFNA, Call Forward Busy (CFB), call Forwarding (CFW), and Call
Hunting (HUNT).
Slow Answer Recall
When a Call Forward No Answer call is unanswered at a telephone
eligible for Second Level Call Forward No Answer, and the call was
extended by an attendant, Second Level Call Forward No Answer takes
precedence over Slow Answer Recall. If the telephone has a Second
Level Call Forward No Answer denied Class of Service, the system
performs Slow Answer Recall for the unanswered call.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

46-6

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

Feature packaging
Call Forward No Answer Second Level is included in basic X11 system
software.

Feature

implementation

-&sign Message Center to allow the Message Waiting indication.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

MCI, (MCX)

Include (exclude) Message Center

Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

FNA, (FND)

Allow (Deny) Forward No answer

MWA, (MWD)

Allow (Deny) Message Waiting

SFA, (SFD)

Allow (Deny) second level CFNA
Note: To implement SFA in
specify both FNA and MWD.

1 release 14 and earlier,

1 release 15 and later allow SFA to be implemented
with an MWA Class of Service.
FTR

FDN

1 features and services

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN

553-3001-305

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

46-7

-Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for SL-1 and digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2216, 2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

FDN

xxx...x

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN

CLS

FNA, (FND)

Allow (Deny) Forward No answer

MWA, (MWD)

Allow (Deny) Message Waiting

SFA, (SFD)

Allow (Deny) second level CFNA
Note: To implement SFA in
1 release 14

and earlier,

specify both FNA and MWD.
Xl 1 release 15 and later allow SFA to be implemented with an
MWA Class of Service.

Feature operation
To forward calls from an SL-1 or digital telephone:
1 Press Forward.
2

Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

3 Press Forward.
To cancel Call Forward All Calls:
1 Press Forward.
To forward calls from a
1

telephone:

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74 (500 telephone).
or

Lift the handset and dial

(2500 telephone).

o r Lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Allowed Flexible Feature
Code (FFC).
2

Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

3 Hang up.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

46-8

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

To cancel Call Forward All Calls:
1

1 features and services

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74 (500 telephone).
or

Lift the handset and dial

or

Lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Deny FFC.

553-3001-305

(2500 telephone).

Call Hold, Deluxe
Deluxe Call Hold (DHLD) offers two options: Individual Hold and Exclusive
Hold.
Individual Hold indicates only those calls placed on hold on SL- 1 and
Meridian digital telephones in a multiple appearance, single call arrangement.
When a user puts a call on hold, normal hold (winking) is indicated at the
user’s telephone only. A slow flicker is shown at all other telephones with the
multiple appearance.
With Exclusive Hold Class of Service, multiple appearances of a line remain
exclusive to the user’s telephone, even when the call is put on hold. While
hold (winking) is indicated at the telephone holding the call, the Directory
Number (DN) lamp is steadily lit on all other appearances of the held call. The
Privacy Release key must be used for access by other appearances of the
Directory Number (DN). Telephones with the Exclusive Hold capability can
be held at any single-line, SL- or Meridian digital telephone with an
appearance.

Operating parameters
Exclusive Hold has priority over Individual Hold. If a telephone is equipped
with Exclusive Hold, the other telephones receive the Exclusive, not
Individual, Hold indication.

features and services

553-3001-305

47-2

Call Hold, Deluxe

Feature
Attendant Administration
Deluxe Hold (DHLD) cannot be administered through the Attendant
Administration feature.
Mixed
If a call is put on Exclusive Hold in a mixed Directory Number
group, other telephones with an appearance of the DN that go off hook
are not included in the call, nor do they receive any tone. Privacy Release
cannot be used with exclusively held calls in a mixed-appearance DN
group.

Deluxe Hold (DHLD), package 71, has no feature package dependencies.

Feature

implementation

Enable/disable Individual Hold for the customer.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number
IHD

OPT

Enable or disable Individual Hold (default IHD)

Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

XHA, XHD

Enable or disable Exclusive Hold (default XHD)

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Hold, Deluxe

47-3

-Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for SL-1, M3000, and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

XHA, XHD

Enable or disable Exclusive Hold (default XHD)

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

47-4

Call Hold, Deluxe

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
92 1231
Status:
Standard
Xl 1 Release:
All
48-1

Call Hold, Permanent
Permanent Hold holds an active call on a 2500 telephone without attendant
assistance. Calls cannot be originated or received while in the Permanent
Hold mode. Incoming calls receive a busy signal if Hunting is not defined for
the called telephone.
If the telephone user goes on hook after activating Permanent Hold, the
telephone periodically receives a one-second ring burst as a reminder that the
call is on hold. This interval is defined at the customer level.

Operating parameters
Permanent Hold is allowed only when a call is active and if the class of
service allows transfer.
If Busy Verify is attempted on a telephone with a call on Permanent Hold,
busy tone is received.
Override cannot be used on a telephone with a call on Permanent Hold.
Permanent Hold cannot be activated during a Conference call.
Two Meridian 1 parties, connected trunk to trunk, can activate Permanent
Hold at the same time if they both have the feature defined. After being placed
to
on Permanent Hold, the second party can flash the switchhook and dial
call. After flashing the switchhook, any dialing sequence other than
hold
the access code results in overflow tone.
Permanent Hold is not supported on station-to-station calls.

1 features and services

48-2

Call Hold, Permanent

If the telephone activating Permanent Hold is part of a mixed arrangement
with another 2500, SL-1, or Meridian digital telephone, the following events
occur:
If a different telephone with the same DN goes off hook, that telephone
connects to the held party.
When Permanent Hold is activated, the DN lamp on the SL-1 or
Meridian digital telephone remains steadily lit.
If the telephone activating Permanent Hold goes off hook, it is automatically
reconnected to the held call.
If the held party disconnects, the hold reminder ring stops.

Feature interaction
Privacy
A call placed on Permanent Hold has Privacy removed. Privacy is
reinstated when the call is removed from Permanent Hold.
Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH)
If Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH) is enabled in LD15, the
Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH) timer takes precedence over the
Permanent Hold timer.

Feature packaging
2500 Set Features
package 18, includes Permanent Hold and has no
feature package dependencies.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Call Hold, Permanent

Feature

48-3

implementation

Set Permanent Hold reminder ring timer.
CHG

Change

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

PHDT

l-(30)-63

Permanent Hold reminder ring timing in two-second
increments (30 = 60 seconds)

REQ

Enable/disable Permanent Hold for 2500 telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type
Terminal Number

TN

FTR

XFA

Allow

transfer

PHD

Enable Permanent Hold

Feature operation
To place a call on hold, follow these steps:
1

While on an active call, flash the switchhook or link key.

2

Dial

or the Flexible Feature Code (FFC), if enabled.

3 Hang up.
The Permanent Hold timer begins.
To retrieve a held call, lift the handset.

features and services

553-3001-305

48-4

Call Hold, Permanent

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Park
Call Park places a call in a parked state, similar to hold, where it can be
retrieved by any attendant console or telephone. A parked call must have an
access ID, also known as a Park DN. This is done by parking the call on a
System Park DN or on any telephone Directory Number (DN) in the system.
A parked call does not occupy a Directory Number (DN), nor is there a lamp
to indicate its presence.
are available per customer. There is no limit to the
Up to 50 System Park
that can be used as a Call Park access ID. However, only one
number of
call at a time can be parked against any particular telephone or System Park
DN.
In addition, the system can offer a default access ID. If System Call Park is
defined, the default access ID for the following equipment is the next
available System Park DN for the following equipment:
attendant consoles
SL-1 telephones
M3000 telephones
Meridian digital telephones equipped with digit display or display
screens
are not defined for the customer, the default access ID is
If System Park
the DN of the telephone where the call was parked. An attendant must press
the Park key and enter a DN if System Park
are not defined.

1 features and services

49-2

Call Park
Park the call, then page the person called. The person called then picks up the
call directly or through the attendant. Call Park also enables the telephone that
originally receives the call to park it so that another telephone can retrieve it
later. The telephone placing the call in Park is free to make or answer other
calls.
Calls can be parked from telephones or attendant consoles with the Park
key/lamp pair or Special Prefix (SPRE) code. Parked calls not retrieved
within a specified time (30 to 240 seconds) are recalled to the telephone that
parked it. Music for parked calls can be provided if Music (MUS), package
44, is installed.
If a call is parked on a System Park DN, it is recalled to the attendant who
parked it. However, for multi-tenant service, if the parking attendant does not
belong to the same CPG specified for the tenant of the calling station and if it
is busy at the time of the recall, the parked call is presented to an idle attendant
in the same CPG specified for the calling station. Then if there is no attendant
within that CPG available to accept the recall, the parked call is queued until
one of the attendants in the CPG becomes idle.
If a call is parked on a telephone DN, the recall is placed in the attendant
queue and presented to any available attendant. In all cases, parked calls
recalled to the attendant appear on the Recall Incoming Call Identification
(ICI) key, if defined.
The Park DN of the most recently parked call can be redisplayed on SL-1 and
Meridian digital telephones equipped with displays, a Park key, and a Display
key. This is done by pressing the Display key, then the Park key. The
attendant can display the last call parked by pressing the Park key when no
loop key is active.

features and services

553-3001-305

Call Park

49-3

Operating parameters
Call Park is not available for calls on Dial Intercom keys or for calls on
telephones designated as Dial Intercom telephones.
Call Park is not permitted when Privacy Release or Conference is active.
Calls parked from SL-1, Meridian digital telephones, and
telephones are recalled to the telephone that parked the call.
When a Multiple Appearance Single Call telephone mix (the same DN
appears on SL-1, Meridian digital telephones, and single-line telephones) is
parked, other appearances are not automatically bridged to the parked call
when going off hook. The call can be retrieved by another Multiple
Appearance DN (MADN) telephone only by dialing the Call Park retrieval
code and the DN.
Remote access (Centralized Attendant Service [CAS] or Direct Inward
System Access [DISA], for example) for parked parties is not permitted.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), and Direct
Private lines, attendant
are not valid park numbers.
Inward System Access (DISA)
Trunks without disconnect supervision cannot be parked.
Parked calls are not retained during initialization or system load.
Parked calls cannot be accessed with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
In-calls key. If parked access from Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
positions is required, a DN key must be provided.
A parked call recall cannot be placed on hold by the attendant.
A call transferred to the attendant by the Conference key on an SL-1 or
Meridian digital telephone cannot be parked by the attendant. A call
transferred to the attendant by the Transfer key on an SL-1 or Meridian digital
telephone can be parked by the attendant.

features and services

553-3001-305

49-4

Call Park

Feature interaction
attendant console
The Call Park access code and the Park DN are displayed for parked call
recalls.
QCW4 attendant console
When a parked call returns to the console, the console shows an attendant
display (DLEN in LD12) of eight digits with only the Special Prefix
(SPRE) code and the Park DN when a parked call recalls to the console.
(Press the Display Destination key twice for the Park DN.) An attendant
display of 16 digits shows the SPRE, the Call Park access code, and the
Park DN for parked call recalls.
Access Restrictions and Class of Service (CLS)
A call can be parked on any DN, regardless of its CLS. Access to a
parked call is governed by the same CLS restrictions for normal
trunk-to-telephone call processing. The following table details the
restrictions. These restrictions can be overridden with the Authorization
Code.
Accessing telephone Class of Service
Parked call type
FRE
Telephone

FR2

allowed

allowed

allowed

denied

denied

denied

DID Trunk

denied

denied

denied

Tie trunk

allowed

allowed

denied

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Calls parked by ACD agents are recalled to the ACD DN queue and
presented to any available agent.
Busy Lamp Field
A busy lamp field can be equipped to display the status of System Park

features and services

553-3001-305

Call Park

49-5

Call Detail Recording (CDR)
Call Detail Recording (CDR) records for Call Park are similar to the start
and end records generated when a call is transferred or terminated. When
a call is parked, a Call Detail Recording (CDR) start record is generated
if one has not already been generated by another feature. A CDR record
is not generated when the parked call is accessed. A CDR end record is
generated when the trunk call is terminated or when a parked call
disconnects.
Call Forward
A recalled parked call to telephones with Call Forward, Call Forward
Busy, or Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) is not forwarded.
Call Waiting
A recall of a parked call is not presented in the Call Waiting mode. If an
internal telephone is in the parked state, Call Waiting to that telephone is
not provided.
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
Call Park is limited to the local Meridian 1 for systems equipped with
CAS. Call Park cannot be accessed from release-link trunks.
Conference/Call Transfer
A parked call can be accessed after Conference or Call Transfer is
activated.
Do Not Disturb (DND)
that are in the Do Not Disturb
Calls can be parked on telephone
mode (DND). Telephones in the Do Not Disturb (DND) mode can park
a call or access a parked call. Recall of a parked call to a DND telephone
is recalled to the attendant.
Make Set Busy
Recall of a parked call to a telephone in the Make Set Busy mode is
intercepted by the attendant.
Private Line Service
Private lines cannot park a call.
Privacy Release
When a call from an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone is parked, that
telephone cannot activate Privacy Release. For example, Party A calls
Party B. Party B parks the call. Party A cannot activate Privacy Release.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

49-6

Call Park
Speed
Speed Call or
calls.

can be programmed to park calls or access parked

Traffic measurements
TFCO07 is included for Call Park. It provides traffic measurements for
the following:
.

system park usage

.

system park overflow

.

telephone park usage

.

park access

.

park recall

.

average waiting time

Feature packaging
Call Park (CPRK), package 33, has no feature package dependencies.

Feature

implementation

-Enable or disable Call Park.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

CPA, (CPD)

Enable or disable Call Park

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Park

49-7

Add/change or print Call Park.
Note: This overlay must be defined for Call Park operation.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CPK

Call Park data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CPTM

Parked call recall time in seconds (default is 45 seconds)

SPDN

xxxx

Number of contiguous System Park DN and the first
System Park DN
Note
The default 0 (zero) disables System Park DN capability,
but allows Telephone Park
Note 2: If the DN Expansion package is equipped, the System
Park DN can have up to seven digits.

MURT

o-51 1

Music route number for parked calls

Allow or deny access to Call Park for

TYPE

CHG

Change

aaaa

Telephone type

telephones.

aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000
TN
CLS

Terminal Number
XFA, (XFD)

Allow (Deny) access to Call Park

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

49-8

Call Park
Add or change a Call Park key on SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx PRK

Add a Call Park key (key number must be 17 for M2317
and 31 for M3000)

LD12 -Add or change a Call Park key on attendant consoles.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx PRK

Add a Call Park key (key number can be 00-l 9 on M2250)

Feature operation
To park a call with the Park key, follow these steps:
1

Press Park twice.
If there is a System Park extension, the call is parked on it. Otherwise, it
is parked on your extension.

To park a call on an extension other than the System Park extension, follow
these steps:
1 Press Park.
2

Enter the extension number.

3

Press P a r k again.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Park

49-9

To park a call using SPRE codes, follow these steps:
1

Press Transfer or Conference.

2

Dial SPRE 71.
You can dial an extension number to park the call, or you can use the
system park extension, chosen automatically. (It shows on your
telephone’s display, if equipped).

3

Press Transfer or Conference again.

To retrieve a parked call, follow these steps:
1

Select a free extension.

2

Dial SPRE 72.

3

Dial the extension where the call is parked.

1 features and services

49-10

Call Park

features and services

Issued:
Status:
Xl 1 Release:

93
31
Standard
19
50-l

Call Party Name Display
Call Party Name Display (CPND) identifies the calling or called number in
addition to the DN. The identifier (the name, for example) associated with a
DN on telephones with an alphanumeric display is defined in LD95.
Whenever the calling party’s DN displays on the terminating telephone, the
calling party’s name also appears. Likewise, on an internal call, the called
party’s name is appended to the displayed DN on the originator’s telephone,
as soon as a valid DN is completely dialed.
X11 release 13 enhancements display the DN and name of the originally
dialed party for redirected calls. A new Class of Service,
(Dialed Name Display Allowed or Denied), is assigned on a per-telephone
basis. The terminating telephone must have DNDA to display the name of the
originally dialed party.
The
attendant console can extend a call to a DN requested by
a calling party. The CPND enhancement enables the M 1250 attendant
console to display the incoming call information on one line, and the outgoing
call information on the next line when extending an incoming call.
X11 release 16 Multi-Language CPND displays the party’s name in
Roman/English or Katakana (Japanese alphabet) characters on Meridian
modular telephones. The names are stored in the database under each
character set and the language is specified with the Meridian modular
program keys.

1 features and services

50-2

Call Party Name Display

Two languages can be stored in the database for any given name. For this
enhancement to work fully, both telephones involved must have the same
name in the same languages. For example: John Smith calls Anne Jones. Both
John and Anne must have Katakana in their database for the name to appear
in Katakana characters. If John has Katakana enabled, but Anne does not,
Anne sees the English version.
Entering Katakana, or any other non-ASCII Roman characters, requires a
system terminal that supports 8 bit, no-parity I/O.

Call Party Name Display assignment
A CPND name string can be assigned to internal
the following:

associated with any of

telephones
single-call/multiple-call SL-1 telephones
trunk access codes
attendant

Dial Intercom Group member numbers
the assigned
As a customer option for multiple-appearance
CPND name can be linked with its member telephone’s designator (DES field
in the TN block) to further identify the party of a shared DN.

features and services

553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

50-3

Call Party Name Display composition
A CPND name is the name used to identify a DN, entered in ASCII
alphanumeric character format. The maximum CPND length is the smaller of
two values: the maximum length configured in LD95, or 27 characters,
including spaces and special characters.
The ASCII characters supported are A-Z, O-9, space, Hex 20-127, and the
following special characters:
“

0

Prior to X11 release 19, the CPND name was usually entered as first name, a
space, and last name (such as Mary Smith). Beginning with X11 release 19,
10, 11, and 95 accepts first name, a comma as a
the NAME prompt in
X11 release 19 supports
separator, and last name (such as
CPND names in the older format, treating the entire name string as the first
name. See Table 50-l for examples..
Table 50-l
Response formats for CPND NAME prompt
Entered Data
Sue Smith

Displayed Result
Sue Smith
Sue Smith

Sue
Sue,

Sue
(Trailing comma is ignored.)

Sue,Smith, Dept. 410

Sue Smith, Dept. 410

Sue Smith,,Joe Brown

Sue Smith

Brown

The default in X11 release 19 is to accept the names as entered, replacing the
displays as Mary
comma with a space. Hence, a value entered as
Smith.
Note I: Do not enter leading spaces. LD95 ignores them.
or
Note 2: When CPND information is printed (using
the printout reflects what is in the database, not what appears on the
telephone display.

features and services

553-3001-305

50-4

Call Party Name Display

In addition to the caller’s name, a reason field can be provided to indicate the
cause of a redirection. This is a customer option and the actual mnemonics are
service-changeable. The following call redirections have a reason displayed:
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward No Answer
Hunting/Call Forward Busy
Call Transfer with Network Call Redirection
Attendant Alternative Answering
Call Pickup

Display Devices and Capabilities
The M3000 Touchphone has a display line of 35 characters, 27 available for
displaying DN-related information.
The M2317 has a display line of 40 characters, 33 available for displaying
DN-related information.
If there are more characters than the telephone’s display allows, the system
deletes letters to make the name fit.
The Ml250 and M2250 attendant consoles are equipped with four lines of
LCD alphanumeric display. Each line has 40 characters, and lines 2 and 3 are
used to display DN-related information. If the number of characters displayed
is more than 40, an arrow appears in the upper right corner of the display. The
arrow alerts the user that more information can be retrieved using the
scrolling keys. For complete information, refer to the
Attendant Console User Guide (P0728489).
The call type, originating or terminating telephone, and the Class of Service
all affect the display and CPND information. Three Classes of Service are
associated with the display function. CPND conforms to whichever Class of
Service is configured for the telephone.
Automatic Digit Display
ADD
Digit Display Selection
DDS
Touchphone Digit Display TDD

features and services

553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

50-5

No user interaction is required to display information on the call. On the
to save
M2317 telephone, however, the user can press the SAVE
the name and number of the calling party. This applies to all outgoing and
answered incoming calls.

Operating parameters
CPND is not displayed if a live call is not involved, for example, while
programming a Speed Call key.
Attendant Administration does not support the entry of CPND class marks for
digital telephones.
CPND is not displayed on the calling telephone while making an outgoing
trunk call.
CPND is not supported on data calls.
CPND is not available on QCW attendant consoles.
In Xl 1 release 13 and later, CPND applies only to redirected calls on M2008,
M2016, M2216, M2616 M3000, and M2317 telephones.
For M2008, M2016, M2216, M2616 M3000, and M2317 telephones, CPND
is provided on a per-telephone basis, depending on the Class of Service.
DNDA (Dialed Name Display Allowed) and NDD (No Digit Display) Class
of Service are mutually exclusive.
Multi-Language CPND operates on Meridian modular telephones only.
An individual DN can have Roman/English, or Katakana, or both
programmed in the database if MCPND is equipped.
If the call destination is a trunk or a telephone type other than Meridian
modular, the name is translated into the ASCII equivalent.
on local switches only. CPND for
Multi-Language CPND applies to
ISDN calls is displayed in English only.

features and services

50-6

Call Party Name Display

Feature interaction
ACD DNIS
If an incoming trunk call from a route with Dialed Number Identification
is presented to a display telephone, the identification digits follow the
regular trunk access code and member number. It precedes the CPND
name for the DNIS incoming trunk group.
ACD Routing by DNIS
With Xl 1 release 17 and later, when an incoming trunk call from a route
with Routing by DNIS is presented to a display telephone, the
identification digits follow the regular trunk access code and member
number. It precedes the CPND name for the DNIS DN.
Attendant Recall
Attendant Recall using the Attendant Recall key or a switchhook flash
results in both source and destination information being displayed. No
redirection reason is displayed, however. In this type of recall, the party
that pressed the Attendant Recall key or switchhook is the destination
Attendant Recall using Call Transfer or Conference displays the
recalling party’s DN and CPND information on the attendant’s source
line. No redirection reason is displayed. If the recall is done with the
Transfer key the third party’s DN and CPND information are displayed
on the source line when the transfer is complete.
and Speed Call
No name information displays during the programming of
Speed Call numbers.

and

Automatic Wake-up
All display information associated with Automatic Wake-up programming
is directed to line three of the display. Names are appended to
appearing on line three if they are different
those on line two, or if no
DN appears on line two. There is no DN information on line two if the
attendant has initiated the AWU process while not on an active call. No
DES information is appended, since AWU operates on a DN basis.
Calls held or re-established
When a call is put on hold, the holding telephone’s display clears. The
held telephone’s display does not change. When the telephone
re-establishes the call, the display returns the original DN and name.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

50-7

Call Park
Upon valid operation of the Park key, or dial-access if used, CPND
shows the SPRE code and the Park Access ID. Because the Park Access
Code is displayed, no CPND name is displayed. The only time that the
digit display shows the actual DN of the parked party is when the parked
party has been retrieved, put on hold, and then retrieved from hold.
Call Pickup
For Call Pickup, the Xl 1 release 13 enhancement to CPND applies when
the call is answered.
Call Transfer
When the Transfer key is pressed during an active call, the display clears.
(The call is in a held state.) The DN and name of the transferred
telephone appear on the display when the DN is dialed. When the transfer
is complete, the transferring telephone’s display clears because the
telephone is now disconnected. The transferred telephone’s display
changes to show the name of the newly connected party.
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
When an attendant in the CAS mode extends a call to a remote station,
the display shows only the source line.
Conference
When pressed during an active call, or to set up a conference, the
Conference, Connect, or Join Parties key clears the display. The
telephones involved in the conference have blank displays. If the
conference returns to a two-way only call, each telephone displays the
DN and name of the other telephone.
Dial Intercom
The display on telephones connected by Dial Intercom shows the group
member’s DIG number plus CPND information.
Display Key
When pressed during a call, the Display key clears the display until
pressed again. The original display reappears. When the telephone is
inactive and the DSP key is pressed, followed by a function key like
Autodial, no CPND information is displayed.
End-to-End Signaling
When entered after a call is answered, EES digits are displayed
immediately following the CPND name of the connected party. Leading
DN digits and name characters may be shifted out of the display window.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

ISDN
On incoming ISDN calls, the Calling Line ID number can be displayed
instead of a DN on the source party line. With Xl1 release 14, CPND
applies to telephones configured for ISDN when redirection is supported,
and only when all parties involved are located on the same switch. X11
release 16 allows calls to redirect across a Meridian 1 network with
Network Call Redirection. The CPND is maintained through the
redirection.
Listed Directory Number
CPND is not supported for
If the LDN is an incoming trunk route,
the CPND assigned to the route access code is displayed.
M3000 Touchphone
Local Directory Translation CPND and the M3000 Touchphone
DN-to-name translation are mutually exclusive. If CPND name display
is allowed (CLS = CNDA), the DN-to-name translation must be
disallowed.
Multiple Appearance DN (MADN)
On ST and 21 systems, with Xl 1 release 17 and lower, the number of DN
appearances restricts the number of letters/digits allowed for CPND.
These engineering guidelines must be followed:
11 or fewer appearances allows 27 digits/letters in the name
12 appearances allows 23 digits/letters in the name
13 appearances allows 20 digits/letters in the name
14 appearances allows 16 digits/letters in the name
15 appearances allows 14 digits/letters in the name
16 appearances allows 11 digits/letters in the name
17 appearances allows 9 digits/letters in the name
18 appearances allows 8 digits/letters in the name
Manual Signaling (Buzz)
If the Signal key is pressed to buzz another telephone, no digit or name
display appears on the telephone.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

50-9

Override
When Overriding an established call, the displays of the other telephones
show the DN and name of the overriding party.
Slow Answer Recall
Slow Answer Recall results in displays showing source and destination
information. If a redirection occurs, the reason is displayed.
Voice Call
CPND.
The telephone originating a Voice Call displays the called
The called telephone shows the caller’s DN and name on its display.

Feature packaging
Call Party Name Display (CPND), package 9.5, requires:
Digit Display (DDSP), package 19
Digital Sets (DSET), package 88
M3000 Touchphone (TSET), package 89 or
M2317 telephone

package 91

Meridian modular telephones (ARIE), package 170
Multi-Language CPND requires Multi-Language I/O (MLIO), package 211.
If the designator field is to be used for multiple-appearance
requires:

CPND

Office Data Administration System (ODAS), package 20
For Hotel/Motel applications configuring CPND, CPND requires:
Background Terminal (BGD), package 99
Multi-Language
system terminals.

Feature

(MLIO), package 211, to support

no-parity

implementation
Before name strings can be assigned to various telephones, the CPND data
block must be created in LD95. The number and size of CPND name strings
is limited by available space in the Protected Data Store, so we recommend
that you initially use a small number for the maximum character length.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

50-10

Call Party Name Display

Procedure 50-l
Enable CPND and add names to the CPND data block

LD95

Create the CPND data block.

REQ

NEW

Create CPND database (or open existing data base)

TYPE

CPND

CPND data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CNFG



Stand-alone memory

MXLN

STAL

Maximum number of characters allowed in each name
string. Once defined, this value can be changed only by
removing the CPND data block and recreating it.
Yes, (No)

Static allocation of name storage. Must be Yes if
Background Terminal is equipped, or whenever name
strings change frequently.
Average default character string length. Suggested default
is 13 or the maximum length given to MXLN, whichever is
less.
Prompted if STAL = Yes

DES
RESN
CFWD
-CFNA
-HUNT

Yes, (No)
Yes, (No)
aaaa, (F)

aaaa, (N)
aaaa,

aaaa, (P)
xxxx, (T)
aaaa, (A)

Xl features and services

Allow designator for
Allow display of reason for redirecting calls
Mnemonic for Call Forward All Calls display
Mnemonic for Call Forward No Answer display
Mnemonic for Hunt/Call Forward Busy display
Mnemonic for Call Pickup display
Mnemonic for Call Transfer display for NCRD
Mnemonic for Attendant Alternative Answering

553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

50-11

LD95 -Add names to the CPND data block.
REQ

NEW

Open CPND data block to add new entries

TYPE

NAME

Create a new name string

LANG

(ROM), KAT,

Store the name in Roman or Katakana.
name in English.

CUST

o-99

Customer number

DIG

O-2045,0-99

Dial Intercom Group number and member number. Each
time a name string is assigned to a Dial Intercom Group
member, the DIG prompt repeats, until a carriage return is
entered to go to the DN prompt.



Bypass Dial Intercom Group and go to the DN prompt to
assign names on a DN basis

aaaa,bbbb

CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters; see Call
Party Name Display composition on page 50-3.

xx

Defines maximum number of characters allowed in name
string under CHO operation.



Set XPLN to average default character string length
(DFLN) or the actual length (NAME), whichever is longer.

DN

xxx...x

DN to which name string is linked

-NAME

aaaa,bbbb

CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters; see Call
Party Name Display composition on page

xx

Defines maximum number of characters allowed in name
string under CHO operation.



Set XPLN to average default character string length
(DFLN) or the actual length (NAME), whichever is longer.

DCNO

xxx

IDC conversion table number (O-254)

IDC

nnn

Existing complete or partial IDC number
Prompted only when DCNO is valid

NAME

aaaa,bbbb

CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters; see Call
Party Name Display composition on page 50-3.

-NAME

1 features and services

stores the

50-12

Call Party Name Display

Allow names to be assigned to

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
lscu

Terminal Number

CPND

Allow CPND name assignment on this telephone

-Allow names to display on M2008, M2016, M2216, M2616, M3000, and M2317.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa = SLI,
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CNDA, (CNDD)

Allow (Deny) display of CPND entries

DNDA, (DNDD)

Allow (Deny) display of CPND originally dialed entries

names to display on attendant consoles.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa

ATT

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CPND

CNDA, (CNDD)

Allow (Deny) CPND name assignment

DNDA, (DNDD)

Allow (Deny) display of originally dialed CPND entries

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

50-13

Procedure 50-2
Change or remove names in the CPND data block

LD95
REQ

Open the CPND data block to change or remove entries.
CHG, OUT

Change or remove an existing entry

NAME

Change or remove an existing CPND name string

CUST

o-99

Customer number

LANG

ROM, KAT, ALL

Change or remove the name in Roman, or Katakana
All is used to remove all names stored for the DIG.

DIG

o-2045, O-99
ALL,

Dial intercom Group number and member number. Each
time a name string is assigned to or removed from a Dial
Intercom Group member, the DIG prompt repeats, until a
carriage return is entered to go to the DN prompt. ALL
removes all entries for that DIG.
bypasses DIG and
goes to the DN

-NAME

aaaa,bbbb

CPND name string for this DIG; maximum of 27 characters;
see Call Party Name Display composition on page 50-3.



Leave this entry unchanged

xxx...x

DN of name string being changed or removed

ALL

Remove all DN-defined entries



Return to REQ prompt

-NAME

aaaa,bbbb

CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters; see Call
Party Name Display composition on page

DCNO

xxx

IDC conversion table number (O-254)

nnn

Existing complete or partial IDC number
Prompted only when DCNO is valid

aaaa,bbbb

CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters; see Call
Party Name Display composition on page

NAME

1 features and services

553-3001-305

50-14

Call Party Name Display

Procedure 50-3
Print entries from the CPND data block

LD95

Print information associated with entries in the CPND data block.
PRT

Print entries in the CPND data block

NAME

CPND name strings

CUST

o-99

Customer number

LANG

ROM, KAT

Print names in Roman or Katakana

PAGE

Yes, (No)

Page headers and page numbers for multiple

DIG

ALL

Print information on all entries defined by Dial Intercom
Groups

o-2045, O-99

Dial Intercom Group and member number.The DIG prompt
repeats until a carriage return is entered.



Bypass Dial Intercom Group and go to the DN prompt to
print information on a DN basis.

ALL

Print information on all DN entries

xxxx

DN to print information from. DN prompt repeats until a
carriage return is entered.



Return to REQ prompt

xxx

IDC conversion table number (O-254)

nnn

Existing complete or partial IDC number
Prompted only when DCNO is valid

REQ

DN

DCNO

ALL
Yes, (No)

Xl 1 features and services

Print short form (long form)

553-3001-305

and

Call Party Name Display

50-l 5

Procedure
Add or change CPND name entry for a telephone

1 -Add or change CPND name.
REQ

NEW, CHG

Add or change CPND name information

TYPE

aaaa

500, 2500, sll , 2606, 2616, 2317, 3000, etc.

TN

lscu

Terminal number

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CPND

NEW, CHG, OUT

Add, change, or remove the CPND information

(ROM), KAT

Use Roman or Katakana characters

NAME

aaaa,bbbb

CPND name: maximum of 27 characters; see Call
Party Name Display composition on page 50-3.

XPLN

xx

Expected name length

DISPLAY-FMT

(FIRST

Display format: FIRST = first, last (the default);
LAST = last, first

LAST

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

50-l 6

Call Party Name Display

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Call Pickup
Call Pickup allows telephones to be arranged in groups consisting of any
combination of
SL- and Meridian digital telephones.
Telephones can be specified as Call Pickup allowed or Call Pickup denied. If
the telephone’s class of service is Call Pickup allowed, the user can answer
calls made to any telephone within the Call Pickup group. If the telephone’s
Class of Service is Call Pickup denied, but the telephone is assigned to a Call
Pickup group, the user cannot answer calls directed to other telephones. Calls
to the denied telephone, however, can be answered by other members of the
group.
SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephones can dial-access this feature, or be
equipped with a Call Pickup key. An associated lamp is not required.
CO Trunk Priority, X11 release 13 and later releases provide CO trunk
calls priority over other calls within the distinctive ringing and normal ringing
queues. If the CO Trunk Priority is implemented, calls are answered in the
following order:
Distinctive Ringing Queue CO call
Distinctive Ringing Queue non-CO call
Normal Ringing Queue CO call
Normal Ringing Queue non-CO call

Priority 1
Priority 2
Priority 3
Priority 4

Operating parameters
Prior to X 11 release 13, Call Pickup groups were limited to 255 per customer.
With Xl 1 release 13 and later releases, the number of Call Pickup groups is
increased to 4095. The number of members assigned to each group is
unlimited, depending on available system memory.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

51-2

Call Pickup

Feature interaction
Call Park
telephone user on a call can pick up a call by parking the
A
existing call, then activating the Call Pickup feature.
Directed Call Pickup (DCP)
Call Pickup can be assigned to a telephone independent of Directed Call
Pickup (DCP).
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Pickup.

are not supported by Call

Flexible Feature Code (FFC)
FFC codes are not supported on SL-1 or digital telephones when
attempting to call pickup a dial intercom ringing call.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic

Feature

1 system software.

implementation

Implement CO Trunk Priority in the customer data block.
CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

cop,

CO Trunk Priority for the Call Pickup feature
COX is no Priority

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Call Pickup

Define Call Pickup group and Class of Service for
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

RNPG

xxxx

Call Pickup group number (0

(PUA), PUD

Allow (Deny) Call Pickup

51-3

telephones.

4095)

-Define Call Pickup group, Class of Service, and Call Pickup key for SL-1 and Meridian
digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

RNPG

xxxx

Call Pickup group number (0

(PUA), PUD

Allow (Deny) Call Pickup

xx RNP

Add a Call Pickup key

KEY

4095)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

51-4

Call Pickup

Feature operation
To answer a call in your Call Pickup group from an SL-1 or Meridian digital
telephone, follow these steps:
1

Lift the handset, or press a DN key.

2

Press Call Pickup or dial SPRE + 3.

To answer a call in your Call Pickup group from a
these steps:
1

Lift the handset.

2

Dial SPRE 3 or PUDN FFC.
You are connected to the caller.

telephone, follow

Note: If you are on a call when another call comes in for someone in
your Call Pickup group, you must end, park, or transfer the existing call
before you can answer the new call.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Issued:
Status:
Release:

92 12 31
Standard

12

Call Pickup, Directed
Directed Call Pickup (DCP) allows a caller from one Call Pickup group to
pick up a ringing call in another Call Pickup group. The ringing call is picked
up by dialing either its call pickup group number or the DN on which it is
ringing.
Directed Call Pickup adds two new methods of call pickup to the existing Call
Pickup feature:
Group Pickup (GPU)
DN Pickup (DPU)
Group Pickup lets you pick up any ringing call in your own pickup group, or
any pickup group in the system.
DN Pickup allows pickup of a call ringing on a specified DN. If a DN is not
assigned to any group, it defaults to Group Zero (0). This prevents any other
group from picking up that DN.
Both GPU and DPU can be activated using programmable keys or Special
Prefix (SPRE) code dialing. Each pickup method can be assigned to a
telephone independent of the others.
The dialed digits (DN or group number) are displayed on the Digit Display as
dialed. Like the Call Pickup feature, the lamp is optional for the Call Pickup
and Group Call Pickup keys. No second dial tone is given after the key is
pressed, nor is it given after the SPRE code is dialed.

Operating parameters
Group 0 (zero) is not a valid group number. A telephone that is not part of any
group is assigned by default to group 0 (zero).

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

52-2

Call Pickup, Directed

Feature interaction
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
are not supported by Directed Call Pickup.
ACD

Feature packaging
Directed Call Pickup (DCP), package 115, has no feature package
requirements.

Feature

implementation

Define the number of digits dialed for Call Pickup groups.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

PKND

Number of digits dialed for Group Pickup

-4

Prompted only if DCP is equipped
OPT

CO call priority or no priority for Call Pickup and Group Call
Pickup

cop,

Add or change

telephones to allow DCP Class of Service.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

RNPG

0

Call Pickup Group

4095

0 = no pickup group
GPUA, (GPUD)

Allow (Deny) Group Pickup

DPUA, (DPUD)

Allow (Deny) DN Pickup

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Call Pickup, Directed

52-3

-Add or change SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones to allow Directed Call Pickup Class
of Service.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =

, 2006, 2008, 2009,

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

RNPG

0

Call Pickup Group

4095

2216,

0 = no pickup group
CLS

KEY

DPUA, (DPUD)

Allow (Deny) DN Pickup

GPUA, (GPUD)

Allow (Deny) Group Pickup

xx DPU

DN Pickup key (not available on M3000)

xx GPU

Group Pickup key (not available on M3000)

Feature operation
To answer a call in another Call Pickup group from an SL-1 or Meridian
digital telephone, follow these steps:
1

Lift the handset.

2

Press

3

Dial the pickup group number.

Pickup or dial SPRE + 94 or PUGR FFC.

To answer a call on a specified DN from an SL-1 or Meridian digital
telephone:
1

Lift the handset.

2

Press DN Pickup or dial SPRE + 95 or PURN FFC.

3

Dial the extension number.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

52-4

Call Pickup, Directed

To answer a call in another Call Pickup group from a
follow these steps:

telephone,

1

Lift the handset and dial SPRE + 94 or PUGR FFC.

2

Dial the pickup group number.

To answer a call on a specified DN from a

,
telephone:

1

Lift the handset and dial SPRE + 95 or PURN FFC.

2

Dial the extension number.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Xl 1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All
53-1

Call Transfer
Call Transfer allows a telephone user on any two-party call to hold the
existing call and originate another call to a third party. The user may consult
privately or transfer the original call to the third party. A call is transferred by
pressing a dedicated key on SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephones or by
flashing the switchhook on 50012500 telephones.

Operating parameters
A separate Call Transfer key/lamp pair must be assigned to SL-1 and
Meridian digital telephones.
A transfer allowed Class of Service must be specified for
telephones to access this feature.
If trunks are involved, successful completion of a transfer depends on the
access restrictions assigned to the stations and trunks.

Feature interaction
Conference
You can also transfer calls using the Conference key, but not until the
third party answers the call.
Hold
A consultation call can be placed on Hold.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic X 11 system software.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Call

53-2

Feature

Transfer

implementation

Allow/deny Call Transfer for

telephones.

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

XFA, (XFD)

Allow (Deny) Call Transfer

Add a Call Transfer key for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx TRN

Add a Call Transfer key (M2317 and M3000 must use key

Feature operation
To transfer an active call on an SL-1 or digital telephone, follow these steps:
1 Press Transfer.
The call is on hold.
2

Dial the number where you want to transfer the call.

3

Press T r a n s f e r when you hear ringing or after your call is answered.
When your call is answered, you may speak privately with the new party
before completing the transfer.
Note: To cancel an incomplete transfer, press the key beside the fast
flashing indicator and you return to the call you tried to transfer.

features and services

553-3001-305

Call Transfer

53-3

To transfer an active call on a 500 or 2500 telephone, follow these steps:
1

Flash the switchhook.
The call is on hold.

2

Dial the number where you want to transfer the call.

3

Flash the switchhook when you hear ringing or after your call is
answered.
When your call is answered, you may speak privately with the new party
before completing the transfer.
Note: To cancel an incomplete transfer, hang up, then lift the handset
and flash the switchhook to return to the call.

Xl 1 features and services

telemanuals.com

53-4

Call

Transfer

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

issued:.
Status:
1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting
Call Waiting notifies a telephone user on an established call (internal or
external) that an external call is waiting to be answered. SL-1 and Meridian
digital telephones must have a Call Waiting key/lamp pair assigned and a
class of service that allows a warning tone. Call Waiting is applicable to the
Prime DN or any single appearance DN on the telephone. When an external
call comes into an SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephone and the telephone user
is on a call, the Call Waiting lamp flashes and a buzz sounds through the
telephone’s speaker.
To use Call Waiting,
telephones must have a class of service that
allows Call Waiting and a warning tone. Two tone bursts are received through
the handset to advise a
telephone user of a waiting call. Note that
the two calls cannot be
together.
Call Waiting applies to DID, CO, FX, and WATS trunk calls extended to a
busy telephone by the attendant. With Xl 1 release 8 and later releases, Call
Waiting also applies to calls on tie and Common Control Switching
arrangement (CCSA) trunks.
Internal Call Waiting, X11 release and later releases provide Call
Waiting for internal calls. This option, defined on a per-telephone level,
allows Call Waiting for calls from other telephones within the customer
group. These calls include the following:
direct telephone-to-telephone calls
attendant-extended internal calls
telephone-to-telephone call transfer of all trunk and internal calls

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

54-2

Call

Waiting/Internal

Call

Waiting

Operating parameters
An SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone can have only one working Call
Waiting key/lamp pair.
Telephones with internal telephone-to-telephone Call Waiting must also have
external Call Waiting (CWA) Class of Service.
A Call Waiting indication is not presented to a single-line telephone in the
transfer or conference mode.
A
telephone user receiving a second call can connect alternately to
the original call and the Call Waiting call by a switchhook flash. The user
cannot transfer or conference either call.
telephone user who has received a Call Waiting call routed from
A
the attendant cannot reconnect to the original call until it has been released
from the console.
Attendant Administration does not support the Internal Call Waiting feature.

Feature interaction
Call Forward All Calls and Hunting
Call Forward All Calls and Hunting take precedence over Call Waiting.
Call Forward No Answer
If a call to a telephone gets CFNA treatment to another telephone which
is busy, Call
and Camp-On do not apply. The call will attempt
to terminate on the original DN again.
Camp-On
Call Waiting and Camp-on are mutually exclusive. If a Call Waiting
Class of Service or key is defined, Camp-on cannot be provided.
Hunting
If a call comes into a busy DN, it begins the hunting route defined from
on the the hunting route, the call
the called DN. If there are idle
becomes a Call Waiting call on the called DN.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting

54-3

Message Center
Call Waiting calls are not forwarded to a Message Center.
Ring Again
The user is notified that a previously busy line is free only when both the
original call and the waiting call have disconnected.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature

implementation

Allow/deny Call Waiting for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CLS

CWA, (CWD)

Allow (Deny) Call Waiting

SWA, (SWD)

Allow (Deny) internal Call Waiting (if SWA is defined, CWA
must also be defined)

(WTA), WTD

Allow (Deny) warning tone

Allow/deny Call Waiting for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =

TN

KEY

2006, 2008, 2009,

lscu

Terminal Number

SWA, (SWD)

Allow (Deny) internal Call Waiting

(WTA), WTD

Allow (Deny) warning tone

xx CWT

Add a Call Waiting key (M3000 must use key 24)

Xl features and services

2112, 2216,

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

54-4

Call

Waiting/Internal

Call

Waiting

Feature operation
To answer a Call Waiting call on SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones,
follow these steps:
1

Press Mold when you hear a tone during a phone call.

2

Press Call Wait to answer the waiting call.

To return to your first call, follow these steps:
1

Press Hold if you want to put your second call on Hold.

2

Press the extension key that has the first call on it.

To answer a Call Waiting call on
1

Flash the switchhook when you hear a beep during a phone call.
Your current call is on Hold and you are connected to the waiting call.

To return to your first call:
1

Xl 1 features and services

telephones, follow these steps:

Flash the switchhook.

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Issued:

92 12 31

Status:
1 Release:

Standard
3

Called Party Disconnect Control
Called Party Disconnect Control allows Meridian system to control the
disconnecting of calls on CO, FX, CCSA, DID, tie, WATS, modem, and
trunks. The trunk
Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
route data block has been modified so that a route can be specified for
Party Disconnect Control.
With Called Party Disconnect Control, an incoming trunk call answered
within Meridian 1 is not disconnected until the Meridian 1 end goes on hook
If the calling party goes on hook, the connection is held, allowing the call
be traced in emergency situations. If the calling party goes off hook again,
call is not reestablished.

Operating parameters
An incoming call on a trunk route with Called Party Disconnect Control
allowed can be transferred to another telephone within Meridian
but
be transferred to a trunk.
An incoming call with Called Party Disconnect Control can be forwarded
another telephone, but not to another trunk.
Tandem trunk connections are not allowed on incoming calls on trunks
Called Party Disconnect Control allowed.
If Barge-In or Busy Verify is applied to trunks with Called Party
allowed, the trunk is disconnected.
Force disconnect, through service change and maintenance, overrides
Party Disconnect Control.

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

55-2

Called Party Disconnect Control

Feature interaction
Conference
Trunks with Called Party Disconnect Control allowed are treated as
trunks without disconnect supervision when
Automatic Answerback
Incoming calls on a trunk with Called Party Disconnect Control allowed
that terminate on a telephone with Handsfree Answerback are answered
automatically. They are not disconnected automatically, however, when
the calling party goes on hook.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature
LD16

implementation

Define Called Party Disconnect Control for a trunk route.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CNTL

Yes, (No)

Change the controls or timers

CPDC

Yes, (No)

Allow or deny Called Party Disconnect Control for the trunk
route (default is No)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

56-1

Camp-On
Camp-On routes one additional external call to a busy Directory Number
(DN). When the attendant extends a call to a busy Directory Number (DN),
the external call is camped on to the telephone. If the class of service allows
a warning tone, the user hears a tone indicating that a call is camped on. If the
user frees the line within a specified time, the camped-on call rings the
telephone automatically. If not, the call returns to the attendant as a recall.
Camp-On Tone is allowed or denied on a per-customer basis. The time a
from 0 to 5 seconds, in multiples
camped-on call waits is defined in
of 2 seconds. The default is 30 seconds.

Operating parameters
Camp-On applies to attendant-extended calls only. If the attendant hears a
busy tone, another call has already been camped on to the busy telephone.

Feature interaction
Warning tone
Class of service with warning tone denied allows a call to be camped on,
but with no warning tone.
Call Forward All Calls
Takes precedence over Camp-On.
Hunting
Takes precedence over Camp-On.
Call Waiting
Camp-On and Call Waiting are mutually exclusive.

1 features and services

56-2

Camp-On

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic

Feature

1 system software.

implementation
Camp-On tone for a customer.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

OPT

Customer number

CTA, (CTD)
xx yy

Enable or disable Camp-On tone for the customer
Set recall timers
, yy = Camp-On recall timer, response is O-(30)-51 0

Allow/deny warning tone class of service for
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

WTA, (WTD)

Allow (Deny) warning tone

telephones.

warning tone class of service for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

WTA, (WTD)

Allow (Deny) warning tone

1 features and services

553-3001-305

2216,

Camp-On

56-3

Feature operation
To camp on an external call to a busy destination, the attendant follows these
steps:
1 Press RLS.

The call is camped on to the extension. If you hear a busy tone, a call is
already camped on the extension.
Note: If the call is not answered within a specified time, it recalls to the
attendant. Both the Source and Destination indicators flash until the
recall is answered. The call can be camped on again or released.
To answer a camped-on call, the subscriber follows these steps:
1

When you hear a short beep indicating a camped-on call, hang up or press
RLS.

2

When the telephone rings, lift the handset.
You are connected to the camped-on call.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

56-4

Camp-On

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Capacity Expansion
Introduced in
releases 13 and 14, Capacity Expansion increases the
limits associated with the features listed in Tables 57-l and 57-2.
Table 57-l
Features expanded in

1 release

Feature

Previous limit

New limit

Call Pickup Groups

255

4095 (I-4095)

Speed Call lists/Hot Line lists **

255

8191 (O-81 90)

System Speed Call lists

255

4096 (o-4095)

Trunk Group Access Restrictions

15

31 (O-30)

Trunk Group members (per trunk group)

127

254 (i-254)

CDP route list index *

32

256 (O-255)

CDP route list entry *

3

64 (O-63)

8

64 (O-63)

16

30

route list entry *
Multiple Appearance

*

Group Call members (per group)
NCOS Groups *
CDP NCOS Groups *
NCOS Groups *
Network Authorization Code digits *
CDP steering codes *
Per customer

20
16

100 (O-99)

4

100 (O-99)

8

100 (O-99)

7

14

5K

Per system

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

57-2

Capacity

Expansion

Table 57-2
Features expanded in

1 release 14

Feature

Previous limit

New limit

Dial Intercom Groups *

254

2046

Trunk

128

512 (O-51 1) (see Note)

*

Private Line routes *
Customer
Network

1

Groups

32

Authorization

* Per customer

Codes

*

20K

(o-2045)

512 (O-51 1)
100 (O-99) (see Note)
50K

Per system

Note: Due to large memory requirements for data configurations, only XN, NT,
XT, 51, 61, 71, and 81
support the increased Trunk and Customer Groups. All other systems support the original limits only.

Operating parameters
Implementation of expanded features is dependent on available system
memory.
The new Speed Call limit includes all combined Speed Call, System Speed
Call, and Hot Line lists. Of the 8190 lists allocated for the system, up to 4096
lists can be allocated to System Speed Call.
The maximum number of Group Call lists remains 64.
Mini-CDR does not support the expanded CDR records produced by
Capacity Expansion.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Capacity Expansion

57-3

Feature interaction
ACD
Up to 512 (O-511) ACD routes can be configured.
ACD-D records
New ACD-D auxiliary messages replace messages that cannot
accommodate the expansion.
Call Detail Recording (CDR)
The CDR record has a new expanded tape format with the CDR
Expansion package. For a detailed description of the expanded CDR
Derail
record format, refer to
(553-2631-100).
Hot Line list
Any number from to 8190 can be assigned as a Hot Line list number.
Hunting
If more than 16 appearances of the same Directory Number (DN) are
configured, each hunt step is counted as two, to avoid running out of time
slots.
System Speed Call lists
Any number from 0 to 4095 can be assigned to a System Speed Call list.

Feature packaging
No new feature package is required to implement the expanded feature limits.

Feature

implementation
The existing overlays have been modified to accommodate the increased
limits for the expanded features.

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

57-4

Capacity Expansion

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

92 1231
Standard
All
58-1

Centralized Attendant Service
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) centralizes attendant services for
customers with multiple locations. A typical Centralized Attendant Service
(CAS) configuration consists of one or more remote locations, each served by
its own switch and attendants, and a main site location where the Centralized
Attendant Service (CAS) attendants are located. (See Figure
1.) Each
remote location has access to the main CAS attendant through Release Link
Trunks (RLT), which can be either analog or digital. In addition, the remote
locations are interconnected by tie trunks.
When a call from a PBX in a remote location requires attendant assistance, an
idle Release Link Trunks (RLT) at the remote PBX is seized, and the call is
presented to the CAS attendant. If an idle Release Link Trunks (RLT) is not
available, the call is queued until an RLT becomes idle. The CAS attendant
can then extend the call to a station at the remote location.
The types of calls that require attendant assistance and can be handled by a
CAS attendant are
Listed Directory Number (LDN) calls
Dial-O calls (0 is optional if the flexible attendant Directory Number
(DN) is used)
Recalls, intercepts, or transfers to attendant
Operator-assisted calls for restricted telephones, giving access to WATS,
FX, and CO trunks

Operating parameters
For complete information regarding CAS, see Centralized Attendant Service
description and engineering (553-2681-100).

1 features and services

I

58-2

Centralized Attendant Service
Figure 58-1
Typical Centralized Attendant Service configuration
Tie trunks

Remote
PBX

Remote
P B X

Attendant

Tie trunks

Attendant

Remote
PBX
Attendant

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Tie trunks

Xl 1 Release:
59-l

Switchhook Flash
Switchhook Flash (THF) accesses
services such as Call
Transfer or three-way calling while on an established
call. It is useful
where
is the backbone of the service network.
Switchhook Flash (THF) is supported by the following trunk types:
Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD)
Common Control Switching Arrangement, Automatic Number
Identification (CCSA
Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
Central Office (CO)
Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA)
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
Foreign Exchange (FX)
Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS)
Analog and DTI trunks
Switchhook Flash (THF) is invoked, Meridian 1 checks
Whenever
for the following:
With
telephones, that the class of service supports THF.
With SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephones, the feature cannot be activated
if a corresponding key is not equipped.
That the telephone is on an active two-way trunk call.
That THF is enabled in the trunk’s class of service.
If any of the above checks fails, the user hears an overflow tone. After the
tone times out, the original connection resumes.
features and services

553-3001-305

59-2

Switchhook Flash

Operating parameters
This feature is not supported on attendant consoles.
On SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones, once the THF key has been pressed,
connection,
all other function keys are blocked. While waiting for the
only the RLS key or on hook connection is operative. Pressing the RLS key
or hanging up terminates the original connection as well as the THF message.
telephones, another switchhook flash is not allowed once
For the
THF has been invoked. A second switchhook flash is treated as an on hook
disconnection.
THF allows you to make conference calls through the central office (CO). It
can be invoked only if you are established on a call connected to an outside
trunk. If engaged in internal conference calls, THF cannot be used.
Only trunks connected to the central office (CO) support THF. ISDN PRI
trunks do not support THF.
Only voice calls are supported on THF.

Feature interaction
None.

Package dependencies
Switchhook Flash (THF), package 157, has no package
dependencies.

Feature

implementation

Enable/disable

Switchhook Flash for single-line telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

THFA, (THFD)

Allow (Deny)

features and services

553-3001-305

Switchhook Flash

Switchhook Flash
-Enable/disable

Switchhook Flash for multi-line telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa

2009,

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx THF

Add a

LD14
TYPE

LD16
CNTL

Enable/disable

59-3

Switchhook Flash key

Switchhook Flash for each trunk.

AID

Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD) trunk
data block

CAA

Common Control Switching Arrangement Automatic
Number Identification (CCSA
trunk data block

CAM

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
data block

COT

Central Office (CO) trunk data block

CSA

Common Control Switching Arrangement access line data
block

DID

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk data block

FEX

Foreign Exchange trunk data block

WAT

Wide Area Telephone Service trunk data block

THFA, (THFD)

Allow (Deny)

Enable/disable

trunk

Switchhook Flash on this trunk

Switchhook Flash for each trunk route.

Yes

Change controls or timers

FLH xx

Switchhook Flash to
Set the length of the timer for
x msec; legal range for this timer is
256 ms. to 1536 ms. (default is 512 ms.).

1 features and services

553-3001-305

59-4

Switchhook Flash

Feature operation
To use
these steps:

Switchhook Flash (THF) from a

telephone, follow

1

Flash the switchhook to receive a special dial tone.

2

Enter the Special Prefix (SPRE) code, then the THF feature access code

To use
Switchhook Flash (THF) from an SL-1 or Meridian digital
telephone, press the key configured for THF. Dial access is not supported on
these telephones.
To reestablish a connection before the overflow tone ends, flash the
switchhook
telephone). Or Press the DN key or the key
establishing the original call (SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone).

features and services

553-3001-305

Charge Account and Calling Party
Number
Used in conjunction with Call Detail Recording (CDR), Charge Account
direct-bills calls to specific accounts or charge numbers instead of
Charge Account supports fixed-length numbers of 0 to 23 digits (default is 0),
specified on a per-customer basis. The charge account number is validated by
the system for length only. Verification of the actual digits entered is part of
CDR downstream processing.
On SL- and Meridian digital telephones this feature can be activated by a
separate Charge key/lamp pair, or dial-accessed. On attendant consoles it is
activated by a separate key/lamp pair. On single-line telephones it is
dial-accessed.
When a Charge Account number is used, the entire call is billed to that
number. The number can be entered either before or during a call, or when
Consultation Hold, Call Transfer, or Conference is activated.
Charge Account can be used to charge an entire conference call or portions of
the call. Portions of the call are assigned to different accounts by entering the
account number when adding trunks to a conference, before the conference is
completed.
When using single-line telephones, enter the account information
immediately after the switchhook flash, before the new trunk is dialed.
When using SL- and Meridian digital telephones, enter the number after
pressing the Conference key the first time, and before dialing.

features and services

553-3001-305

60-2

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

The charge record shows the identity of the user who made the entry and the
trunk that was added to the call. If the new call is not added to the conference,
the record shows a simple two-party call.
An entire call is charged to the same account by entering the charge number
while active on the conference.
When using SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones, press the Charge key
and enter the number in the usual manner.
When using Single-line telephones, enter the number after a switchhook
flash.
The call is reestablished without dialing additional trunks; a record is
produced for each trunk involved in the conference. In all these records, the
telephone user entering the number is considered the originating party. When
an entire call is charged to only one account number, it must be entered while
all trunks are connected to the conference.
Calling Party Number (CPN) is an extension of Charge Account that allows
entry of the calling party’s number on collect calls. SL-1 and Meridian digital
telephones are assigned a separate Calling Party Number (CPN) key/lamp
pair to activate this feature. When the calling party’s number is entered, a
Calling Party Number (CPN) record is produced. This record may be
compared to a telephone company billing for collect calls. Calling party
and
numbers can be up to 23 digits, and may include an asterisk
A CPN record is generated on the Call Detail Recording
octothorpe
(CDR) device similar to a normal Charge record.

1 features and services

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

60-3

Operating parameters
A valid charge account number is recognized when the number of dialed
digits matches the account length, or when the octothorpe
indicates end of
dialing. After a valid charge account number has been entered, the system
returns a dial tone.
If too few digits are dialed, no response is given until the interdigit timeout
occurs. Overflow tone is returned for 15 seconds after timeout, then the user
is locked out.
If Call Transfer or Conference is used to consult with a third party and returns
to the original call without completing the transfer or conference, the charge
account number is applied to the Consultation call only.
Attendant use of Charge or CPN is restricted to situations in which there is
only one account party involved in the call (source side). When the calling
party number is used, the attendant must transfer the call, or the Call Detail
Recording (CDR) record does not reflect it.

Feature interaction
Telephone features
A Charge Account entry is aborted with any of the following keys:
.

DN

.

Page

.

Voice Call

.

In-Calls

.

Call Waiting

.

Call Pickup

.

Release

.

Not Ready

.

a loop key

.

Release Destination

.

Release Source

1 features and services

553-3001-305

60-4

Charge Account and Calling Party Number
Barge
Busy Verify
A charge account number cannot be entered when Barge In or Busy
Verify is active. Barge In cannot be used to connect to a trunk after an
account number has been entered.

Override
When Charge Account is used during active Override, some digits may
be lost. When entered with Override in conference, a Charge Account
number is accepted and no digits are lost.
Call Transfer
A Call Transfer call produces two records: a CDR start record and a CDR
end record.
Conference
Conference calls produce multiple CDR records. Whenever a new trunk
is added to a conference, the connection between the connected
telephone and the trunk is recorded, and a connection to the conference
loop is established. This causes CDR to generate a start record with the
telephone and trunk identified as the involved parties. As trunks are
removed from a conference, CDR end records are produced. These
records may identify different telephones or conferences as the local
parties.
Ring Again
When Ring Again is activated, no charge record is generated, but the
information is stored for future use. If Ring Again is canceled before a
trunk is seized, the charge number is deleted and no record is produced.
If a trunk is seized later by Ring Again, the charge record is generated in
the usual manner. The use of Ring Again with Charge Account ties up
system resources because an auxiliary call register must be maintained in
the Ring Again queue.
Speed
Charge account numbers, including the Charge Account access Special
Prefix (SPRE) code, can be stored as Speed Call or
numbers.
All current limitations of these features apply, such as a maximum of 23
digits per entry, including the access code. An
number or dialed
digits can follow, but not precede, a Speed Call number. The digits
generated by an
key during feature operation are accepted as
Charge Account digits.

I features and services

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

60-5

Feature packaging
CDR with Charge Account (CHG), package 23, requires
Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4
Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24

Feature

implementation

-Add/change Charge Account for a customer.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CHLN

(0)-23

Maximum number of digits that can be entered as a charge
account number

Allow/deny access to Charge Account for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

XFA, (XFD)

Allow (Deny) call transfer

-Add/change a Calling Party Number or Charge key for SL-1, M3000, or Meridian digital
telephones.

TYPE

CHG

Change

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa = SLI
2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx CPN

Add a Calling Party Number key (must be key 24for
and key 32 for M3000)

xx CHG

Add a Charge key (must be key 25 for M2317 and M3000)

1 features and services

553-3001-305

60-6

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

LD12 -Add/change a Calling Party Number or Charge key for attendant consoles.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
, 2006, 2008,
2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CUST

o-99

Customer number

KEY

O-9 CPN

Add a Calling Party Number key

2216,

Add a Charge key

CHG

Feature operation
This section explains Charge Account feature and Calling Party Number
telephones, and
feature operation for multi-line telephones,
attendant consoles.
Multi-line telephones
To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:
1

Select a free extension.

2

Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.

3

Dial the Charge Account number.

4

When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.

To charge during a call in progress, follow these steps:
1 Press Charge.
2

Dial the Charge Account number.

3

Press the extension key to return to your call.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

To use a SPRE code

to charge a call in progress,

1

Press Transfer or Conference.

2

Dial SPRE + 5.

3

Dial the Charge Account number.

4

Press the extension key to return to your call.

60-7

follow these steps:

To charge a call to an account when you transfer a call, follow these steps:
1 Press Transfer.
The call is on hold.
2

Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.

3

Dial the Charge Account number.

4

Dial the number where the call is to be transferred.

5 Press Transfer.
To charge a call to an account when adding a party to a conference call,
follow these steps:
Press Conference.
The call is on hold.
2

Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.

3

Dial the Charge Account number.

4

Call the party that you want to add to the conference.

5 Press Conference.
To record a caller’s number for accounting purposes, follow these steps:
1

Press Calling No.
The other party is on hold.

2

Dial a Charge Account number or the caller’s number.

3

Press Calling No. again to return to the call.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

60-8

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

telephones
To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:
1

Select a free extension.

2

Dial SPRE + 5.

3

Dial the charge account number.

4

When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.

To charge during a call in progress, follow these steps:
1

Flash the switchhook or link.

2

Dial SPRE + 5.

3

Dial the Charge Account number.

4

Flash the switchhook or link to return to the call in progress.

To charge a call to an account when adding a party to a conference call,
follow these steps:
1

Flash the switchhook or link.

2

Dial SPRE + 5.

3

Dial the Charge Account number.

4

Call the party that you want to add to the conference,

5

Flash the switchhook or link.

Attendant consoles
To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:
1

Press the loop key.

2 Press Charge.
3

Dial the Charge Account number.

4

When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Charge Account and Calling Party Number 60-9

To charge during a call in progress, follow these steps:
1

While the source call is active on a loop key, press Charge.

2

Dial the Charge Account number.
The voice connection remains active.

3

Flash the switchhook or link to return to the call in progress.

To record a caller’s number for accounting purposes, follow these steps:
1

While the source call is active on a loop key, press Calling No.
The other party is on hold.

2

Dial a Charge Account number or the caller’s number.

3

Press Calling No. again to return to the call.

Xl features and services

60-10

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

features and services

553-3001-305

issued:

92 12 31

Status:
1 Release:

Standard
All
61-1

Charge Account, Forced
Forced Charge Account (FCA) temporarily overrides class of service
restrictions for toll-denied users. Use Forced Charge Account (FCA)
long-distance calls to an account number when calling from a telephone that
is restricted from making long-distance calls. The unrestricted class of service
provided by Forced Charge Account (FCA) applies for the duration of the
call.
When the account number is entered, a charge record is produced on a Call
Detail Recording (CDR) device.
FCA supports variable-length numbers of to 23 digits. The minimum value
for the account number is specified at the customer level.
A valid account number equals or exceeds the minimum value defined, and
is validated by the system for length only. Verification of the actual digits
entered is part of Call Detail Recording (CDR) downstream processing.
FCA can be allowed or denied at both customer and user levels. Users include
any station or tie and CCSA type trunks assigned a Toll-Denied (TLD),
Conditionally Toll-Denied (CTD), or Conditionally Unrestricted (CUN)
Class of Service.
SL- and Meridian digital telephones activate this feature by using a separate
Charge key/lamp pair. Any user can access this feature by dialing SPRE + 5.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

61-2

Charge Account, Forced

A distinction is made between normal CDR Charge Account processing and
FCA. If all the following conditions are met, the account number is treated as
an FCA code:
The telephone from which the number is entered must have a TLD, CTD,
or CUN Class of Service.
The station or trunk from which the number is entered must be in a state
to originate a call (press a Directory Number (DN) key or flash the
switchhook).
FCA must be enabled at the customer level.
FCA must be allowed for the station or trunk from which the number is
entered.
A valid account number must be entered at the beginning of the call.
The unrestricted class of service provided by FCA as described above applies
for the duration of the call only. The account number must be reentered for
each successive toll call placed by the station or trunk.

Operating parameters
An octothorpe
dialed after the account number indicates that the
subsequent digits are part of the dialed number.
CDR charge account numbers are fixed-length codes for which a maximum
value is specified by the customer. This is also the maximum allowed for the
FCA account number.
Because 500 telephones cannot dial an octothorpe
fixed-length account numbers.
FCA does not apply to attendant calls.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

they are restricted to

Charge Account, Forced

61-3

Feature interaction
Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection
If BARS or NARS is equipped, an Network Class of Service (NCOS)
associated with FCA must be defined in the customer data block.
CDR
Normal CDR charge account numbers can still be entered before or after
an FCA code. If the criteria for an FCA call are not met, CDR charge
account numbers function in the normal manner.
Conference and Transfer
If an FCA code is entered at the beginning of a call, the new unrestricted
class of service remains in effect for any transfer or conference made
during the call. If all FCA criteria are met, an account number entered
after activating the Conference key, Call Transfer key, or a switchhook
flash is interpreted as an FCA code.
Authorization Code
If the authorization code is used to change the class of service of the user,
the new class of service must be TLD, CTD, or CUN. If an Authorization
Code entered after FCA has altered the class of service to unrestricted
(UNR), the change made by the Authorization Code still comes into
effect.
Speed Call and
FCA numbers (including the Special Prefix (SPRE) code and the Charge
Account access code) can be entered in Speed Call lists or stored as
numbers. The digits can also be stored, provided that the
account number, regardless of its length, is followed directly by an
octothorpe
Trunk Group Access Restrictions (TGAR)
apply to the telephone or trunk entering the account number.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Charge Account, Forced

61-4

Feature packaging
Forced Charge Account (FCA), package 52 requires
Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24
CDR for Charge Account (CHG), package 23

implementation
Enable/disable Forced Charge Account for a customer.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CHLN

(0)-23

Maximum number of digits that can be in an FCA code
(default is 0)

FCAF

Yes, (No)

Enable or disable FCA for the customer

CHMN

xx

FCNC

xx

Minimum number of digits that can be in an FCA code
(must be less than CHLN)
NCOS to be assigned to FCA codes

Enable/disable Forced Charge Account for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

FCAR

Yes

FCA is restricted from use by this telephone
FCA can be used by this telephone

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Charge Account, Forced

61-5

-Enable/disable Forced Charge Account for Sl-1 and Meridian Digital telephones.

TYPE

CHG

Change

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

FCAR

Yes

FCA is restricted from use by this telephone
FCA can be used by this telephone

Enable/disable Forced Charge Account for each incoming tie or CCSA trunk.

TYPE

CHG

Change

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2317,
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

FCAR

Yes

FCA is restricted from use by this trunk
FCA can be used by this trunk

Feature operation
To use FCA, follow these steps:
1

Select a free extension.

2

Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.

3

Dial the Charge Account number.

4

When you have a dial tone, dial the long-distance number.

For operating procedures from particular telephones or consoles, see the
“Charge Account and Calling Party Number” on page 60-l.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

61-6

Charge Account, Forced

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:.
Status:
1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All

62-1

Conference
Conference adds additional parties to an established call. The maximum is
three or six, depending on the Conference feature assigned to the conference
call originator. The
parties can be inside or outside Meridian
although one party must be an internal Directory Number (DN) to uphold the
conference connection. The attendant can also establish six-party
conferences.
SL- and Meridian digital telephones require a separate Conference or
Conference 6 key/lamp pair. M23 17 and M3000 Touchphones establish
telephones use the
conference calls by means of a
switchhook to establish a three-party conference.
Six-party conference for
Telephones, Xl 1 release 10
and later releases
The six-party Conference
Class of Service enables
telephones to establish a six-party conference, which operates the same as a
three-party conference, with the exception of Conference Control operation.
Introduced in
1 release 2, Conference Control disconnects an unwanted
third party (trunk only) from a three-party conference.
telephone
users implement this feature by means of switchhook flash. Telephones with
the six-party conference capability implement Conference Control by dialing
SPRE 87.
telephones have either the three-party
It is recommended that all
Class of Service or the six-party Conference
Class
conference
of Service to avoid confusion when using Conference Control.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

62-2

Conference

Operating parameters
Due to the potential impact on hearing loss levels of more than two trunks in
a conference at any one time, it is strongly recommended that a maximum of
two trunks be included.
At least one party in the conference must be a telephone on the local
Meridian 1 for the duration of the conference call.
Attendant Administration does not support the implementation of six-party
telephones. An error message is displayed if an
conference for
attempt is made to remove Transfer Allowed (XFA) class of service for
telephones with a
Class of Service.
A Transfer allowed (XFA) class of service is required for a three-party
conference
and is also a prerequisite for the six-party conference class
of service
on
telephones.
Dial access of Conference Control is provided only for
Class of Service.
with a

telephones

The number of timeslots is limited to 30 per conference loop. A maximum of
five simultaneous conferences, each consisting of six conference users, is
supported per conference loop.
A warning tone is available for conference calls. When the option is enabled,
the tone lets callers know that they are entering a conference call. The switch
for this option is preset to disable the warning tone. For information on the
card, refer to
cad
switch settings for the
testing (553-3001-211).

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Conference

62-3

Feature interaction
Call Transfer
Conference can be used to transfer calls, eliminating the need for a
separate Call Transfer key/lamp pair on SL-I and Meridian digital
telephones. Calls in the ringing state cannot be transferred with
Conference. The third party must answer before the transfer can be
completed.
Transfer
When a switchhook flash transfers calls on
telephones with
class of service, the transferring party goes
three-party conference
on hook leaving the other two parties established. Telephones with a
class of service involved in a conference having more than three
parties must add the last party to the conference, then flash the
switchhook and go on hook to complete the transfer.
Attendant Barge-In and Attendant Busy Verify
Conference Control cannot be activated if an attendant has used Barge-In
or Busy Verify during a conference that involves a trunk.
Ring Again
This feature cannot be activated during a conference call.
Call Pickup
This feature cannot be activated during a conference call. SL-1 and
Meridian digital telephones can activate Call Pickup if an idle Directory
Number (DN) key is available. The conference call must be put on hold
before pressing the idle DN key to pick up the call.
Trunk Access from any Station (TAFAS)
A switchhook flash on
telephones results in special dial tone.
Dialing SPRE + 4 (TAFAS access code) then picks up an incoming
TAFAS call. A second switchhook flash reconnects the user to the
original conference call. The call picked up by TAFAS is put on
Consultation Hold. No other action can be taken with a call picked up in
this way during an established conference call.
Call Forward All Calls
telephones, Call Forward All Calls can be activated or
On
canceled during a conference call.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

62-4

Conference

Hot Line
A Flexible Hot Line (non-enhanced) telephone cannot place conference
calls, but an Enhanced Hot Line telephone can activate the conference
feature. If the Hot Line restriction option is set, the conference call can
terminate only to other Hot Line telephones. If the restriction option is
not set, the conference call can terminate to any type of telephone.
Group Call
Neither Call Transfer nor Conference can be initiated during a Group
telephone user flashes the switchhook during an
Call. If a
established Group Call, the user is dropped from the call.
Attendant
allows
telephones on
Three-party Conference
established calls to flash the switchhook and Dial 0 to talk to the
attendant. Six-party conference users follow the same sequence, but the
conference loop is seized and the call is treated as a conference call.
When only two parties remain from the conference, the call is returned
to a simple call if neither of the remaining parties is an attendant console.
Dial Intercom Group (DIG)
a
telephone is part of a Dial Intercom Group (DIG), the user
of the telephone can conference only with another user whose telephone
is within the same Dial Intercom Group (DIG).
Meridian Mail (VOM) Conference Control
Three- and six-party conference allows 2500 telephones to disconnect
from Meridian Mail by dial access during a conference call.
A 2500 telephone on an established call flashes the switchhook to place the
existing call on Consultation Hold. After receiving special dial tone, the user
dials the third party. If the third party does not answer, the call is forwarded
to Meridian Mail. If the 2500 telephone flashes the switchhook again, a
three-party conference is established, including Meridian Mail. If the user
does not flash the switchhook at this time, Privacy is in effect and the user can
disconnect from Meridian Mail by dial access before returning to the original
call. This can be done if the user is in conference or on a simple two-party call.
to stop the recorded
To disconnect from Meridian Mail, press octothorpe
to stop recording your message, and 83 to disconnect.
greeting, octothorpe
To disconnect from any other message system connected to Meridian
press 3 to stop the recorded message and the asterisk
to disconnect.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Conference

62-5

Feature packaging
Conference is included in basic

Feature

1 system software.

implementation

Add/change Conference 3 or Conference 6 for
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

telephones.

Terminal Number

TN
XFA (XFD)

Allow (Deny) transfer Class of Service
Allow (Deny) six-party conference
Class of Service)

requires an XFA

Add/change Conference 3 or Conference 6 for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa
2317, 2616, 3000
Terminal Number

TN
KEY

xx

Add a Conference 3 or Conference 6 key (must be key 23
for M3000)
xx = key number

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

62-6

Conference

Feature operation
To add a new party to an established call on an
follow these steps:

or digital telephone,

Press Conference.
The first party is on hold and you receive a dial tone.
Dial the number of the new party.
When the new party answers, you may talk privately.
Press Conference to include all parties in the call.
To add more parties to the conference (up to six, including yourself),
repeat steps 1-3.
Note: If you make a mistake while dialing or receive a busy signal, press
to disconnect. To return to the call, press the key beside the fast
flashing indicator.
To add a new party to an established call on a
these steps:

telephone, follow

1

Flash the switchhook.
You hear three beeps followed by dial tone. The first party is on hold.

2

Dial the telephone number of the person to be included in your call.
When the call is answered, you may talk privately with the new party.

3

Flash the switchhook to include all parties in the call.

4

To add more parties to the conference (up to six, including yourself),
repeat steps 1-3.
Note: If you make a mistake while dialing or receive a busy signal, flash
the switchhook to return to the original caller.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
Release:
63-1

Console Presentation Group Level
Services
A Console Presentation Group (CPG) is a subset of the consoles configured
for a customer. A CPG handles attendant calls from one or more tenants and
incoming trunk calls on one or more routes. CPG improves functions for the
following CPG Level Services:
Attendant Overflow Positions (AOP)
AOP DN and waiting time threshold can be specified for each CPG.
Call Waiting Indication
Count thresholds, timers, and buzz options can be defined for each CPG.
Incoming Call Identification (ICI)
ICI keys can be defined for each CPG. Attendants see only those ICI
definitions for their own CPG.
Listed Directory Numbers (LDN)
Each CPG allows four
Night Service (NSVC)
Each CPG can go into Night Service mode independent of the other
groups.
Recorded Announcement (RAN)
Each CPG can have its own recorded overflow announcements.

Operating parameters
Console Presentation Group (CPG) services and Departmental Listed
Directory Numbers (DLDN) are mutually exclusive at the customer level.
can be equipped on the same system with Console
That is,
Presentation Groups
but not enabled for the same customer group at
the same time.

features and services

553-3001-305

63-2

Console Presentation Group Level Services

Feature interaction
Attendant Administration
Attendants can dial the access code and activate the Administration
mode. In this mode, they can modify the configuration of any telephone
for this customer.
Call Park
Parked calls recall to the attendant who parked them. If that attendant
console goes into Position Busy mode, the call recalls to an attendant in
the same CPG as the original.
If the attendant goes into Night Service (NSCV) while a call is parked,
the recall is presented to the Night DN defined for that CPG. If an
attendant goes into Night Service while the recall is in the attendant
queue, it stays in the attendant queue until the call is abandoned.
Secrecy
The Secrecy option specified for a customer applies to all attendants for
that customer.
Supervisory console
The supervisory console specified for a customer belongs to one CPG. In
the Supervisory mode, ICI indicators show only the information for
in that CPG. Thresholds specified in the customer data block apply only
to the CPG where that console resides, and do not effect any other CPG.

Feature packaging
Console Presentation Groups (CPG), package 172, requires
Multi-Tenant Services (TENS), package 86

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Console Presentation Group Level Services

Feature
LD93

63-3

implementation

Enable CPG.

TYPE

Multi-Tenant data block

CUST

Customer number

CPGS

Enable CPG Level Services

LD93 -Assign attendant consoles to a presentation group.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CPG

Console Presentation Group data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

AGNO

O-63

Attendant console group number

ANUM

l-631-63

Attendant console numbers

LD93

Assign tenants to an attendant group number.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

TCPG

Tenant to Console Presentation Group data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

TEN

l-511

Tenant number

AGNO

O-63

Attendant console group number

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

63-4

Console Presentation Group Level Services

LD93

Assign a route to an attendant group number.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

RCPG

Route to Console Presentation Group data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

l-511

Route number

AGNO

O-63

Attendant console group number

LD93

Add CPG features. (Part 1 of 2)

REQ

NEW, CHG

Enable/disable Multi-Tenant Service for a customer

TYPE

CPGP

Console Presentation Group parameters

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CPG

1-63

Console Presentation group number

LDNO

xxxx

Listed DN 0

NIT1

xxxx

First Night Service by Time of Day (NTOD) DN

hhmm

Hour minute for First NTOD DN

NIT2

xxxx

Second NTOD DN

TIM2

hhmm

Time for Second NTOD

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Console Presentation Group Level Services

63-5

LD93 -Add CPG features. (Part 2 of 2)
NIT3

xxxx

Third NTOD DN

TIM3

hhmm

Time for Third NTOD DN

NIT4

xxxx

Fourth NTOD DN

TIM4

hhmm

Time for Fourth NTOD

ICI

xx aaa

Incoming Call Indicators (ICI)
Attendant queuing threshold

AQTT
AODN

xxxx

Attendant overflow DN

(0)-255

Number of waiting calls, lower threshold and upper bound

CWTM

(O)-511 (O)-511

Time for waiting calls, lower threshold and upper bound

CWBZ

Yes, (No) Yes, (No)

Buzz Call Waiting calls over thresholds, and/or enters
queue

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

63-6

Console Presentation Group Level Services

features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
Xl 1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
7
64-1

Controlled Class of Service
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) alters the Class of Service restriction
levels on telephones that have been defined as CCOS controlling telephones.
This applies to SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephone users designated as
CCOS controllers. While CCOS is active, central office or toll calls made
from these telephones cannot be completed without first being routed through
an attendant.
SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephones designated as CCOS controlling
telephones are assigned a CCOS key/lamp that is used to activate or cancel
the system-defined CCOS restriction level on individual

Operating parameters
Controlling telephones can be any SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephones.
CCOS controlling telephones must refer to the Prime Directory Number
(PDN) when activating or cancelling CCOS on other telephones.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agents cannot be restricted by CCOS.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

64-2

Controlled Class of Service

Feature interaction
Authorization code
The authorization code overrides a telephone’s CCOS restriction level.
Conference
If CCOS is activated at a telephone involved in a conference call,
established control office or toll calls are not affected. The CCOS
restriction level is applied immediately, and no new calls can be initiated
from the conference. The telephone remains in the CCOS active state
after the conference is terminated.
Multiple Appearance DN
CCOS restriction levels are activated or canceled on controlled
telephones through their Prime Directory Number (PDN). When the
PDN of an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone is made CCOS active, all
on that telephone are also restricted. If the DN is a PDN on other
telephones, those telephones are also restricted (if they have CCSA class
of service).

Feature packaging
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS), package 81, has no feature package
requirements.

features and services

553-3001-305

Controlled Class of Service

Feature

64-3

implementation

Add/change CCOS for a customer.
REQ

Change

CHG

Customer Data Block
CUST

o-99

Customer number

CCRS

UNR
CUN
CTD
TLD
SRE
FRE

Unrestricted
Conditionally unrestricted
Conditionally toll-denied
Toll-denied
Semi-restricted
Fully restricted
Fully restricted
Fully restricted 2

FR2

-Allow/deny CCOS on SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =

TN

, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112,

lscu

Terminal Number

CCSA, (CCSD)

Allow (Deny) CCOS

CCOS on 50012500 telephones.
CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CCSA, (CCSD)

Allow (Deny) CCOS

1 features and services

553-3001-305

64-4

Controlled Class o f S e r v i c e

-Add/change CCOS controlling telephone assignments on
telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

and Meridian digital

aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx cos

Assign CCOS controlling key

Feature operation
To activate CCOS, follow these steps:
1 Press CCOS.
2

Dial the Prime Directory Number (PDN) of the telephone to be changed
and press CCOS.

3 Press RLS.
To deactivate CCOS, follow these steps:
1 Press CCOS.
2

Dial the PDN of the telephone to be returned to its original class of
service and press CCOS.

3 Press RLS.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:

931031

Status:
1 Release:

Standard
15
65-l

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) allows a controller or
attendant console to alter the class of service (CLS) restriction levels of other
CCOS telephones. The feature allows two more customer-defined levels of
restriction. In addition, the CCOS key can now be assigned to an attendant
telephones as a programmable key.
console and

Operating parameters
Controlling telephones can be any SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone.
A CCOS controlling telephone must refer to the Prime DN when activating
or canceling CCOS on other telephones.
ACD agents cannot be restricted by CCOS.
On M3000 telephones, the CCOS key can be assigned as a programmable key
(O-5 only).
This feature is applicable only when the CLS lamp is lit on the controlling
telephone.
The CLS key on an attendant console can be used only on an idle loop. (The
loop lamp is lit; source and destination lamps are dark.)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

65-2

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

Feature interaction
Attendant Administration
This feature cannot change CCRS,
keys to certain telephones.

or ECC2, but can assign CLS

Authorization Codes
The Authorization Code can override a telephone’s CCOS restriction
level.
Conference Calls
If CCOS is activated at a telephone on a conference call, established CO
or toll calls are not affected. The CCOS restriction level is applied
immediately, however, and no new calls can be initiated from the
conference. That telephone remains in the CCOS state after the end of the
conference.
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP)
The internal DN is used for programming the CLS level for CDP from
the controlling telephone.
Multiple Appearance
All CCOS restriction levels are activated and canceled from the PDN
(PDN) for CCOS controlling telephones. The PDN for an SL-1 telephone
is made CCOS active, and all
for that telephone are restricted as
well. If that DN is a PDN on other telephones, they are also restricted (if
they have CCSA Class of Service).
Pretranslation
The DN used to program the CCOS should be the actual DN before
pretranslation. When programming CCOS, the DN entered is not
pretranslated.
Supervisory attendants
When the attendant is in the supervisory mode, CCOS programing is
prohibited.

Feature packaging
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS), package 173, requires
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS), package 81

features and services

553-3001-305

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

Feature

65-3

implementation

Define the class of service restrictions for the system.
REQ

CHG

Change
Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number
CCOS restrictions

CCRS

Unrestricted

service

CTD

Conditionally

CUN

Conditionally Unrestricted

Toll

Denied

FRE

Fully

Restricted

Fully Restricted level

ECC2

FR2

Fully Restricted level 2

SRE

Semi-Restricted

TLD

Toll Denied

xxx

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service, Level 1

xxx

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service, Level 2
x x x =(UNR)
CTD
CUN
FRE
FR2
SRE
TLD

Note: Input restrictions apply when CCSA is active. When CCSA is inactive, the telephone has the CLS
assigned in
O/l 1.

features and services

553-3001-305

65-4

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

-Assign keys for controller telephone.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =

2006,

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx cos

Key number for CCOS key on controller telephone
(for M3000, key must be O-5)

Configure controlled

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CCSA, (CCSD)

Allow (Deny) CCOS

Configure the controlled SL-1 and digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CCSA, (CCSD)

Allow (Deny) CCOS

Xl features and services

18, 2112, 2216,

553-3001-305

.

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

LD12

65-5

Assign ECCS keys for attendant console

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

ATT,

Console type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx cos
xx

Key number for CCOS controller key on attendant console
xx = key number (must be greater than 1)

Feature operation
To activate Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) from an
digital telephone with the feature currently inactive, follow these steps:

or

Press CCOS to begin the activation sequence.
Note that this is a toggle: If CCOS is already active, pressing the key will
change the CCOS state to inactive. Check the CCOS lamp to determine
if CCOS is already active.
Dial the PDN of the telephone to be changed and press CCOS. The
controlling telephone’s display, if equipped, shows the DN of the
changed telephone and a 0 (zero).
To select
dial 1.
Note that the octothorpe
is required. The controlling telephone’s
display, if equipped, shows the DN of the changed telephone and a 1.
To select
dial 2.
Note that the octothorpe
is required. The controlling telephone’s
display, if equipped, shows the DN of the changed telephone and a 2.
Press RLS.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

65-6

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced
To activate ECCS from an attendant console, follow these steps:
1

Select an idle loop key.

2 Press CCOS.
3

Dial the PDN of the telephone to be changed and press CCOS. The
console’s display shows the DN of the changed telephone. A 0 (zero) is
displayed if the telephone is active in the original CCOS mode.
If the telephone dies not have CCOS or ECCOS active, the console does
not acknowledge that you have successfully entered a valid CCOS DN.

4

dial # 1.
To select
Note that the octothorpe
is required. The console’s display shows the
DN of the changed telephone and a 1.
To select ECC2, dial 2.
Note that the octothorpe
is required. The console’s display shows the
DN of the changed telephone and a 2.

5 Press RLS.
To deactivate Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS), follow these
steps:
1
2
3

Select an idle loop key.
Press

Dial the PDN of the telephone to be returned to its original class of
service and press CCOS.

4 Press RLS.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Issued;
Status:
1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
5
66-1

Directory Number
The Departmental Listed Directory Number (DLDN) feature allows specified
telephones sharing the same numbering plan to belong to one subgroup out of
a possible four subgroups within a Meridian 1 customer group. Each
Departmental Listed Directory Number (DLDN) subgroup is identified by
Calls to a specific
one of the customer’s Listed Directory Numbers
Listed Directory Numbers (LDN). or dial-0 calls from subgroup telephones,
are directed to the attendant console or consoles assigned to that Listed
Directory Numbers (LDN).
When the Departmental Listed Directory Number (DLDN) feature is
implemented, a departmental attendant console is presented with calls from
the following sources:
Incoming external trunk calls routed to the LDN from
.

an auto-terminate trunk (CO, FX, or WATS) whose Auto-Terminate
Number (ATDN) is the LDN

.

a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk whose Direct Inward Dialing
(DID) number is the same as the LDN

Calls that originate from internal telephones or tie trunks when
.

a telephone user dials the LDN

.

a telephone user associated with a departmental attendant console
dials 0

.

a tie-line user dials the LDN

The DLDN feature associates attendant consoles with a LDN. Up to 63
attendant consoles can be associated with one LDN.

Xl 1 features and services

66-2

Departmental Listed Directory Number

For call distribution purposes, all attendant consoles within a subgroup are
made members of a circular list. When a call is received, it is presented to the
next listed console after the one that was last offered a call, thus ensuring that
LDN calls are distributed in an equitable way. LDN calls, dial-0 calls, and
associated timed recalls are serviced according to a circular list for the
particular LDN.
On receiving an LDN type call, the Meridian 1 searches for an idle attendant
console and tests whether or not that console is configured to answer a call
for the dialed Directory Number (DN). If the attendant console is not
configured to answer calls for that LDN, the next idle attendant console is
tested. If an attendant console that can answer the call is found, the call is
presented with the appropriate Loop and Incoming Call Indication (ICI)
lamps lit. If no idle attendant console for the LDN is found, the call is placed
in the incoming call queue for all attendant consoles within the customer
group.
The Call Waiting indication is provided to all attendant consoles within the
customer group. If an Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key has been provisioned
for the LDN, a lamp indication will be provided to all idle attendant consoles
within the customer group and may be answered by pressing the appropriate
key.
When an attendant presses the Release key, the Meridian 1 checks to see if
there are any calls waiting in the queue. If there are calls waiting, it tests
whether or not the attendant console, if it is next in the circular list, can
answer the first call in the queue. If the call can be answered, it is presented
to the attendant console. Otherwise it is put back into the queue and another
call is sought. If no calls for the LDN are found, the attendant console is idled
and the Release lamp is lit.

Operating parameters
An optional assignment of ICI keys is allowed to provide a visual indication
of the LDN

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Departmental Listed Directory Number

66-3

Feature interactions
Night Service
DLDN does not affect Night Service (including TAFAS). Calls
presented to the LDN from an external source will queue for the night
bell. All other attendant calls receive busy treatment if the night
Directory Number (DN) is busy.
Position Busy
If all attendant consoles in an LDN group are in a Position Busy state,
calls to that LDN will not be automatically presented to any attendant
console in the customer group. Other attendants may only answer those
LDN calls if the LDN has been assigned to an ICI key.
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
LDN calls are not screened for Centralized Attendant Service (CAS).
When a Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) key is pressed at a CAS
remote attendant console, LDN calls will be handled at the CAS main as
if the DLDN feature did not exist.
Call Forward
Call Forward No Answer to the attendant and Call Forward Busy operate
like Call Forward to 0, and are routed to any idle attendant console in the
customer group.
Interdepartmental Attendant Transfers
Interdepartmental Attendant Transfers operate normally, except that if
there is a recall, it will be to the appropriate department rather than to the
last attendant that extended the call.
Attendant Overflow Position
LDN calls that have been waiting in the queue longer than the specified
threshold period will be routed to the Attendant Overflow Position.

Feature packaging
DLDN, package 76, has no other package dependencies.

1 features and services

Departmental Listed Directory Number

66-4

Feature

implementation
Note: If the DN Expansion package is equipped, all
to seven digits.

can have up

Enable the Departmental Listed Directory Number feature for a customer. (Part 1 of 2)
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

DLDN

Yes, (No)

Enable or disable DLDN

LDNO

xxx...x

Listed Directory Number Zero

LDAO

Associate attendant console number with LDN 0
Note: With
1 release 8 and later, the maximum number of
attendant consoles allowed is 63.

ALL

Associate all attendant consoles with LDN 0



Associate all attendant consoles with LDNO

xxx...x

Listed Directory Number One
Associate attendant console number with LDN
Note: With Xl 1 release 8 and later, the maximum number of
attendant consoles allowed is 63.

ALL

Associate all attendant consoles with LDN 1



Associate all attendant consoles with

features and services

553-3001-305

Departmental Listed Directory Number

66-5

Enable the Departmental Listed Directory Number feature for a customer. (Part 2 of 2)
LDN2

xxx...x

Listed Directory Number Two

1

Associate attendant console number with LDN 2
Note: With
1 release 8 and later, the maximum number of
attendant consoles allowed is 63.

LDN3

ALL

Associate all attendant consoles with LDN 2



Associate all attendant consoles with LDN2

xxx...x

Listed Directory Number Three

LDA3

Associate attendant console number with LDN 3
Note: With Xl 1 release 8 and later, the maximum number of
attendant consoles allowed is 63.

ICI

ALL

Associate all attendant consoles with LDN 3



Associate all attendant consoles with

xx LDO
xx
xx LD2
xx LD3

Incoming Call Indication for Listed Directory Numbers Zero
to Three (xx key number
9)

Note: To remove an LDN, enter an X before the Directory Number. An LDN cannot be removed if any
attendant consoles are associated with it. To remove an associated attendant console, enter an X at the
LDA prompt before the attendant number.

Add or change Departmental Listed Directory Number for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

LDN

O-3, (No)

Telephone associated with LDN (O-3 or none)
Choose No to remove this telephone from the group.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

66-6

Departmental Listed Directory Number

-Add or change Departmental Listed Directory Number for SL-1 and Meridian digital
telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type (aaaa =
2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, 3000

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

LDN

O-3,

Telephone associated with LDN (O-3 or none)
Choose No to remove this telephone from the group.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

93 08 01
Standard
5
67-1

Dial Intercom
Dial Intercom (DI) allows a customer to arrange stations within the Meridian
1 into separate Dial Intercom Groups (DIGS ). A total of 100 stations can
belong to each Dial Intercom Group (DIG). One-digit dialing is required for
a Dial Intercom Group (DIG) of up to 10 stations, and two-digit dialing is
required for a DIG of up to 100 stations.
SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephones can be equipped with a separate DIG
key/lamp pair for each DIG of which it is a member. Single-line telephone
users can belong to only one DIG and may not have any non-DIG Directory
Numbers
Voice or ring may be specified on a DIG basis for SL- 1 and Meridian digital
telephones. If voice is specified, an idle stations rings once for 2 seconds. The
calling party is then connected and may make a voice announcement. If ring
is implemented, normal ringing is received until the called party answers. In
Xl 1 release 19, you have the option of an announcement or a two-way speech
path.
The ring option must be used if a 500 type telephone is a member of the
group.
Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom, X11 release 13 and later software
This feature allows a user to differentiate between an incoming call and a Dial
Intercom (DI) call. The Dial Intercom (DI) ringing has a different cadence
than the regular Directory Number (DN) ringing and Distinctive Ringing.
Distinctive Ringing for DI is assignable on a per customer basis. The cadence
is 0.5 on and 0.5 off, repeatedly.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

67-2

Dial

Intercom

Dial Intercom Handsfree Voice Call
Dial Intercom Handsfree Voice Call is an X11 release 19 system feature that
can be used with the following telephones: M2112, M2317, and M2616.
Handsfree Voice Call provides the option of configuring
(with
voice option) to be answered in either handsfree mode or loudspeaker only
mode. Calls answered in handsfree (HVA) mode establish a two-way voice
path, while those answered in loudspeaker only (HVD) mode establish only
a one-way voice path from the calling telephone to the destination telephone.
Note: Dial Intercom Handsfree Voice Call applies only to voice option

DIG calls.

Operating parameters
A maximum of 254
can be established per customer. X11 release 13
can be implemented.
and later software up to 2046
Calls are restricted to stations within the DIG only. Trunks cannot be accessed
using the DIG key, and cannot be added to a DIG call using the Conference
feature.
A DIG member number must be a single appearance Directory Number (DN)
within a specified DIG.
DI
attendant.

telephones cannot dial the attendant or be dialed by the

A DI telephone cannot be assigned a member number that conflicts with the
Special Prefix (SPRE) code. In the case of double-digit values, the first digit
cannot be the same as the SPRE code. For example, if the SPRE code is 7, the
member number cannot be 7, or 70 through 79, but a two-digit SPRE code,
such as 77, allows 99 DIG member numbers. With no SPRE code defined,
100 DIG members are possible.
Call Transfer and Conference cannot take place to telephones outside the
DIG.

features and services

553-3001-305

Dial

Intercom

67-3

Handsfree Voice Call allowed/denied is set at the system level and can only
be used with digital telephones that have handsfree capabilities (such as 2112,
2317, and
and requires Class of Service Handsfree
on
the destination telephone, which is set at the telephone level.
Note: BRI, M3000, and SL-1 telephones do not support the Handsfree
feature.

Feature interactions
Call
The Dial Intercom code may be dialed using

or Speed Call.

Call Forward/Call Waiting
The Call Forward and Call Waiting features do not apply to a Dial
Intercom appearance.
Call Pickup
Call Pickup may be used by SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones if the
telephones are all in the same DIG and Call Pickup Group and the ring
option is specified for the DIG.
Digit Display
The digit display will be cleared when the DIG key is pressed. When the
user dials the DI code, the digits of the code are displayed. When the call
is answered, the DI code of the calling party appears on the display of the
called party.
If either party presses the Release key or goes on-hook during a DIG call,
the displays of both parties are cleared. If either party presses the Hold
key, the display of the holding station is cleared but the display of the
other station remains unchanged. When the held call is reestablished, the
holding station redisplays the DIG number of the other party.
Conference/Call Transfer
When using Conference or Transfer, the voice option is not provided if
the call is terminated before the conference or transfer is completed.
Auto Answer Back (AAB)
This feature is not affected by the Handsfree Voice Call feature.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

67-4

Dial

Intercom

Station features
DI can be used in combination with the following features:

Feature

SL-1 and Meridian
digital telephones

telephones

.
Speed Call

.

Digit

.

Display

Make Set Busy

.

Override

.

Release

.

Hold

.

Call Pickup

.

.

Conference

.

.

Call Transfer

.

.

Ring Again

.

.

Feature packaging
Dial Intercom (DI) package (21) has no other package dependencies.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Dial

Feature

Intercom

67-5

implementation

Enable Dial Intercom for a customer.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

DGRP

(0)

253

maximum number of
customer

that can be defined for the

Note: With Xl 1 release 13 and later, the maximum number of
allowed is 2046.

Add or change Dial Intercom for

telephones.

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change (see Note)

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

DES

a...x

ODAS set designator
a...x = one to six character alphanumeric designator

CUST

o-99

Customer number

DIG

xxxx yy

xxxx = Dial Intercom group number (O-253)
yy = member number (O-99) within the group
Note: With Xl 1 release 13 and later, the maximum number of
allowed is to 2046.

Note: Single line telephones cannot have both a Dial Intercom Group number and a standard DN. To add
this feature, you must remove the telephone from the database and build it again, as a Dial Intercom Group
member.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

67-6

Dial

Intercom

-Add or change Dial Intercom for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type (aaaa =
2018, 2112,

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx DIG aaa bb c

add a Dial Intercom key

, 2006, 2008,
2616, 3000

xx = key number

aaa = group number (O-253)
bb = member number (O-99)
c = r (ring) or v (voice)
Note: With Xl 1 release 13 and later, the maximum number of
allowed has increased to 2046.

Add or change Handsfree Voice Call for the Meridian 1 system.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer data block

CUST

xx

Customer number

OPT

HVA, (HVD)

Handsfree Voice Call Allowed (Denied)

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Dial

Intercom

67-7

Feature operation
An example of a Dial Intercom call is listed below.

Dial Intercom Call
To make a Dial Intercom call
1

Lift the handset and dial the Intercom key.

2

Dial the one- or two-digit code for the DIG member.

If your phone and the phone you are calling are configured for the voice
option, you can deliver a voice message after 2 seconds of ringing.
To answer a Dial Intercom call when you are on a line other than your DIG
line
1

Release the current call or place it on hold.

2 Press Intercom.
Dial Intercom Handsfree Voice Call
Examples of both Handsfree Voice Call options are listed below.
HVA option
The originating telephone (telephone A) places a DIG call to the destination
telephone (telephone B).
Telephone B rings once.
After one ring, telephone B automatically answers the call in Handsfree
mode.
The DN and handsfree
established.

are lit and a two-way voice path is

1 features and services

553-3001-305

67-6

Dial

Intercom

HVD option
Telephone A places a call to telephone B.
Telephone B rings once.
After one ring, telephone B automatically answers the call in loudspeaker
only mode.
The DN LCD is lit and the handsfree LCD remains dark, establishing a
one-way voice path from telephone A to telephone B. At this point,
telephone A is unable to hear the person at telephone B.
To establish a two-way voice path, telephone B must either go off-hook,
or press the Handsfree button.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
Release:

92 12 31
Standard
17
68-1

Dial Pulse/Dual Tone Multifrequency
Conversion
With the Dial Pulse/Dual Tone Multifrequency Conversion feature, Dial
telephones, Dial Pulse (DP) tie lines, SL-1
Pulse (DP) signals from
and digital telephones, or attendant consoles are automatically converted to
Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) signals for transmission over trunks
equipped for Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) service. Dual Tone
Multifrequency (DTMF) signals from single-line 2500 telephones are
automatically converted for transmission over rotary-dial-only trunks, such
as tie lines. This eliminates the need for duplicate dials.
DTMF calling allows the use of 2500 telephones, equipped with pushbutton
dials, to transmit digits through audible tones to the Meridian 1 equipment.
This feature provides the ability to use any combination of telephones.
However, 2500 telephones cannot use DTMF to control dictation equipment
when the dictation trunk is specified as Dial Pulse (DP).

Operating parameters
There are no feature requirements.

Feature interactions
There are no feature interactions.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Feature

implementation
Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

66-2

Dial Pulse/Dual Tone Multifrequency Conversion

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

921231

Standard
IO
69-1

Dialed Number Identification Service
The ACD Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) shows the last three
or four digits of the dialed DN received from auto-terminated DID and Tie
trunks on the display for ACD agents. The maximum number of characters
allowed is 27, including spaces.
Note: Xl release 17 and later supports DNIS on non-ACD telephones.
X 11 release 16 and earlier provides DNIS on ACD telephones only.

Routing by

number
Routing by DNIS number enhances call distribution within an ACD system.
This Xl 1 release 12 enhancement allows calls to be routed to a specific ACD
DN, based on the DNIS number, instead of auto-terminating as described in
the DNIS description in Automatic Call Distribution advancedfeatures
description (553-2671-101).
Xl 1 release 17 provides for Routing by DNIS on Tie trunks.

Name Display for
This Xl 1 release 17 enhancement lets you assign a name to each DNIS
number, and displays both the DNIS number and name for IDC DNIS calls
terminating on both ACD and non-ACD telephones. The maximum number
of characters allowed is 27, including spaces.

ON CDR
For CDR records, the DNIS information is included in the call record after the
Feature Group D digits if the customer has the DNIS and CDR packages, the
route is a DNIS route, and DNIS was turned on in the Route Data Block.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

69-2

Dialed

Number

Identification

Service

across Call Modifications
This enhancement preserves the DNIS information across certain call
modifications and enhances DNIS operation and functionality. This feature
enhances DNIS operation and functionality for DNIS name and number
display across the following call modifications.
Conference and No Hold Conference
Transfer
Privacy Release
Mixed
End to End Signaling
Parked Call/Recalled Parked Call

Related

documents
For a complete discussion on DNIS, Routing by DNIS, Name Display for
DNIS, DNIS on CDR, and DNIS across Call Modifications, refer to
(553-2671-101).
For information about Call Detail Reporting (CDR), refer to Call Detail
Recording description and formats (553-2631-100).

1 features and services

Issued:
Status:
Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All
70-I

Digit Display
There are two types of Digit Displays: Attendant console Digit Display and
SL- 1 telephone Digit Displays.

Attendant console Digit Display
QCW attendant consoles can be equipped with either an
display. This display indicates the following:

or a 16-digit

dialed digits
On attendant-originated calls, Busy Verify (BVR), or Barge-In, the digits
dialed by the attendant are displayed. If the dialed number hunts, the
Hunt destination and the dialed Directory Number (DN) are displayed. If
the dialed number is call forwarded, the forwarded Directory Number
(DN) and the dialed Directory Number (DN) are displayed.
incoming calls
On incoming calls and forwarded Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls, the
trunk access code and member number are displayed. For all station
dial-0 calls, the calling station DN is displayed. For recalls, the
destination DN is displayed.
Display Source/Display Destination keys
Two keys are provided to allow the attendant to display the source and
destination numbers for any connection completed through the console.
Night assignment
During the assignment of night numbers, the Display Source key may be
pressed after the trunk access code and member numbers have been
dialed to display the correct night assignment.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

70-2

Digit

Display

The DN stored against an
key may be displayed by pressing the
key, then the Display Source key. If using an eight-digit display
assignment and if the stored DN consists of more than eight digits, the
Display Source key must be pressed a second time to display the
remainder of the DN. When the
number is changed, the new
number may be displayed by pressing the Display Source key.
Speed Call
The DN stored against a Speed Call code may be displayed by pressing
the Speed Call key, dialing the Speed Call code, and then pressing the
Display Source key. When the Speed Call list is changed, an entry may
be displayed by pressing the Display Source key.
Time and Date
The time may be displayed by pressing the Display Time key on the
attendant console. The date is displayed by pressing the Display Date
key.

SL-1 telephone Digit Display
This feature allows the automatic display of information relevant to normal
call processing and feature activation on any SL-1 telephone equipped with a
display. A key/lamp pair is also provided to enable the station user to
obtain information manually, independent of call processing activity.
Time and Date displayed with an additional Time and Date (TAD) key.

CAUTION
This option should not be used when a Prime DN appears on another
telephone as a Prime DN. Severe real-time penalties will occur
(ERR040 message).

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Digit

Display

70-3

Three display options are available:
No Digit Display (NDD)
This is the default option.
Automatic Digit Display (ADD)
This option allows the display of digit information during call
processing. ADD allows the automatic display of a calling party number
on an incoming call to the Prime DN on a telephone.
Standard Delayed Display (DDS)
Provides calling party information, displayed after answer only.
Automatic displays will show the following:
number dialed
number of calling party
Call Pickup
Call Waiting party
time and date
Press the Display (DSP) key, then the feature key to display information
associated with these features:
Buzz DN
Call Waiting party
Voice Call party
number
Speed Call number
Ring Again party
Call Forward party

features and services

553-3001-305

70-4

Digit

Display

Operating parameters
Digit Display must be enabled for all console types in
OPT.

using the prompt

Only telephones equipped with a Digit Display module can use this feature.
The Display Time and Display Date key cannot be assigned to key 0.

Feature interactions
There are no feature interactions.

Feature packaging
Digit Display (DDSP), package 19, has no other feature package
dependencies.

Feature
LD15

implementation

Add or change Digit Display for attendant consoles for each customer.
CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

IDP, (XDP)

include or exclude Digit Display capability for attendant
consoles of this customer

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Digit

Display

-Enable or disable Digit Display for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa
2317,

TN

lscu

Terminal Number
Telephone is not equipped with a Digit Display

KEY

DDS

Calling Party information is displayed after call is answered
(delayed display source)

ADD

Calling Party information is displayed during call
processing (Automatic Digit Display)

xx DSP

Add a Digit Display key (must be key/lamp pair)
xx key number

xx TAD

Add a Time and Date key (must be key/lamp pair)
xx key number

1 features and services

70-5

70-6

LD12

Digit

Display

Enable or disable Digit Display for each attendant console.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

ATT,

Console type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number
Digit Display entry length (default is 8)

DLEN

This prompt applies to QCW-type consoles only.
KEY

xx DCW

Add display Call Waiting key

xx DDT

Add display Date key

xx DPD

Add display Destination key

xx DPS

Add display Source key

xx DTM

Add display Time key

xx MDT

Add display/change Date key

xx MTM

Add display/change Time key

Feature operation
There are no special procedures for operating this feature.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

92 12 31
Standard

Status:
1 Release:

All
71-1

Digital Trunk Interface
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) provides an integrated interface for
transmitting digital voice and data between a network loop and a DS- 1 digital
carrier terminal. Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) operates similarly to a channel
bank on the carrier side and an analog trunk on the Meridian 1 side. Digital
Trunk Interface (DTI) processes digitally the transmission and reception of
Meridian 1 Data (mixed voice/data), as well as voice calls.
interfaces to DS- 1
digital carriers, which may use infrared
transmission, fiber-optic cables, microwave radio, satellite links, or leased
facilities. DTI may connect to any of the following:
another Meridian 1 or an SL-100
a non-Meridian 1 type system that can use

carrier facilities

a digital central office (CO)

Related documents
For complete information regarding DTI, refer to the following documents:
Digital Trunk
(553-281 l-100)

description

Digital Trunk

installation and
(553-28 1 l-200)

Digital Trunk Interface/Computer-to-PBX
(553-281 l-500)

maintenance

Operating parameters
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

71-2

Digital Trunk Interface

Feature interactions
Not applicable.

Feature packaging
Not applicable.

Feature

implementation
Not applicable.

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
Xl 1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All
72-1

Direct Inward System Access
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) allows selected users to access the
system from the public or private network by dialing a special Directory
Number (DN) assigned by the customer. The number can be dialed from any
telephone outside the network. Once the Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) call has been answered, the user can access any of the
following features and capabilities offered through Direct Inward System
Access (DISA):
calls to any station within the customer group
trunk calls (such as calls to a central office (CO), a tie trunk, or paging
and dictation trunks)
Basic/Network Authorization Code
Call Detail Recording (CDR) and Call Detail Recording (CDR) Charge
Account
Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection
route selection
Automatic Number Identification

and

Each special Directory Number (DN) dialed by a DISA user is associated
with a particular DISA Directory Number (DN). Any number of DISA
can be assigned, provided that they are consistent with the numbering plan of
the customer. Access rights are determined by the Class of Service and Trunk
Group Access Restrictions (TGAR) associated with the DISA number. Calls
to DISA can be placed on dedicated, auto-terminate incoming trunks (CO,
FX, or WATS) and tie or Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks, all of which
must have proper supervision.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

72-2

Direct Inward System Access

As a safeguard against unauthorized use, an authorization code or special
security code of one to eight digits can be assigned for each DISA DN. The
security code must be entered before any system resources can be used.
Additionally, a secure data password can be provided to enable the customer
to create, modify, or remove information concerning DISA.

Operating parameters
The features not available to DISA users are those that require a switchhook
flash (such as Call Transfer, Conference, Hold, or Ring Again). Also
unavailable are features requiring that predefined data be assigned for the DN
(Speed Call for example), and other features that are not applicable to DISA
calls (such as Call Pickup and Call Forward).
Any CO, FX, or WATS trunk route can be designated as an auto-terminate
route, allowing incoming calls in the route to terminate on one particular DN
rather than going to the attendant. Several trunks can specify the same DISA
DN, or each trunk can specify a different DISA DN.
Only trunks that give disconnect supervision can be used to provide access to
DISA. Therefore, trunks dedicated to DISA (CO, FX, or WATS) must have
a ground start signaling arrangement. Incoming DISA calls on trunks without
disconnect supervision will not be allowed. For these calls, overflow tone is
given to tie, DID and Common Controlled Switching Arrangement (CCSA)
trunk calls, and calls on CO, FX, and WATS trunks are intercepted to the
attendant.
Trunks dedicated to DISA may also be used as normal outgoing trunks.
The minimum signaling level for the currently available
at the trunk interface.
22

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

receiver is

Direct Inward System Access

72-3

Feature interactions
DISA does not support unsupervised CO, FX, or WATS trunks.
Access Restrictions
Access restrictions are assigned to the DISA DN as they are to any
station within the system. Separate access restrictions are also assigned
to authorization codes used by DISA callers.
Basic/Network Authorization Code (BAUT/NAUT)
This feature can be used in conjunction with DISA to allow a user access
to more resources than are normally available. The authorization code
must be entered, in addition to the security code (if required), using the
applicable Special Prefix (SPRE) code followed by the authorization
access code 6, or by an applicable Flexible Feature Code. If authorization
codes are required, a valid authorization code must be entered after the
DISA security code (no SPRE code is needed).
Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection
The
features function on a DISA call as if it had been
originated from inside the system.
Busy Verify (BVR)
within the system. If an
Busy Verify (BVR) applies only to
attendant tries to use the feature to enter an DISA DN, overflow tone is
returned.
Call Detail Recording (CDR)
If the customer and trunk route on which the incoming DISA call is being
made have the applicable Call Detail Recording (CDR) options in effect,
particulars of the call are recorded when it is established. There is no
special indication on the Call Detail Recording (CDR) record that this
was a DISA call. If the incoming trunk route is not specified for CDR
options, recording depends on what has been specified by the customer
for any outgoing trunks seized by the DISA caller.
Flexible Line Lockout
The defined Flexible Line Lockout treatment is provided to DISA calls.

Feature packaging
DISA, package 22, has no other feature package dependencies.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

72-4

Direct Inward System Access

Feature
LD24

implementation

Create or change the Direct Inward System Access feature for a customer.

REQ

NEW, CHG

TYPE

DIS

CUST

o-99

SPWD

xxxx

New or change
data
Customer number
System secure data password (0001
allows modifications to the
0000 = disable the password (see

DN

xxx...x

SCOD

x, xx...xx

DN for

9999)

data block
5)

access

security code (l-8 digits)
X = remove security code

TGAR

Yes, (No)

Authorization code is or is not required

xx

Trunk Group Access Restriction to be applied to calls made
using
(O-i 5)
Note: With

NCOS

xx

1 release 13 and later software, TGAR can be from

Network Class of Service to be applied to
Class of Service to be applied to

cos
UNR

unrestricted

CUN

conditionally unrestricted

SRE

semi-restricted

TLD

toll

CTD

conditionally

FRE

fully

restricted
toll

restricted

fully restricted
FR2

features and services

fully restricted 2

restricted

calls
calls

Direct Inward System Access

LD16

Define an auto-terminate trunk route for Direct Inward System Access.

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

RDB

Route data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

xxx

trunk route number

TKTP

aaa

Trunk type

AUTO

Yes, (No)

route is or is not arranged to auto-terminate incoming calls
on the
DN

IAO, ICT, OGT

Incoming and outgoing trunk

xxxx

Trunk route access code

LD14

72-5

Define Direct Inward System Access

for trunks in an auto-terminate trunk route.

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

COT, FEX, WAT

Trunk type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

XTRK

XUT

Universal trunk card (prompted for superloops)

CUST

o-99

Customer number

YYY

Route number and member number
xxx = o-51
yyy = l-254

ATDN

xxx...x
GRD

DN on which incoming calls are to auto-terminate
Ground Start signaling

1 features and services

553-3001-305

72-6

Direct Inward System Access

Feature operation
To dial into the system from the public network
1

Dial the DISA number. You hear dial tone.

2

Dial the security code, if required.

3

Dial the authorization code, if required.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Directory Number
Flexible Attendant Directory Number
The Flexible Attendant Directory Number (FADN) specifies the Directory
Number (DN) that provides access to the attendant, replacing the usual 0. The
Directory Number (DN) may be any Directory Number (DN) in the
numbering plan, but it must be used only for the attendant and in all situations
in which 0 is normally used.

Operating parameters
The attendant DN may be used only for the attendant. One attendant DN is
allowed per customer and all attendants must have the same DN.

Feature interactions
Flexible Attendant Directory Number (FADN) interacts with other features
as follows:
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP)
The attendant DN can have up to seven digits if the Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package is equipped.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic X 11 system software.

Feature

implementation

or change the attendant Directory Number.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

ATDN

xxx...x

number dialed to reach the attendant (default is

1 features and services

553-3001-305

73-2

Directory Number

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Listed Directory Numbers
Each customer within the system may have up to four Listed Directory
in the public directory on Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Numbers
trunks. Each Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) is assigned to an Incoming
Call Indication (ICI) key, enabling the attendant to answer an incoming call
appropriately. For systems without DID facilities, Listed Directory Numbers
may be provided on incoming central office (CO) trunks assigned to
a trunk group and an Incoming Call Indication (ICI) key on the console. Local
telephones and tie lines can call the attendant using any of the four

Operating parameters
Only four

can be assigned per customer.

Feature interactions
interact with other features as follows:
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP)
can have up to seven digits if the DNXP package is equipped.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic

1 system software.

Feature implementation
Assign Listed Directory Numbers for each customer.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer Number

LDNO

xxx...x

LDNO

xxx...x
LDN2

LDN2
LDN3

xxx...x

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Directory Number

73-3

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Multiple Appearance Directory Number
can appear on more than one multiline telephone, and can be shared
between those telephones and single-line telephones. Up to 16 appearances of
the same DN are allowed on Xl 1 release 12 and earlier software. Xl 1 release
13 and later software allows 30 appearances of the same DN on NT, RT, XT,
and 81 systems only. Four multiple-appearance options are
provided, as follows:
Multiple Call Arrangement with Ringing (MCR)
Call Arrangement without Ringing (MCN)
Single Call Arrangement with Ringing (SCR)
Single Call Arrangement without Ringing (SCN)
The customer can specify which of the four options applies to each
appearance of the DN. Xl 1 release 13 allows 30 Multiple Appearance
71, and 81 systems
Directory Numbers (MADNs) on NT, RT, XT,
only.
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers (MADNs) are not restricted to
telephones connected to the same loop. Telephones with MADNs can be
assigned to different loops if the Loop Removal enhancement is allowed in
LD17 under the prompt MLDN.
A Multiple Appearance, Multiple Call Arrangement is available between
SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones only. It allows as many calls to be in
progress as there are appearances of the DN (that is, a maximum of six
independent calls). Selection of the ring option allows the DN to be rung
whenever an incoming call is directed to the idle DN.
Selection of the no ring option causes the DN appearance not to ring when an
incoming call is directed to the DN. Indication of an incoming call is limited
to a flashing lamp associated with the DN. Privacy is inherent in all active
calls.

features and services

553-3001-305

73-4

Directory Number

Multiple Appearance, Single Call Arrangement
allow a single call to be
active on the DN, irrespective of its number of appearances. Multiple
Appearance, Single Call Arrangement is available to all telephones.
Selection of the ring option allows ringing to accompany lamp flashing when
a call is directed to a DN. The no ring option limits Incoming Call Indication
(ICI) to lamp flashing. Privacy is inherent in active calls, except in a mixed
and SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones with an
arrangement
appearance of the same DN).
Call redirection parameters such as Hunt and Call Forward No Answer are
TNB) of the prime appearance of the
derived from the TN data block
called DN. If there is more than one prime appearance, the parameters are
selected from the last TN in the DN block for the DN (LD22 DNB).
If more than one prime appearance of an MADN exists, the information noted
in the following list must be considered prior to configuring call redirection
parameters for
The DNB organizes MADN information in numerical TN order. The TN
with the highest numerical value (000-O-06-03) is placed at the
beginning of the DN list. The list then continues in descending order with
the lowest numerical TN (000-O-03-01) at the end of the list.
If a telephone is service changed, the TN of the telephone is moved to the
beginning of the DN list regardless of the numerical value of the TN.
This telephone remains at the beginning of the list until another
telephone is service changed or a sysload is performed. A sysload
restores the DN list to
TN order.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Directory Number

73-5

If a DN is assigned as a prime DN on one telephone, and as a secondary
DN on one or more telephones, the DN list is still organized as described
in the preceding text. However, if only one prime appearance of a DN
exists, call redirection parameters are derived from the TN of the prime
appearance telephone, even though it may not be at the end of the list. A
prime appearance is always the first TN used when the system looks for
call redirection instructions.
If a DN appears on
SL-1, and Meridian 1 digital telephones
telephones are listed in numerical TN
simultaneously, the
order at the top of the DN list, and SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones
are listed in numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A service
change to a
telephone moves the TN of that telephone to the
beginning of the list. A service change to an SL-1 or Meridian digital
telephone moves the TN of the telephone to the end of the list. A sysload
restores the list to numerical TN order, with
telephones at the
top of the list and SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones at the bottom of
the list. Call redirection parameters continue to be derived as described
in the preceding text.
Note: It is not necessary to change any data to register service change

activity. To put a telephone at the end of the list, simply call up the
service change data and default through the data.

Operating parameters
Multiple Appearance, Multiple Call Arrangement is limited to SL-1 or
Meridian digital telephones. If telephones are mixed, only Multiple
Appearance, Single Call Arrangement is allowed.
For Multiple Appearance, Single Call Arrangement, the no ring option is
limited to SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones.
appear on an ST or a 21, at least one appearance
If more than 20
must be defined on key 0. Additionally, the key 0 appearance must be the last
key defined in the database. If more are added later, remove the key 0
appearance, and reenter it last.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

73-6

Directory Number

Feature interactions
MADN interacts with other features as follows:
CPND (Call Party Name Display)
On ST and 21 machines using X11 release 17 and earlier software, the
number of DN appearances restricts the number of letters or digits
allowed for CPND. These engineering guidelines must be followed:
Eleven or fewer appearances allows 26 letters or digits in the name.
.

Twelve appearances allows 23 letters or digits in the name.

.

Thirteen appearances allows 20 letters or digits in the name.

.

Fourteen appearances allows 16 letters or digits in the name.

.

Fifteen appearances allows 14 letters or digits in the name.

.

Sixteen appearances allows 11 letters or digits in the name.

.

Seventeen appearances allows 9 letters or digits in the name.

.

Eighteen appearances allows 8 letters or digits in the name.

DNXP (DN Expansion)
The DN can have up to seven digits if the DNXP package is equipped.
If Loop Restriction Removal is allowed, telephones with
can be
the Digital
moved across loops using Automatic Set Relocation
telephones data block
the
telephone data block
or Attendant Administration.
Loop Restriction
If Loop Restriction removal is not allowed, telephones with
be moved by using the Automatic Set Relocation feature
Attendant Administration feature.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

can
or the

Directory Number

73-7

Privacy
If a Multiple Appearance, Single Call Arrangement (SCR) or Single Call
Arrangement without Ringing (SCN) DN is shared by SL-1 and
Meridian digital telephones only, Privacy is in effect. No one can enter a
call unless the call is first placed on Hold, or unless Privacy Release is
activated to allow another appearance to enter the call. If this
configuration is shared between these telephones and single-line
telephones, Privacy is not in effect for any appearance of the DN.
Anyone sharing the DN can enter the call at any time.
Privacy Release
Multiple Call
Privacy Release has no effect on Multiple
Arrangement with Ringing (MCR), or Multiple Call Arrangement
without Ringing (MCN) calls.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature implementation
-Assign a Multiple-appearance Directory Number key.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
3000
TN
K

Terminal Number
E

Y xx MCN

Add a multiple-call non-ringing DN key
xx = key number
= DN

xx MCR

Add a multiple-call ringing DN key
xx = key number
= DN

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

Directory Number

73-8

Single Appearance Directory Number
A Single Appearance Directory Number (SDDN) may be assigned to any
type of telephone.

Operating parameters
A Single Appearance Directory Number (SADN) can appear only once
within any customer group.

Feature interactions
Single Appearance Directory Number (SADN) interacts with other features
as follows:
DNXP (DN Expansion)
The DN can have up to seven digits if the DNXP package is equipped.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature

implementation

-Assign Single Appearance Directory Number keys.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =

, 2006, 2008, 2009,
3000

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx SCN

Add a single-call non-ringing DN key
xx key number
= DN

xx SCR yyy...y

Add a single-call ringing DN key
xx = key number
= DN

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

2112,

Directory Number

73-9

Prime Directory Number
The bottom key on an SL-1 or a Meridian digital telephone is the Prime DN.
It is preselected for call origination. If a user wishes to place or receive a call
on any other DN, the key must be manually selected.

Operating parameters
Prime DN applies only to SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones. Only one
Prime DN is allowed per telephone.

Feature interactions
There are no feature interactions.

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature

implementation
Assign key as the Prime DN in

Feature operation
Not applicable.

1 features and services

73-10

Directory Number

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
13
74-1

Directory Number Expansion
This feature increases the number of digits allowable for internal Directory
from a maximum of four digits per Directory Numbers (DN)
Numbers
to seven digits per DN. The following internal Directory Numbers
havebeenexpanded:
single-line telephone
multi-line telephone
Trunk Group Access codes
attendant DN (including local attendant in Centralized Attendant Service
Listed Directory Numbers
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) steering codes

ACD position
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
CAS hold
Release Link Trunk (RLT)

in Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)

System Park
test line
data service

1 features and services

74-2

Directory Number Expansion

The following DN types are not expanded:
Special Prefix (SPRE)
Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection

access codes

Route Selection Automatic Number Identification (RSANI) access code
Automatic Modem Pooling (AMP) all-digital-connection prefix
Along with Directory Number Expansion (DNXP), a new CDR Expansion
(CDRE) package (package 151) is available to allow CDR records to
accommodate the increased digit field lengths. Basic CDR (package 4) and
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) (package 150) are required for CDRE.

Operating parameters
The Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) capability is available on systems
supporting X11 release 13 and later software.
The number of
that can be configured is limited by the available
protected data store in the system.
DNXP does not enhance existing feature capability other than allowing an
internal DN with up to seven digits.
If DNXP is equipped, the system communicates with any attached Auxiliary
Processor (AUX), except ACD-D, in a new message format containing
expanded DN fields. Therefore, the respective Auxiliary Processor (AUX)
software must be upgraded to handle longer
in new messages.
If a message is sent to an Auxiliary Processor (AUX) that is not capable of
handling expanded
only the last four digits are included in the message.
Incoming Digit Conversion (IDC) translates a maximum of four digits only.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Directory Number Expansion

74-3

calling number is always seven
The Automatic Number Identification
digits long. It is obtained by combining the Automatic Number Identification
Listed Directory Number (AN1 LDN) with one of the following:
DN of the PBX telephone
Prime DN of the SL-1 telephone
Automatic Number Identification
a per customer basis

attendant number, specified on

Automatic Number Identification
trunk group basis.

trunk number, specified on a per

With the DNXP package equipped, if an Automatic Number Identification
Listed Directory Number (AN1 LDN) is not defined, then the full seven digits
of an internal DN can be used as the AN1 calling number. If an Automatic
Number Identification Listed Directory Number (AN1 LDN) is defined and
are longer than four digits, then only the leading digits of the
internal
are retained in the AN1 calling number.
CDRE must be equipped to allow the printing of seven-digit
records. CDRE is not supported by Mini-CDR.

in the CDR

Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD) station identification
number remains four digits long. If a DN is longer, only the leading digits are
retained as the Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD) station
identifier.

Feature interactions
Electronic Switched Network (ESN)
With DNXP, a seven-digit Location Code (LOC) call to an Electronic
Switched Network (ESN) switch can be terminated to an internal DN of
up to seven digits. A Digit Manipulation Index associated with a Home
Location Code is used to properly terminate the calls.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

74-4

Directory Number Expansion

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP)
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) steering codes are expanded to a
maximum of seven digits. The maximum number of digits for a complete
CDP DN has increased from seven to ten (a three-digit steering code
followed by a seven-digit internal
With DNXP, the maximum number of leading digits to be deleted from
a Local Steering Code (LSC) is expanded to seven digits, due to longer
CDP numbers.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Depending on the number of Direct Inward Dialing (DID) digits
outpulsed by the central office (CO), the system can insert a unique string
of prefix digits to the incoming Direct Inward Dialing (DID) digits on a
per DID trunk group basis to form a final internal DN. The number of
digits that can be inserted for a DID (or tie) trunk group has been
expanded from six to eight digits.
Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD)
The AIOD station identifier and trunk identifier remains four digits long.
If the total number of digits in the AIOD prefix and internal DN exceeds
four, only the leading digits of the station DN are retained as the AIOD
identifier.
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Refer to
Primary
Interface description and administration
(553-2901-100).
Background Terminal Interface (BGD)
When the DNXP package is equipped, any background terminal
command, response, or display containing a DN is allowed to have a DN
of up to seven digits.
ACD-C Reports
When the DNXP package is equipped, each DN-related field is expanded
to seven digits.
ACD Load Management
ACD Load Management commands have been modified to allow longer
DN-related fields (ACD DN, position ID, route access code).
Digit and Name Display
If longer
are defined, leftmost digits may be scrolled out on a digit
display, depending on the size of the display window.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Directory Number Expansion

74-5

Auxiliary processors
Any AUX or application processor that shares or exchanges Meridian 1
internal DN related information with the system must be modified to
handle the longer DN format. Otherwise, only the four trailing digits will
be included in the message.
The presence of DNXP has an impact on the following types of AUX:
l

Auxiliary Processor Link (APL)

.

Application Module Link (AML)

.

standard Serial Data Interface (SDI) with application interface to the
Meridian 1
standard

without application interface to the Meridian 1

Feature packaging
DNXP, package 1.50, has no other feature package dependencies.

Feature

implementation
Service-change and print overlays with DN-related prompts and commands
if the DNXP package
have been modified to accommodate seven-digit
is equipped.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

74-6

Directory Number Expansion

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing
In commercial applications, the ability to have telephones with a distinctive
ring is useful for distinguishing various call types. The Distinctive Ringing
capability is enabled for specific trunk groups.
The Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) card provides SL-1 and Meridian 1 digital
telephones with distinctive ringing cadence. This card provides a distinctive
tone of 440 Hz + 480 Hz on incoming calls on the designated trunks,
timed for 1.64 on and 0.36 off. On single-line telephones, the normal ringing
pattern is 2 on and 4 off. Distinctive Ringing for single-line telephones is 1.54
on and 0.38 off.
New Distinctive Ringing,
1 release 9 and later software
This feature provides a new ringing cadence of 0.5 12 on and 0.5 12 off,
followed by 1.024 on and 4.096 off, for all telephone types.
Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom, Xl 1 release 13 and later
software
This feature allows a user to differentiate between an incoming call and a Dial
Intercom call. The Dial Intercom ringing has a different cadence than regular
Directory Number (DN) ringing or Distinctive Ringing.
Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom is assignable on a per customer basis.
The cadence is 0.5 on and 0.5 off, repeatedly.

1 features and services

75-2

Distinctive/New

Distinctive

Ringing

Operating parameters

.

Distinctive Ringing requires 2.5 times as much “on” ringing time as routine
ringing. The number of simultaneously ringing lines per ringing generator is
reduced according to the proportion of incoming calls that receive Distinctive
Ringing. For example, if 50% of all calls receive Distinctive Ringing, the
number of simultaneous ringing lines is reduced from 20 to 14 per ringing
generator.
Fast Tone and Digit Switch card, or a later version of this card,
The
is required to implement the New Distinctive Ringing feature.

Feature interactions
Attendant calls
When an incoming trunk call is extended by an attendant, the terminating
extension rings distinctively.
telephone features
Calls modified by the following features receive Distinctive or New
Distinctive Ringing:
.

Call Forward All Calls

.

Call Forward No Answer

.

Flexible Call Forward No Answer

.

Call Park

.

Call Transfer

.

Conference

.

Hunting

Call Forward Busy
Calls modified by Call Forward Busy are not given Distinctive Ringing
as they terminate on the attendant console.
Night Service
Incoming calls terminating on a night Directory Number (DN) ring
distinctively.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Distinctive/New

Distinctive

Ringing

75-3

Meridian digital telephones/M3000 Touchphones The Meridian
digital telephone Distinctive Ringing (defined by the Class of Service in
specifies the frequency and the warble-tone rate, and does not
pertain to the Distinctive Ringing feature as referred to in this feature
description.
For example, suppose New Distinctive Ringing is enabled and a call
comes in from a Distinctive Ringing-enabled trunk. If the call terminates
on a Meridian digital telephone with DR2 Class of Service, it rings with
DR2 (frequency and warble tone), but with a cadence of 0.512 on and
0.512 off, followed by 1.024 on and 4.096 off. This also applies to the
M3000 Touchphone. If the M3000 custom ringing option is selected,
then Distinctive Ringing is overridden.

Feature packaging
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing (DRNG), package 74, has no other
feature package dependencies.
Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom is included in Dial Intercom (DI),
package 21.
Distinctive Ringing for digital telephones is included in Digital Telephones
(DSET), package 88.

Feature

implementation

Enable or disable Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom calls and specify Call Forward No
Answer timing for trunks with Distinctive Ringing.
REQ

CHG

Customer Data Block

TYPE
CUST

DFNA

Change

o-99

Customer number

Yes, (No)

Enable/disable Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom calls
The number of triple-ringing cycles before Call Forward N
Answer is activated for calls with Distinctive Ringing
(default is 4)

Xl 1 features and services

O

553-3001-305

75-4

Distinctive/New

LD17

Distinctive

Ringing

Specify Distinctive or New Distinctive Ringing.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CFN

Configuration Data Block

PARM

Yes, (No)

Change system parameters

NDRG

Yes, (No)

Enable (disable) New Distinctive Ringing (DRNG)
Prompted only if DRNG is equipped.

LD16
route.

Enable or disable Distinctive Ringing for each incoming or incoming/outgoing trunk

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

RDB

Route Data Block

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-51 1

Route number

DRNG

Yes, (No)

Enable (disable) Distinctive Ringing for incoming calls

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Distinctive/New

Distinctive

Ringing

75-5

LD 11 -Specify Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing class of service for SL-1 and Meridian
digital
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa
2006,
2317, 2616, 3000
TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CLS

DRGX

Distinctive ring type

2018,

DRG4

= high fast tone, frequency
DRG2

Hz

high slow tone, frequency 6671500 Hz
= low fast tone, frequency 2501333 Hz

DRG4 = low slow tone, frequency 2501333 Hz
The
telephones

are

distinctive ringing for M2006 and M2008
different:

fast tone, frequency
slow tone, frequency

Hz
Hz

Feature operation
There are no special procedures for operating this feature.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

75-6

Distinctive/New

features and services

Distinctive

Ringing

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Issued:
Status:
Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All
76-1

Do Not Disturb
Individual Do Not Disturb (DNDI) allows the attendant to place a particular
Directory Number (DN) in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode. A DN in this mode
is free to originate calls, but appears busy to incoming calls. An attendant
dialing a Directory Number in Do Not Disturb mode receives a visual
indication and can override it temporarily by using Busy Verify (BVR) and
signal source. To activate Individual Do Not Disturb (DNDI), a separate
Individual Do Not Disturb (DNDI) key/lamp pair must be assigned to each
applicable attendant console.
telephones can be equipped with a Do Not Disturb lamp. Common
Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA) and LPA Class of Service must be
allowed.
Calls will receive the customer-specified intercept treatment; for example,
busy tone, RAN, or attendant. An enhancement to DND provides the ability
to route calls to the Hunt DN instead of to the intercept treatment. Table
1
lists possible intercept treatments based on responses to the prompts DNDT
and DNDH in LD 15.
Group Do Not Disturb (DNDG) allows an attendant to place predefined
in DND mode. A DN can belong to many DND groups.
groups of
To enable Group Do Not Disturb (DNDG), the DNDI package must be
equipped. DNDI allows the user to activate, cancel, and verify the presence
of the feature. A separate Group Do Not Disturb (DNDG) key is assigned to
each attendant console for activating the DNDG feature.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

76-2

Do Not Disturb

Table 76-1
Do Not Disturb intercept treatments
DNDT = BST
Call type

Hunt

DNDT = RAN

DNDH
No

DNDH
Yes

DNDH
No

Allow

H

H

Deny

A

A

Allow

A

H

Deny

A

A

Allow

H

H

B

Deny

B

B

Allow

B

Deny

DNDT = ATT

DNDH
Yes

DNDH
No

DNDH
Yes

H

H

H

A

A

A

H

A

A

H

H

H

B

B

B

B

H

B

H

B

H

B

B

B

B

B

B

Allow

H

H

H

H

H

Deny

B

B

A

A

Allow

B

H

A

H

Deny

B

B

A

A

DID

SL-l/digital

H

Attendant

SL-1 /digital

Internal

SL-l/digital

H = Follow Hunt Directory Number (DN).
A = Intercept to attendant.
B = Busy tone

= RAN treatment

features and services

553-3001-305

R
H

telemanuals.com

Do Not Disturb

76-3

Operating parameters
Up to 100 groups (O-99) can be defined per customer. Each group can contain
up to 127
Up to 20 DNDG keys can be equipped on an M2250 attendant console. Ten
DNDG keys can be equipped on a QCW or Ml250 attendant console.
Alternatively, the DNDI key plus dial-access can be used to activate DND for
up to 100 groups.
To activate DNDG using a DNDG key, a group of telephones must be defined
for that key (see LD26).

Feature interactions
DND interacts with other features as follows:
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP)
If the Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package is equipped,
can have up to seven digits.
Night Station
A Night Station DN can be placed in DND mode.
Private Lines
DND cannot be used on Private Lines.
Call Forward All Calls/Hunt
If activated, Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over DND busy
indication.
Call Park
in DND mode. When a telephone in
Calls can be parked on and by
DND mode parks a call, the call will not return to the DND telephone. It
recalls to the attendant.

Feature packaging
DNDI, package 9, has no feature package dependencies.
DNDG, package 16, requires DNDI, package 9.
Do Not Disturb Hunt requires Meridian Hospitality Voice Services
package 179.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

76-4

Do Not Disturb

Feature

implementation

Specify the treatment received by calls to a number in Do Not Disturb mode.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

DNDL

Yes, (No)

Do Not Disturb lamp for

DNDT

BST

Busy tone treatment for Do Not Disturb (DND) numbers

(default)

telephones

ATT

Attendant treatment for DND numbers

RAN

Recorded announcement for DND numbers

DNDH

Yes, (No)

Allow (Disallow) Do Not Disturb Hunt

RRT

xxx

Route number for the recorded announcement for calls to a
DND number (prompted if DNDT=RAN)

LD26

Add or change a Group Do Not Disturb.
CHG, REM

Change, remove DN in DND group

DND

Do Not Disturb Group data block

o-99

Customer number

o-99

DND group to be added or changed

xxx...x

DN to be added or changed in the DND group; repeat to
add other
DN to be removed from a DND group
Prompted if

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Do Not Disturb

76-5

LD26 Merge one or more defined Do Not Disturb groups into another DND group, retaining
their status as groups.
REQ

MRG

Merge DND groups

CHG

Add a DND group from a list of merged DND groups

REM

Remove DND group from a merged group

OUT

Remove a DND group that consists of a list of merged DND
groups

TYPE

DND

Do Not Disturb Group data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

GPNO

o-99

Number of the DND group to be created through merging
of other DND groups

GO-G99

Number of the first DND group to be merged (total number
of members in all merged DND groups cannot exceed 127)
Prompted if REQ = MRG

GRP2

GO-G99

Number of the second DND group to be merged (total
number of members in all merged DND groups cannot
exceed 127)
Prompted if REQ = MRG

GRP

GO-G99

Number of the DND group to be merged (total number of
members in all merged DND groups cannot exceed 127)
Prompted if REQ = MRG

STOR

GO-G99

Specify the number of the DND group to be added to a list
of merged DND groups
Prompted if REQ = CHG

RMOV

GO-G99

Specify the number of the DND group to be removed from
a list of merged DND groups
Prompted if REQ = REM

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

76-6

Do Not Disturb

LD26

Print Do Not Disturb group data.

REQ

PRT

Print

TYPE

DND

Do Not Disturb Group data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

GPNO

o-99

DND group to be printed



Print all DND group data

LD12 -Add or change Individual or Group Do Not Disturb keys on an attendant console.
CHG

Change

TYPE

ATT,

Console type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx DDL

Add an Individual Do Not Disturb key
xx = 0
xx = 0

KEY

xx GND O-99

19 for M2250 consoles
9 for M 1250 consoles

Add a DND group key
xx = 0

19 for M2250 consoles

xx = 0 9 for Ml 250 consoles

-Enable or disable lamp for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

LPA, (LPD)

Enable (disable) lamp

CCSA, (CCSD)

Controlled Class of Service allowed (denied)

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Do Not Disturb

76-7

Feature operation
Individual Do Not Disturb
To activate DNDI using the DNDI key (attendant console)
1

Select an idle loop key.

2 Press DNDI.
3

Dial the DN of the telephone to place into DND mode.

4

Press DNDI again. (Ignore status of indicator.)

5 Press
To deactivate DNDI, follow the same steps.

Group Do Not Disturb
There are two ways to activate DNDG with the DNDI key, or with the DNDG
key.
To activate DNDG using the DNDG key (attendant console)
1

Press DNDG. This key already has a defined group assigned to it. The
associated indicator remains steadily lit to indicate that all telephones in
that DND group are in DND mode.

2 Press RLS.
To deactivate DNDG
1 Press DNDG.
To activate DNDG using the DNDI key (attendant console)
1

Select an idle loop key.

2 Press DNDI.
3

Press the octothorpe

4

Dial the group number.

5

Press

6

Press DNDI again.

key.

again.

7 Press RLS.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

76-8

Do Not Disturb

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All
77-1

Electronic Switched Network
The Electronic Switched Network (ESN) group of features is designed to
support voice and circuit-switched voiceband data telecommunications needs
for multiple-location customer applications.
Electronic Switched Network (ESN) applications range from a single
network node (combined PBX and network switching system) to a widely
dispersed network with up to 256 locations. For complete information on
Electronic Switched Network (ESN), refer to the Meridian networking
document and Electronic Switched Network description
100).

Basic Authorization Code
The Basic Authorization Code (BAUT) feature provides up to 5000
authorization codes of 1 to 14 digits that allow selected users to temporarily
override system access restrictions by dialing a Special Service Prefix
code, the digit 6, and the Basic Authorization Code (BAUT) code.
The Basic Authorization Code (BAUT) code is used for general applications
and is described in Basic and Network Authorization Code description
(553-2751-103).

Basic Alternate Route Selection
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) enables calls placed to another
location to be routed automatically over the least expensive route.
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) access code and the desired number
have been dialed, Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) automatically
tries alternate routes to the destination and completes the call over the least
expensive route available at the time of dialing. BARS is described in detail
in Basic and Network Alternate Route Selection description (553-275
100).

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

77-2

Electronic Switched Network

Call Back Queuing
Call Back Queuing (CBQ) is an optional feature available to systems
equipped with the Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection
or Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) features. If all facilities are busy when an
individual places a BARS, NARS, or CDP call, Call Back Queuing (CBQ)
enables the individual to invoke the Ring Again (RGA) feature and receive a
callback from the system when a facility becomes available. Call Back
Queuing (CBQ) is described in detail in Network Queue description
(553-2751-101).

Call Back Queuing to Conventional Mains
Call Back Queuing to Conventional Mains (CBQCM) enables call originators
at a Conventional Main (any type of switch, including switches that are part
Tie Network [ETN]) to access the CBQ feature at the serving
of
ESN Node. When offered CBQ by the Node, the user at the Conventional
Main dials his extension number to accept the CBQ offer. When facilities
become available at the Node, it initiates a CBQ callback to the call originator
at the Conventional Main. Refer to Network Queue description
(553-2751-101) for a detailed description of Call Back Queuing to
Conventional Mains (CBQCM).

Coordinated Call Back Queuing
Coordinated Call Back Queuing (CCBQ) enables telephones eligible for Ring
Again (RGA) at the Main to be offered CBQ when network calls are blocked
at the serving Node. When facilities become available at the Node, the call
originator at the Main is alerted by a call back (identical to an RGA callback)
from the Node. Coordinated Call Back Queuing (CCBQ) requires that the
Main and associated Node be equipped with Network Signaling. Refer to
Network Queue description (553-2751-101) for a detailed description of
Coordinated Call Back Queuing (CCBQ).

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

Electronic Switched Network

Coordinated Call Back Queuing Against Main
Coordinated Call Back Queuing Against Main (CCBQAM) is an
enhancement to the CCBQ feature that allows a station at the Node to be
offered CBQ if a call is blocked at the Main. When facilities become available
at the Main, the call originator at the Node is alerted by a callback from the
Main. The Network Signaling feature must be equipped at both the Main and
the Node for Coordinated Call Back Queuing Against Main (CCBQAM)
implementation.

Coordinated Dialing Plan
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) enables a customer with a number of
switches to coordinate the dialing plan of stations at these switches. The
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) feature allows the telephone user to call any
other telephone within a CDP group by dialing a three- to seven-digit number
assigned to the station. CDP can be arranged to provide a centralized public
exchange network capability that channels access to the public network
through a single Meridian 1 switch within the CDP group.
Xl 1 release 15 and later software allows CDP to route Direct Inward Dialed
(DID) calls over central office (CO) and WATS trunks using a Distant
Steering Code (DSC). The feature is controlled by the Customer Data Block
(LD15). This enhancement applies to CO, WATS, Data Terminal Interface
(DTI) and Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) type trunks.
CDP is described in detail in Coordinated Dialing Plan description
(553-2751-102).

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

77-4

Electronic Switched Network

Flexible ESN

Routing

Flexible ESN
Routing (an Xl 1 release 16 and later) allows the routing of
calls on different routes based on a few predefined non-leftwise unique
dialing sequences. “Leftwise unique” means that each entry cannot match the
leftmost portion of any other entry in the table. For example, if “123” is an
entry in the table, then no other entry may begin with “123.”
The ESN translation table will allow any or all of the following non-leftwise
unique numbers (along with their associated route lists) to be entered into the
ESN translation table:
0
00
01
011
Flexible ESN “0” Routing is part of the existing BARS (57) and Network
Alternate Route Selection (NARS) (58) packages and has no interaction with
other features besides these. Since NARS has two translation tables, two
Flexible ESN
Routing data blocks will be included in NARS. This means
that a call could be configured to route in two different ways.
This feature is applicable to all route types and network types that are
supported by ESN. For information on the appropriate prompts and responses
in Service Change
refer to
input/output guide (553-3001-400).

Network Alternate Route Selection
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) is an integral part of Northern
Telecom’s ESN. Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) is designed for
large business customers with numerous distributed operating locations,
enabling the customer to tie together the switches at the various operating
locations to create a private telecommunications network. NARS is described
in detail in Electronic Switched Network description (309-3001-100) and
Basic and Network Alternate Route Selection description (553-2751-100).

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Electronic Switched Network

77-5

Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion
Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion (ITGE) is an enhancement to the
feature, offered on
1 release 5 and later software. Standard
call blocking is applied on outgoing calls to a specific Numbering Plan Area
(NPA), NXX, Special Number (SPN), or Location Code (LOC) at the ESN
node if the call is from a specific incoming trunk group.
This prevents
routing through the caller’s home switch (home NPA,
NXX). Calls that should have been made off-net from the caller’s home
switch are blocked outgoing at the Node. Main users are prevented from using
the ESN to make calls to certain NPA, NXX, SPN, or Location Code (LOC)
that are restricted from making at the home switch.
Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion (ITGE) provides full ten-digit restriction
for NPA and SPN codes, seven-digit restriction for NXX codes, and
three-digit restriction for Location Code (LOC) codes.
Detailed information on this enhancement is provided in
Network description (309-3001-100) and Basic
Selection description

Electronic Switched
Route

NARS Multiple DID Office Code Screening
Multiple DID Office Code Screening, offered on
release 5 and later
software, is an enhancement to the On-Net to Off-Net Overflow capability of
the NARS feature. This enhancement permits network calls that undergo
on-net to off-net conversion to terminate at any Directory Number (DN) that
has been defined in the LOC data block of memory. This data block allows
the definition of multiple office codes (NXX) and/or multiple Directory
Number (DN) ranges of the following types:
single office code/single Directory Number (DN) range (Prior to Xl 1
release 5, only this arrangement was addressed during on-net to off-net
conversion.)
single office code/multiple DN ranges
multiple office codes/single DN range
multiple office codes/multiple DN ranges

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

77-6

Electronic Switched Network

Operating parameters
NARS Multiple DID Office Code Screening operates within the following
parameters:
Only one Numbering Plan Area (NPA) per LOC is allowed.
Ranges defined within a LOC must be unique. Overlapping or
duplication of ranges is not permitted.
The number of digits must be the same in each Direct Inward Dialing
(DID) range.
A maximum of 20 Direct Inward Dialed (DID) ranges may be defined
per location code.

Off-Net Number Recognition
Off-Net Number Recognition is an enhancement to the Basic/Network
Alternate Route Selection
feature for ESN, and for the BARS
feature for stand-alone applications. It is offered on Xl 1 release 5 and later
software.
Off-Net numbers that terminate at an ESN Node or Main, or at a
Conventional Main, can be routed through the private network by means of
tie trunks.
Off-Net Number Recognition prevents unnecessary
TO and FROM terminations through CO trunks, at the terminating end, when
a caller dials a DID or Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) call to a location in the
private network. Calls are handled on the basis of customer-defined
parameters stored in Network Translation Tables and Supplementary Digit
Recognition/Restriction Blocks.
Detailed information on this enhancement is provided in
Network description (309-3001-100) and Basic and
Selection description (553-2751-100).

Xl features and

553-3001-305

Electronic Switched
Route

telemanuals.com

Electronic Switched Network

77-7

11 -Digit Translation
This feature expands the ESN
translation capabilities from a
maximum of 4 digits to a maximum of 11 digits for route selection.
Possible conflicts between translatable codes (NPA, NXX, LOC, SPN) are
eliminated by 1 l-Digit Translation. By allowing translation of more than four
leading digits, unique nonconflicting routing to a destination is possible.
More than one route list can exist for each specific code of a type. For
example, the NXX 727 could only translate into one route list previously.
With 11-Digit Translation, up to 128 route lists for BARS and up to 256 for
NARS may be defined, extending translation deeper into the dialed code. The
codes must be
unique. If an NXX of 7271 is defined, any other 727
entries must be extended to four digits. Table 77-l compares the number of
digits that can be translated prior to X11 release 8 with the present capability.
Table 77-1
Digit translation before and after Xl 1 release 8
release 7
and earlier software

Xl 1 release 8
and later software

LOC

3

3-7

HLOC

3

3-7

NPA

3-4

3-11

HNPA

3-4

3-4

NXX

3-4

3-8

SPN

1-4

l-11

Translation Type

BARS/NARS 1 l-Digit Translation is discussed in greater detail in Electronic
Switched Network description (309-3001-100) and Basic and Network
Alternate Route Selection description

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

77-8

Electronic Switched Network

Network Authorization Code
The Network Authorization Code (NAUT) feature provides
to 20,000
authorization codes of 1 to 7 digits. X11 release 13 and later software
provides authorization codes of 1 to 14 digits. X11 release 14 and later
software allows up to 50,000 authorization codes. Network Authorization
Code (NAUT) incorporates all the features of the BAUT feature, adds a
conditionally last option for entering an authorization code after dialing an
ESN call, and enables the attendant to enter an authorization code. Network
Authorization Code (NAUT) is described in detail in Basic and Network
Authorization Code description

Network Call Transfer
Network Call Transfer (NXFER) enhances the operation of Call Transfer
(XFER) between two switches when a call is transferred back to the
originating switch. The regular Call Transfer feature requires two tie trunks
to complete the call. With Network Call Transfer (NXFER), if the call is
transferred back to the originating switch as the same tie trunk group, the
originating switch completes the transfer within itself and the tie trunks are
dropped. For a detailed description of Network Call Transfer (NXFER) refer
to Basic and Network Alternate Route Selection description (553-2751-l 00).
The benefits derived from the NXFER feature include
minimal use of access tie lines
improved transmission performance, since tie lines are not used for the
completed connection
operation of identical to that of Call Transfer (XFER)
Operating parameters
NXFER operates within the following parameters:
SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones must be equipped with a Call
Transfer key.
Network Signaling (NSIG) must be provided on both switches.

Xl 1 features and services

Electronic Switched Network

77-9

Network Signaling
Network Signaling (NSIG) provides a proprietary signaling protocol for
transmission of network call information between switches that operate in a
private network environment with Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection
or CDP. Network Signaling (NSIG) can be equipped at the
Node and Main switches. For a detailed description of Network Signaling,
refer to Electronic Switched Network description (309-3001-100) and Basic
and Network Alternate Route Selection description (553-2751-100).
NSIG supports transmission or reception of information between the
following switch types:
Meridian 1 Node to Meridian 1 Node
Meridian 1 Node to Meridian 1 Main
Meridian 1 Node to an Electronic Tie Network (ETN) switch
Meridian 1 Main to Meridian 1 Node
ETN switch to Meridian 1 Node
Information transmitted and received from one switch to another can include
the following:
call type
called number
Network Class of Service (NCOS)
Traveling Class of Service (TCOS)
Traveling Class Mark (TCM)
queue identification number (for CCBQ)

features and services

553-3001-305

77-10

Electronic Switched Network

Operating parameters
NSIG operates within the following parameters:
A Main can connect to only one Node, and both switches must be
equipped with the NSIG feature.
Tie trunks between Nodes and Mains must be arranged for Dial Tone
Multifrequency (DTMF) sending/receiving and wink-start operation.
Meridian 1 Node compatibility with Electronic Tie Network (ETN)
switches is limited to seven-digit on-network and ten-digit off-network
calls.

Network Traffic
The Network Traffic (NTRF) feature enables traffic data related to BARS,
NARS and CDP to be retrieved and output at a traffic TTY. The network
traffic measurements (in addition to the switch traffic measurements) are
measurement formats and output
described in detail in
(553-2001-450).

Network Speed Call
Network Speed Call (NSC) enables a user who is normally restricted from
provided
making network calls to make such a call through
that the destination is a number defined in a System Speed Call (SSC) list.
When such a call is placed, the CLS and TGAR restrictions are lifted and a
Network Class of Service (NCOS), associated with the SSC list, is assigned
for the duration of the call. NSC is described in detail in Electronic Switched
Route
Network description (309-3001-100) and Basic and
Selection description

Off Hook Queuing
Off Hook Queuing (OHQ) is an optional feature available at any switch
equipped with BARS, NARS, or CDP. If all facilities are busy when an
individual places a BARS, NARS, or CDP call, the OHQ feature enables the
individual to wait off hook for a programmed length of time until a facility
becomes available. OHQ is described in Network Queue description
(553-2751-101).

Operating parameters
Refer to the appropriate Northern Telecom publication for each ESN feature.

Xl 1 features and services

Electronic Switched Network

77-11

Feature interactions
Refer to the appropriate Northern Telecorn Publication for each ESN feature.

Feature packaging
Basic Authorization Code (BAUT), package 25, requires
Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), package 57, requires
Basic Routing (BRTE), package 14
Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP), package 59, requires
Basic Routing (BRTE), package 14
Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32
Flexible Call Back Queuing (FCBQ), package 61
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), package 58, requires
Basic Routing (BRTE), package 14
Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32
Network Authorization Code

package 63, requires

Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24
Basic Authorization Code (BAUT), package 25
and at least one of the following:
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), package 57
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), package 58
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP), package 59
Network Call Transfer (NXFR), package 67, requires
Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32
Network Signaling (NSIG), package 37

features and services

553-3001-305

77-12

Electronic Switched Network

Network Signaling (NSIG), package 37, requires
Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32
Network Traffic (NTRF), package 29, requires at least one of the following:
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), package 57
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), package 58
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP), package 59
Priority Queuing (PQUE), package 60
Flexible Call Back Queuing (FCBQ), package 61
Off Hook Queuing (OHQ), package 62
Network Speed Call (NSC), package 39, requires
System Speed Call package (SSC), package 34
and at least one of the following:
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), package 57
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), package 58
Off Hook Queuing (OHQ), package 62, requires
Basic Queuing (BQUE), package 28
and at least one of the following:
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), package 57
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), package 58

Feature

implementation
Refer to the appropriate Northern Telecom publication for each ESN feature.

features and services

553-3001-305

End-to-End Signaling
The End-to-End Signaling (EES) feature enables a station to send
end-to-end signaling through an established outgoing connection. Prior to
X 1 release 19, the signaling to both originating and terminating parties
consists of digits in Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) code. With Xl 1
release and later, improved EES provides faster, more reliable service, and
also provides an optional feedback tone to the originator, as specified in
LD56.
Customers requiring DTMF tones should continue to use the original EES
support. This support, provided in X 11 release 18 and earlier, is also provided
as an option in Xl 1 release 19 and later. However, customers who do not need
DTMF tones should use improved EES provided in X release and later.
An outgoing connection from a digital telephone is considered established
after the end of dialing time is elapsed. Alternatively, an outgoing call can be
established after the end of dialing time is elapsed, or can be established
immediately by pressing an octothorpe (#) after the last digit is dialed.

Attendant End-to-End Signaling
With X 1 release 16 and later, the attendant can send DTMF signals using the
EES key on the attendant console. Prior to X 11 release 19, only one party may
be connected to the active loop key (source or destination) and receive DTMF
signals. The console must have one and only one party connected; however,
if that one party is part of a conference, all connected parties receive DTMF
signals. With Xl 1 release 19 and later, when EEST equals “YES” in LD15,
EES no longer requires a conference loop. The TDS or enhanced TDS
conference card is used to produce the tone.
Incoming calls to the attendant console will stay in the attendant queue while
the console is in Attendant End-to-End Signaling (AEES) mode.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

78-2

End-to-End Signaling

Operating parameters
Xl 1 release 5 and later software enables a telephone to send and receive
DTMF codes, thereby extending the EES capability to internal PBX calls and
incoming trunk calls.
EES was only applicable on established outgoing calls on X11 release 4 and
earlier software.
EES and the X11 release 5 enhancement to the EES feature is only allowed
trunk types.
on CO, FX, WATS, TIE, CCSA, DID, and
EES is not available on

telephones.

Prior to X11 release 19, there must be a conference loop and TDS slot
available to perform Attendant End-to-End Signaling (AEES). With X11
release 19 and later, there is the option to use a conference loop or the TDS.
Prior to X11 release 16, any feature that allows or requires an active party on
the loop key will terminate AEES operation when activated. If such a feature
is already active, pressing the EES key will be ignored.
The AEES key cannot be configured on key 0 or key 1.
A call must be established before using the EES feature. An outgoing call is
considered established 14 seconds (DP trunk) or 4 seconds
telephone or
trunk) after the last digit has been outpulsed. The
length of this delay may be changed through service change. If the octothorpe
is dialed, end-to-end signaling may be initiated as soon as
is
heard, or answer supervision is received.

Feature interactions
EES cannot be combined with Autodial, Speed Call or Network Speed Call.
However, it can be initiated after a call has been set up by these features.
Attendant Administration
While in the Attendant Administration mode, pressing the EES key is
ignored.
Attendant features
Activating Automatic Wake-up, Call Park, Charge Account, Calling
Party Number, Hold, Release, or another loop key will terminate AEES
operation.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

End-to-End Signaling

78-3

Barge In/Busy Verify
While in the Barge In/Busy Verify mode, the console cannot enter EES
mode.
Call Detail Recording
EES stores EES digits for external calls in the CDR record. Because
these digits may include sensitive information, such as account numbers
and passwords, storing these digits may be a security exposure.
Therefore, in X11 release 19, improved EES gives the customer the
option of whether to include EES digits in the CDR record.
Conference
If the receiving party is part of a conference, all other connected parties
receive DTMF signals. While in AEES mode, the receiving party may
not initiate a conference call.
Digit Key (Meridian Hospitality Voice Services)
Attendant End-to-End Signaling and Digit Key are mutually exclusive.
Being in AEES mode overrides the use of the Digit Key.
End-to-end signaling (station level)
The attendant console and the telephone receiving AEES cannot both
activate EES simultaneously.
Interposition call
When an attendant is actively connected to another console using
Interposition Attendant Call, AEES is blocked. However, during an
Interposition Call Transfer, the console which is actively connected to a
telephone can perform AEES, providing the party connected to the other
attendant console is excluded.
Night Service/Position Busy/Centralized Attendant Service
These features work together with AEES. However, do not press one of
these feature keys while using AEES, or the DTMF signals may be
blocked.
Supervisory console
The supervisor can operate AEES if there is a call on the active loop key.
An attendant in AEES mode can be monitored by the supervisor.
Trunk connection
On incoming ground start CO or DID trunks without Answer
Supervision, you must press the Release (RLS) key on the console to exit
AEES mode and drop the connection.

features and services

553-3001-305

78-4

End-to-End Signaling

Feature packaging
End-to-End Signaling and improved End-to-End Signaling (EES) are both
part of package 10 and have no feature package dependencies.

Feature

implementation

Table 78-1
Enable End-to-End Signaling tone feedback.
LD15
Prompt

Comment

Response

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

EEST

, YES

NO = No EES feedback tone is given to the telephone.
YES
EES feedback tone is given; the type is defined
by the DTMF prompt.

, NO

YES Use the current EES for DTMF feedback tone.
NO
Use the improved EES for single feedback tone

, YES

NO
Do not capture EES digits in the CDR record.
YES = Capture EES digits in the CDR record.

ECDR

Table 78-2
-Add End-to-End Signaling
Prompt

to attendant console.

Response

Comment

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

ATT,

Console type
Terminal Number

TN
KEY

xx EES

Xl 1 features and services

Add EES key (xx = key number) (Cannot be key 0 or 1)

553-3001-305

End-to-End Signaling

78-5

Table 78-3
Specify the cadence for the EES feedback tone
LD56
Prompt
REQ

Response

Comment

CHG, NEW

Change or Add

FTC

Flexible Tones and Cadences

TABL

X

FTC table number

HCCT

YES

Hardware Controlled Cadence

EEST

(No response expected; this is an informational
prompt.)

TDSH
N

i bbcctt

TDS external, burst, cadence, and tone

O-255

7 TDS tone code

O-255

7 cadence code for FCAD

Feature operation
There is a 5.4 DS difference between when EEST is set to YES (provide
end-to-end signaling feedback tone) and when it is set to NO (provide no
using the conference pads is applied to the
tone). An attenuation of 5.4
EES tone if a user feedback is to be given.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

78-6

End-to-End Signaling

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

79-1

Equal Access Compliance
A telephone user can select any interexchange carrier for any given call by
using a Carrier Access Code (CAC). A CAC comprises an Equal Access
identifier and a Carrier Identification Code (CIC). Northern Telecom refers
to a call preceded by a CAC as an Equal Access call.

FCC requirements
FCC Part 68 regulations require that any equipment or software manufactured
or imported on or after April 17, 1992, and installed by any aggregator, must
allow all users to use Equal Access codes to selectively access the long
distance carrier of their choice. As defined in FCC docket 90-3 13, an
is any business that, in the ordinary course of operations, makes
telephones available to the public or to transient users of the premises, for
interstate telephone calls using a provider of operator services. Aggregators
include hotels or motels, hospitals, universities, airports, gas stations, or pay
telephone owners.
Aggregators, although they must allow callers access to any long distance
caller, are permitted to block calls selectively. Selective equal access lets
aggregators choose to block direct-dialed calls that result in charges to the
originating telephone. Aggregators cannot block operator-assisted calls.
Northern Telecom complies with the FCC Equal Access rules in dockets
I-35, and their appendixes, in a software up-issue of Xl 1 release 14
90-3
1 release 19 supports the
(14.59 or later), and 1 release 17 and later.
expanded codes described in the following section.
Note: X 11 releases 15 and 16 do not support Equal Access.

Xl 1 features and services

79-2

Equal Access Compliance

Carrier Access Code
Prior to the first quarter of 1995, the CAC is defined as
where
is the Equal Access identifier and XXX is the CIC. During the first quarter of
1995, Carrier Identification Code Expansion will occur. The CAC will
(an Equal Access identifier of ‘101’ followed by a
become
four-digit CIC). For a period of approximately 18 months following
introduction of the new format, both old and new formats will be accepted.
format will terminate. Meridian 1
During 1996, support for the
software permits both formats.

Equal Access dialing plans
X11 software supports Equal Access dialing plans as follows:
Allow operator-assisted North American and international dialing.
.
.

CAC + 0 + (NPA) + NXX + XXXX

.
Allow or deny direct North American and international dialing.
.

CAC t 1 t (NPA) t NXX t XXXX

.
Legend:
CAC = Carrier Access Code

or

NPA = Numbering Plan Area (area code in the North American
Numbering Plan)
NXX = end-office code
(N = any digit except 0 or 1; X = any digit (O-9))
XXXX = any four digits
CC = Country Code
NN = National Number

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Equal Access Compliance

79-3

Route types
Equal Access Compliance supports COT, FEX,

and tie routes.

A tie route is supported only if standard signaling is specified in LD16 (SIG0
= STD). To enable Equal Access call restrictions to function properly, DTI tie
routes must be voice only. (DTI tie routes configured as voice/data are not
supported for connection to a central office.) Tie routes must be either
outgoing or incoming/outgoing
=
or OGT).

Call restriction
Call restriction relies on fixed pattern recognition to determine which calls
can be denied. Switch administrators can restrict two kinds of direct-dialed
Equal Access calls: North American calls with the
format and international calls with the
format. If either restriction option is chosen, the
administration must verify that the OCAC flag is correctly set as described in
“Feature packaging” on page 79-3.
Call restrictions do not affect attendant calls.
Calls blocked by Equal Access are not directed to alternate routes.

Feature packaging
Equal Access compliance is included in basic X11 software. The Network
Class of Service package (NCOS, package 32) is required to configure Equal
Access.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

79-4

Equal Access Compliance

Feature

implementation
Carrier Identification Code Expansion supports and extends the General
Carrier Restriction method of blocking calls. Given the expansion in the
number of Carrier Identification Codes, it is no longer practical to support
Selective Carrier Restriction functionality. (Carrier Identification Code
Expansion continues to provide the selective blocking function required by
the FCC; Northern Telecom and the FCC interpret the term “selective”
differently.) For these reasons, prompts pertaining to GCR and SCR in LD16
no longer appear.
Customers who chose the ITOL option to block international calls should also
have international calls blocked at the Central Office to reduce the likelihood
of unauthorized international calls.
Before and during the permissive period, when both the three-character and
the four-character CIC are allowed, current Equal Access users must set the
Original Carrier Access Code (OCAC) flag to YES in LD17. The default is
NO, indicating that only the new CAC format is acceptable. A YES setting
for OCAC in LD17 lets customers use both the original and the new CAC
formats. All customers who currently have Equal Access configured should
set OCAC to YES in LD17 immediately after sysload when installing new
software that includes the new expansion feature. When the original CAC is
OCAC should be set to NO.
no longer acceptable (sometime in
Note: New Equal Access customers do not need to change the OCAC
flag until the feature is configured.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Equal Access Compliance

79-5

routing
Equal Access determines restrictions without looking at a call’s originating
type (ESN or Direct Access). Routing has no effect on Equal Access call
restriction: calls receive the same restriction treatment whether they originate
from a trunk access code or from
Equal Access is not a
feature and does not require
dialing.
To configure
to route Equal Access calls, simply use a special
number (SPN) of 10 (the Equal Access code) to identify the calls as Equal
Access calls and route them accordingly.
Example
Configure BARS/NARS for Equal Access call routing, assuming that calls
originate from Customer 0 and go out over Route 10. To route Equal Access
calls originating from Customer 0 over Route 10, using route list index 100
and access code 1
configure the database as follows.
The configuration in this example routes all Equal Access calls placed
through
with access code 1
over route 10. Note that the
SPN is “10,” to support the original CIC format, rather than “101,” as
required under the new CIC format. Set the SPN to “101” if support for the
original CIC format is unnecessary or if another dialing sequence beginning
with “10” is introduced into North American Numbering Plan.
Follow these steps:
1

In LD17, set OCAC as appropriate.
CHG

Change existing route data

TYPE

CFN

Route Data Block

PARM

YES

Change system parameters
Enable or disable new distinctive ringing

YES
YES

Support original CAC format (must be set to YES
during interim period, NO following interim period)

1 features and services

553-3001-305

I

79-6

Equal Access Compliance

2

In

set the route list index to Route 10.

REQ

NEW, CHG

Create or change database

CUST

0

Customer number

FEAT

RLB

Route List Block

100

Use route list index 100 to route Equal Access
calls

ENTR

0

Route entry number for this route list index (0 if
this is the first entry)

ROUT

10

Send Equal Access calls over Route 10

3

In

establish an SPN for the Equal Access code.
New ESN translation table entry
Customer number
Network translation table entry
Access code 1 is used to originate the Equal Access
calls
SPN translation entry
SPN (Equal Access code)
Use route list index 100 to route Equal Access calls

4

In LD87, configure an NCOS for Equal Access.
REQ

CHG

Change NCTL data

CUST

0

Customer number

FEAT

NCTL

Change NCTL block

NCOS

4

Network class of service group number

EQA

YES

This NCOS permits Equal Access call restriction
capabilities

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Equal Access Compliance

5

6

Assign an NCOS to a set in

79-7

or

CHG

Change existing set data

TYPE

aaa

Specify set type

TN

lscu

Specify set Terminal Number

NCOS

4

Network class of service group number

In LD16, enable Equal Access for this route.
REQ

CHG

Change existing route data

TYPE

RDB

Change Route Data Block

CUST

0

Specify customer number

ROUT

10

EQAR

YES

Enter YES to enable Equal Access and selective
blocking for this route. AYES response triggers
the next two prompts.

(DENY)

Specify that Equal Access North American calls
billed to originating telephone are to be denied

(DENY)

Specify that Equal Access international calls billed
to originating telephone are to be denied

The configuration in this example routes Equal Access calls placed via
using AC1 over route 10 and blocks all Equal Access toll calls
for NCOS = 4. Note that Equal Access toll calls placed via direct trunk a c c e s s
to route 10 also will be blocked.

Feature operation
There is no specific procedure for operating this feature.

Operating parameters
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

79-8

Equal Access Compliance

Feature Interactions
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
7

Fast Tone Digit Switch
The
Fast Tone and Digit Switch (FTDS) card, along with the
associated software, can reduce call setup time by as much as 50 percent with
features such as Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection
Stored Number Redial, Speed Call, and System Speed Call. With the use of
an on-board buffer memory, the calling efficiency of end users is greatly
improved.
The
can be operated in two different modes as defined by the
dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) bursts, or
customer 5: 1 either with
with 50ms DTMF bursts. The software can load up to 32 digits into the buffer
in a single time slice, and can
the digits at a maximum rate of 10
digits per second.

Operating parameters
Tone Digit Switch cards QPC197 and QPC25 1 cannot coexist with the
17 within the same Meridian 1 system.
QPC609 or

Feature interactions
Not applicable.

Feature packaging
Fast Tone and Digit Switch (FTDS), package 87, has no feature package
dependencies.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

80-2

Fast Tone Digit Switch

Feature
LD17

implementation

Change duration of

burst.

CHG

REQ
TYPE

Change

CFN

Configuration Record
Change system parameters

PARM

Yes, (No)

DTRB

50, 60, 70, (100)

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

burst time in milliseconds

81-1

FCC Compliance for DID Answer
Supervision
This feature is designed to meet the requirements in the United States, Section
68.3 14(h) of Part 68, and the DOC requirements in Canada, Section 3.22 of
CS03 Part for answer supervision of redirected telephone calls to help
ensure proper billing.
This feature is designed specifically for telephone calls coming in through
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks. Answer supervision for all other types
of telephone calls is not affected. This feature works in conjunction with the
following types of calls:
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls terminating at the Meridian 1 and
forwarded to a Recorded Announcement (RAN)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls forwarded by the system through the
public switched network (PSN) to another number in the central office
(CO), or to another Meridian 1
On North American COT, FEX, and WATS trunks, central offices do not
always return answer supervision. When no answer supervision is
returned, the Meridian software uses the end-of-dial timer for
non-Digitone trunks (EOD timer), or the end-of-dial timer for
trunks (ODT timer) to verify call connection. For FCC compliance, the
EOD and ODT timers will still be used for incoming DID calls, except
that EOD is capped at 20 seconds even if configured for more.

features and services

553-3001-305

81-2

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

This feature handles incoming DID calls over Data Terminal Interface (DTI),
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN), and analog trunks. Outgoing
calls Central Office (CO) and tie are also handled. System components
involved include trunks, the Meridian 1, and the CO. The following explains
how the system components handle answer supervision.
Analog, DTI, and ISDN incoming trunks: These are covered as long as
they are DID incoming trunks. For incoming analog and DTI trunks,
answer supervision or pseudo-answer supervision is returned by the
Meridian 1 to the CO, if necessary. For incoming ISDN trunks, the
connect message is returned instead.
Analog, DTI, and ISDN outgoing trunks: For incoming DID calls, the
answer and disconnect supervisor (SUPN) of the outgoing trunk is forced
to NO. The EOD or ODT timer simulates the return of answer
supervision.
Meridian 1: For DID calls terminating at the Meridian 1, the system
returns answer supervision based on the terminating condition. For DID
calls forwarded to public switched networks
or private networks,
returns answer supervision based on the condition of the outgoing trunk
(answered or timed out).
CO: The Meridian 1 provides the pseudo-answer for DID calls because
the Meridian 1 cannot return answer supervision.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

81-3

DID calls terminating at the Meridian 1
The requirements for a DID call terminating at the Meridian 1 to return
answer supervision to the incoming DID trunk are shown in Table 81-l. The
prompt in LD16 is kept for other types of calls, but the Meridian 1
software enforces the correct settings to return answer supervision if a
Recorded Announcement (RAN) is used for DID calls, regardless of the value
originally specified in the service change.
Table 81-l
Returning Answer Supervision for DID calls terminating at the
Meridian 1

DID call terminating status

Answer supervision
returned with FCC
Compliance

Answered by the called DID station

Yes

Answered by an attendant

Yes

Routed to dialing prompt

Yes

Routed to Meridian Mail

Yes

Routed to recorded announcement (except for
invalid number, not in service, and not assigned
announcements)

Yes

Routed to recorded announcement by Automatic
Call Distribution (ACD) including invalid number,
not in service, or not assigned announcement

Yes

Not answered

No

Busy signal

No

Recorder signal

No

Routed to announcement for invalid number, not
in service, or not assigned

No

Xi features and services

553-3001-305

81-4

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

Calls forwarded to public switched network
Because it is uncertain whether or not the far end will return answer
supervision, the Meridian 1 uses the EOD and ODT timers. If the Meridian 1
has not detected the return of answer supervision upon timeout of the
outgoing CO trunk, the Meridian 1 sends pseudo-answer supervision to the
incoming DID trunk. This timer is set in LD16 on a per route basis. When a
CO trunk is configured, Meridian 1 software forces the value of SUPN to NO.
Consequently, Meridian 1 software does not expect the return of answer
supervision, and returns answer supervision in the following cases:
The Meridian 1 receives answer supervision from the outgoing CO trunk
before the EOD or ODT timer of the outgoing route expires.
The Meridian 1 does not receive answer supervision from the outgoing
trunk and the EOD or ODT timer of the outgoing route expires;
pseudo-answer is generated.
Note: There are still some cases in which the SUPN value for CO trunks
is assigned to YES if the CO supports a reverse battery mechanism.
With FCC Compliance, a more stringent mechanism is introduced to apply
SUPN = No in LD14 to all CO trunks, even those configured as polarity
sensitive. Service-changeable EOD or ODT timers are always used for
incoming DID calls to enforce the return of answer supervision. In this case,
EOD = 128-19, 968 ms (default time is 13,952 ms)
ODT = 256-16, 128 ms (default time is 4,096 ms)
Note: The EOD timer expires at 20 (20,000 ms) for FCC Compliance.
For outgoing DID calls, the EOD upper limit is 32,640 ms.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

81-5

DID calls forwarded to private networks
Answer supervision is not always returned on tie trunks because some tie
that do not support
trunks leased from public carriers are connected to
answer supervision.
Currently, the Meridian 1 provides the SUPN prompt (LD14) to specify the
availability of answer supervision on certain types of trunks, including tie,
CAM, CCSA (common control switching arrangement), and CAA (CCSA
If SUPN is YES, and it is an
Automatic Number Identification
outgoing trunk, Meridian 1 does not return answer supervision to the
incoming DID trunk unless answer supervision is received from that outgoing
trunk. If the user specifies NO, the Meridian 1 returns pseudo-answer
supervision upon EOD or ODT timeout. Such implementation causes short
billing and overcharge problems.
To solve this problem, a treatment similar to the one implemented on CO
trunks is used on the trunks in this category. The Meridian 1 enforces SUPN
= NO without changing the SUPN value.

Feature interactions
For incoming DID calls routed to private networks, SUPN is enforced to NO
to ensure the return of answer supervision on the outgoing tie, CO, FEX,
WATS, CAM, CAA, Common Control Switching Arrangement (CSA), and
Automatic Voice Network (AUTOVON) trunks. If answer supervision is not
returned when the end of dial timeout occurs, the Meridian 1 disregards the
original value of SUPN set by the user and forces the return of answer
supervision.
When the call comes from a DID trunk, the following outgoing trunks are
affected: tie, CO, FEX, WATS, CAM, CAA, and CCSA.
Feature Group D trunks and Japan (JPN) DID trunks are not affected by this
feature.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

81-6

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

trunks
Both incoming and outgoing Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
trunks are affected by this feature.
For ISDN incoming DID trunks, the connect message is returned when
answer supervision is returned or when the end of dial timer expires.
For ISDN outgoing trunks, the end of dial timer is added to the protocol
to simulate the EOD timer when a connect message is not returned from
the far end; the Meridian 1 generates a pseudo-answer to send to the
incoming trunk.
intercept and RAN
With this feature, incoming DID calls that are intercepted to a Recorded
Announcement (RAN) are provided with answer supervision.

Operating parameters
FCC compliance is supported on
later software.

1 release 14, and on X11 release 17 and

Note: X11 releases 15 and 16 do not support FCC Compliance.
Allowing Meridian equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not
provide proper answer supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules.
This equipment, if provisioned with X11 release 17 or later software,
returns answer supervision signals to the public switched telephone
network (PSTN) when

Xl 1 features and services

.

answered by the called station

.

answered by the attendant

.

routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the
Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) user

.

routed to a dial prompt

553-3001-305

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

81-7

This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded
back to the PSTN. Permissible exceptions are when
.

a call is unanswered

.

a busy tone is received

.

a reorder tone is received

Feature packaging
FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision requires FCC compliance
package 223.

Feature

implementation
Although no implementation changes are necessary, FCC Compliance does
affect system parameters.

LD14
When FCC Compliance is equipped, the Meridian 1 forces SUPN to NO. This
indicates that the system does not expect the CO to return answer supervision,
and provides the pseudo-answer supervision required.

LD16
When RAN is provided for DID calls, the Meridian 1 forces answer
supervision regardless of the setting established in LD16 with the
prompt.

Feature operation
There is no specific procedure required to operate this feature.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

81-8

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
Xl Release:

93 08 01
Standard
17
82-1

Flexible Feature Codes
Flexible Feature Codes
are user-defined numbers of up to four digits
that can be used in place of existing Special Prefix (SPRE) codes. With DN
can be up
Expansion (DNXP), package 150, Flexible Feature Codes
to seven digits long. The Flexible Feature Code (FFC) feature allows
customers to define different dialing codes for different features. There is no
limit to the number of
per prompt as long as each one is unique.
This enhancement allows the use of digits 0 through 9, and the asterisk
and
octothorpe
to activate features. The existing Special Prefix (SPRE) dialing
feature is still supported, with or without the FFC feature enabled. However,
to
the Special Prefix (SPRE) must be assigned in LD1.5 in order for
operate for those features that also use SPRE codes.
The FFC package allows

telephones to activate these features:

Automatic Wakeup (AWU)
Electronic Lock (ELK) (see “Feature operation” on page 82-9)
Override
Remote Call Forward (RCFW) (see “Feature operation” on page 82-9)
Customers define one or more codes at their discretion in LD57 (FFC). For
Service Change updates, refer to the
(553-3001-400).
Any telephone that can currently operate the SPRE dialing feature can
operate the FFC feature. Any telephone that does not currently have SPRE
access receives intercept treatment when dialing
Telephone operation
remains the same (only the codes are different) so that the FFC code is dialed
instead of the SPRE code. Therefore, each feature enabled must have an FFC
individually defined.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

82-2

Flexible Feature Codes

When FFCT is YES in LD57, the Meridian 1 returns a confirmation tone to
the user after completing some feature operations. Refer to “Feature
interactions,” later in this document)
The confirmation tone is the same as the special dial tone.

Operating parameters
The SPRE feature must exist in order for FFC to operate.
Xl 1 release 15 and later software supports Flexible Feature Codes.
The
selected must be unique numbers up to seven digits long. They
cannot conflict with any Directory Number (DN) already in the dialing plan.
LD57 can allow no more than 100
through Service Change.

to be modified in a single pass

Customers using the octothorpe
as part of their dialing plan can use a
predefined string of digits for end-of-dialing indicators.
Changes to the Station Control Passwords
do not take affect until
and sysload. Configuring the system or enabling the feature
after a
changes SCPL = 0 in LD15 to any length. This change takes effect
and
immediately. Any other change to SCPL in LD15 requires a
sysload before taking effect. When the Station Control Password Length
(SCPL) is changed, all associated passwords change accordingly at the next
and sysload. Changing SCPL from 3 to 5 automatically inserts
leading zeros before all existing three-character passwords. Conversely,
changing SCPL from 5 to 3 automatically truncates the leading characters of
all existing five-character passwords.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Flexible Feature Codes

82-3

Feature interactions
FFC interacts with other features as follows:
It allows
telephones to Override established calls, based on the
telephone’s programmed Class of Service (CLS).
telephones
can also activate and deactivate Call Forward by dialing a single FFC.
Telephones with the proper Class of Service (CLS) can activate
Automatic Wakeup (AWU) for their own telephone.
Confirmation Tone for FFC lets
and digital telephones receive
a special tone when certain functions are complete. Confirmation Tone
is returned following these events:
.

Automatic Wakeup (any function)

.

Call Forward (deactivate)

.

Electronic Lock (any function)

.

Ring Again (activate or deactivate)

.

Room Status (any function)

.

Speed Call Controller (add to Speed Call list)

.

Store Number (erase)

Confirmation Tone for FFC is returned when a predefined string is used
as the end-of-dialing indicator for the following activities:
.

Call Forward (activate)

.

Permanent Hold (any function)

.

Speed Call (store)

.

Store Number (store)

.

Flexible Feature Code (any verification)

Confirmation Tone is provided for Speed Call store after the
End-Of-Dial string (such as is entered.
FFC codes are not supported on SL-1 and digital telephones when
attempting to call pickup a Dial Intercom ringing call.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

82-4

Flexible Feature Codes

Automatic Wake-Up
Telephones can activate Automatic Wakeup (AWU) features for their
own station with Common Controlled Switching Arrangement (CCSA)
Class of Service (CLS).
Users are still able to use SPRE dialing (if the feature is enabled), with
or without FFC defined.
Because Electronic Lock (ELK) sets the Controlled Class of Service
(CCOS) to CCRS (as defined in
a telephone with a key used to
modify CCOS can be used to activate or deactivate the Electronic Lock
without having to dial the FFC or the password.

Feature packaging
Flexible Feature Codes (FFC), package 139, requires Controlled Class of
is desired.
Service (CCOS), package 81, only if Electronic
In addition, the SPRE dialing feature must be enabled for FFC functions.
package 18, and 500 Set Features
2500 Set Features
73, are required to support the following features:
Call Forward
Speed Call Controller
Speed Call User
Permanent Hold
Call Park
System Speed Call

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

package

Flexible Feature Codes

Feature

82-5

implementation

Set parameters for Flexible Feature Code.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CCRS

aaa

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) (assigned when
Electronic Lock (ELK) is activated)
aaa =
UNR

Unrestricted

TLD

Toll Denied

CTD

Conditionally

CUN

Conditionally Unrestricted

SRE

Semirestricted

FRE

Fully

Toil

Denied

Restricted

Fully Restrict Level
FR2
X

Fully Restrict Level 2

Station Control Password Length (SCPL), O-8.
Entering 0 disables ELK and RCFW features at next
and sysload.

FFCS

YES, NO

Change or don’t change FFC end-of-dialing indicator

STRL

X

String length l-3 (prompted only if FFCS = YES)

STRG

aaa

Character string to be used (up to string length; prompted
only if FFCS = YES)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

82-6

Flexible Feature Codes

Set Station Control Password Length for
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

telephones.

Terminal Number

TN

X
CLS

CCSA

Station Control Password (must be same length as SCPL in
LDl5; enter X to delete password)
Enable CCOS for Electronic Lock (ELK) and Remote Call
Forward

Set Station Control Password Length for SL-1 and digital telephcmes.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

xx...xx

Station

Control

Password

Must be the same length as SCPL in
X

Enter X to delete the password
Delete the password only if SCPL = 0; else receive an error
code for no password to fit the SCPL

CCSA

features and services

Enable CCOS for ELK and Remote Call Forward

553-3001-305

Flexible Feature Codes

LD57

82-7

Define numbers for Flexible Feature Code (Part 1 of 3).

REQ

NEW, CHG, OUT

Build new FFC data block, change FFC data block, remove
FFC code.

TYPE

FFC

Flexible Feature Codes

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CEPT

YES, NO

Conference
des Postes Tel defaults are allowed,
or not allowed, to be defined (prompted only if REQ = NEW)

REP*

n

Single-character replacement for * and # in CEPT defaults
Create defaults only

ALL
CODE

YES, NO

Remove or don’t remove all
OUT)

(prompted only if REQ =

nnnn

FFC type

ALL

All prompts



No prompts

ASRC

nnnnnnn

Automatic Set Relocation code

AUTH

nnnnnnn

Authorization code

AWUA

nnnnnnn

Automatic Wakeup Activate code

AWUD

nnnnnnn

Automatic Wakeup Deactivate code

AWUV

nnnnnnn

Automatic Wakeup Verify code

CDRC

nnnnnnn

Call Detail Recording charge account code

CFWA

nnnn

Call Forward All Calls Activate code

CFWD

nnnn

Call Forward All Calls Deactivate code

CFWV

nnnn

Call Forward All Calls Verify code

nnnn

Conference Diagnostics code

CPAC

nnnn

Access Parked Call code

CPRK

nnnn

Park Call code

CSHF

nnnn

Switchhook Flash

Xl features and services

82-8

Flexible Feature Codes

LD57

Define numbers for Flexible Feature Code (Part 2 of 3).
nnnn

Six-Party Conference call code

DEAF

nnnn

Deactivate Ring Again and FWD codes

DPVS

nnnn

Data port Verification code

nnnn

Electronic Lock Activate code

ELKD

nnnn

Electronic Lock Deactivate code

HOLD

nnnn

Permanent Hold code

IMS

nnnn

Integrated Message System Access code

MNTC

nnnn

Maintenance Access code

MTRC

nnnn

Malicious Call Trace code

OVRD

nnnn

Override code

PUDN

nnnn

Pick Up Directory Number code

PUGR

nnnn

Pick Up Group code

PURN

nnnn

Pick Up Ringing Number code

RCFA

nnnn

Remote Call Forward Activate code

RCFD

nnnn

Remote Call Forward Deactivate code

RCFV

nnnn

Remote Call Forward verify code

RDLN

nnnn

Redial Last Number code

RDNE

nnnn

Erase Stored Number code

RDSN

nnnn

Redial Saved Number code

RDST

nnnn

Store Last Number code

RGAA

nnnn

Ring Again Activate code

RGAD

nnnn

Ring Again Deactivate code

RGAV

nnnn

Ring Again Verify code

RMST

nnnn

Room Status code

features and services

553-3001-305

Flexible Feature Codes

LD57

82-9

Define numbers for Flexible Feature Code (Part 3 of 3).
nnnn

Station Control Password Change code

nnnn

Speed Call Controller code

nnnn

Speed Call User code

nnnn

System Speed Call User code

TFAS

nnnn

Trunk Answer from Any Station code

TRMD

nnnn

Terminal Diagnostics code

TRVS

nnnn

Trunk Verification code

USTA

nnnn

User Status code

nnnn

Log-in, Log-out code for 50012500 ACD telephones

nnnn

Not Ready Activate or Deactivate code for
telephones

NRDY

ACD

Feature operation
For some features, the user can dial a different FFC to activate or deactivate
a feature or to verify some feature operations. The tone for each event
(activate, deactivate, verify) is the s a m e as the default Confirmation Tone
(special dial tone).
Electronic Lock
Electronic Lock (ELK), packaged with FFC, provides an SCPW for changing
the status from the telephone. The SCPW also protects against changes to the
RCFW feature. Entering a password length of 0 in
(SCPL) disables
password control for both ELK and Remote Call Forward (RCFW).
Operating ELK requires enabling of CCOS, package 81.
To change the Class of Service (CLS) from a telephone
1

Dial the Electronic Lock Activate

code.

2

Dial the SCPW. The telephone’s CLS is changed to the CCRS value
defined in LD15.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

82-10

Flexible Feature Codes

To return the telephone to the originally defined CLS
1

Dial the Electronic Lock Deactivate (ELKD) code.

2

Dial the SCPW. The telephone’s CLS is changed to the values defined in
and

Because the CLS defined for CCRS in LD15 is usually lower than the CLS
or
the CLS for a telephone is lowered by dialing the
defined in
Electronic Lock Activate
FFC and the password associated with that
telephone. The user can activate from a remote telephone by dialing the
FFC, the SCPW and the Directory Number to be changed. The same
operation can deactivate the feature, using the Electronic Lock Deactivate
(ELKD) code programmed in LD57.
ELK operation has the following requirements:
CCOS allowed, with CCSA CLS in
in LD15

and

and CCRS defined

Set the password length in LD15, at the SCPL prompt
Add passwords in

and

at the

FFCT = YES in LD 57
To change the SCPW for ELK
1

Select a free extension.

2

Dial the SCPC code.

3

Dial the SCPW for your telephone.

4

Dial the new password.
To confirm, dial the new password again

6

Hang up or press RLS.

Remote Call Forward
Remote Call Forward (RCFW) allows a telephone user to program their Call
Forward Directory Number (DN) from a remote telephone. Each telephone
must have Call Forward All Calls enabled, and must have the SCPW defined
or
for FFC in

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Flexible Feature Codes

82-11

As with all FFC applications, a unique number code must be programmed for
each of the FFC functions relating to RCFW: Remote
Forward Activate
(RCFA), Remote Call Forward Deactivate (RCFD), and Remote Call
Forward Verify (RCFV). User’s can change the RCFW Directory Number
(DN) from their own telephone, or from a telephone remote from the switch.
From any telephone within the Meridian 1 system, simply lift the handset and
use the following procedures. From any telephone outside the system, first
dial the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) number and wait for dial tone.
You may hear a Confirmation Tone after entering the main extension number,
telling you that the password and extension match. You may hear a second
special tone after dialing the end-of-entry digits, telling you that the
procedure was successful. If you hear a Fast Busy signal, hang up and try
again.
1

Dial RCFW FFC (for example,

2

Dial the SCPW.

3

Dial the DN of station to be forwarded.

4

Dial the number you are forwarding to.
If required, dial end-of-dialing digits (default is the octothorpe

6 Hang up.
If there are two telephones with the same Prime DN, it is recommended that
only one of them have an SCPW. With RCFW, it is possible that the two
telephones could have the same password assigned. With the same password,
they could control each other’s telephone security. For the same reason, the
Secondary DN for an ACD station should not appear as a Prime DN on
another station.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

82-12

Flexible Feature Codes

features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
Xl 1 Release:

921231
Standard
All
83-1

Group Call
Group Call allows a user of an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone to place a
simultaneously by activating a
call to up to ten Directory Numbers
must have been previously defined as
Group Call key. The called
members of a group.
Each customer within the Meridian 1 system can have up to 64 groups
Xl 1 release 13 and later
assigned. Each group has up to ten member
software allows 20 members per group. Any DN in the system can be
assigned as a member of a group, and a DN can be a member of more than
one group.
Groups are defined through Service Change in LD18. When a group is
defined, each member of the group is assigned a member number. If network
or conference blocking is encountered, members are assigned priorities for
connection to the Group Call in order of their group member numbers
(member 0 has the highest priority). It is recommended that group members
be assigned from different network loops to minimize the possibility of
network blocking.
The Group Call key is used to originate a Group Call to all members of the
group to which the Group Call key is assigned. The Group Call key for a
given group can appear on more than one telephone. More than one Group
Call key can be assigned to a group, but only one Group Call key can be active
for a given group at any time. A telephone with a Group Call key need not be
equipped with a Directory Number (DN) that is defined as a group member.

features and services

553-3001-305

83-2

Group Call

Activation of a Group Call key originates a call to all assigned members of
tone is
the group. When the first member of the group answers,
removed and a speech path is set up between the member and the originator
of the call. As subsequent members answer, they are added to the call. The
lamp associated with the Group Call key at the originator’s telephone flashes
until all members of the group have answered the call.
If a Directory Number (DN) is actively engaged in a call and a Group Call is
originated for that DN, either the Group Call is camped-on or Call Waiting is
activated for the DN and a special warning tone is provided. The special
warning tone consists of three rapid bursts of tone followed by ten seconds of
silence, then an additional three rapid bursts of tone.
An active Group Call is under complete control of the originator of the call.
If the originator goes on hook, the call is completely broken down. Members
who are taking part in a Group Call may disconnect from the call at any time,
but once disconnected, they cannot be reconnected.

Operating parameters
A Group Call can be originated only from an SL-1 or Meridian 1 digital
telephone with a Group Call key.
The maximum number of members per group is 10 (20 with X11 release 13
and later software).
The maximum number of groups per customer is 64.
Each group member DN must have a Warning tone allowed COS.
OPX lines cannot be members of a group.
Calls to a DN that is active in a Conference call or Group Call are blocked.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Group Call

83-3

Feature interactions
Telephone features
The following features cannot be applied on a Group Call:
.

Call Forward No Answer

.

Call Forward Busy

.

Call Park

.

Call Transfer

.

Conference

.

Hunting

.

Privacy Release

.

Ring Again

Call Forward All Calls
A Group Call to a telephone with Call Forward active is forwarded one
step only. The Call Forward number must be a valid DN.
Call Pickup
This feature can be used to answer a Group Call if it is activated by a
valid telephone in the same Call Pickup group, or by using Directory
Number (DN) Pickup or Group Pickup.
Hold
Only the originator of a Group Call can put the Group Call on hold.
Make Set Busy or Individual Do Not Disturb
A Group Call to a telephone in Make Busy or Individual Do Not Disturb
mode cannot be completed. The telephone will not be rung and is not
counted as part of the Group Call; that is, if all other members in the
group have answered, the lamp next to the Group Call key on the
originator’s telephone lights steadily.

Feature packaging
Group Call (GRP), package 48, has no feature package dependencies.

Xl 1 features and services

83-4

Group Call

Feature

implementation
or change a Group Call list.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

GRP

Group Call data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

GRNO

O-63

Number of the Group Call list

STOR

Group member number (xx) and associated DN


End input of stored Group Call entries

-Add or change Group Call for

and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =
2317, 2616, 3000

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx GRC yy

Add a Group Call key
xx = key number
yy = Group Call member number

LD20

Print Group Call data.

REQ

PRT

Print

TYPE

GRP

Group Call data

CUST

o-99

Customer number

GRNO

O-63

Number of the Group Call group
Print data for all Group Call groups

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Group Call

83-5

Feature operation
To make a Group Call,
1

Press Group Call. All group members are automatically called. The
LCD indicator beside the Group Call key flashes until all members have
answered. Then it lights steadily.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

83-6

Group Call

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

History File
The History File provides the capability to allocate an area of protected data
to store system messages until a printout is requested by a craftsperson. The
size of the History File is defined on a system basis and can be up to 65,534
characters. Since one word of protected data stores two History File
characters, the size of the History File is up to 32,767 words of protected data.
For a complete description of the History File, including the significant
enhancements provided in X 11 release 19, please refer to XI system
management application (553-3001-301).

Xl 1 features and services

84-2

History File

1 features and services

85-1

Hot Line
Flexible Hot Line
Flexible Hot Line (HOT) allows designated
telephones to place
calls to a predetermined destination simply by lifting the handset. The
destination may be internal or external to the Meridian
and the call does not
require attendant intervention.
Flexible Hot Line (HOT) is provided to designated
telephones on a
Class of Service (CLS) basis. A telephone is assigned the Hot Line feature
through Service Change and a Manual Line (MNL) CLS. Address digits must
be stored for the predetermined destination. If no digits are defined, the call
will route to the attendant console.
When the user lifts the handset, no dial tone is returned. The Meridian 1
translates the stored digits and performs in one of two operations:
It rings an internal Directory Number (DN), then returns

tone.

It translates to an external Trunk Access Code (TRC) and DN, then
returns external call-progress tones or announcements.
Note: Flash the switchhook at any time during call setup or during the
call will be ignored.
caller is a Hot Line, the prime Directory Number of the calling
telephone is displayed on the terminating telephone, if equipped with a
display.

Operating parameters
Flexible Hot Line applies to

telephones only.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

85-2

Hot Line

Feature interactions
Enhanced Hotline
Flexible Hotline and Enhanced Hotline are mutually exclusive (a
telephone cannot have both Manual Line (MNL) and Enhanced Hot Line
Allowed (EHTA) Class of Service (CLS)).
Hunting
Calls will hunt before being routed to the attendant.

Feature packaging
Flexible Hot Line (HOT), package 70, has no feature package dependencies.

Feature

implementation

Add or change Flexible Hot Line for

TYPE

telephone

CHG

Change

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =

TN

FTR

2018, 2112,

lscu

Terminal Number

MNL

Manual signaling (requires XFD Class of Service,
transfer denied)

HOT l-31

Add Flexible Hot Line (Xl 1 releases 4 through 9)
Flexible Hot Line Directory Number (DN)

FTR

HOT D 1-31

Add Flexible Hot Line (Xl 1 release 10 and later
software)
l-31 = maximum digits for Hot Line
= Flexible Hot Line DN
= Phantom DN for a two-way Hot Line

features and services

553-3001-305

Hot Line

85-3

Feature operation
To make a Flexible Hot Line Call, follow these steps:
1

Lift the handset. The Hot Line number is automatically dialed.

2

To end the call, hang up.

Enhanced Hot Line
Enhanced Hot Line (EHOT), available in X11 release 10 and later software,
provides Hot Line services to telephones with programmable keys. This
feature is designed for, and is compatible with,
telephones and SL-1
and Meridian digital telephones. All capabilities from Flexible Hot Line
(HOT) are provided to any key/lamp pair for one- and two-way Hot Lines on
a per station basis. When the handset is lifted, or when a preprogrammed key
is activated, the system-speed calls a preprogrammed DN. Hot Lines access
or by list
a set of terminal numbers programmed by direct entry using
entry such as by System Speed Call (SSC) using
There is no difference
in operation for the Hot Line user.
Once a Hot Line call enters the ringing state, it is the same as any normal call.
telephone
Enhanced Hot Line (EHOT) allows a distinction between
Hot Lines and manual Hot Lines without dial capabilities. For example,
telephones with EHOT enabled and dial facilities support Dial Access
features such as Call Transfer or Conference calling.
A Hot Line key may be defined with a Directory Number (DN) of its own,
allowing other calls to terminate on that HOT key. For SL-1 and digital
telephones, the HOT key must be assigned to a DN during Service Change to
create a two-way Hot Line.
telephones are always two-way Hot
Lines, as they always have a DN assigned.

1 features and services

85-4

Hot Line

Operating parameters
Incoming calls to Hot Line telephones or keys can be restricted to calls
originating from other Hot Line telephones or keys, Voice Call keys, and
Group Call keys. This restriction is turned on or off on a percustomer basis.
Telephones without a keypad or rotary dial cannot be assigned the Enhanced
Hot Line Allowed (EHTA) Class of Service (CLS).
A maximum of 31 digits can be stored against a Hot Line telephone or key.
Only one Hot Line list is allowed per customer.
HOT cannot access a list created by the list-entry method for Enhanced Hot
Line (EHOT).
A specific Hot Line key on an SL-1 or digital telephone can have access to
only one entry in the Hot Line List, but more than one telephone may have
access to the same entry.
telephones with Manual Line (MNL) CLS cannot be defined as
Enhanced Hot Line Allowed (EHTA); Enhanced Hot Line Denied (EHTD) is
the default. Users of these telephones must continue to use the HOT feature.
If a key is assigned as an EHOT Directory Number (DN), then all
appearances of that DN must also be EHOT keys.

Feature interactions
ACD
A Hot Line DN key can be assigned to an ACD telephone.
Prime DN
If the Hot Line key is assigned to key 0 on an SL-1 or Meridian digital
telephone, it acts as the prime DN. When the user goes off-hook without
selecting a DN key, the Hot Line is activated and the call is placed
without further user action.
Automatic Line Selection
Since the Hot Line key acts as a Single Call Ring (SCR) key, incoming
ringing line preference can be applied. Outgoing line preference
automatically selects a line other than the current Hot Line, so that a Hot
Line call is not accidentally activated.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Hot Line

85-5

Attendant Administration
Use of an attendant console to change the data base for EHOT is not
supported.
Automatic Answerback
The Automatic Answerback feature is fully compatible with a two-way
Hot Line key assigned as the Prime DN.
Call Forward Busy/No Answer and Hunting
Any Hot Line telephone may be assigned Call Forward Busy/No Answer
and Hunting (excluding Short Hunt) CLS, but it applies only to the
two-way Hot Line capability.
Call Park
Hot Line telephones with EHTA and XFA CLS are
The
allowed to park calls using the established Call Park procedures. Once a
Hot Line telephone and the telephone is
call is parked on a
placed on hook, it cannot be unparked. Parked calls will recall to the
parking telephone after the Call Park timeout. Two-way SL-1 Hot Line
stations that are equipped with a Park key/lamp pair are allowed to park
telephones, a call parked
calls in the normal fashion. As with
from a Hot Line key cannot be picked up using the same key.
Call Pickup
Hot Line
Telephones with two-way Hot Line keys, and
telephones, may be assigned to pickup groups. Incoming Hot Line calls
may be picked up by group members. To prevent any one from picking
up a Hot Line call, do one of the following:
.

Do not put a Hot Line user into a Call Pickup group

.

Assign the Hot Line restricted option (OPT HTR) in LD15

Dial Intercom
Hot Line telephones cannot be members of Dial Intercom
The
Groups (DIGS ).
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS)
When a Hot Line DN is on a telephone that has CCOS activated, Hot
Line calls ignore the imposed CLS, if the System Speed Call (SSC)
package is present and the Hot Line list is given an adequate Network
Class of Service (NCOS) for the override.

Xl 1 features and services

85-6

Hot Line

Digit Display
A Display key on a telephone with a Hot Line appearance will display
the Hot Line target DN data stored for that key.
HOT
EHOT and HOT are mutually exclusive (a telephone cannot have both
MNL and EHTA CLS).
Group Call
Hot Lines may be members of a Group Call. They cannot, however, have
a Group Call key.
Make Set Busy
Make Set Busy is overridden by the Hot Line feature. If an SL-1
telephone is in Make Set Busy mode, incoming Hot Line calls still
terminate (ring) on the telephone.
Override
A Hot Line call can be entered using the Override feature.
Permanent Hold
telephones with EHTA cannot have Permanent Hold.
Private Line
A Hot Line key cannot be a Private Line, as this would defeat the benefits
of Private Line service.
Room Status (RMS)
The Room Status feature is incompatible with any telephone for which
going off hook activates Hot Line.
Internal CDR
Hot Line stations may be assigned the appropriate CLS that allows CDR
records to be printed for calls originating on that telephone.
System Speed Call (SSC)
When the SSC package is equipped, Hot Line lists have the
characteristics and limitations of SSC lists. If the package is not
equipped, Hot Line lists function like standard Speed Call lists.
Voice Call
The terminating DN of a Voice Call arrangement may be the incoming
DN of a two-way Hot Line.
Note: When engineering call modification paths (such as Hunting and

Call Forward No Answer), the Hot Line Restriction option will cancel
the normal call modification operation for internal non-Hot Line calls.
Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Hot Line

85-7

Feature packaging
Enhanced Hot Line (EHOT), package 70, requires:
Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32
System Speed Call (SSC), package 34

Feature

implementation

the number of Speed Call lists, including Hot Line lists.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CFN

Configuration record

MSCL

O-81 91

Maximum number of Speed Call lists

-Add or change Enhanced Hot Line for a customer.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

C U S T

o-99

Customer number

OPT

HTU, HTR

Hot Line unrestricted or restricted

This program determines whether the call is going to a Hot Line DN or to any available DN. HTR
restricts Hot Line calls to Hot Line
but HTU does not.

Hot Line Speed Call list memory size and disk records
REQ

COMP

TYPE
NOLS

release 17).

Compute disk and memory
Speed Call lists

l-8191

Number of lists to be added

DNSZ

6-31

Maximum length of DN allowed for Speed Call list

SIZE

1-1000

Maximum number of DN entries in Speed Call list

Note: Use this prompt sequence to determine if there are enough memory and disk records for new Speed
Call lists. Compare the output with the MEM AVAIL and DISK AVAIL values output before the REQ prompt.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Hot Line

85-8

or change a Hot Line Speed Call list.
NEW,
CHG,
OUT

Add, change, or remove a Speed Call list

HTL

Hot Line List

o-99

Customer number

LNSO

O-81 90

Hot Line List number (only one Hot Line List per customer)

NCOS

o-99

NCOS to be assigned to calls accessing the list

TYPE

DNSZ xx

Maximum number of digits in a list entry (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, or 31)

SIZE

l-1000

Maximum number of entries in the Speed Call list

WRT

YES, NO

Data is (or is not) correct and list may (or may not be) be updated

STOR

xxx

xxx list entry number (O-9, O-99, or O-999)
= digits to be stored against the entry (must be equal to or less
than DNSZ)

WRT

YES, NO

Data is (or is not) correct and list may (or may not be) be updated

Note: The WRT prompt follows SIZE and STOR prompts asking for confirmation of the data just entered.
data is correct,
or
A response of NO to WRT after SIZE returns the REQ prompt. A
response of NO to WRT after STOR causes the data just entered to be ignored and a restart message
(SCH3213) to be generated.
A response of
Yes are saved.
In

aborts the program. The last STOR value is lost but all other values to which WRT was

1 release 17 and later software, the following information is output with the WRT prompt:

ADDS: MEM:

DISK:

(xxxxx is the amount of protected memory;
is the number of disk records required for the new speed
call list. Check the MEM AVAIL and DISK REC AVAIL values output before the REQ prompt)

features and services

553-3001-305

Hot Line

Add Enhanced Hot

for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

DTN, DIP

or dial pulse service (manual service is not
allowed)

FTR

EHTA

Enhanced Hot Line allowed

LNA, LDN)

Last Number Redial allowed or denied (optional)

XFA, XFD

Call Transfer allowed or denied (optional)

CWA, CWD

Call Waiting allowed or denied (optional)

XRA, XRD

Ring Again allowed or denied (optional)

HOT D nn

Direct Hot Line DN
nn = number of digits (l-31) for target DN

HOT L O-999

Hot Line List entry number defined in

8

features and services

telemanuals.com

85-10

Hot Line

-Allow or deny Enhanced Hot Line for SL-1 and digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa
2317, 2616, 3000

TN
KEY

Terminal Number
nn HOT D cc

One-way Hot Line key

nn HOT L aaa

One-way Hot Line List key

nn HOT D cc
xxxx

Two-way Hot Line key

nn HOT L aaa

Two-way Hot Line List key

nn CH D cc

Combined No Hold Conference and Direct Hot Line
release 14 and later software)
feature (Xi

nn CH L aaa

Combined No Hold Conference and Hot Line List feature
(Xl 1 release 14 and later software)

Legend:nn = key number
number of digits for target DN (1-31)
cc
target DN (s 31 digits)
aaa Hot Line List entry defined in
DN for Hot Line key

Feature operation
To make an EHOT call on a

telephone,

Lift the handset. The Hot Line number is automatically dialed.
To transfer or conference an EHOT call on

type telephones,

Flash the switchhook (or press Link) and dial the third-party extension.
To make an EHOT call on a SL-1 or digital telephone,
Press Hotline.
To answer an incoming Hot Line call on a SL-1 or digital telephone,
Press the flashing Hotline key.
To end an Enhanced Hot Line call,
Hang up or press RLS.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting
Hunting allows calls encountering a busy Directory Number
to route
automatically to another DN. Hunting continues along a predefined path,
known as the hunt chain, until reaching an idle DN, the end of the hunt chain,
or the maximum number of hunt steps. Hunting is specified on a DN basis.
in the hunt chain can be consecutive or nonconsecutive numbers.
The four types of hunt chains provided by the Meridian 1 are:
Circular hunting
Linear hunting
Secretarial hunting
Short hunting
The following pages describe and illustrate each of these ways to hunt.
In addition, Data Port Hunting is described on page
Hunting is described on page
1.5.

Xl 1 features and services

and Trunk

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

86-2

Hunting

Circular Hunting
Circular Hunting begins at the dialed DN and travels through every DN in the
hunt group. The chain can begin at any point in the circle. The call goes
around the circle until answered, or until returned to the initial DN. If the
in the chain arc busy, the caller hears busy tone. Figure
shows an
example of circular hunting.
Figure 86-1
Circular Hunting example

DN
HUNT

Final step

Fourth step

Return to Dialed DN
Caller hears busy if
3001 is still busy
DN
3005
HUNT 3001

HUN
Incoming call
Dialed DN 3001

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Hunting

86-3

Linear Hunting
Linear Hunting begins at the dialed DN. The call travels in one direction only
when hunting along a linear chain. If a call comes into the second DN of a
only. If all the
are
four-DN chain, it hunts to the third and fourth
busy, the caller hears busy tone. Figure 86-2 shows an example of Linear
Hunting.
Figure 86-2
Linear Hunting example

DN 3001
HUNT 3002

DN
3002
HUNT 3003

Incoming call
Dialed DN 3002

DN
3003
HUNT 3004

DN
3004
HUNT

Caller hears busy
if 3004 is busy

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

86-4

Hunting

Secretarial Hunting
Secretarial Hunting sends calls to a single Hunt DN, typically a secretary or
Voice Mail. When a call comes in to a busy DN, it travels to the central
location. Figure 86-3 shows an example of Secretarial Hunting.
Figure 86-3
Secretariai Hunting example

DN
3003
HUNT 3100

DN

DN
3004
HUNT 3100

3002

Incoming call
Dialed DN 3004
DN 3100

DN 3001
HUNT 3100
Incoming call
Dialed DN 3001

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting

86-5

Short Hunting
Short Hunting takes place along the key strip of any SL-1 or Meridian digital
telephone. The hunt chain begins on a DN on the key strip. The call hunts up
the keys until it reaches a feature key, an unassigned key, or the Last Hunt
Key (LHK, defined in LD 11). If the call cannot reach an available DN, the
caller hears busy. When a call hunts to a Multiple Appearance DN, all
appearances with ringing allowed.
For a TN with Hunting control enabled, Short Hunt takes precedence over
normal Hunting (Circular, Linar, or Secretarial). If the Hunting search selects
a TN for a digital telephone, Short Hunt redirects the call before attempting
to use the Hunt TN. Thus the hunt chain might become Hunt DN A, Hunt DN
B, Short Hunt Sequence C, Short Hunt Sequence D, Hunt DN E.
Figure 86-4 shows an example of Short Hunting.

Operating parameters
The maximum number of hunt steps varies according to the system, as
follows:
18 hunt steps are allowed with

M, MS, LE, N, ST, and 21 systems.

30 hunt steps are allowed with VLE, XL, XN, NT, XT,
81 systems.

Xl 1 features and services

and

telemanuals.com

86-6

Hunting

Figure 86-4
Short Hunting example

S C R 3005
S C R 3003
S C R 3002
CLS HTA
HUNT 0 0 0
LHK 3

SCR 3001

incoming call
Dialed DN 3001

SCR 4005
SCR 4003
TRN
SCR 4002
CLS HTA
HUNT 000
LHK

1 features and services

SCR 4001

553-3001-305

Incoming call
Dialed DN 4001

telemanuals.com

Hunting

86-7

Feature interactions
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Hunting.
Call Forward Busy
Hunting takes precedence over Call Forward Busy for Direct Inward
Dialing (DID) calls. When the station receiving a DID call has both Call
Forward Busy and Hunting Allowed (HTA) Class of Service, the call is
routed along the hunt chain. If all stations in the hunt chain are busy, the
call is forwarded to the attendant.
Call Waiting or Station-to-Station Call Waiting
Hunting takes precedence over Call Waiting. If all steps in the hunt chain
are busy, Call Waiting is activated.
Multiple-Appearance Directory Numbers
With Xl 1 release 17 and earlier software, call redirection parameters are
derived from the Terminal Number data block (TNB, in LD 20) of the
first TN in the DN block for that DN (DNB, in LD 22) with hunting
control enabled. Hunting control is enabled by Hunting Allowed (HTA)
Class of Service (CLS) for
telephones. For SL-1 and Meridian
digital telephones, the DN key must also be less than or equal to the Last
Hunt Key (LHK, in LD 11).
20 and 22) for digital telephones
A printout of the DN block (using
shows an “H” beside the TN that has Hunting enabled. For
telephones, a printout of the TN blocks indicates if the CLS HTA is set
for Hunting control. If no TN for that DN has Hunting control enabled,
no Hunting is attempted.
The selected TN gives the Hunting parameters and determines the
in the TN list of the DN block at the time the
current ordering of the
DN block is accessed. The Hunting pattern can be different if the TN
ordering is changed. The DN block for each busy DN is checked each
time Hunting is attempted for call redirection.

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

86-8

Hunting

When a TN is found with Hunting control enabled, Short Hunting takes
precedence over normal Hunting (that is, Linear, Circular, and
Secretarial, which use the Hunt DN). If the TN selected by the Hunting
search is a digital telephone, the call will be redirected by Short Hunting,
if possible, before attempting to use the Hunt DN. Thus a Hunt Chain can
go from Hunt DN A to Hunt DN B to Short Hunt sequence C to Short
Hunt sequence D to Hunt DN E.
When a telephone is service changed, the Terminal Number (TN) is
moved to the beginning of the DN list regardless of the TN’s numerical
value. This telephone remains at the beginning of the list until another
telephone is service changed.
With X11 release 18 and later software, Hunting can be controlled by the
MADN Redirection Prime (MARP) Terminal Number (TN). If the MARP
system option is disabled, Hunting proceeds as if MARP did not exist.
Note: If all the telephones in the Multiple-Appearance Directory
Number (MADN) group are SL-1 and/or Meridian digital telephones,
ringing telephones are placed at the beginning of the DN list, and
nonringing telephones are placed at the end.
If a Multiple-Appearance Directory Number (MADN) appears in a group
with several telephone types, the telephone type affects the position of
the TN in the list. The
telephones are listed at the beginning,
and SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones are listed in numerical TN
telephone
order at the end of the list. A service change to a
moves its TN to the beginning of the list. A service change to an SL-1 or
Meridian digital telephone moves it to the end of the list. Call redirection
follows the TN order from beginning to end.
The MARP TN is always checked to determine if and how the call is to
be redirected by Hunting, regardless of where the MARP TN resides in
the TN list of the DN block. No searching of the TN list of the DN block
is needed. Hunting will follow the Hunt Chain based on the originally
dialed DN. The actual functioning and requirements for Hunting are not
changed by the MARP feature. The basic change introduced by the
MARP feature is to always have a designated TN, the MARP TN, as the
TN supplying the call redirection parameters.
If the MARP TN does not have Hunting control enabled, no Hunting is
attempted. Other features for redirecting calls to busy
may be
attempted based on the MARP TN.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting

86-9

A Short Hunting sequence begins when the MARP TN of a busy DN can
perform Short Hunting. When a Short Hunt begins, it completes on that
telephone before going to the Hunt DN. The precedence of Short Hunting
over normal Hunting is maintained. Once a Short Hunting sequence is
in the Short Hunt sequence on that TN
started on a digital TN, all the
are attempted before redirecting the call to the TN’s Hunt DN. Thus a Hunt
only.
Chain connects Short Hunting sequences through Hunt

Feature packaging
Hunting is included in basic

Feature

implementation

Add or change Hunting for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type
Terminal Number

TN
HUNT

1 system software.

xxx...x

Hunt DN
removes the DN from the hunt chain

HTA, HTD

Allow or deny hunting (default is HTD)

Add or change Hunting for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type
aaaa =
, 2006,
2317, 2616, 3000

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

HUNT

xxx...x

Hunt DN
000 allows short hunt only
removes the DN from the hunting chain

000

Allow Short Hunting

xx

Last Hunt Key (LHK) number (default is 0)
LHK 0 deactivates Short Hunt

HTA, HTD

Allow or deny hunting (default is HTD)

LHK

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

86-10

Hunting

Data Port Hunting
This feature was known as ADM Trunk Hunting (ATH) with
1 release 5,
with
1 release 12. Trunk
and ADM Trunk Hunting Enhancement
release 76 or 17 for ST, NT, RT, and XT
Hunting (TH) is supported on
systems only. Data Port Hunting is available with
1 release 18 and later for
all supported systems.
Data Port Hunting improves the Hunting operation for data ports and modem
pooling, and improves Ring Again operation for modem pooling.
Up to 255 data ports can be configured as trunks in data port trunk routes. In
addition, the route may be programmed to step to another data port route if all
members in the route are busy.
A data port serves as the interface between the Meridian 1 and a computer or
other data communication device. A data port can be one of the following
devices:
Stand alone Add-on Data Module (ADM) in auto-answer mode (no
modem)
Any modem that can recognize ringing and simulate off hook or on hook
status

stand alone ADM in auto-answer mode, connected to a modem
Data Access Card (DAC)

Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA)
The following types of trunk routes are supported for data port hunting:
ADM Trunk Routes: Add-on Data Module (ADM) data ports that
interface through Data Line Cards.
Modem Trunk Routes: Modem data ports which interface through
Line Cards.
RS-232 (R232): RS-232 data ports that interface through Data Access
Cards
RS-422 (R422): RS-422 data ports that interface through Data Access
Cards

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting

86-11

MCA: Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA) data ports which
interface through Integrated Services Data Line Cards
or Data
Line Cards

I

Data ports can act only as terminating parties. The user dials the access code
of the trunk route to access the data ports.

Feature operation
To access a Data Unit (DU), the user dials the Access Code
of the
route data block. If a DU is available, a connection is made. If a DU is
unavailable, the user receives this message on the terminal screen: ALL
PORTS ARE BUSY. ACTIVATE RING AGAIN? Select Ring Again and
wait until a DU port becomes available.
When a user dials a data port, the request is placed in the Ring Again queue
until a port becomes idle. When an idle port is located, the calling party is
notified and the port is reserved for 8 seconds.

Verification (DVS)
Any applicable set with
Verification Allowed (ADV) Class of
Service may place a call to a specific Add-on Data Module (ADM) in a route
by going off hook, receiving dial tone, and dialing
SPRE + 70 +

+ mmm

Where:
SPRE = special prefix
70
= special access code for the Data port Verification (DVS)
feature
= Access Code for the ADM trunk group
mmm = three-digit number that is to be seized within the trunk

The selected ADM trunk is seized if it is in not busy, maintenance busy, or
disabled state. Once the call is established, it is treated as a normal ADM
trunk call. If the selected trunk is in busy, maintenance busy, or disabled state,
the call originator receives an overflow tone. No tone is returned when
keyboard dialing is used.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

I

telemanuals.com

86-12

Hunting

Operating parameters
All data port trunks within a route must be of a single type. ADM and
MDM data ports cannot be mixed in the same data port trunk route.
Only an attendant can extend incoming calls from stations or trunks (CO,
FX, WATS, tie, Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Common Controlled
Switching Arrangement (CCSA)) to data port trunk routes. Calls cannot
from a station to a data port
be extended, transferred, or
group.
In Night Service mode, any station can transfer incoming calls to data
port routes.
Trunk access restrictions (TARG, TGAR) should be applied to data port
trunk routes to prevent stations with collocated
from directly
accessing data ports with modems, and vice versa.
Class of Service restrictions do not apply to data port trunks.
Ring Again, Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection
and trunk access restrictions (TARG, TGAR) are the only features that
may be applied on calls to data port routes.

Feature interactions
Conference
The Conference feature is not supported with data ports.
Ring Again
When a user activates Ring Again against the data port extension Access
Code (ACOI), the Meridian 1 stores the request until a member in the
data port route becomes idle. When an idle member is found, the calling
party is notified and the member is reserved for 8 seconds. If the calling
party does not respond to the Ring Again notification after 8 seconds, the
reservation is dropped.

Feature packaging
Data Port Hunting is included in basic

1 features and services

553-3001-305

1 system software.

telemanuals.com

Hunting

Feature

86-13

implementation

or change a data port trunk route. (Part 1 of 2)
REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

RDB

Route Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-51 1

Trunk route number

TKTP

ADM, MDM, R232,
R422, MMPM

Trunk route type

STEP

o-51 1

Alternate trunk route number

TARG

o-31

Trunk Access Restriction Groups

TOV

o-3

Data port time out
No timeout
1 = 15 minutes
2 = 30 minutes
3

60 minutes

PSEL

TLNK, DMDM

T-Link or DM-DM protocol (See Note 2)

OPE

YES, NO

Change or don’t change data port operating
parameters (See Note 2)

PSDS

YES, NO

Allow or don’t allow PSDS protocol (See Note 2)

TRAN

SYN, ASYN

Port transmission type; if PSDS = YES, then TRAN
must be SYN (See Note 2)

PAR

SPAC, EVEN, ODD,
MARK

Parity type
SPAC = space parity
EVEN = even parity
ODD = odd parity
MARK = mark parity

DTR

ON, OFF

Forced DTR (If ON) or dynamic DTR (if OFF) (See
Notes 1 and 2)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting

86-14

or change a data port trunk route. (Part 2 of 2)

DCD’

HALF, (FULL)

Half duplex/full duplex

OFF, (ON)

OFF = forced CD
(ON) = dynamic CD
Modem, (Network): when TRAN = SYN

YES, (NO)
ON, (OFF)

Interworking

ON, (OFF)

ON = Internal, (OFF) = External Clock:
when TRAN = SYN

DEM’

YES, (NO)

V.25 bis offered only when TRAN = SYN

YES, (NO)

High Level Data Link Control offered only when V25 =
YES

DTE, (DCE)

Data Equipment Mode
DCE or DTE mode

PBDO’

ON, (OFF)

Port Busy upon DTR Off
presented when DCE, Dynamic DTR
ON = enabled
(OFF) = disabled

I: Prompt offered to R232
Note 2: Prompt offered to MCU

LD14

= MMPM)

Add or change a data port trunk.

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

ADM, MDM, R232,

Trunk type

R422, MMPM
TN

lscu

features and services

Loop Shelf Card Unit

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting

86-15

Trunk Hunting
Trunk Hunting provides either Linear Hunting or Round Robin Trunk
Hunting for outgoing trunks in a route.
When Linear Hunting is implemented, the system searches for an available
trunk in descending order. A station originating an outgoing call is connected
to the last available trunk (highest available trunk route member number) of
the trunk route accessed. The last trunk route member is always the first
choice for outgoing calls and the first trunk route member is always the last
choice.
Round Robin Trunk Hunting, Xl 1 release 3 and later software
Outgoing calls evenly distributed among the members of a trunk route. When
a station originates an outgoing call, the system searches for an available
trunk route member in descending order, starting with the next lower member
number from the last trunk seized for an outgoing call on the trunk route. If a
trunk with a lower member number is not available, the system searches for
a trunk starting with the highest member number of the route.
Note for multiple group machines using Round Robin Trunk Hunting:
To minimize system resource usage, the Meridian 1 will attempt to hunt to an
available trunk within the same group as the originating TN. For example, if
a call is placed from a telephone whose TN is in group 1, the system will first
attempt to locate an available trunk within group 1. If there are no available
trunks in group 1, the system selects an available trunk from another group.
Each time hunting occurs, the round robin index value, which points to the
next route member to be examined, is updated. Because the proximity of a
trunk loop to the originating TN loop takes precedence over the order of the
trunk route members, the system may be forced to hunt through many route
members to locate an available trunk within a given group. This can cause the
round robin index to change dramatically, yielding inconsistent trunk usage
patterns.
If uniform trunk usage is a prime concern, configure route members with
alternating groups. For example, if a given route contains trunk members
from different groups, alternate the groups so that route member 1 is a trunk
member from group 1, route member 2 is a trunk member from group 2, and
SO on. This configuration will produce more uniform trunk usage than would
occur if trunks of the same group were bunched together within a route.

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

86-16

Hunting

Operating parameters
The central office (CO) governs incoming trunk hunting. The Meridian 1 has
no control over the order of incoming trunks.

Feature interactions
There are no feature interactions.

Feature packaging
Trunk Hunting is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature implementation
LD16

Implement Linear or Round Robin Trunk Hunting for a trunk route.

REQ

NEW, CHG

New or change

TYPE

RDB

Route data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-51

Trunk route number

SRCH

RRB, LIN

Round Robin or Linear Hunting

Feature operation
There is no specific procedure for operating this feature.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
Release:

92 12 31
Standard
15
87-l

In-Band
The In-Band
feature provides the ability to display a ten-digit
calling party number during setup (signaling) over a non-Integrated Services
Digital Network (ISDN)
trunk. The Automatic Number Identification
digits are displayed when they auto-terminate to an Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) Directory Number (DN) agent telephone with digit
display. The
feature supports ten digits for
or three and four digits
for Dialed Number Identification (DNIS).
sends these digits to three
places: the CDR records, the host, and the agent telephone.
When a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or tie trunk originates a call, the
trunk
software determines whether the call is on an In-Band AN1
digits are
group. If it is, the ten Automatic Member Identification
collected, and the call auto-terminates at the Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD) Directory Number (DN) specified for that trunk, provided that the
ACD telephone has digit display and Standard Delayed Display (DDS) Class
of Service. The call, sent by Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) signaling
prior to call termination, is not received until all the digits are received by the
software.
message is simultaneously
When the call is presented to the ACD DN, a
sent across the Application Module Link (AML) carrying the Automatic
digits. The message contains the AN1 number,
Number Identification
the ACD DN, and the ACD Agent ID. For a complete description of
see Meridian Link
general guide (553-2901-I 10).
If an auto-terminating ACD DN is not configured for the trunk, the call
intercepts to the attendant, and the AN1 number is displayed on the attendant
console. If the call is extended to an ACD DN, the IAN1 digits are displayed
after it is extended.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

87-2

In-Band

Operating parameters
operates on

Direct Inward Dialing (DID), and tie trunks only.

cannot be configured on the same trunk with Electronic Switched
Network (ESN), Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN), or Dialed
Number Identification Service (DNIS).
The auto-terminating Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Directory
(DN) is configured in LD14. Any ACD Agent specified to
answer
calls also receives standard ACD calls. When a standard
ACD call is received on an non-ISDN or non-AN1 trunk, no AN1
numbers are displayed.
If an
call terminates on a non-ACD DN, no
digits appear on
the telephone display. Likewise, no
messages are sent across the
Application Module Link (AML).
Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) is not supported.
Should the system initialize while an agent is active on an
call,
there will be no impact on the call. However, if any call modification
number is
(such as, Call Transfer or Conference) takes place, the
lost.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

In-Band

87-3

CDR records
Because IAN1 and Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) cannot be
configured on the same trunk group, the IAN1 report is able to appear in place
of the Calling Line Identification (CLID) records. The AN1 number is shown
on the second line of the CDR report in the following format:
N 002 00 TO0004 01
Where:
N
002
00
TO0004
01

= record type
= record sequence number
= customer number
= trunk route and member number
= ACD Agent Position ID
= date (month/day)
= time (hour:minute)
= duration
= AN1 number (ten digits followed by

For a complete description of CDR output,
description and formats (553-2631-100).

Feature interactions
The IAN1 feature interacts heavily with ACD. For a complete description of
the ACD features involved, see Automatic Call Distribution basic features
description (553-2671-100).

feature interactions
ACD Answer/Call Supervisor/Emergency
If the agent presses the Supervisor (ASP) key or the Emergency (EMR)
key, the digit display is cleared when the supervisor answers the call. The
display remains clear while the supervisor is active on the call. If the
supervisor releases first, the AN1 number reappears on the agent’s
telephone display.

Xl 1 features and services

87-4

In-Band

ACD Interflow
If an IAN1 call inter-flows to another predesignated local ACD DN, the
number is displayed on the ovefflow agent’s digit display. The
number.
source ACD DN is displayed following the
ACD Night Call Forward
call is forwarded to an ACD DN, the
If an
on the ACD Agent telephone.

number is displayed

ACD Overflow by Count
If an
call overflows to another ACD DN, the
number is
displayed on the overflow agent’s digit display. The source ACD DN is
displayed following the
number.
activity code
call, the
If the Activity Code (ACNT) key is activated during an
display is cleared. Once the activity code has been entered and the ACNT
key pressed again, the AN1 number reappears on the agent’s display.
Attendant Recall
If an ACD Agent is active on an
call and activates the Attendant
Recall (ARC) key to call the attendant, the agent’s display shows the
attendant number when the attendant answers the call. The
number
reappears when the attendant releases.
Call Consultation
call and presses the TRN key for call
If the agent is active on an
consultation, the display is cleared. When the agent restores the
call, the
number reappears.
Call Park
call and it times out and recalls the agent, the
If an agent parks an
number is not displayed.
Call Transfer
If an agent transfers an
call to another ACD DN, the
is displayed on the terminating set’s display.

number

Conference
If an agent activates the Conference feature while active on an
call,
the display is cleared. The display remains clear while the Conference
party releases first, the
number
call is active. If the
appears on the agent’s display.

features and services

553-3001-305

In-Band

87-5

Display (DSP) key
If the agent is active on an IAN1 call and presses the DSP key to display
another key feature, the
number does not reappear when the DSP
function is complete.
Hold
If an ACD Agent places an IAN1 call on hold, the AN1 number reappears
when the call is restored.
NACD
If an IAN1 call diverts to a target node as a result of Network ACD
(NACD), the AN1 number appears at the target node.
time and date
If the agent presses the Time and Date (TAD) key while on an IAN1 call,
the time and date remains displayed throughout the call. To display the
AN1 number again, place the call on hold and retrieve it. The AN1
number reappears.
time overflow
If an ACD Agent receives an IAN1 call due to time overflow, the AN1
number is displayed. The source ACD DN follows the AN1 number on
the display.
Virtual Agents
Virtual Agents are not supported for IAN1 calls.

Hardware

requirements
A Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) receiver is required to interpret the
DTMF tones with an IAN1 number.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

87-6

In-Band

Feature packaging
In-Band
is not a separately-packaged feature. To implement
requires the following packages:
Basic ACD (BACD), package 40
ISDN Signaling (ISDN), package 145
Primary Rate Access (PRA), package 146
Inter-Exchange Carrier (IEC), package 149
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS), package 98
If Application Module Link (AML) is required, Command Status Link
(CSL), package 77, and Integrated Messaging System (IMS), package 35,
must be included.
For CDR records, Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4, is required.

Feature
LD16

implementation

Identify the route as an In-Band Automatic Number Identification route.

REQ

NEW, CHG

Add or change an

TYPE

DID, TIE

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or tie route

NO, YES

Enable or disable
route as

YES, NO

Specify or don’t specify as an auto-terminating route

YES, NO

Enable or disable the

AUTO

LD23

Send the

(cannot be configured on same

route

messages across the Auxiliary Processor Link (APL).

REQ

NEW, CHG

TYPE

ACD

Add or modify an

route

calls terminate at an auto-terminating ACD DN
Enable

Yes, (No)
Note: The

route

prompt replaces the

messaging across the AP link (see note).

prompt in Xl 1 release 15 and later software.

Feature operation
There is no specific procedure for operating this feature.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

88-1

Incoming DID Digit Conversion
The Incoming DID Digit Conversion (IDC) feature allows digits received
from the central office (CO) to be converted to unrelated extension numbers
within the system. This conversion is accomplished using a translation table
dedicated to a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) route. The digit conversion table
is set up to map the received (external) DID digits into the local (internal)
Directory Number (DN).
IDC can be selectively applied to DID routes. A unique conversion table is
available for each route.

Full Digit Conversion
All the digits received are converted to another string of digits as specified in
the conversion table.
Note: Different strings of digits can be converted to the same internal
Directory Number (DN).

Partial Digit Conversion
Not all of the digits received from the central office (CO) are converted. The
remaining digits may remain unchanged, and the whole string of digits is
forwarded to the Directory Number (DN) translator.
to another partial string of
It is possible to convert a partial string
digits of different length (for instance,
to
or
to
The range
of
to convert can include a mix of DN lengths.

No Digit Conversion
If the digits received are not defined in the conversion table, they are assumed
to represent an internal Directory Number (DN). They are forwarded to the
DN translator without any change.

1 features

and services

553-3001-305

88-2

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

Direct Call Termination
Incoming calls from non-Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks are not affected
by Incoming DID Digit Conversion (IDC). If a call from a trunk on a route
with IDC is received, the digits are translated into a pass (continue), or a
converted telephone of local digits. These digits replace the dialed digits.
Additional dialed digits are then forwarded directly for call processing. The
IDC processor has no further influence on the call. Once the internal digit
processor receives the digits, it alone determines the disposition of the call. It
may be able to terminate the call, or it may be required to intercept the call
due to invalid digits, a busy station, or Call Forward.
When DEXT = NO (LD16) the SL-1 or digital telephone display looks like
this:

Where:
AAAA = route access code
MMM = Route Member Number
The display may show the name of the route if
Call Party Name Display (CPND) is allowed.
When DEXT = YES (LD16) the SL-1 or digital telephone display looks like
this:
Pxxxx
Where:
AAAA = route access code
MMM = Route Member Number
P = Special character (identifying the received digits)
xxxx = Originally dialed digits

features and services

553-3001-305

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

88-3

When DEXT = NO (LD16) the attendant console display looks like this:
iiii xxxx
Where:
AAAA = route access code
MMM = Route Member Number
iiii = Internal DN (called party)
xxxx = route name if Call Party Name Display (CPND) is allowed
When DEXT = YES (LD16) the attendant console display looks like this:
iiii
Where:
AAAA = route access code
MMM = Route Member Number
= Special character (identifying the received digits)
xxxx = originally dialed digits
iiii = Internal DN (called party)

Incoming Call Redirection
If an incoming call is redirected to a Centralized Attendant Services (CAS) or
local attendant, the local DN is used to extend the call. If an incoming call
reaches a Night DN, Hunt DN, Call Forward DN, or similar destination, then
both the internal DN and the directory of local
are used to redirect the
call.

Operating parameters
IDC applies to Direct Inward Dialing (DID) routes only. Auto-terminate
trunks to Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) do not support IDC.
All digits received from an incoming call translate to a maximum of four
digits. Acceptable received digits for an incoming call are 0 through 9.
New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) is required to operate IDC. Since
NFCR trees and IDC tables share the same structure, the total combined
number of NFCR trees and IDC tables cannot exceed 255 per customer.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

88-4

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

Feature interactions
There are no feature interactions.

Feature packaging
Incoming DID Digit Conversion (IDC), package 113, requires New Flexible
Code Restriction (NFCR), package 49.

Feature
LD15

implementation

Specify maximum number of Incoming Digit Conversion trees allowed.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

NFCR

YES, NO

New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) enable or disable

MAXT

l-255

Maximum number of NFCR trees

YES, NO.

Enable or disable IDC

l-255

Maximum number of IDC tables

DCMX

Note: The sum of the values for MAXT and DCMX cannot exceed 255 per customer.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

88-5

Create tables to convert incoming Direct Inward Dialing digits.
REQ

NEW

Create

TYPE

IDC

IDC tables

CUST

o-99

Customer number

O-254

IDC tree number

O-99990-9999

tables

DN or range of

to be converted

Examples:
To convert the external DN 3440 to 510, enter
IDGT3440
3440510
To convert external

in the range

enter

I DGT3440 3465
3440444
3441445
3465469

Enable digit conversion for required Direct Inward Dialing trunk routes.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

RDB

Route Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-51 1

Route number

IDC

YES, NO

Use or don’t use digit conversion for this route

DCNO

O-254

IDC tree number

NDNO

O-254

IDC conversion table for Night mode

DEXT

YES, NO

Allow or don’t allow Digit Display

1 features and services

553-3001-305

88-6

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

Feature operation
There is no specific procedure for operating this feature.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

89-1

Incremental Software Management
Incremental Software Management
introduces a new approach to
system management, offering more flexibility and control over system
configuration and implementation. With ISM, software ordering and pricing
ACD positions
is based on the total count of Terminal Numbers
and Control
(agents and supervisors), ACD Directory Numbers (ACD
and AST
The customer requested configuration parameters are
communicated to Northern Telecom when a new system or upgrade order is
placed, and are then defined during software disk preparation.
The number of configurable Terminal Numbers
is provided in
increments of 100. ACD positions are incremented by 5, while ACD
and
AST
are provided in increments of 1. If an order is received without
these parameters defined, the order will not be processed. The system
parameters used, available, and totaled are listed in a header at the beginning
of each software program. For specific system requirements and limits, refer
to the Pricing Manual.
Note
ACD parameters are preset for each system. The numbers in the
header are not necessarily real limits, and are subject to system
configuration. Contact your Northern Telecom representative for
information regarding your system limits.
Note 2: With Xl 1 release 17, the system
with the ACD

are incremented along

features and services

89-2

Incremental Software Management

Operating parameters
Incremental Software Management (ISM) operates within the following
parameters:
configured in the system, all
To calculate the Terminal Numbers
associated with
SL-1, and digital telephones, ACD
AST
attendant consoles (two
per console),
receivers, tone
detectors, and trunks are included in the total.
The total

refers to Terminal Numbers
configured in
and LD14. There is no differentiating between signaling, data,
or voice channels.
To calculate the number of ACD Agents configured in the system, any
telephone configured as key 0 ACD is counted for the total. This includes
ACD Agents and ACD Supervisors.
AST

are not counted in the total of ACD Agents.

release 17 and later software, AST
must be defined
With
or
1. In Xl 1 release 16 and earlier software, AST
individually in
are defined in LD23 on a per queue basis.
AST DN designation is not maintained following a software conversion. All
must be reconfigured after the conversion is complete.
AST
The total ACD Agents refers to virtual and active (live) ACD Agents and
ACD Supervisors.
Each attendant console increments the TN count twice. The first TN is
designated for the primary TN, and the second TN is designated as the
secondary TN. Power units are not included in the TN count.
X11 release 18 and later software tracks Application Module Links (AML),
D-channels
Logical Terminal Identifiers
and Digital
Subscriber Loops
Note:
and
apply to Integrated Services Digital Network
Basic Rate
(ISDN) Basic Rate Interface (BRI) only. Refer to
Interface description (553-3901-100) for more information regarding
BRI.

features and services

Incremental Software Management

89-3

System monitoring
To assist in monitoring system growth, a header appears in each affected
overlay (LD), reflecting system status. The header indicates the total,
ACD
ACD positions, AST
available, and used quantities of
Digital Subscriber Loops
Logical Terminal Identifiers
D-channels
or Application Module Links
configured. The
counts are updated each time system activity adds or deletes one of the
tracked items. When the limits are exceeded, an error message appears. For a
complete list of the Service Change and error message information, see
inputloutput guide (553-3001-400).
In addition to the headers, a new response is added to Print Routine 3 (LD22)
to query the system limits.
With
1 release 17.67 and later software, when the allowed limits are
exceeded, any additional entry is blocked, and a
message is shown
every time an entry is attempted. Refer to the message list in this section for
the SYS message for each parameter.
Note: The ACD parameters are allowed only if the basic ACD package
is equipped (option 40).

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

89-4

Incremental Software Management

System administration
When the predefined limits are reached, an error message indicates that
further database additions are blocked. New software must be ordered to
increase system limits. In order to minimize delays in system administration,
it is critical that the configuration limits be monitored and that new disks be
ordered before the current parameters are exceeded.
When doing a system enhancement requiring new software, if insufficient
TN, ACD DN, or ACD Agent quantities are ordered, excess TN, ACD DN,
ACD Agent, and AST DN information could be lost. For example, if a system
has 150
configured, but the Incremental Software Management
order is for 100
the system will eliminate the additional 50
A SYS
message is given if this occurs.

CAUTION
System information will be lost.

With ISM in X11 release 15.55 and later software, if SYS message
or 4330 appears at sysload, sysload previous system
disks. Order ISM disks with sufficient system parameters configured.
Call your technical support department for assistance.

Feature packaging
This implementation is required for all new system installations and system
upgrades as of Xl 1 release 15.
The ACD
and ACD Agent and Supervisor parameters are included only
if the basic ACD, package 40, is equipped.
Command Status Link (CSL), package 77, and
To configure AST
Application Module Link (AML), package 209, must be equipped.

features and services

553-3001-305

Incremental Software Management

Feature

89-5

implementation
The following programs contain new headers to indicate the total system
limits allowed, and the current system usage. New error messages are also
added to warn when the limits are reached.
telephones
digital telephones
LD12: attendant consoles
LD13:

receivers and tone detectors

LD14: trunks
LD17: D-channels (DCH) and Application Module Links
LD23: ACD
LD27: Digital Subscriber Loops
Identifiers
Note

and Logical Terminal

The ACD parameters are allowed only if ACD is equipped.

Note 2: Prior to X11 release 17, ACD groups are defined as
at the
group level in LD23. As of
1 release 17, each agent can be defined
individually using LD 10 and
As a consequence, customers must
reconfigure ACD
manually through
and
1 when
upgrading to Xl 1 release 17.
Note 3:
and
apply to Integrated Services Digital Network
(ISDN) Basic Rate Interface (BRI) only. Refer to ISDN Basic Rate
Interface description (553-3901-100) for more information.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

89-6

Incremental Software Management

The following implementation procedures show the header increments when
ACD positions, ACD
or AST
are added or deleted. Other
than the headers, the programs have not changed. LD22 contains a new
response to query system limits.
a 500-type telephone.
MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 189162

USED: 154594

TOT: 343756

TNS AVAIL:

USED: 390

TOT: 400

ACD AGENTS AVAIL: 5

USED: 10

TOT: 15

AST SETS AVAIL: 10

USED: 3

TOT: 13

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

REQ

NEW

Add a new telephone

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

1010

Terminal Number

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 189139

U S E D : 154617

TOT: 343756

TNS AVAIL: 9

U S E D : 391

TOT: 400

ACD AGENTS AVAIL: 5

USED: 1 0

TOT: 1 5

AST SET AVAIL:

USED: 3

TOT: 1 3

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Incremental Software Management

Add a

89-7

or Meridian digital telephone.

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 189139

USED: 154617

TOT: 343756

TNS AVAIL: 9

USED: 391

TOT: 400

ACD AGENTS AVAIL: 5

USED:

TOT: 15

AST SETS AVAIL:

USED: 3

TOT: 13

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

REQ

NEW

Add a new telephone

TYPE

SL-1

Telephone type

TN

1010

Terminal Number
U S E D : 154714

T O T : 343756

TNS AVAIL: 8

U S E D : 392

TOT: 4 0 0

ACD AGENTS AVAIL: 5

USED: 1 0

TOT: 1 5

AST SETS AVAIL: 10

USED: 3

TOT: 1 3

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 189042
DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

89-8
LD12

Incremental Software Management

Add an attendant console.

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 189042

U S E D : 154714

TOT: 343756

U S E D : 392

TOT: 400

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94
TNS AVAIL: 8
REQ

NEW

Add a new console

TYPE

1250

Console type

TN

4050

Assign this as the primary TN

CDEN
SETN

Double Density card
4051

Assign this as the secondary TN

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188867

U S E D : 154889

TOT: 343756

U S E D : 394

TOT: 400

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94
TNS AVAIL: 6

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Incremental Software Management
a

89-9

receiver.

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188867

U S E D : 154889

T O T : 343756

U S E D : 394

TOT: 4 0 0

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94
TNS AVAIL: 6
REQ

NEW

Add a new DTR

TYPE

DTR

Add a new DTR

TN

1580100

Assign the DTR to this TN

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 189857

U S E D : 154899

T O T : 343756

U S E D : 395

TOT: 4 0 0

U S E D : 154899

T O T : 343756

USED: 3 9 5

TOT: 4 0 0

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94
TNS AVAIL: 5

a trunk.
MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188857
DISC RECS AVAIL: 94
TNS AVAIL: 5
REQ

NEW

Add a new trunk

TYPE

TIE

Add a new tie trunk

TN

8052

Assign the trunk to this TN

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188802

U S E D : 154954

TOT: 343756

USED: 3 9 6

TOT: 4 0 0

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94
TNS AVAIL: 4

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

89-10

Incremental Software Management

a D-channel (DCH).
MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188857

U S E D : 154899

TOT: 343756

7

USED: 8

TOT: 1 5

AMLS AVAIL: 5

USED: 4

TOT: 9

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94
DCHS

REQ

CHG

Add a DCH

TYPE

CFN

Configuration Record

NEW DCH 6

Add a primary DCH on port 6
U S E D : 154899

TOT: 343756

DCHS AVAIL: 6

USED: 9

TOT: 1 5

AMLS AVAIL: 5

USED: 4

TOT: 9

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188857
DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Incremental Software Management

LD17

89-11

Add an Application Module Link.
USED: 154899

TOT: 343756

DCHS AVAIL: 7

USED: 8

TOT: 15

AMLS AVAIL: 5

USED: 4

TOT: 9

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188857
DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

REQ

CHG

Add a DCH

TYPE

CFN

Configuration record

NEW AML 4

Add an AML on port 4

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188857

U S E D : 154899

TOT: 343756

DCHS AVAIL: 6

USED: 9

TOT: 1 5

AMLS AVAIL: 4

USED: 5

TOT: 9

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

1 features and services

553-3001-305

89-12
LD23

incremental Software Management
Add an ACD DN.

M E M AVAIL: (U/P): 188802

U S E D : 154954

TOT:

USED: 1 0

TOT: 1 5

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94
A C D DNS AVAIL: 5
REQ

NEW

Add a new ACD DN

TYPE

ACD

Add a new ACD queue
Customer number

CUST
ACDN

7700

Assign this ACD DN

M E M AVAIL: (U/P): 188513

U S E D : 155243

TOT: 343756

USED: 11

TOT: 1 5

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94
A C D DNS AVAIL: 4

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Incremental Software Management

LD27

89-13

Add a Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL).
U S E D : 154954

T O T : 343756

AVAIL: 4

USED: 6

TOT:

AVAIL: 4

USED: 8

TOT: 1 2

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188802
DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

REQ

NEW

Add a DSL

TYPE

DSL

Add a DSL

DSL

I s c dsl

address
U S E D : 154954

TOT: 343756

DSLS AVAIL: 4

USED: 6

TOT:

LTIDS AVAIL: 4

USED: 8

TOT: 1 2

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188802
DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

89-14

LD22
REQ

Incremental Software Management

Print the system limits.
SLT

Prints the limits established for the system, the used
parameters, and the quantities remaining.

Additionally, to print complete information regarding system parameters, use
the following print routine:
Parameter

LD

Prompt

Response

LD20

REQ

LTN

LD21

REQ

PRT

TYPE

CDB

ACD

LD23

REQ

PRT

ACD positions

LD81

REQ

LST

FEAT

ACD

New error messages
CAUTION
System information will be lost.

With ISM in

release 15.55 and later software, if SYS message
or 4330 appears at sysload, sysload previous system
disks. Order ISM disks with sufficient system parameters configured.
Call your technical support department for assistance.

The following error messages relate to ISM administration. For a complete
list and description of all error messages, see XI 1 input/output guide
(553-3001-400).
Note: In
the Service Change (SCH) messages appear only after
the FTR prompt has been answered. In
the messages appear only
prompt has been answered.
after the

1 features and services

Incremental Software Management
Event

Message

Action

SCH5069

The number of

exceeds the limit.

SCH5070

The number of ACD Agents (including agents and
supervisors) exceeds the limit.

New disks
required

SCH5071

The number of ACD
limit.

New disks
required

SCH5072

The number of AST sets exceeds the limit.

New disks
required

BUG51 19

The number of

New disks
required

BUG51 20

The number of ACD Agents (including agents and
supervisors) configured for the system is 0.

New disks
required

BUG51 21

The number of ACD
0.

New disks
required

and

89-15

New disks
required

exceeds the

configured for the system is 0.

configured for the system is

SYS4327 DO NOT DATADUMP. SYSTEM INFORMATION WILL BE LOST.
The TN limits are exceeded and cannot be
sysloaded. See note.

New disks
required

SYS4328 DO NOT DATADUMP. SYSTEM INFORMATION WILL BE LOST.
The ACD Agent (including agents and supervisors)
limits are exceeded and cannot be sysloaded.
See note.
SYS4329 DO NOT

New disks
required

SYSTEM INFORMATION WILL BE LOST.
The ACD DN limits are exceeded and cannot be
sysloaded. See note.

New disks
required

DO NOT DATADUMP. SYSTEM INFORMATION WILL BE LOST.
The AST set limits are exceeded and cannot be
sysloaded. See note.
Note: Do not

New disks
required

when this message appears, or system information will be lost.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

89-16

Incremental Software Management

Feature operation
There is no specific procedure for operating this feature.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Integrated

Feature
LD17

Messaging

System

Link

90-3

implementation

Add or change the link to a messaging system (Xl 1 release 17 and later software).

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CFN

Configuration Record

YES, NO

Allow changes to input/output devices

NEW, CHG TTY

Add or change a messaging system link to the SL-1

o-15
USER

AXQO

APL

This link is an Auxiliary Processor Link (APL)

20-255

Number of call registers to be used for receipt of messages
from the messaging system (see note 2)

20-255

Number of call registers to be used for output of messages
to the messaging system (see note 2)

Note Before adding, changing, or removing a link, the device must be disabled. Refer to the
input/output guide (553-3001-400) for overlay programs and commands to disable or enable devices.
Note 2: If the number of call registers defined for the Meridian SL-1 system (prompt NCR) is within the
range 80-l 020,
and AXQO cannot exceed 25% of the system call registers.

features and services

553-3001-305

90-4

integrated Messaging System Link

or change the link to a messaging system for X11 release 18 or later.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CFN

Configuration Record

YES, NO

Allow changes to input/output devices

NEW, CHG TTY

Add or change a messaging system link to the SL-1

o-1 5
CTYP

aaaa

Card type

aaaa = DCHI, MSDL, MSPS, SDI, SDl2, SD14,
DNUM

o-1 5

Device number to be printed automatically (same as
number)

USER

APL

This link is an Auxiliary Processor Link (APL)

20-255

Number of call registers to be used for receipt of messages
from the messaging system

20-255

Number of call registers to be used for output of messages
to the messaging system

AXQO
Note

Before adding, changing or removing a link, the device must be disabled. Refer to the X7
for overlay programs and commands to disable or enable devices.

Note 2: If the number of call registers defined for the Meridian SL-l system (prompt NCR) is within the
range 80-l 020,
and AXQO cannot exceed 25% of the system call registers.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Integrated Messaging System Link

or change the IMS feature for a customer.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

MCI, MCX

Include or exclude

IMS

YES, NO

Allow or don’t allow changes to the IMS feature

YES, NO

IMS feature is or is not enabled

APL

o-1 5

Port number of the link to the messaging system

UST

YES, NO

User Status Update (UST) feature is or is not enabled

APL

o-1 5

Port number of the link from UST to the messaging system

UMG

YES, NO

User-to-User Messaging (UMG) feature is or is not enabled

APL

o-1 5

Port number of the link from UMG to the messaging system

Xl 1 features and services

90-5

90-6

Integrated Messaging System Link

LD23 -Add or change ACD data for Integrated Messaging System Link feature.
CHG

Change

TYPE

ACD

ACD Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ACDN

xxxx

ACD DN (can have up to seven digits if DN Expansion
package is equipped)

MWC

YES, NO

ACD is or is not an IMS

IMS

YES, NO

Allow or doesn’t allow changes to the IMS feature

YES, NO

ACD DN is or is not used as an IMS DN

APL

o-15

Port number of the link to the messaging system

UST

YES, NO

User Status Update (UST) feature is or is not enabled

APL

o-15

Port number of the link from UST to the messaging system

UMG

YES, NO

User-to-User Messaging (UMG) feature is or is not enabled

APL

o-1 5

Port number of the link from UMG to the messaging system

RAN

O-30,

UMT

o-15

32-xxx

Xl 1 features and services

Route number to the Recorded Announcement (RAN) for
UMG (default is no RAN)
Time, in seconds, of silent interval after alert tone on RAN
(default is 6 seconds)

553-3001-305

Integrated

Messaging

System

Link

90-7

Add or change IMS attendant capability for each telephone.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =

2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112,
2216, 2317, 2616, 3000
TN
CLS

lscu

Terminal Number

IMD

LTN

i-253, O-l 5

KEY

0 ACD

This telephone is or is not an IMS attendant
Logical Terminal Number assigned to this attendant, port
number of the link to messaging system used by this
attendant
yyyy

Add an

key

xxxx IMS Directory Number (DN)
yyyy

Agent ID

Note: IMS DN and Agent ID can have up to 7 digits if DN
Expansion package is equipped
xx MIK
xx MCK
xx NRD
xx MSB

Add a Message Indication (Ml) key
Add a Message Cancellation (MC) key
Add a Not Ready (NR) key
Add a Make Set Busy (MSB) key

Feature operation
There is no specific procedure required to operate this feature.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Integrated Messaging System Link

Xl features and services

Issued:

Status:
Release:

92 12 31
Standard
14
91-1

Integrated Services Digital Network
Integrated Services Digital Network
is the new standard in digital
communications. Phase I of ISDN, which is implemented in X release
and later software, provides Primary Rate Access (PRA) to host computers,
other
and central office (CO) switches. Refer to ISDN
description and
100) for additional
information.

Operating parameters
Refer to ISDN Primary Rate
100) for a complete description of the following TSDN features:
Backup D-channel
Basic Call Service
Calling Line Identification
Data Packet Network access
Digital Trunk Interface replacement
Electronic Switched Network interworking
Integrated Services Access
ISDN Signaling Link
Integrated Trunk Access
Network Call Party Name Display/Network Call Redirection
Network Message Services
Network Ring Again
Remote Virtual Queueing
Software Defined Network access
Software Release ID
T309 Timer
Trunk Optimization (before answer)

1 features and services

91-2

Integrated

Services

Digital

Network

Feature interactions
Refer to
Primary Rate Interface description and administration
(553-2901-100).

Feature packaging
Integrated
package dependencies.

Feature

Network (ISDN), package 145, has no feature

implementation
Refer to ISDN Primary Rate Interface description and administration
(553-2901-100).

Feature operation
There is no specific procedure required to operate this feature.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:
Status:
1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All
92-1

Integrated Voice and Data
The Integrated Voice and Data feature provides integrated voice and data
switching through a host Meridian
Hardware consists of the Add-on Data Module (ADM), Data Line Card
(DLC). and Modem Pool Line Card (MPLC), if modem pooling is used.
The Meridian SL- I software recognizes the ADM as an SL- 1 telephone, the
DLC as an SL-1 Line Card, and the MPLC as a 500 telephone Line Card.
Overlay programs (LD and LD 1 1) are used to enter the hardware into the
office data.
Refer to the Northern Telecom Publication
Services series
(553-273 1- 100 through 553-273 l-300) for further details.

Operating parameters
Hunting is not allowed with the Modem Pool Line Card (MPLC) pack.
No

telephone may be assigned to the MPLC pack.

Co-located SL- 1 telephones can only have three key/lamp strips, due to
physical constraints.

Feature interactions
Refer to Northern Telecom Publication
(553-273 I -ZZZ).

Services series

Feature packaging
This capability is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

92-2

integrated Voice and Data

Feature

implementation

Add or change SL-1 telephone (of an
telephone/Add-on
associated with a Data Line Card (DLC) data port pair.
REQ

CHG

TYPE

Module (ADM) pair)

Change
Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number (TN): SL-1 telephones are restricted to
unit 0 or 2 when co-located with an ADM

CDEN

SD, DD

Density of this card is single or double

KLS

1-7

Number of key/lamp strips

KEY

0 DN

Key 0, Voice Frequency Directory Number (DN) (VFDN)

2 TRN

Key 2, Call Transfer key

9 RLS

Key 9, Release key
Note: Other feature keys may be associated as required, subject
to the limitations imposed by the companion ADM.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Integrated Voice and Data

-Add or change ADM (of an SL-1
(DLC) data port pair.
REQ

CHG

Change

Terminal Number (TN): loop
shelf (O-i), card
unit (1, 3, 5, 7); the loop, shelf, and card must be the
same as those specified for the companion SL-1 telephone;
the unit must be the next subsequent unit to the companion
telephone (e.g., if the unit for
telephone is 2, then
the unit for ADM must be 3)

N

KEY

pair) associated with a Data Line Card

Telephone type

TYPE

CDEN

92-3

SD, DD

Single or double density card

WTD

Warning Tone Denied (WTD)

0 DN xxxx

Key 0, data Directory Number (DN); can have up to 7 digits
if DN Expansion (DNXP) package is equipped

1 DN

Key

2 TRN

Key 2, Call Transfer key (optional)

3 ADL

Key 3,

4 RGA

Key 4, Ring Again key (optional)

6 SCC O-81 90

Speed Call Controller, Speed Call List number (optional;
must be on key 6 if equipped)

optional secondary data DN

DN (optional)

or
6 SCU O-81 90

Speed Call User, Speed Call List number (optional, must be
on key 6 if equipped)
Note: With
1 release 12 and earlier software, the number of
Speed Call Lists is limited to 253.

9 RLS

Release key: must be key 9
Note: Only the feature keys listed above may be assigned to the
Add-on Data Module (ADM). If they are assigned to the ADM, they
must also be assigned to the companion SL-1 telephone on the
same keys; that is, if the ADM has ADL on key 3, the companion
SL-1 telephone must also have ADL on key 3, with the same
DN.

Xl 1 features

and services

553-3001-305

Integrated Voice and Data

92-4

-Add or change DLC data port associated with a stand-alone ADM.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

Telephone type

TN

Terminal Number (TN)

CDEN

KEY

SD

Single density card

WTD

Warning Tone Denied (WTD)

0 DN

Key 0, data Directory Number (DN)

9 RLS

Key 9, Release key
Note: Other features/functions must not be assigned to keys 1-8.

-Add or change IDLC port associated with an AIM.
REQ

CHG

Change
Telephone type

TYPE
TN

lscu

Terminal Number (TN): for AIM, unit 1 or 3 should be used

CDEN

SD

Single density card

Xl 1 features and services

integrated Voice and Data

-Add

92-5

change IDLC port associated with an AIM.

CLS

WTD

Warning Tone Denied (WTD)

KEY

0 DN

Key 0, data Directory Number (DN)

DN

Key 1, optional secondary data DN

2 TRN

Key 2, Call Transfer key (optional)

3 ADL

Key 3,

4 RGA

Key 4, Ring Again key (optional)

6

O-81 90

DN (optional)

Speed Call Controller, Speed Call List number (optional;
must be on key 6 if equipped)

or
6 SCU O-81 90

Speed Call User, Speed Call List number (optional; must be
on key 6 if equipped)
Note: Before Xl 1 release 13, the number of Speed Call Lists is
limited to 253.

9 RLS

Release key, must be key 9

trunk route for each data port group (modem pool).
REQ

NEW, CHG

Create a new route, or modify an existing one

TYPE

RDB

Route Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-51 1

Route number

TKTP

ADM

ADM route

xxx...x

Access code for this route

Yes, (No)

SL-1 is or is not the only controlling party on incoming calls

CDPC

1 features and services

553-3001-305

92-6

integrated Voice and Data

a DLC as a trunk for each data port within the data port group.
REQ

NEW, CHG

Create a new trunk or modify an existing one

TYPE

ADM

ADM trunk

TN

Terminal Number

Define a Modem Pool Line Card (MPLC) for each modem in the data port group.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number

CDEN

SD, DD, 4D

Single, double, or quad density card

DN

xxx...x

Voice Frequency Directory Number (DN) (VFDN); must be
the same as that telephone by switches in the ADM

Note: The trunk route defined for the data port group in LD16 cannot be used.

LD16 Define a route data block for each Central Office (CO), FEX, tie, or WATS trunk route to
a remote system.
NEW, CHG

Create a new route, or modify an existing one

TYPE

RDB

Route Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ROUT

o-51 1

Route number

TKTP

COT, FEX, TIE
WAT

Route type
Access code for the route

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Integrated Voice and Data

Define each trunk within the route.
REQ

NEW, CHG

Create a new trunk or modify an existing one

TYPE

COT, FEX, TIE
WAT

Trunk type

lscu

Terminal Number

SD, DD

Single or double density card

CDEN

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

92-7

92-8

Integrated Voice and Data

Xl features and services

Intercept Treatment
Calls that cannot be completed because of call restrictions or dialing
irregularities can be routed to a Recorded Announcement (RDN), the
attendant, or to hear overflow, or busy tone. Separate treatments can be
specified for calls from the following categories of originating party:
telephones
attendants
.

attendant originated

.

attendant extended

tie trunk, or remote attendant or telephone
Controlled Class of Service Allowed (CCSA) or Direct Inward Dialing
(DID) trunk

Operating parameters
When Intercept to RAN is desired, you must have a recording device. A
Recorded Announcement (RAN) route and at least one trunk must be defined
(see the RAN feature module).
Intercept Treatment (INTR) for these types of calls can be specified in
the Customer Data Block
for the situations as listed in
Table
1.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

93-2

Intercept

Treatment

Table 93-1
Intercept Treatment

Intercept

Access

situation

Telephone

Attendant
extended
calls

Calling Party
tie trunk
(including
attendant)

trunk

denied

(ACCD)
Call to vacant number
(CTVN)
Maintenance busy number,
RPE failure
(MBNR)
Code or toll restricted call by
Toll Denied (TLD) station or
tie trunk

NA

NA

(CTRC)
Calls to

NA

(CLDN)
0 = overflow tone
A = intercept to the attendant
C = choice of overflow tone, attendant, or Recorded Announcement (RAN)
NA = not applicable
DISC = call disconnected
Note: Items in parenthesis are the default Intercept Treatments. Where an item is preceded with
a
choice can be made between overflow, attendant busy, or a RAN. Four entries are required for each
intercept situation.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Intercept

Treatment

93-3

Feature interactions
Flexible Feature Codes
If Intercept Treatment has been specified for a call to a vacant number
(CTVN), the Digit Display
on the attendant console is affected by
If no FFC has been defined, the dialed digits are displayed up to
and including the first digit that fails to match any Directory Number
have been defined, the dialed digits are
(DN). If one or more
displayed, up to and including the first digit that fails to match any FFC.
Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection
Table 93-2 specifies the type of Intercept Treatments (INTR) available
for
calls, and lists the intercept situations that are possible.
Table 93-2
Intercept Treatment for

calls
Originating Party

Intercept

situation

Station or

Attendant
extended
calls

Tie trunk
(including
attendant)

I
trunk

invalid (NINV)

translation

invalid
(NITR)
restricted

(NRES)
blocked (NBLK) C(0)
0 = overflow tone
A = intercept to the attendant
C = choice of overflow tone, attendant, or Recorded Announcement (RAN)
NA = not applicable
DISC

call disconnected

Note: Items in parenthesis are the default Intercept Treatments. Where an item is preceded with
a
choice can be made between overflow, attendant busy or a RAN. Four entries are required for each
intercept situation.

Xl 1 features and services

.

.

93-4

Intercept Treatment

Feature packaging
Intercept Treatment (INTR), package 11, has no feature package
dependencies.

Feature

implementation

Change customer’s Intercept Treatment for various call types.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

Yes, (No)

Allow changes to intercept treatments

ACCD

OVF OVF OVF ATN

Default Intercept Treatment for calls to access-denied
numbers

CTVN

OVF OVF OVF ATN

Default Intercept Treatment for calls to vacant numbers

MBNR

OVF OVF OVF ATN

Default Intercept Treatment for calls to maintenance busy
numbers

CTRC

OVF NAP OVF NAP

Default Intercept Treatment for a code or toll restricted call by
a toll restricted station or Tie trunk

CLDN

NAP OVF NAP NAP

Default Intercept Treatment for calls to a Listed DN

OVF OVF OVF ATN

Default Intercept Treatment for BARWNARS invalid calls

OVF OVF OVF ATN

Default Intercept Treatment for BARWNARS invalid
translation calls

NRES

OVF OVF OVF ATN

Default Intercept Treatment for

NBLK

OVF OVF OVF ATN

Default Intercept Treatment for BARWNARS blocked calls

RANR

xxx

RAN route number for intercepted calls

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

restricted calls

Basic Rate Interface
Meridian ISDN BRI supports network functions defined by CCITT, ANSI,
ETSI, and NET64 standards (and other standards such as
for ISDN
BRA. These standards create a universal digital network to facilitate voice
and data communications that use different transmission protocols, existing
networks, and diverse communication equipment.
ISDN
is a digital port that integrates three digital channels on one digital
subscriber loop (DSL). The three digital channels consist of two 64 kbps
B-channels and one 16 kbps D-channel. B-channels can be automatically
assigned and reassigned to different voice and data terminals in
circuit-switched applications or they can be dedicated to specific terminals
for packet data applications. A D-channel is permanently dedicated to a DSL
and is used for signaling and low speed packet data transmission. The ability
to dynamically connect different terminals on one DSL provides more
flexibility, connectivity, and service diversity than the conventional “hard
wired” connections where each channel is dedicated to one terminal.

Operating parameters
Refer to the following publications:
ISDN Basic Rate Interface description
ISDN Basic Rate

100)

installation (553-3901-200)

Basic Rate Interface maintenance (553-3901-500)

Feature interactions
Refer to the documents listed for your system.

features and services

553-3001-305

94-2

Basic Rate Interface

Feature packaging
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI), package 216, requires the following:
Integrated Services Digital Network

package 145

Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL), package 222

implementation
Refer to ISDN Basic Rate Interface description (553-3901-100).

Feature operation
There is no specific procedure required to operate this feature.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

95-l

Last Number Redial
Last Number Redial (LNR), which is defined on a customer and a telephone
basis, allows the last number dialed by a user to be automatically stored. The
stored number can be redialed by pressing a key on SL- 1 and Meridian digital
telephones. The M3000 and
telephones, or by dialing SPRE + 89 on
the M23 17 telephones have LNR as a local telephone (firmware) feature
instead of as a system feature.
The number is stored whether the call rings, is busy or answered, or if a valid
access code is dialed with the number. Only one number, composed of up to
32 digits (including access codes), may be stored at any one time. The new
number overwrites the previously stored number.
If the telephone has a Digit Display (DDS), the called number is displayed.

Operating parameters
When making a call using Last Number Redial (LNR), no digits may be
dialed before the stored number, except Authorization, Charge Account, or
Forced Charge Account codes. However, additional digits may follow the
outpulsed LNR number.

Feature Interactions
A number dialed using
will become the LNR number on all
telephones except the M23 17 and M3000.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

95-2

Last Number

Call Modification
When a Call Modification takes place at the called Directory Number
(DN), the originally dialed number and not the number reached through
Call Modification is stored as the LNR. This applies to the following
features:
all Call Forward features
.

Call Pickup

.

Conference

.

Hunting

.

Integrated Messaging System

.

Transfer

when using Operator Revert

The stored LNR number will not be affected when making calls using the
following features:
.

numbers dialed on Call Transfer or Conference

.

Attendant Recall from

.

Call Park

.

Dial Intercom

.

Group Call

.

Special Services Access Codes

and Meridian digital telephones (using

Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MADN)
A last number dialed on a Directory Number (DN) with multiple
appearances is stored only against the telephone from which the number
was originally dialed.
Authorization, Charge Account, Forced Charge Account codes
These codes are not stored in LNR. To use these features when calling
the number stored in LNR, the code must first be dialed manually. When
dial tone is returned, LNR may be used to complete the dialing.
Speed Call
A number dialed using Speed Call will become the LNR number on all
telephones except the M2317 and M3000.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Last Number Redial

95-3

Feature packaging
Last Number Redial (LNR), package 90, has no feature package
dependencies.

Feature

implementation

Enable or disable LNR for a customer.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

CDB

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

LRA, (LRD)

LNR allowed or denied

Add or change LNR for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

lscu

Terminal Number (TN)

LNA, (LND)

LNR allowed or denied
LNR size

LNRS

-Add or change LNR for SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones.
REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2616
TN

lscu

Terminal Number (TN)

LNA, (LND)

LNR allowed or denied
LNR size

LNRS
KEY

xx LNK

LNR key
xx = key number

1 features and services

553-3001-305

95-4

Last Number Redial

Feature operation
To automatically redial the last number dialed:
1

Lift the handset or select a free Directory Number (DN).

2

Press the Last No. or the DN key again.

To automatically redial the last number dialed
1

Lift the handset.

2 Dial

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telephones),

96-1

Limited Access to Overlays
Limited Access to Overlays allows the administrator to limit access to a
configured database. It allows you to define up to 100
passwords in the
configuration record
each with its own set of access restrictions. For
each Limited Access Password (LAPW), you define the level of access the
password provides:
Only the LD numbers defined for each password can be accessed.
Only the customer data specified can be modified by users of each
password.
Only the tenant numbers allowed can be accessed.
Access to Print routine LD20 may or may not include access to the Speed
Call lists.
Access to the Configuration Record (CFN) LD17 can be restricted to:
.

no access at all to LD 17

.

changing a user’s own password only

.

full access to modify the system configuration

With the Print Only option defined, certain users are limited to:
.

access only to administration
that contain print commands, and
can only use the print commands in those

.

full access to all print routines:

.

System commands in Traffic LD02 are accessible only to users with
access to all customers. Customer defined commands are accessible
according to the customer numbers defined for each password.

and

1 features and services

l-83.

553-3001-305

96-2

Limited Access to Overlays

Only the highest level password users
Level 2 or PWD2
can configure or
change access for other passwords. These users are the Administrators.
Implementing and using the LAPW feature does not interfere with the use of
any existing passwords in the system. For a complete listing of the passwords
currently used, refer to LD17, prompts PWD2,
NPW2 and
prompts ATAC and SPWD in XI I
(553-3001-400).
Each password can access up to 32 customer-tenant combinations. Each
combination is defined by a number designator that includes the customer
number (O-99), and the tenant number (O-51 1).
Each new Limited Access Password (LAPW) must be:
any combination of numbers and letters (upper-case letters only)
four to sixteen characters in length with no spaces
unique
different than existing passwords.
For example, acceptable passwords may include:
JSMITH
0001
2GUEST
CRAFTSPERSON
System administrators using
and PWD2 in LD17 define access to
with this feature. They may also define certain command use levels within a
given LD. For instance, the administrator can specify print
a c c e s s in the
Configuration record (LD17). Any other requests generate the following
system message:
SCH8836 PASSWORD HAS PRINT ONLY CLASS OF SERVICE.
After calling up a LD, certain commands may be restricted from use by the
same password, if that password is properly defined. Trying to use those
access is denied.
commands without the correct password is not successful

1 features and services

553-3001-305

Limited Access to Overlays

96-3

Log on attempts are monitored for security. Failed attempts with invalid
passwords are counted and the tally is compared with a pre-defined threshold.
If the threshold is met or passed, the entry point
or terminal) is locked
out for a pre-determined time set in service change (and password protected).
Access from that point is ignored by the system for the lock-out timer defined.
Lock-out conditions are reported to all maintenance terminals when they
occur, with a special report to the next system administrator who logs on.
information. The four

The system can keep an Audit Trail to record
columns in the Audit Trail printout contain:
column 1
column 2
column 3
column 4

DAT (date, appears at beginning of each day), or
LOG (a
record)
(month/day), or
cc:dd (hours: minutes)
#ee (number associated with password)
ff ff . . . (LD numbers accessed)

Figure 96-l
Example of Audit Trail printout (LD22)

10

11

15

10

14

15

21

57

22

11

15

21

12
PWD2

15

17

Only system administrators, logged in using
Audit Trail from LD22.

or PWD2, can access the

Administrators can change the size of the Audit Trail buffer, from 50 to 1000
words (divisible by 50). When the buffer is full, new records overwrite the
message is sent to the active TTY
oldest information in the buffer
Printing the Audit Trail in LD22 clears the
and all maintenance
buffer.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

96-4

Limited Access to Overlays

Operating parameters
The LAPW feature should only be enabled on a system with a completed
Configuration record in LD17 a Meridian 1 or SL-1 machine that is already
up and running. All passwords defined within the feature must be unique.
Users and administrators can not have more than one password defined for
any one access configuration.

Feature interactions
This feature has no interactions with other feature packages.

Feature packaging
Limited Access to Overlays (LAPW), package 164, must be enabled for this
feature to operate.

Feature

implementation
Implementing the LAPW feature requires you change the Configuration
record (CFN), LD17. You must respond to the following prompts in LD17.

LD17

Define LAPW options and passwords. (Part 1 of 2)
CHG, END

Change data or terminate overlay

TYPE

CFN

Configuration

PWD2

xxxx

Current Level 2 master password

xxxx

New level 1 Log-in password

xxxx

New level 2 master password

0 99

LAPW password number

data

block

New password for “nn” above
No more changes to LAPW

TEN

xx xx xx
ALL, (XALL)

Add these overlays to the list accesses by password
Xnn removes the overlay.

O-99, ALL, (XALL)

Customer number, all customers, (no customers)

xxx
xxx
xxx,
ALL, (XALL)

Tenant list for the above customer for password access.
XALL removes tenant access for this password.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Limited Access to Overlays

LD17
HOST

Define LAPW options and passwords. (Part 2 of 2)
Yes, (No)

Host mode

aaaa

Password Options allowed

CFPD,

(CFPA)

LLCA, (LLCD)
(PROD)
PSCD, (PSCA)

Changes to all

Line Load Control commands in allowed (denied)
Print Only Class of Service allowed (denied)
Printing Speed Call lists (allowed) denied
Stop

-LOCK

7 prompts denied (allowed)

defining

passwords.

O-(3)-7

Failed log-on attempt threshold

O-(60)-270

Lock-out time in minutes

Yes, (No)

Audit Trail allowed (denied)

-SIZE

000

Word size stored in the Audit Trail buffer

(0)-65534

For release 18 and later

Yes, (No)

Reset ports locked out during manual INIT.

Change user’s LAPW password (user must log in using current LAPW).

PWD2

CHG

Change password options



Level 2 master password

aaaa

Log on Password for LAPW user

xx

x

New log on password for LAPW user

1 features and services

96-5

telemanuals.com

96-6

Limited Access to Overlays

LD22 -Check options available for LAPW passwords (administrator).
REQ

PWD

Lookup

password

options

PWD2

xxxx

Level 2 master password

Note: LAPW password options are output to the active TTY only. Options format is shown below:
FLTH

X

Failed log-on attempt Threshold

LOCK

xx

Lock-out time in minutes

AUDT

aaa

Audit Trail allowed (denied)

SIZE

xxxx

Word size stored in the Audit Trail buffer

aaa

Reset ports locked out during manual
1 master password

PWD2

xxxx

Level 2 master password
aaaaaa

password number and password

xx xx xx

Overlays accessible by this password

CUST

xx TEN xxx

Customer number and tenant numbers accessible

HOST

No

Host mode

OPT

a a a a

Password options allowed

REQ

PWD

Print

PWD2



Administrator’s

passwords
password

Note: Options available to the logged on password are printed. The format is shown below:
aaaaaa

password number and password

xx xx xx

Overlays accessible by this password

CUST

xx TEN xxx

Customer number and tenant numbers accessible

Host

No

Host mode

OPT

a a a a

Password options allowed

LD22

Print contents of Audit Trail buffer (allowed if using

REQ

PRT

Print

TYPE

AUDT

Audit Trail

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

or PWD2).

telemanuals.com

Line Load Control

97-3

Operating parameters
The following services are not subject to LLC:
attendant stations
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Hot line services

Feature interactions
Established calls are not affected by LLC upgrades, only new calls
attempted.
The system counts the calls denied for each CLS, and prints the traffic
data periodically as part of the Processor Load Format TFS004.

Feature packaging
Line Load Control (LLC), package 105, must be enabled for this feature to
operate.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

97-4

Line Load Control

Feature

implementation

Add or change Line Load Control for

telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

500

Telephone type

TN

Terminal Number (TN)
LLCN

LLC not enabled (default)
LLC class 1

LLC2

LLC class 2

LLC3

LLC class 3

-Add or change Line Load Control for

and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =
2317,
TN

lscu

Terminal Number (TN)

CLS

LLCN

LLC not enabled (default)
LLC class

LLC2

LLC

LLC3

LLC class 3

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

2

telemanuals.com

Line Load Control

LD2

Set Line Load Control levels.

SCTL

x aaa

Set

blocking

probability

x = F (LLC, level F)
S (LLC, level S)
T (LLC, level T)

aaa

SLLC

O-l 00

Activate LLC at level x

X

x = F (LLC, level F)
S (LLC, level S)
T (LLC, level T)
OFF (deactivate LLC)
TLLC

Print blocking probability and current active LLC level

Feature operation
Not applicable.

features and services

97-5

telemanuals.com

97-6

Line Load Control

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

Issued:
Status:
Xl 1 Release:

92 12 31
Standard
All
98-1

Line Lockout
When a user remains
without dialing any digits, a timeout occurs.
The transmission path is released for other uses. Dial tone timeout and
interdigit timeout for telephone and Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
trunks are considered Line Lockout situations.
The 2500 telephones lock out after 15 seconds. SL- Meridian digital
telephones, and 500 telephones lock out after 30 seconds. When Line
Lockout occurs, the system gives overflow tone for 14 seconds and then puts
the telephone in a lockout state. SL- and Meridian digital telephones are
telephones appear busy to any incoming calls. DISA
idled, and
calls receive overflow tone.
Flexible Line Lockout, X11 release 4 and later software This
enhancement provides three options for lockout treatment for stations and
DISA calls. Flexible Line Lockout can perform any of the following
functions:
provide the existing ovefflow tone and then lockout treatment
immediately intercept calls to the attendant
receive overflow tone and then intercept to the attendant
is returned and the call
When a call is intercepted to the attendant,
appears at the attendant console on a designated Line Lockout (LCT)
Incoming
Indicator (ICI) key. If an LCT ICI key is not defined, the call
is treated as a normal incoming call.
When the attendant answers the call, the Directory Number (DN) of the
originating telephone, followed by the name (if Call Party Name Display
(CPND) is enabled), is displayed on the console. The attendant may then
terminate the call or offer assistance to the call originator.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

98-2

Line Lockout

Flexible Line Lockout Timers, X11 release 10 and later software This
enhancement to Flexible Line Lockout provides three variable Line Lockout
and range from 0 to
timers. The timers are defined in

Operating parameters
Tie trunk calls do not receive overflow tone during line lockout, and do not
receive Flexible Line Lockout treatment.

Feature interactions
Attendant Overflow Position (AOP)
A call intercepted to the attendant due to Flexible Line Lockout receives
AOP treatment if the feature package is equipped and the AOP Directory
Number (DN) is defined.
Call Detail Recording (CDR)
If a Direct Inward System Access (DISA) call routes to the attendant due
to Flexible Line Lockout, and CDR is selected for incoming trunk calls,
a call record generates when the attendant terminates the call after
answer. The CDR record shows the attendant number and the route and
member numbers.
If the attendant extends the call, the CDR record generates when the call
is terminated. The CDR record does not show the attendant Directory
Number (DN).
Display
If a call from a telephone equipped with a display is intercepted to the
attendant due to Flexible Line Lockout, the telephone displays the digits
dialed, if any, before the intercept. If no digits are dialed, the attendant
DN and name (if configured) will be displayed. When the attendant
answers the call, the console displays the DN and the number zero (0), or
any digits dialed and the name (if configured) of the telephone
intercepted.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Line Lockout

98-3

Recorded Overflow Announcement (ROA)
Calls intercepted to the attendant due to Flexible Line Lockout receive
ROA treatment if the Line Lockout (LCT) Incoming Call Indicator (ICI)
key is configured for ROA.
System Overflow Tone
If the option for Flexible Line Lockout to the attendant is enabled, any
call that is given ovefflow tone (for example, if the wrong access code is
dialed, or if the telephone is not allowed to dial the Trunk Access
code) is intercepted to the attendant on overflow timeout.

Feature packaging
This feature is included in basic X11 system software.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

98-4

Line Lockout

Feature
LD15

implementation

Implement Flexible Line Lockout for a customer.
Change

REQ
TYPE

Customer Data Block

CDB

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ICI

O-l 9 LCT

Assign a Flexible Line Lockout Incoming Call Indicator (ICI)
key to attendant consoles
Line

LLT

Lockout

treatment

Overflow tone, then lockout
Overflow tone, then attendant intercept
Attendant intercept

ATN

Line lockout treatment for Direct Inward System Access
(DISA) calls

DLT

Overflow tone, then lockout
Overflow tone, then attendant intercept
Attendant intercept

ATN

Dial tone and interdigit timeout for SL-I , Meridian 1 digital
telephones, and 500 telephones
Dial tone and interdigit timeout for 2500 telephones
Busy tone and overflow tone timeout for all telephones

BOTO

Feature operation
Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

99-1

and Trunk Cards
In addition to providing a definition for card types, this section lists cards for
Meridian 1 and SL-I systems.

Line Cards
Line cards provide the interface between the Meridian 1 and telephones, their
associated data options, and attendant consoles.
Line cards
.

Digital (16 digital telephones plus 16 associated data
options)

.

Analog ( 16 analog in-line telephones)
Telephone Line Card
QPC594 (4d) (16 ports per card)

l

l

QPC452 (dd) (8 ports per card)

l

QPC60 (sd) (4 ports per card)

Message Waiting Line Card
.

l

Analog Message Waiting (16 analog single-line
telephones with Message Waiting lamps)
QPC789 (4d) (16 ports per card)
QPC494 (dd) (8 ports per card)

l

l

QPC267

(4 ports per card)

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

99-2

Line and Trunk Cards

SL-I Telephone Line Card
l

l

(dd) (8 ports per card)
QPC61 (sd) (4 ports per card)

Attendant Console Line Card
l

l

QPC451 (dd) (8 ports per card; 4 ports per console)
QPC61 (sd) (4 ports per card; 4 ports per console; card must be
vintage C or later)

Integrated Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC)
l

QPC578 (4d) (16 logical ports per card; 8 physical ports; 8 for
voice/8 for data)

In addition, Data Line Cards are available to interface data communications
products.

Trunk Cards
Trunk cards provide the interface between the Meridian 1 and all trunk
facilities, including not only public and private network trunks (CO, Tie), but
those that connect the Meridian 1 to special features (Recorded
Announcement, Paging, and so forth).
Universal (Any combination of 8: CO, DID, FX, RAN,
Paging (low resistance), WATS, TIE, Music
E&M (Any combination of 4: 2-wire E&M, 4-wire E&M,
4-wire duplex, Paging (high resistance), Emergency Recorder

Receivers (DTR)
Receivers convert DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals to a
digital format acceptable by the CPU. They are required for all 2500
DID trunks. Because
telephones, some incoming TIE trunks, and
perform a service rather than support an item, the quantity depends on
the volume of
traffic generated in a system.
Receiver (8

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Receivers)

telemanuals.com

Line and Trunk Cards

99-3

Controller Cards
Controller cards provide the interface and control between the Network cards
and telephone, consoles, and trunks. These cards are always installed in a
dedicated slot in the IPE module. One Controller card is required per IPE
module.
Controller-2 (Connects up to 2 superloops to one IPE
module)
Controller-4 (Connects up to4 superloops to one IPE
module)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

99-4

Line and Trunk Cards

features and services

553-3001-305



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Warning                         : Error loading Encrypt object

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools